the kp chapters i think that are full if not sorry
Introduction:
these stories were originally done by jayrich and nither him nor me own kim possible series and if anyone from the cast complains they can SUCK MY LEFT NUT BYE
KP, I GOT YOUR BACK!!! Ron runs up towards the stage area, where Kim is currently fighting Shego. It s another one of Drakken plan to take over the world that s drawn the two here. This one involves the kidnapping & brainwashing of the President, so this Mission is High Priority. Shego & Kim s battle is heated & epic, more than normal, with no one having the clear advantage. Dr. Drakken s up high on a podium, holding the President hostage, and hoping for protection from Kim. Ron reaches the platform stage just as Shego lands a vicious shot that sends Kim to the ground.
Kim coughs and tries to catch her breath as Shego stands over her, hands glowing. I guess you can t do anything, Kimmy. She leans in closer, preparing to strike. You had this coming for a long time, Princess. Sic her, Rufus! Shego looks up and sees a small pink blur speeding towards her. It s Rufus. Before she can react, the Naked Mole Rat jumps up and bites her on her finger. Shego jumps back in pain, and tries to shake Rufus off, giving Kim enough time to recover.
Thanks for the save&Ron? HWAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHH!!!! Kim looks up and sees Ron charging full speed at Shego. But before he can do any damage, he trips over an electric cord and ends up stumbling into her. Shego is sent flying, as is Rufus. She hits her head on a Scaffolding, which knocks her out immediately, then rips open the top of her Jumpsuit on a hanging hook before flying and landing on the floor backstage behind the curtains. Ron, still stumbling, slips off the stage and lands backstage in the same area. RON Kim sees the accident and begins to check on them before she hears familiar sinister laughter.
MWAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHA!!!! Kim looks up to see Drakken floating away in his Hover Pod with the President. She looks around, looking for anything to help her catch him. After spotting a rope, she grabs it, and lassos it to the Hover Pod and hangs on to chase after Drakken. Meanwhile, Ron wakes up from his daze. Uh&what happened? He opens his eyes to see only green skin. And everything comes back to him. WHAAAAAAAAAAAHHH!!! SHEGO!!! He jumps up and covers himself, expecting the worse. A few seconds later, he realizes she s knocked out. She must be out cold. HA! Looks like it s another victory for Mr. Ron Stop& His words die in his mouth. All that comes out is a little drop of drool as he sees Shego s Weapons in all of their glory.
Holy&she s exposed. Her breasts are just hanging out in the open. Whoa, those are way bigger than what Kim s packing. She even rivals Mrs. P. I can t believe it. Ron inches closer, being careful not to make enough noise to wake her up. He slowly kneels down to get a closer look. This is even better than Half-Price Tuesday at Bueno Nacho. He inches his hand out, until it s directly over them.
Ron starts shaking as he lowers the hand closer, then he shoots it back. No, this is wrong. This is so wrong. He s about to get up and walk away when he thinks to himself. Come on, Stoppable! Be a Man! This is a Once in a Lifetime Chance. There s no one back here. Kim will never know she s chasing Drakken. Besides, it s not like Shego doesn t deserve it. He looks back at her, still out cold. He puts both hands in the air and counts silently to himself. One&Two&THREE!!! He shoots his hands down and quickly grabs Shego s Funbags. He starts to caress and massage them as he looks like he s in a moment of pure ecstasy. Oh, this must be what Heaven feels like. He almost gets lost in the moment when another idea pops into his head. OK, I now know what they feel like&but now I gotta know what they taste like.
Ron leans his head closer, as pure curiosity & horniness has taken him over. He opens his mouth and slowly licks his tongue across her nipple. That causes Shego to moan slightly in her unconscious state. He then puts his entire mouth on her Breast. He starts sucking on her right Tit while using his left hand to feel on her left one. He goes at this for about two good minutes before he stops and sits up, with a grin almost as big as The Joker s. Okay, that was the greatest moment of my life. His eyes then wonder down to see Shego s Legs, and what s between them. Let s see if I can make it even better. He moves his hand slowly towards The Prize. He gets closer&and closer&until a familiar voice rings out that makes his face go white. KIM POSSIBLE! YOU THINK YOU RE ALL THAT, BUT YOU RE NOT!!!
Ron shoots to his feet and runs back to the curtain. He comes out onto the stage to see Kim driving the Hover Pod, lowering the President down. Drakken is handcuffed and being thrown into the back of a Paddy Wagon by Federal Agents. Kim hops out the Hover Pod and runs over to Ron. RON! Thank goodness your OK. Shego didn t& NO! No! No. Shego is out cold from some head hitting thingy. She s out. Ron is looking more nervous than ever. Kim doesn t pay attention. Come on, we ll leave the Federal Agents to take care of her. YES! Let s let s do that. Get far away from back there. Far away. Just then, the President walks up to the two. Thank you so much, Ms. Possible. I don t know how I could ever repay you. I am in your debt. A smile comes onto Ron s face. You could proclaim it National Naco Day and give us unlimited access to Bueno Nacho. Both Kim and the President look at him for a moment. Kim sighs and grabs Ron s arm. Come on, Ron. WHAT? I think it s a reasonable award.
The two begin to walk away from the whole event. As Kim pulls out her Communicator to fill in Wade, Ron looks back at the stage, and remembers what when on behind it.
The Incredibly Lucky Ron Stoppable 2
2 Weeks later&
How does she do it? Drakken paces around his Secret Lair (OK, not that secret), thinking to himself how he got beaten by Kim Possible yet again. Shego is sitting down at a table with her feet kicked up. Hmm, let me see&is it because all your evil plans are LAME and never have ANY hope of working? Not now, Shego. I am in a seriously peeved mood. Shego jumps to her feet and looks at Drakken. YOU? You just got beat by a High School Cheerleader, for the Umpteenth time! Big Whoop! I, for some reason, feel like I ve been severely violated! I m gonna go have me some alone time. Drakken s eyes widen as he looks at Shego. Need me to join you? Shego gets a puzzled look on her face, and then looks back at him as if he were stupid. No, A-LONE time. Meaning time to myself. Not time with some whiny little Evil Genius who took three years to pass High School Science! She storms off into her quarters, leaving Drakken alone. Drakken yells back at her. IT WAS TWO!
An Electric Sliding Door opens and Shego storms into her room, hands glowing. She looks ready to take someone s head off. UGH! Why do I keep working for that Idiot? The glow fades and her hands go back to normal as she sighs and sits down on her bed. Things were so much better when I was training Senor Senior Jr. She picks up a picture that s on her Nightstand. It s of her and Junior&with her holding a whip over Junior, who s covering up trying not to get hit. He was athletic, handsome&and had endurance that could rival a marathon runner. Too bad he came up short with the Package. She starts to get angry and tosses the picture behind her, before jumping up in a rage. WHY CAN T I FIND A MAN WITH A BIG DICK THAT ISN T AS DUMB AS ONE? She stands there and hangs her head down, looking like she s given up. I need to relieve some stress. Ugh! And get this disgusting feeling off of me.
She goes into her bathroom and begins to run her shower, then begins to undress. She takes off her Jumpsuit Top, and her breasts pop out into the open like a Jack in a Box. She bends over and pulls down her Jumpsuit Bottom to reveal a Luscious Ass that s been hidden for so long. And a pussy that looks cleanly shaven (Surprisingly). She steps out of her pants and steps into the shower, wanting to wash away the feeling of failure (and Violation). The water rains down on her jet-black hair, soaking it so that it covers her face. She stands there, for a minute, before she flips her hair back and lets the water shower down on her round & perky jugs. She begins to wash herself, starting with arms, then her shoulders, then down to her breasts. She stays there for a while, having a familiar feeling of them being played with & caressed. It s both stimulating, and a little bit sickening to remember that feeling, but she goes on anyway, pushing her Tits together as the soap bubbles between them. A small moan comes from her as she continues. Her mind wonders to the all the Villains she has made love to (OK, screwed) in her evil career. Killigan, Monkey Fist, even that one night in Tahiti with Adrena Lynn, none of them were satisfying enough.
She remembers not being satisfied on any of them occasions. Even Drakken, who had a decent tool, just didn t know how to use it. Frustrated, she yanks out the Shower Head (which ain t removable) and puts it right on her Tight Pussy. OOOHHH, YEEEEESSSSSSSS!!!!!! The water pressure is turned on to its highest setting. She massages her breast and rubs on her nipple with one hand, and guides the Shower Head deeper with the other. The sensation makes her fall to her knees as she keeps going. She moves her other hand lower and starts to rub on her Clit furiously. OH, GOD! Almost there! ALMOST THERE! She feels her climax coming. Closer&and closer&and closer&and&
SHEGO! Drakken busts through the bathroom door, startling Shego and ruining the moment. I ve finally developed the perfect way to eliminate Kim&Possible? Shego grabs her gloves, that are hanging on a Towel Rack, and slip them on. They slowly start to glow. Drakken gets very nervous. Uh, I did something very bad, didn t I?
KRA-KA-BOOM!!!!!!
Drakken is sent through the wall into the Laboratory Wing. As the dust clears from the wreckage that was made, a figure with glowing hands stands over the cowering Drakken. It s Shego, still naked, still soapy, and still pissed. What&is the First Rule&OF OUR AGREEMENT??? N-n-never disturb you when you re in your room, unless I want one of my Doomsday Weapons shoved up my ass sideways. Shego steps closer and leans over to look Drakken in the eyes. So what do you think you were doing when you&what? Wh-what? What are you staring at? Do I have something in my teeth? What? She wonders why Drakken has turned into a staring, drooling idiot. Then she looks down and sees her Big Titties are the reason. She quickly grabs a towel to cover herself. WHAT DO YOU WANT, DRAKKEN??? Drakken snaps out of it. Uh&I mean, I ve done it. I ve developed the perfect plan to take over the World and take care of Kim Possible! Uh-huh. Ye and why would this plan be different from the others? Drakken gets the oh-so-familiar evil grin across his face. Because, it involves us trapping her, and you getting to do anything & everything you want to do to her. An evil grin now comes across Shego s face. Oh, yes. I think I m gonna enjoy this.
Meanwhile&
Ron is sitting on the couch at the Possible House. Both Kim s Mom & Dad are at work, and the twins are performing a dangerous experiment (something involving a Puppy, a Trampoline & some explosives). He has his eyes closed, and a couch pillow in his hand. And it looks like he s over fluffing it. Oh, yeah. That s soft. That s Heaven. Now pull your pants down. Ooh, a green thong. I wonder what s green underneath& Underneath what, Ron? Ron opens his eyes from his Daydream to see Kim looking at him. WHAAH!!! Uh, I mean, NOTHING! I-I was just thinking about&Trees. Just trees and stuff. Suddenly, they re interrupted by the sound of a Toilet flushing. The Bathroom Door opens and Rufus comes scampering out. He jumps on Ron s lap and climbs into his pocket. Hey, did you remember to wash your hands? Before he can answer, Kim s Communicator goes off in her pocket. She pulls it out and answers it. What s the Sitch, Wade? Wade appears on the screen. Kim, I ve just received word that there were several robberies reported in the Pebble Beach Area. A rash of Sports Equipment Stores have been picked clean of special computerized Golf Clubs. Hmm, sounds like Killigan. I m on it. She shuts off her Communicator as Ron stands up. But, you can t be on it, Kim. We got the Cheer Team s meeting today to discuss the Pep Rally. No big. You can go and take notes for me. I shouldn t be long. Please & Thank You. Kim rushes out of the door as Ron tries to stop her. WAIT&KIM!!! Ron stands in the Doorway she rushes off to her mission. Rufus comes out of Ron s pocket and looks up at him. Well, this shouldn t be too bad.
Later, at Middleton High&
I can t believe Kim didn t even show up. She had to send her lackey. Bonnie is steamed, as usual, as she walks down the hall. Ron is tailing behind her. Hey now, first of all, The Ron Man is no one s lackey. And number two, Kim s off trying to save the world. That so figures. She s always off in some far-off place. She cares more about Saving the World than this team. When you see her, tell her I want a few words, and not the good ones. She storms off in a huff, leaving Ron at the Lockers. Well Kim s gonna be happy about that. Better drop off these notes at her Locker, before I hit Bueno Nacho! Rufus jumps out of Ron s pocket and climbs up on his shoulder, happy & ready to go. Let me tell you buddy, I got a craving for Grande Naco that s bigger than& As soon as he opens Kim s locker, a trap door opens under him. WHAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!! Ron is sent plummeting downward with Rufus, but the Trap Door closes before Rufus can fall in. Ron falls all the way down the chute and hits the bottom hard. Ohhhh, what happened? He looks around and sees nothing but darkness. OK, either this is my worse nightmare, or a really big surprise party in my honor. Just then, sinister laughter fills the air, and a pair of Glowing Green Hands appear out of the darkness. OK, I can count out surprise party. Ron backs up to a wall as the hands come closer, and a pair of Glowing Green Eyes appears. AAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
The Incredibly Lucky Ron Stoppable 3
The glowing hands shoot a beam outward and it hits a Lantern. The flame from the Lantern illuminates the room to show that it s Shego with Ron. They re in the Deep Basement of Middleton High. Time to&wait a minute, you? The Buffoon? Where s Possible? Is she sneaking around trying to find a way to surprise me? Ron stops cowering in the corner to answer Shego. Sh-sh-she s not here. She s not here? Then where is she? Just then, Ron starts to think to himself. OK Stoppable, obviously Shego s trying to hunt Kim down. You can t let anything happen to her. This&is where you stand up&and be a man. Ron gets up to his feet and looks Shego in the eye. And why should I tell you? Shego smirks, and then kneels over to grabs a rock off the ground. Her hands begin to glow again, and she turns the rock into powder in her hands. Ron goes back to cowering in the corner. WHAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHH!!! SHE S OFF AT PEBBLE BEACH CHASING KILLIGAN!!! Shego starts to get angry. KILLIGAN? That Fat Pro Golfer Wannabe? Oh, that s just great! Once again, Drakken manages to Fuck Up another one of his plans. Shego turns her back and begins grumbling to herself. Ron gets back up from the corner and begins to climb out the way he came. Well, since Kim isn t here, I guess I should just be going. Shego shoots a beam that hits the wall above Ron. Since I can t have a Showdown with Possible&I might as well settle taking her friend as a Hostage.
Shego inches closer as Ron back up to the wall. This is it, Stoppable. Are you gonna go quietly? Or are you gonna go loud? He jumps off the wall and faces Shego in a Kung-Fu Stance. Shego cocks an eyebrow up. You can t be serious, kid. Oh&I am! HWAAAAAAAAAHH!!! You wanna piece of Ron? Shego laughs a little bit to herself, right before she lunges at him. Ron barely avoids the strike and attempts a Monkey Kick. Shego grabs his leg, flips him over and they start to trade & block each other s blows. After a few moments, Ron actually gets in a Palm shot to Shego s chest. She stumbles back and holds her right Breast as Ron grins and waves for her to bring it. Getting frustrated again, Shego leaps at him in a blind fury. Ron dodges this attack barely, and jumps back into his fighting stance&until his pants fall down. AWWWWWW! Why does this always happen to me?
Shego gets ready to charge again when she stops in her tracks. She takes a look down and her mouth drops wide open. All that comes out is a little drop of drool as she sees the giant bulge coming from Ron s Boxers. That s what Stoppable is working with? But he s only a Teen. Of course, that would explain all the clumsiness I ve seen from him. OH, I ve GOT to get my hands on that&and my mouth. Shego grins to herself, thinking of all the things she can do with that thing. Ron sees this and decides to take this moment to escape. He reaches down to pull up his pants when Shego snaps out of it. Hold it RIGHT There! Ron stands back up as Shego slowly walks over to him. I ve decided to cut a deal with you, kid, and give you a chance to play hero&for once. Ron looks confused as Shego continues. I ll lay off Possible for the time being. So you and her can go Save the World and all that. But in exchange, you have to do something for me. Ron gets nervous as Shego grows a Devious Grin. A-And what would that be? Your Boxers&drop em!
A look of pure shock comes across his face. Of all the things he thought she would ve asked, that was the last one that came to mind. Instantly, he remembers that day when he felt up on her breasts while she was Knocked Out backstage at the Presidential Fund Raiser. Since then, he s had wet dreams about going even further than that with her, but nothing like this. He hesitates for a second, but then complies, pulling them all the way down to his ankles. Shego stands there in shock, staring at his Pipe. Holy Shit, he s almost as big as Drakken. And with his youth, I bet he can go on and on. I guess I should teach the kid how to use it. She starts to get a little wet just thinking about it. She drops to her knees, and grips the Cock with her hand. Hmm, let me guess&Virgin? No! No, no. I ve done it, plenty of times. Dozens! A smirk grows on her face. Ye like I m supposed to believe Good little Kimmy actually gave it up to you. She s probably saving herself for something stupid like Marriage. Well kid, welcome to Shego s Sex-Ed 101, kid. First lesson, now
Shego slowly leans forward and opens her mouth. Her tongue comes out as she gives it a quick lick. Then, her Dark Green Lips slowly wrap around his Large Shaft, and she takes it in. The same look of ecstasy that was on Ron s face when he first saw Shego s bare breasts is back. Shego begins to slowly move her head back & forth, as her tongue just goes crazy around his Cock. OH! It s been so long since I had a Big Cock in my mouth. Her pussy starts to get soaking wet, and she starts to rub her clit as she did in the shower. Ron can barely stand as he looks ready to blow. Oh, man. This feels so good. I m about to pop. NO! No, no, gotta stay strong. I don t know how long she ll do this, so I got to make it last. And as long as she doesn t Deep Throat me, we don t have a problem. And at that moment, Shego begins to take it all in. More and more goes deeper into her mouth until her chin is on his balls. OK, we DO have a problem. She pulls back and pumps her head faster, going like there s no tomorrow. She gets so into it that she rips open her Jumpsuit Top to reveal those luscious round breasts again. This sends Ron over the edge. He stops holding on and let s go, as Semen blasts into her mouth, filling it up almost instantly. It s so much, that the Semen starts to drool out of her mouth. She pulls her head back, letting Ron s Cock out of her mouth. Ron steps back a little, thinking he s done something that ll end his life&and is shocked to see that she swallows his whole load down her throat. Mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm, Yummy. Ron stands there in disbelief. Oh&My&God! SHE S A TOTAL FREAK!!! This would be my dream come true if I wasn t frightened that she ll kill me. Regardless of the fear, Ron s Dick goes hard again. This doesn t go unnoticed by Shego. Hmm, looks like the little soldier is still ready to go. Ron gets nervous again. Yeah, whaddya know&go figure. Ye I think it s time we go to lesson 2. Ron looks confused again. Lesson 2? She has a Sexy Evil grin as she slowly bends over and pulls down her Jumpsuit Bottom to reveal her shaven pussy and that heavenly Ass. Ron almost faints after seeing this. This&is a Dream Come True.
Meanwhile&
Rufus has just climbed up to Kim s Locker, and is frantically pressing buttons trying to activate the spare communicator. After a few more tries, he finally gets Wade. What up, Ro Rufus? What s going on? Rufus starts scampering about what happened to Ron, but Wade can t understand him. Is this Bueno Nacho again, Rufus? Rufus groans and then begins to act out all that happened to Ron. Wade finally begins to understand. Something tells me Ron s in trouble. Better call Kim.
Back to the Action!
Shego stands bent over in front of Ron, with that perfect ass in the air. So, you ready for Lesson 2? Ron grabs his Cock and grins. Oh yeah&OH YEAH! THE RON MAN S READY!!! And with that, Ron lunges forward and inserts into her Soaking Wet Pussy. Shego moans with ecstasy almost instantly. OOOOOOHHHHHHHHHHH, YES! Ron pumps in and out of her, enjoying every minute. This is it, Stoppable. Today&you are THE Man! He begins to stroke faster, getting fully into it. Shego looks like she s in heaven. Oh my GOD!! Kimmy does not know what she s missing. Ron leans over and starts massaging Shego s Round Tits. The sweat is pouring off of them both as Ron continues to pump it in, Deeper & Deeper. Shego looks closer than she s ever been to an Orgasm. OH, YEAH!! RIGHT THERE!!! I m so Close! I m&I M&AAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ron shoots out his load, filling her up just as much as he did her mouth. It s almost like a fire hose. Shego falls to the ground, sweating, exhausted, and Happy. Ron falls to his knees, still smiling over what he s done.
Shego lays there, feeling vindicated&and out of breath. You know&with a few more lessons&you could really become a pro. Ron feels glad over the compliment. He looks down to answer Shego when he sees something that he never thought to see in his wildest dreams&Shego s Bare Ass. His Dick gets Rock Hard upon seeing it, and dozens of ideas of what he could do to that ass run through his head. It s a thing of pure beauty. You know what? Screw it all. Shego might kill me when she gets her strength back, so I might as well go out with a Bang! Ron gets a Devious grin on his face as he looks at Shego. Yeah, I could become a pro. And I think I ll take my Anal Test right now! Shego looks confused. Anal Test? Wh-what re you&No, NO! THAT S NOT GONNA HAP&
Before she can finish, Ron grabs her ass and penetrates straight into her Asshole. Oh, man. This is like 10 times tighter than her pussy. Shego s gloves start to glow brightly as she s clearly not happy about this surprise. Ron sees it, and decides just to keep fucking her ass as long as he can. Shockingly, Shego s hands slowly stop fading as she begins to enjoy it. Oh, YEAH! OH, GOD THIS FEELS SO GOOD!!! RIDE ME, STOPPABLE! RIDE ME HARD! Ron can t believe what he just heard. She IS a Total Freak! I don t think I can hang on any longer. He keeps pumping her ass, going deeper with each stroke. Shego is drooling & moaning in joy. It s been so long since she s had it up the ass real good, and it s about to make her come again. Oh God&OH GOD&I m Gonna, again&AAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!! Ron lets loose yet another load. This one looks to be the biggest. He pulls out of her, and falls to the ground, drenched in sweat, and a smile on his face. I d die now a happy man&it was worth it& And Ron passes out from Exhaustion, laughing to himself.
Ron wakes up a Few Hours later, fully clothed and wiped of the sweat. He looks up and sees the dimly lit room again, this time it has a tunnel of light shining in on his face. Ugh. Am I dead? He gets up off the ground and tries to get his bearings when he notices that the tunnel is real. Shego left him a way out&and left him alive. He walks out through the tunnel and out into the open just as Kim arrives on the scene. RON! Is everything OK? As Ron s eyes still adjusts to the light, he hears Kim s voice. Kim? Is that you? Yeah&I-I m okay. Kim hugs him, glad to know that he s safe. Wade said that he scanned the school and saw you fell through a Trap Door. And he said Shego was there. What happened? Don t worry, Kim. You see I m safe. I handled the situation. Guess you could say I had the tools to get the job done. Kim looks puzzled. What does that mean, Ron? OH, Uh&NOTHING! Nothing! Let s go to Bueno Nacho. I think its Half-Priced Tuesday.
And&
Shego walks into Drakken s secret lair, looking refreshed and carrying a Shopping Bag. Drakken ducks behind a table. Wait, Shego. Before you get mad, there was no way I could ve known Killigan would pull that stunt. And the plan can still& Forget it, Drakken. I m taking a Personal Day. Hold off your Half-Assed for another day. She walks straight into her quarters as the door slides shut behind her. Drakken just stares at the door, surprised she didn t break anything. Humph! My plan wasn t that Half-Assed. In her room, Shego pulls a bag of Ice out of the Shopping Bag. She lays the Ice Bag on her bed and gently sits down on it. Ouch! She finally rests on it, as a Vindictive look grows on her face. I gotta get me some more of that Stoppable Cock&and pay him back for my Ass.
The Amazingly Lucky Ron Stoppable
Ron, are you OK? Kim sits with Ron at the back of the School Bus, wondering if everything s Kosher since he hasn t said a word since they left. They ve joined the Cheer Squad and a few members of the Football Team on a Special Pep Rally to Camp Wannaweep. Usually hearing the name causes Ron to go cowering in a corner, but this time he s kept his composure, causing Kim to worry. She puts her hand on his knee. Is this about you having to leave Rufus behind because of his Veterinarian appointment? No, I m cool, KP. Like the other side of the pillow. Kim smiles, assured he is OK. So the counseling sessions with the School Psychiatrist have been working? Yeah, he says that I should just think about happier times whenever&that name is mentioned. And he also gave me this nifty Stress Ball to squeeze when I get nervous. I doubt that I ll need it though. At that moment, Ron looks out of his window and sees the Camp Wannaweep welcome sign outside of the Camp. He starts hyperventilating and squeezing his Stress Ball, so hard that it explodes in his hands. Bonnie Rockwaller sees this and turns to look at the two. Um, yeah, he s not gonna be acting like this the whole trip, is he? Kim stands up to Bonnie. Chill out, Bonnie. Ron will not be a problem on this trip Uh-Huh, he better not!
The Bus rolls through the front entrance gate of the camp, and Ron s close to having a nervous breakdown. He remembers all of the horrible events that went on here. The Bugs, The Rabid Monkey, and the two Incidents with Gill, the Swamp Mutant. Ron remembers the advice of the School Psychiatrist and recalls all of the good events in his life. His Times at Bueno Nacho, his Adventures with Kim saving the world&and losing his virginity to Shego. Just thinking about that gives him a Hard-On that can be seen even through his Baggy Pants. Ron looks down and notices it. Oh, no. Not again. If Mr. Barkin sees it, he ll make me sit through another film of The Birds & The Bees . Gotta hide it. Ron quickly grabs Kim s pom-pom and puts them on his crotch, trying to cover up. At that time, the Bus hits a huge speed bump, and Ron realizes he forgot to buckle his seat belt. He s sent flying onto the Aisle Floor, and the whole Bus starts to laugh at him, as Kim looks very embarrassed. Bonnie sighs and looks at her Cheerleader friends. You see, this is why I don t associate myself with the loser class. She & her friends start laughing along with the rest of the Bus. Ron is about to make a comeback at her when the insult dies in his mouth. He s at eye-level with Bonnie s crotch area, and can see between her legs & under her skirt that she s not wearing any underwear. He can t make out the whole scene, but he can definitely see the hair and the clit from Bonnie s Pussy.
Bonnie s¬ wearing Panties& He goes on staring, as Bonnie doesn t even pay attention to him. But suddenly his concentration & gaze is broken. STOPPABLE!!! Ron jumps to his feet and stands Eye-to-Chest with Mr. Barkin. Is there a reason why you were lying on the floor of a moving Bus? NO, NO! No, sir! None at all! Uh, I mean&I ll just go back to my seat now. Ron sits back down in the back as the Bus comes to a complete stop. The door opens and they all pile out into the open. Mr. Barkin marches them out to the middle of the Camp Site, then lines them up in 4 rows. Kim is placed 2 rows behind Ron and five students to the left, while Ron is directly behind Bonnie. Mr. Barkin walks around in front of the kids, like a Drill Sergeant addressing his troops. People! The school has issued this Pep Rally in order to Pep up your spirits for the Big Game. We will spend a couple of hours here raising your School Spirit, and you will be Peppy by the time you leave this camp. Now the Big Game is tomorrow night, so I expect you to& Mr. Barkin is interrupted by the Bus Driver. They turn their backs to the students and talk, as Ron can t help but keep his eyes on Bonnie s ass. Oh, man. It s so round&it s so perfect. And she s not even wearing panties. Oh, she must be a Pro. I bet she could teach me so much. Ron begins to let s his imagination go wild.
He starts to imagine the both of them alone in the School Gym & Bonnie wearing a special Cheerleader Outfit with a super short skirt. The Outfit is black & blue with a Big Letter R in the front. She looks at Ron with seductive eyes and slowly walks towards him. Gimme an R! Ron looks confused, as he s the only one in the Gym with her. Um&R? She moves closer as a devious grin grows on her face. Gimme an O! OK, O! She gets right up on him and leans in close. Now gimme an N! N! She puts her arm around him and drags her finger gently over Ron s chest. You know what that spells? You, ya big stud. She leans in closer and gives him a Deep, Wet Kiss. They both start leaning more and find themselves on the floor. They keep kissing, as Ron begins to feel on Bonnie s ass. He slowly moves his hands up her body, feeling on every curve of her. His hands finally reach her Cheerleader Top, and he slowly starts to lift it up when a Loud & Uninviting voice breaks up this dream. STOPPABLE!!! Ron is snapped back into reality to see Mr. Barkin staring a hole through him from a distance. What is wrong with you? Are you high? What? N-No. No Mr. Barkin, sir. Barkin walks back to the group. Then pay attention, then. People, it appears that our Mode of Transportation has run into some Technical Difficulties. In other words&the Bus broke down. This means that we will have to spend the night here. Now later, I will be assigning partners to share Cabins. For now, practice on your cheers and proceed with building up your Pep .
The group disbands. Ron tries to make his way over to Kim through the crowd, when he notices Bonnie kissing Star QB Brick Flagg on the lips, then giving him a slap on his butt. He sighs, wishing that it was him. It ll never happen, Stoppable. Bonnie goes for Dimwitted Athletic Type, not the Shy Mascot Type. Kim walks over to him. Well, looks like we re gonna have to hang here for a while. I ll call Wade to see if anything s going on. Kim walks off towards the Main Office as Ron tries to find the positive in this situation. OK, Stoppable. You re stuck here while Rufus is at the Vet. None of the other girls are interested in you, except maybe Kim&hey, maybe me & Kim can hook up tonight. Ah, who am I kidding? Mr. Barkin will never let the boys get close enough to the girls to let that happen.
Later that night&
The Group is gathered around the bonfire as Mr. Barkin reads from a list of the students that are there. All right, listen up. Seeing that these Cabins are only made to accommodate two, I will be pairing you off to these Cabins. Now, due to the Discriminatory Act the school has been issued, I will be pairing you off regardless of Age, Race and/or Gender. This causes some gasps from the crowd. Ron looks around and sees Bonnie with a joyous grin on her face as she looks at Brick. The Camp Counselor walks over to Mr. Barkin to address what he just said. Excuse me, sir? Do you think that it s a wise decision? I mean, Co-Ed Cabins. Not to worry, these are all young adults who know the value of Responsibility. Besides, my eyes & ears are like a Cat. If I see anything that I don t agree with, I ll pounce with the quickness of a Cheetah. Mr. Barkin focuses his attention back to the students. Alright, now here s how you ll be paired off. Possible! You ll be rooming with&Brick Flagg! Kim looks shocked. This came out of Left Field for her. Brick is smiling and being congratulated by his teammates. Bonnie looks devastated. This so can not get any worse! Mr. Barkin makes his next announcement. Stoppable! Your roommate will be&Bonnie Rockwaller!
Bonnie s jaw drops as she can t believe her luck. Ron develops a smile on his face, thinking this might not be so bad. But the smile quickly fades when he turns towards Bonnie and sees a vindictive look on her face. As Mr. Barkin finishes up announcing the partners, Ron gets up and makes his way to the Cabin he was assigned, hoping to avoid Bonnie s wrath. He reaches the front door when an arm shoots out and blocks his way. It s Bonnie, and she s looking pissed. Let s&get this straight, Stoppable. We may be roommates, but that s it. So do not pull your usual goofy stunts around me! I will not put up with it like your stupid friends or Ms. Perfect Possible. Understood? Ron lowers his head and nods it. And do NOT think that there will be any sex in that Cabin. As a matter of fact, if I catch you even trying to look at me that way, I ll stick these Pom-Poms straight up your& OK! OK, Bonnie. I get it! She sneers at him and walks into the Cabin. Huh, you better! Ron follows after her into the Cabin, thinking this might not be such a good thing. Oh, man. This is gonna be a Nightmare.
Later that night&
Bonnie is sitting on the Top Bunk being her usually moody self. She s filing her nails, trying to past the time until this is all over. Ron is walking around the Cabin, checking every dark corner and under every piece of furniture. Bonnie begins to get annoyed by all of this. What are you doing, Stoppable? Ron continues his check. I m checking for Bugs and Psychopathic Monkeys. They can hide anywhere and attack from any place. Oh, I can not believe that I am stuck with you for the night. Ron gets up from his check and comes back at Bonnie. You know, this isn t exactly a Picnic for me, either. Bonnie gets angry a shoot down a mean look at Ron. Hey, you should be happy that you get this close to a beautiful woman. Lord knows Ms. Perfect doesn t have my looks. Ron is about to come back at her again, when he decides to just let it slide. Look, how about we just go to bed and get some sleep. That s the first good idea you had. The sooner tomorrow gets here, the sooner I get away from you. Bonnie turns her back to Ron and lies down on her bed. Ron sighs to himself and turns off the light. He walks over to the bottom bunk and takes off his shoes & pants, not wanting to sweat in his sleep. He climbs in the bottom bunk and closes his eyes, quickly falling asleep himself.
A few hours later, the Camp Site is quiet. Everyone is asleep in his or her Cabin as you can barely hear anything. Inside Bonnie & Ron s Cabin, Bonnie gets up to get a drink of water. She walks over to the sink and grabs a cup, but changes her mind when she looks in the cup and sees how filthy it is. ICK! Never in my life! She throws the cup down and walks back to the bunk. As she begins to climb up to the Top Bunk, she notices something on Ron. Ugh. Must be a bug. Better shoo it off of him before it attacks me next. She climbs down and goes to bat the bug away when she sees what it really is in the darkness&Ron s Bulge. Holy shit&THAT S what Stoppable is working with? Well, it does explain the clumsiness. I wonder if Kim knows? I gotta see this for myself. Bonnie carefully begins to grab Ron s Boxers, trying not to wake him up. She reaches inside and slowly pulls out his Cock, looking shocked by the size of it. Geez, it is for real! I never would ve guessed. I wonder what it tastes like?
She looks around, checking the windows of the Cabin to make sure that no one is looking in. She then grips the shaft in her hand, and gives it a small lick, expecting it to be the nastiest thing ever. Huh. It s not so bad. Just then, Ron starts to shift a little. Bonnie turns pale, thinking she s about to be caught Red Handed&somewhat. Then a smile comes onto Ron s face. Oh, Shego. I love it when you do that. Bonnie looks at Ron angrily. Who the hell is Shego? She shrugs it off, concluding that it s Ron talking in his sleep. She takes a few more lick of his Penis, then leans in more. She opens her mouth, and slowly begins to engulf the head. It s starting to feel real good to Ron. So good that he wakes up, and sees Bonnie s mouth on the head of his Cock. WAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHH&
Bonnie sits up and quickly forces her hand on Ron s mouth to shut him up. Would you shut up, Stoppable? Ron snaps back in and realizes it s not a dream. Bonnie, you were you were just giving me a& She cuts him off before he can continue. Look, I know what you re thinking. No you don t. Cause right now, I m really confused. Bonnie sighs and sits on the edge of the bed. Look, Stoppable, I had a plan to be with Brick Flagg right now, but stupid Mr. Barkin changed that. My sister s made a bet with me. Said they d stop teasing me if I get laid by the star QB, like they did when they were in High School. I was just& She holds her head down in disappointment. Ron gets up from his bed and puts his arm around her. Hey, hey, it s OK it s OK. The Ron Man knows about being teased. And it never affects my style. Bonnie raises her head and looks at Ron. You know, you re not so bad after all, Stoppable. They both smile, then their eyes meet, and they both lean in to kiss each other.
The two of them end up falling on the lower bunk bed. It s just like Ron s Daydream. He starts to feel on Bonnie s ass. Playing with it before he slowly moves his hand up her body, feeling all of her curves. He reaches her Cheerleader Top and lifts it up, revealing her Soft, Round Breasts. He massages them, pushing them together and playing with them. Bonnie moans softly in approval. R-Ron&wait&I wanna do something& She slowly moves down Ron s body, reaching his still erect Penis. She grabs it, and begins to put it in her mouth when Ron interrupts. Uh&Bonnie? Are you sure that& Shut Up, Stoppable! I need this. I just need to Suck someone! It s just a Blowjob. Ron shuts up, remembering his experience with Shego. It s best to just let a Frustrated Woman suck you off, and lay back and enjoy it.
Bonnie puts her lips on his Cock and proceeds to work her tongue all around his head. She goes up and down on his shaft, leaving it wetter with every motion. Ron can t believe how good this feels. Oh, man. She s even better than Shego at this. This feels so good. Bonnie starts to tilt her head as she goes lower and lower on his Manhood. Ron feels like he s about to blow when he gets a glimpse of Bonnie ass from under her skirt with the moonlight hitting it just right, to give it that glow. It s even more perfect than I could ever dream. I bet her pussy is heaven. I gotta get my Dick in that. I gotta touch it! I gotta see how warm it is! But Bonnie would kill me if I even tried. Bonnie takes his Cock out of her mouth and starts to lick it like an Ice Cream Bar. She goes up & down the shaft, and even starts to suck on his balls. All the while, her pussy is getting more & more soaked. Ron notices she s enjoying this and makes a bold decision. I&I can t help it. I just gotta touch that Pussy!
Ron takes his Middle & Ring Fingers and puts them together, then lifts her skirt and slides them into Bonnie s Wet Box. Bonnie gasps, not expecting him to do something like that, but she continues licking & sucking on his Cock, enjoying the moment. She takes it in once more, this time all the way down until it disappears. Ron looks ready to pass out. I can t believe it. She even knows how to Deep Throat. I can t hold back. Bonnie keeps pumping her head back & forth off his Cock. She takes it out of her mouth just when Ron lets his load explode. Semen flies all over her face and in her hair. Ron is scared for his life. He takes his fingers out of her wet box, and has flashbacks of what happened with Shego, hoping for the best. She shoots an evil look at Ron. Do you have to Fuck up everything, Stoppable? Ron looks close to begging. I m so sorry, Bonnie. I didn t mean& You know what, if you wanna make it up to me& Bonnie climbs onto his bottom bunk and spreads her legs right in front of him. &then Fuck Me! Ron is completely caught off guard. He never expected to hear that. But& Oh, you think you can just finger me close to an Orgasm then just quit? She leans in and grabs his collar, pulling him close to her. I WANT YOUR DICK IN ME, STOPPABLE!!!
Ron looks shocked, but not too shocked that he doesn t comply. He leans in and rubs the head of his Cock around her pussy lips. It turns on Bonnie more & more, as she starts breathing heavy with anticipation. Stop teasing me, Stoppable. Put it in! He stops the teasing, and fits his penis inside her surprisingly tight box. She moans in pleasure, finally getting what she wanted. Ron begins to move slowly, pumping in and out of her. Oh, man. She s so warm. She s got Shego beat by a mile. He s getting lost in this pleasure, as he grabs her thighs and pushes himself deeper in her. Bonnie is in Heaven. OH, GOD!!! OH GOD, RON!!! YEAH!!! LIKE THAT!!! OH, FUCK!!! Bonnie s screams can be heard 2 Cabins over. But in that Cabin, sleeping like a Log is Mr. Barkin. He s cuddled up with his Teddy Bear, unknowing of the wildness going on. Over at the other end of the Campgrounds is Kim s Cabin&without Kim, who was called away on a mission to investigate Professor Dementor. Back at the Cabin, the entire Bunk Bed is shaking from the action. Ron is sucking on Bonnie s Firm, Round Tits as he keeps pounding her. Suddenly, Bonnie pushes Ron away from her. He pulls out and wonders what s going on when she lays him on his back. It s time for Bon-Bon to drive.
She climbs on top of Ron as before, and guides his Dick into her. She slowly begins to bounce up and down, before picking up the speed they had before they stopped. Ron grabs her Firm Breasts again and begins to massage and play with them. This time Bonnie helps, and she guides Ron s hands, pushing her Tits together and rubbing on her nipples. They re both going at a fast pace, as the whole room fills with squeaks from the bed. Bonnie closes her eyes and tilts her head back, feeling closer than ever. YES!! YES!!! OH, YES!!! I M GONNA CUM!!! I M GONNA& Bonnie hops off of his Cock just as he sprays all of his Semen out. He lets it go all over her back and her Round Ass as she falls forward onto Ron, with her Breasts burying Ron s face. She rolls over onto the other side of the bed. They re both drenched in sweat & breathing hard. Ron has a huge smile on his face. As he passes out, only one thought goes through his mind. I am The Man!
The next morning, Ron is woken up by his pants being thrown on his face. He sits up to see Bonnie fully dressed and standing by the door. Come on, Stoppable! I don t have all damn day to wait for you! Get a move on! She storms out of the Cabin as Ron sighs and starts to put on his pants. He stands up and grabs his shoes when he notices Bonnie back in the doorway. And thanks for last night, stud. She blows a kiss at him, then exits back out. Ron smiles and puts on his shoes before leaving the Cabin. The Bus is already half-full as Mr. Barkin is loading the rest of the kids. Ron joins Kim in line. Hey, KP. Everything go OK with your bunk? Didn t find out. Had to go on a late-night Capture of Professor Dementor. How about you? Was Queen Bonnie bearable? Ron is about to answer when he feels a smack on his butt. He turns to see Bonnie walking onto the bus ahead of them. Ron smiles and replies to Kim. Eh, you know. The Ron Man always survives, no matter the danger.
Kim & Ron climb onto the bus, as it s revealed that they re being watched on a Monitor. The Figure that s watching them steps out of the shadow to reveal that it s Shego, with a sinister grin on her face. Trust me, Stoppable. You don t know what danger is&at least not until I show it to you. You re gonna pay for what you did to me! OWW!!! She grabs an Ice Pack and begins to gently rub her ass. And my Ass!
The Unbelievably Lucky Ron Stoppable part 3
Itâs 11:30am, as the Sun brightly shines into Ron Stoppableâs room, which looks like a Tornado hit it twice. Rufus is sleeping in Ronâs Sock Drawer, using one of his Socks as a Blanket. The room is eerily quiet, that is until Ronâs alarm clock goes off. âITâS PEANUT BUTTER JELLY TIME! PEANUT BUTTER JELLY TIME!!!â The song blares throughout the room as Ron is shocked awake. He reaches for something to grab onto, but ends up falling out of his bed, which wakes up Rufus. He picks himself up off the floor and grabs his Shirt. âCome on, Little Buddy, first Day of Spring Break. Which means nothing but Sun, Fun & Video Games!â Rufus stands up and yawns as Ron puts on his pants and a pair of Sandals. He grabs Rufus and runs into the bathroom. Grabbing his Toothbrush, he turns on the Faucet to the Sink and brushes his teeth. Rufus climbs onto the sink and grabs a Toothbrush of his own and brushes his. The two finish and dash out into the hall and down the stairs.
âMOM! Iâm up! Got the Waffles ready?â He runs into the Kitchen to see nobody at home. Only a note left on the table. He grabs the note and read. âDear Ronnie, your father and I have gone shopping since last night you cleaned out the Refrigerator with your mouth. We will be back this Afternoon.â Ron puts the note down and looks at Rufus. âOh well, looks like itâs Bueno Nacho time!â Rufus shakes his head in excitement just as the house phone rings. Ron picks it up. âHello? Casa De Stoppable.â âRon, Iâm so glad I caught youâ Itâs Kim on the other line. A smile comes onto Ronâs face. âHey, Kim. So howâs Cheerleader Practice?â âItâs fine, but I need a favor from you. I ran out of the house and forgot to grab my Momâs Medical Supplies. Can you go drop them off for me?â The smile on his face quickly turns into a frown. âAw, Kim. Youâre really cutting into my Ron time.â âPlease & Thank You.â Ron finally caves. âAlright, Iâm on my way.â âGood. The Tweebs should still be home so theyâll let you in. I owe you, Ron.â She hangs up the phone as Rufus crawls into Ronâs pocket and looks up at him, wondering whatâs going on. âLooks like we gotta make a small detour, Rufus. But this wonât cut into our fun time.â
A Little LaterâŠ
Ron shows up outside of Kimâs house. He rings the doorbell, and a moment later the door swings open. Ron looks in and then quickly ducks as a Rocket shoots over his head followed by Kimâs Twin Brothers, Jim & Tim. âWe shouldâve used less fuel.â Ron stands back up, wondering whatâs going on. âUh, whatâs with the Rocket?â Jim uses a Remote Control to try to call back the Rocket as Tim explains. âWe heard NASA was willing to pay for a new Cleaner Burning Rocket Fuel. We succeeded, but it makes the Rocket a little harder to control.â Tim takes the control as Jim turns to Ron. âKim called and said what you needed. Momâs bag is upstairs in her room.â Just then, the Rocket crashes in a Neighborâs Back Yard. âOh no, Ms. OâLearyâs yard. We gotta get that Rocket back.â
They run off towards the Neighborâs house as Ron heads inside. He climbs the stairs and walks into Kimâs Parents Room. The Bagâs not out in the open, so Ron decides to look for it. He checks the counter, under the bed, then checks the drawers. He opens one drawer, and his face starts to turn bright red as he sees what lies withinâŠits Mrs. Possibleâs underwear drawer. âWhoa!â He looks at the door to make sure no oneâs watching, then grabs a few pair to see what they look like. He holds one up to reveal that itâs a Thong. âOh, man. I never knew Mrs. P wore a thong! Dr. P is a lucky man!â Heâs about to put the underwear back in the drawer when he notices a photo face down in the drawer. He picks up the photo to look at it, and his Dick almost shoots out of his pants. Itâs Kimâs Mom, naked, and playing with her Huge Breasts. Ron drools uncontrollably, mesmerized by the photo. After a minute, Rufus snaps him out of it. He puts down the Photo and closes the drawer. His eyes gaze downward, and he sees her Medical Bag behind the door. He grabs it and runs back down the stairs, trying to get his mind off of what he just saw. âNo! Stop it, Stoppable! Thatâs Kimâs Mom! What youâre thinkingâŠitâs Sick & Wrong. Get your mind off of it!â He runs out of the house and closes the door behind him. Ron hops on a Public Bus headed Downtown as the Tweebs are getting scolded by Ms. OâLeary.
An Hour LaterâŠ
Ron arrives at the Hospital and walks through the sliding doors to see Mrs. Possible being congratulated by fellow Colleagues after a successful Brain Transfer Procedure. She sees Ron walking up to her and welcomes him. âRonald! How nice of you to drop by. Kim told me what youâre doing. Sorry to cut into your free time.â âNo problem, Dr. P.â He hands the bag over to Mrs. Possible. âNow if youâll excuse me, I have some Nacos to scarf down. Plus, these hospitals bring back bad memories.â âNonsense, Ronald. Thereâs nothing to fear from Hospitals. Probably just something that happened from your last Check-Up.â Ron gets nervous and starts to scratch the back of his head. âUh, actuallyâŠI havenât had a Check-Up in a while.â Mrs. Possible gets a motherly look on her face as she folds her arms. âRonaldâŠâ âDonât worry, Dr. P. Itâs on my To-Do List. But a man like me does have Priorities. Like Half-Price Tuesday as Bueno Nacho!â Heâs about to jet off to his favorite hangout when heâs grabbed by Mrs. Possible. âAnd a young man like you needs to keep healthy. A small Check-Up wonât take that much time out of today, Ronald.â âBut youâre a Brain Surgeon, Dr. P.â She turns and smiles at Ron before leading him down the hall. âBut I also studied Basic Medicine in Medical School, which means Iâm more than Qualified to perform Check-Ups on Patients.â
She leads him to her Office. Heâs about to walk in when she puts her hand up to stop him. âSorry, Ron. But Rufus has to stay in the Waiting Room. Sterilization Rulesâ Rufus looks upset, but he jumps out of Ronâs pocket and scampers off to the Waiting Room. Ron walks into her Office and waits as Mrs. Possible remains outside. âIâll be right with you, Ronald. Just have to make a quick phone call. She walks down the hall to the end and pulls out her Cell Phone, dialing in a number. She puts the phone to her ear and listens to it ring for a few moments before someone answers. âHello?â âHoney, itâs me.â âOh, Hey sweetie. Everything OK at work?â âYes, itâs fine James. Just wondering if weâre still on for tonight. The Twins are going to a Sleepover, and Kimâs got a Stakeout Mission. So itâll just be you & me.â âOh, Iâm sorry, Sweetie. But I gotta pull an all nighter tonight. NASAâs really been bugging us to finish our Robot so they can send it to explore Jupiter. I hope youâre not too disappointed.â She sighed, looking very disappointed. âNoâŠno, itâs OK, Honey. Iâll see you when you get home.â She hangs up the phone, too upset to even say goodbye. She stands there, with her fist clenched tightly, as her mood changes from Disappointment to Frustration. She then turns back to the room to start her Check-Up on Ron. âYou knowâŠIâm beginning to think that Iâll never get laid.
The Unbelievably Lucky Ron Stoppable 4
Mrs. Possible reaches her office and stands outside, trying to regain her composure and not look to upset that Ron notices. âOK, stop thinking about this. Youâre a strong woman, and youâll get through this. Itâll just be another night with the Vibrator again.â She walks into the Room and sees Ron struggling to put his Hospital Gown on. âRon?â He turns his head and sees Mrs. Possible. âYou see this is why I donât like Hospitals, Dr. P. I think I put this thing on backwards.â He turns around to show that he did put it on backwardsâŠand his penis hanging out in the open. Mrs. Possible is awestruck at the sight of it. âMy GodâŠTHATâS what young Ronald is packing? Well, it does explain all of the clumsiness. My word. Maybe I wonât need a Vibrator tonight after all.â A cute, but fiendish smile grows onto her face as she shuts the door behind her. Ron recognizes the look. Itâs the same look that was on Shego & Bonnieâs face.
Mrs. Possible slowly moves closer to Ron. âYes, Ronald, it is on backwards. But I think we can work around that.â This confirms Ronâs suspicion. âOh, no. Oh, No! Sheâs coming on to me. I canât do this; this is Kimâs Mom. This is so sick & wrong! I gotta do something to stop her!â Ron starts going through his mind about what he can do to not appeal to Mrs. Possible, but before he can come up with a solution, a warmness comes at him from below. He looks down to see Mrs. Possible gripping his Cock. âUhâŠDr. P? Arenât you supposed to be using a glove when you do that?â âDonât worry, Ronald. Iâm sure you donât have anything that I donât want. But you do have something Iâm especially interested in.â She begins to stroke his Dick slowly, as she licks her lips. Ron tries to fight it, but is losing badly. âOh, God. Her hand is so warm. NO! No! Canât get hard! Think about Basketball, Cold ShowersâŠDNAmy!!!â She keeps stroking, with each movement getting Ron harder & harder. It starts to turn her on, also. As she can feel herself getting wet between her legs. âI canât believe this. Just stroking this monster is getting me off. I gotta have this in my mouth.â
Mrs. Possible squats down as she continues to stroke Ronâs shaft. Ron has a worried look on his face. âI canât let this happenâŠbut I donât want this to stop.â She comes down to eye-level with his penis when surprisingly she gets nervous. âGee, itâs been so long since Iâve done this. Hope I still rememberâŠdonât wanna put Ronald into a Coma.â She opens her mouth and sticks her tongue out a little as she moves closer. Her Ruby Red Lips engulf the head of his Cock as she uses her tongue to lick all around it. Ron looks paralyzed with pleasure. âOh, man. Sheâs not a proâŠsheâs a fucking Master! Her and Mr. P must have Freaky Sex every night!â She pumps her head back and forth on his Cock, as she slowly starts to take off her white jacket. She tosses it on the floor and starts unbuttoning her blouse, all without losing a step. She opens her blouse to reveal a White Lace Bra holding back those Incredible Tits. Ron instantly gets flashbacks to the photo. âIâŠI shouldnât do thisâŠbut I canât help it. I just gotta see them for myself.â Suddenly, Mrs. Possible takes his penis out of her mouth and looks up at Ron. âRonald, would you like me to show you something maybe Kim can do for you in a few years?â Ron nods his head yes, unable to speak from the pleasure. Mrs. Possible grins and slowly removes her Bra, letting loose her Massive Jugs.
She grabs them and pushes them onto Ron, so that his Penis is completely enveloped by them. Ron canât believe what heâs feeling. âHoly Crap! My First Titty-Fuck!â She massages his Dick in between her breasts, pushing them together to make it even tighter. She gently licks his head, then moves her luscious breasts up and down over his shaft. Ronâs feeling at peek performance. âIâm sorry, Kim. But your Mom is the best Woman Iâve ever had. Hands down.â Mrs. Possible looks up and notices Ronâs close to his Orgasm. She stops and stands up straight. âOh, we canât have you popping your Cork without having the Main Course.â She turns her back to him and bends over, revealing a White Lace Thong. She moves it aside to show her Dripping Wet Pussy, ready to be penetrated. Ron stands thereâŠstunned, until Mrs. Possible snaps him out of it. âWaiting for something, Ronald?â âNoâŠNot a thing, Dr. P!â
He guides his Penis through her lips, into her warm, inviting box. She looks back at Ron with seductive eyes. âOoh, you know your way around, Ronald. You must have had some experience.â Ron gets nervous as he starts to pump her pussy, in & out. âUhâŠyeah, a little.â âDonât worry, Ronald. I wonât tell your motherâŠprovided you show me what you learned.â His eyes light up, like seeing presents on Christmas Day, and he goes Balls Deep into her, making her moan in pleasure. âOh, Ronald! Just how I like it! Keep goingâŠFaster!!!â Ron picks up the speed, slapping his skin with Mrs. Possibleâs Round Ass. He leans forward and massages her Bare Breasts, enjoying every moment of this. Mrs. Possible starts drooling uncontrollably, as she looks close to her Climax. âYES, RON!! YES!! IâM CLOSE!! IâM CUMMING!! AAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!â
Ron lets his load go inside of Mrs. Possible, as they both fall to their knees, sweaty and tired.
Ron tries to catch his breath, when he realizes what heâs done. âOh, no. I didnât pull out. Dr. P. IâŠâ âCalm down, Ron. Iâm on the pill. Mr. Possible & I learned our lesson after Jim & Tim.â She gets up off the floor and helps Ron up, then kisses him gently on the forehead. âThank you, Ronald. You donât know how I needed that.â âNo problem, Dr. P. Glad to help out.â Ron buckles up his pants and heads for the door when Mrs. Possible calls to him. âRonaldâŠif youâre not busy, maybe you can help me out around the house tonight. Kimâs Cheer Practice wonât end to late, and Mr. Possible has to pull and all-nighter.â She looks at Ron with those same seductive eyes, which Ron still canât resist. âNever too busy to help you out, Dr. P.â
The Not-So-Lucky Ron Stoppable
âMorning TimeâŠand time for Vengeance!â Shegoâs alarm goes off. She puts on her gloves and smashes the clock into a million pieces. As she sits up in her bed, topless, she recalls the events that lead her up to now. The Frustration, the chance meeting with Ron Stoppable, and her getting reamed up the Ass by Ronâs massive manhood. A look of pure hatred fills her face, as the morning sun shines on her perfect Round Tits, making them almost glow. She gets up from bed to reveal sheâs wearing nothing but a Dark Green Thong. She slips on her âOh Boyzâ Slippers and walks into her bathroom. Her hair is all a mess and she looks a little Hungover, but still Damn Sexy. She turns on her faucet and runs the water as she grabs a Toothbrush and some Toothpaste, and begins brushing her teeth. Just then, she hears Dr. Drakkenâs voice over the P.A. system. âSHEGO! Are you up? I need you! Meet me in my Laboratory!â Shego groans and spits the Toothpaste out of her mouth, before leaving the bathroom to get dressed. âFucking Drakken. Iâll meet my Foot with his Ass, thatâs what Iâll do.â
5 Minutes laterâŠ
The sliding door opens and Shego walks into the Laboratory to see Dr. Drakken high above the room, designing another scheme to take over the world. Shego looks up at him, Angrily. âWhat is it, Drakken?â âShego, I am so close, I can taste it. I almost have the perfect plan to annihilate Kim Possible and her Buffoon sidekick, AND take over the World! Itâs gonna be, as they say, Off the Heezy!â Shego gets annoyed and begins to walk off. âYeah, thatâs nice Drakken. By the way, mind if I borrow one of your Doomsday Weapons? Thanks.â She walks into Drakkenâs Weapons room not caring about his answer, leaving Drakken alone again. âOh, sure Shego. Knock yourself out. Now could you hand me the Screwdriver? Shego? SHEGO?â He turns to see no one there. Shego stands in the Weapons Room, in front of a Miniature Neutronalizer. She picks it up, as a Devious Grin grows on her face. âOh Yes, Ron. You are gonna seeâŠthat Payback, is a Bitch!â
MeanwhileâŠ
Ron is sitting at the Kitchen Table, having a bowl of Corn Flakes. Across from the table sits his mother, whoâs wearing some Slippers, a Bathroom Robe, and possibly nothing else underneath. Ron nervously picks up his spoon and begins to eat, when his mother breaks the Silence. âRonald, are you feeling OK?â WAAAHHHHH!!! OH! Oh. Iâm OK, Mom. Just a little âOn Edgeâ lately.â He takes another bite, as Mrs. Stoppable reaches over & grabs his hand, causing him to stop in mid chew and look up. âWell you know Ron, you can talk to me about anything. Iâm here for you.â Ron yanks his hand back before she can get a full grip, then stands up from the Table. âYou know what, thatâs all good, Mom. But right now, I g-g-gotta go andâŠandâŠMEET KIM! Yeah, Big Practice for the Big Game.â Ronâs Mother looks confused. âBut I thought your school already had the Big Game, Ronald.â He gets more nervous, trying to think up a good cover. âUhâŠthis is forâŠCHESS! Yes, the Chess Team really needs us Cheerleaders and Mascots. So Iâm uhâŠgonna go train for the uhâŠChess Thing!â
He runs out of the Kitchen and out the Front Door of the house. He shuts it behind him, breathing hard and still nervous. Rufus comes out of his Pocket to see whatâs the Matter. âI donât know how much more I can take. First Shego, then Bonnie, Then Kimâs Mom. Now my Mom might be starting? Does every Woman in Middleton want my Cock?â Rufus looks at him and shrugs, not knowing the answer. â(Sighs) Letâs just go and meet up with Kim, Little Buddy. Hopefully, she wonât go crazy and try to rape me.â They head off down the block to meet with Kim. They reach the Possible Residence and are greeted by Kim waiting at the Front Door. Kim smiles at Ron and Hugs him. âReady to hit the Mall, Ron?â âReady, Willing and Able. Canât wait to hit the Food Court.â Kim smirks at Ron being himself. âYeah. Well I just need to update my look. A Quick swing by Club Banana should do it.â Ron smirks right back at her. âYou know, I donât understand why you just donât buy your Clothes at the Smart Mart.â âAnd youâre not me, so you never will.â They both laugh and start on their way. Ron looks back at the house, with the Front Door open, and sees Kimâs Mom standing by the stairs. Mrs. Possible gives Ron a seductive smile as she licks her lips, which makes Ron nervous again. âUh, letâs get a move on, KP. Donât wanna miss any Big Sales.â He grabs Kimâs arm and leads her down the street towards Downtown.
30 Minutes laterâŠ
Kim & Ron are sitting at the Food Court. Kim has two bags from Club Banana sitting at her side, and Ronâs scarfing down a Grande sized Chimerrito. âMan, I am SO happy that they put this Express Bueno Nacho here. Itâs like a little home away from home.â Kim is about to say something when Bonnie, who just came from Club Banana herself, interrupts her. âWell, well, if it isnât Ms. Perfect.â Kimâs smile disappears from her face as soon as she hears her voice. âHello, Bonnie.â âIâm shocked to find you here among us âCommon Folk.â What, no World to save? No Sinister Plot to stop?â Kim looks up at Bonnie and grins. âWell, better to save the World and keep fit than sit around and get allâŠflabby.â Rage comes over Bonnieâs face. âListen here, you littleâŠâ Ron interjects himself into the conversation. âWAIT! No fighting! No fighting. Canât we all just get along?â Bonnie regains her composure and turns her back to Kim, looking at Ron. âYouâre lucky that I have more important things to do with my time, Kim. Later.â Bonnie walks past Ron, slowly rubbing her finger along his chest. She gives him a sexy smile and a wink that Kim canât see, before walking off. Kim has a confused look on her face. âWhat was that all about?â Ron looks back at Kim, more nervous than ever. âI-I-I have n-no Idea. Beats the hell out of me.â
As the two talk, a shadowy figure watches them from up high. Itâs Shego, and she has the Mini Neutronalizer in her hand. âThank you, Stoppable. Thatâs exactly what Iâm about to do!â As Ron continues to chow down on his snack, he realizes a shadow is over him, and itâs starting to grow. He looks up to see Shego diving down on him, hands glowing. âWAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!â Kim tackles Ron and gets him out of the way, just a split second before Shego crashes through the Table, destroying it. Kim gets up and protects Ron as Shego recovers herself. âMove out of the way, Kimmy. This isnât about you, itâs about your little Boy Toy there.â Kim gets herself in a fighting stance. â1, He is Not my Boy Toy. And 2, if you want Ron, youâre gonna have to go through me.â Shego thinks about Kimâs threatâŠfor a second. âHmm, Doable!â
Shego charges, and the fight is on. The two trade blows all around the Food Court as Ron just stands there, thoughts of his last encounter with Shego running through his mind. âOh, man. She must want revenge. And now Kimâs involved because of me! Oh, why did I have to Fuck her Ass that day?â The battle rages on as the two fall into the Mall Fountain. Soaking wet, Shego gloves are still glowing as a Ball of energy at Kim. KP ducks, and charges at Shego as they Struggle in the Fountain. âI mean it, Kimmy. I donât care about hurting youâŠfor today at least. I just want Stoppable!â âAnd I told you, youâre not gonna hurt him.â âHim? IâM the one thatâs Hurt!!!â They push each other apart and fall into the water. Ron rushes over to the scene to see both stand back up. He looks at Kim and sees her Wet T-Shirt, and the Sports Bra she has on underneath. âWhoa. Never knew Kim for the Sports Bra Type, but it explains a lot. AGH! What am I doing? Gotta Focus!â Shego lunges at Kim with a Clothesline, but Kim counters with a Roundhouse Kick that sends her out of the Fountain. Kim hops out of the Fountain and looks at Shego. âOK. What did Ron do to upset you?â Shego forces herself to her feet, still recovering from that kick. âYou mean you donât know? Fine. Iâll tell you what Mr. Big Man did to me over thereâŠâ
Ronâs life flashes before his eyes, thinking he wonât have long to live if Shego reveals their Secret. He runs in between the two, interrupting Shego. âKIM! Whatever Shego tells you is a Dirty Lie.â Kim looks more confused than ever, as Shego decides to take her shot. âYouâre Mine, Stoppable!â She leaps at Ron with the Mini Neutronalizer, but Kim cuts her off, causing Shego to drop the Neutronalizer. As they struggle, the weapon goes off, and engulfs the two in a Bright Energy Field. After a moment, the field is gone and both Shego & Kim fall to the ground, smoke coming off their bodies. Ron runs over to check on Kim. âKIM!! KP!!! Hold on, Iâm gonna get you some help.â He picks up Kim and carries her towards the Mall Exit, rushing out of the Mall. Shego slowly starts to recover as she picks herself up and looks around. She opens her mouth to call outâŠbut in Kimâs voice. âRâŠRon?â
The Not-So-Lucky Ron Stoppable 2
The Mini Neutronalizer did its job perfectly. Kim Possible is now in Shegoâs body. Kim slowly struggles to her feet, getting her bearings back. âRon? Ron, where are you?â Her eyesight comes back as she looks around, seeing nothing but Innocent Bystanders still surprised over the Battle. She looks down to see if sheâs on level ground, when she sees her legs are not hers. âWhaâŠWhat the?â She runs over back to the Fountain to look at her reflection, and sees the truth. âNo! I-IâŠI canât believe it. Shego switched bodies with me. Oh God. This is like a Bad Plot out of some Science Fiction Show. I gotta find Ron. Gotta explainâŠâ Before she can do anything else, a Hover Pod crashes through the Glass Ceiling and swoops her up, carrying her up out of the Mall the way it came. Kim tries to get her balance back, but itâs hard in her new body. Just then, a small monitor activates and Drakkenâs face appears. âShego, I donât know why you decided to go AWOL on me, but I need you back at the Lab, pronto. Thereâs business to take care of.â Unable to control the Hover Pod herself, Kim decides to just go with it.
An Hour Later, Back at Kimâs HouseâŠ
Ron is pacing around in Kimâs Bedroom as Rufus stands on her Bed Post holding the Communicator over Kimâs body, scanning for various abnormalities. After a moment, Rufus puts it down on the bed and Wadeâs face appears on the screen. âWell, nothing is Physically wrong with her, Ron. She looks fit as a CheerleaderâŠwho saves the world.â Ron looks relieved, then turns his attention to Kim as he sees her waking up. âOh, shit. Kim will freak out if Iâm in her Bedroom without permission. Letâs go.â Ron & Rufus run out of the room as Wade logs off. Kim slowly sits up, feeling like a Truck hit her. âUgh! What happened?â Itâs Shegoâs voice, confirming that Shego is in Kimâs Body. âWhere is this place?â She gets up off Kimâs Bed and on her feet, almost losing her balance at first, but then catching herself. She slowly walks towards the door when she passes a Full Body Mirror. She takes a quick glance to see herself then continues onâŠthen runs back to the Mirror in shock. âWHAT THE FUCK??? Iâm Kim? Iâm in the Cheerleaderâs body? What is this, a Bad Dream?â She starts to feel on her hips, moving her hands down a little, then moving them up until she reaches her Soft, Round Breasts. âNo, this is real. I really am in her body. Hmm, not bad. Sheâs developing quite nicely. Though, not like me.â
She walks over to Kimâs nightstand, looking at all the little knickknacks, then picks up a Picture of Kim & her family. A sinister grin grows on her face. âThis could be good after all. I can make Kimâs Family suffer, and theyâll never know the truth. YeâI think Iâm gonna like this change.â More evil thoughts fill her head, until she hears a knock on the door. âKim, itâs me, Ron. Is it cool to come in?â Shego gets startled, and runs back to the bed to lie down, pretending not to feel well. âUh, yeah. Come in.â Ron opens the door to see Shego faking Ill. âKim, you OK? Your voice sound deeper, and a little more annoying.â Shego gets angry at that comment. âAnnoying? Iâll show you annoying, you smart littleâŠno. No, Shego. Canât let him catch on. Gotta play along.â She clears her throat to sound more like Kim. âOh, Iâm fine, Stoppable. RON! I mean Ron. Just had a bad run in with Shego.â âIâll say. Whatever that thing was that Shego had, it looked like it put a whammy on you. Iâm surprised she knew how to use it.â Shego holds back the temptation to strangle Ron. âWell, you know. Shegoâs always been the Brains of the Operation. Sheâs the most dangerous Villainess that weâve ever faced.â Ron drops his jaw a little, shocked at what came out of Kimâs mouth. âAre you sure youâre OK? Youâre giving Shego compliments andâŠâ Shego stands up and begins to push Ron out of her Room. âYes! Yes! Iâm fine! Now go! I got umâŠCheerleader stuff to do.â
She boots him out and shuts the door behind her, leaning on the door trying to make sure he canât come back in. Once she makes sure heâs gonna, she goes back to her own Voice. âDamn that Stoppable! The little punk is gonna pay forâŠwaitâŠThatâs It!â An idea forms in her head, and she smiles fiendishly at the thought of it. âIâll seduce Stoppable. Iâll work my charm on him and get him to Fuck Ms. Princess while Iâm in her body, getting back at him and her. Sheâs probably still a virginâŠyep, still a virgin.â She laughs to herself, as she imagines the plan unfolding in her head. âOh, yes. This time, theyâll both pay.â Shego walks over to Kimâs Bedroom window and sees Ron leaving the house on his way back home. She goes to the door and leaves out of Kimâs room. Walking down the hall, she passes Kimâs twin Brothers, Jim & Tim. The two hold up Squirt Guns to her, with intent to fire. âHold it! You may not pass! Besides, we need to test out our new Chemical onâŠâ Shego gets impatient and interrupts. âOK, you know what? What if I show you something to make you happy. Will you leave me alone?â The twins both nod their heads. Shego then lifts up the shirt and the Sports Bra that Kim was wearing to show the Twins Kimâs Round Breasts. âThere. Happy? Knock yourselves out.â Shego lowers the shirt and continues out of the house as Jim & Tim stand there in disbelief, for about 2 minutes. Then Tim finally breaks the Silence. âI CALL DIBS ON THE BATHROOM!â Tim runs into the Bathroom and shuts the door behind him, locking Jim out. âNO FAIR!â Jim looks around for a second, then runs into his room and locks the door behind him.
MeanwhileâŠ
The Hover Pod thatâs carrying Kim, in Shegoâs body, pulls in and lands inside Drakkenâs Secret Lair. Kim slowly stands up and looks around, recognizing this place. âOh, manâŠthis must be the Secret Lair ofâŠâ Sheâs then interrupted by the Evil Genius himself. âAh, Shego. You return.â âDr. Drakken!â Kim jumps out of the Hover Pod and into a Fighting Stance. Her gloves start to glow involuntarily, as Drakken falls to his knees. âOh, Please donât hurt me. Iâm sorry for pulling you away, but I need your help.â Kim starts to remember whatâs going on. âThatâs right, I forgot. Iâm still in Shegoâs body. Canât let him know any different. At least until I get back in my body and save Ron.â Kim starts to clear her throat, so she sounds more like Shego. âYeahâŠyou better get on your knees. Cause Iâm ShegoâŠand Iâm bad.â Drakken gets back up on his feet and looks at Shego. âIs everything OK, Shego?â âUh, why wouldnât it be? Iâm Shego. Everythingâs Cool. So, whatâs the Big Evil Plan ofâŠEvil?â Drakken looks strangely at her, then shrugs it off and announces his plans. âVery well. Using the Mind Control device that I âborrowedâ from Professor Cyrus Bortel, I can gain control over the Queen of England. Then, using the Rare Orchid I used to almost make Kim Possible disappear, I can sprinkle the Royal Duke, thenâŠâ Drakken goes on, getting lost in his own Master Plan. Kim slowly backs away heading for the nearest room away from here. Ironically, she backs up into Shegoâs Room.
She looks around, seeing everything that makes Shego what she is. âGod, itâs like I stepped into her deranged mind.â She looks on Shegoâs bed and sees her Diary, off all things. Curiosity gets the best of Kim as she sits down on the bed, picks it up and begins to read. âHmm, âSeptember 1st, 2001. After another successful mission with Team Go, we celebrated with our Customary All-Night Orgy. It felt good, but this whole Crime Fighting Career is starting to go sour on me. Iâve called Drakken again, and told him that Iâm still considering his offer to become his Henchwoman and take over the world.â Whoa! She had an Orgy with her own family? Major Whack-Job.â She stands up and walks around some more, passing a Full Body Mirror. She stops in front and examines the body she inhabits now, feeling on the hips and the breasts. She lifts up the Jumpsuit to expose Shegoâs Luscious Tits out in the open. âNo wonder Iâve been uncomfortable, she doesnât even wear a bra. Such a Slut!â She lowers the Top and looks at herself closely in the Mirror, with a look of depression. She then holds her head high and looks herself in the eye. âDonât worry, Kim. Youâll get your body back, save Ron, and make that bitch pay for what she did.â
Back at MiddletonâŠ
Shego, still in Kimâs body, and Ron are at Middleton High, to pick up some coupons for Bueno Nacho that Ron left in his Locker. As Ron puts in his Combination, Shego commences her plan to Seduce Ron. âRonâŠhow about we go somewhere private. Just youâŠand meâŠand a DildoâŠand some K-YâŠâ Ronâs eyes widen as he instantly figures it out. âOh, Man. Now Kim is coming on to me. Oh, Curse The Ronâs Sexiness. CURSE IT! I gotta turn her off me.â He starts thinking of someway to distract her, then comes up with one. âLook, Killer Golf Balls coming this way!â Shego turns around, and Ron dashes off around the Corner. Shego turns her attention back to Ron, to see that heâs gone. â(Sighs) I canât believe I fell for the oldest Trick in the Book.â Shego chases after him, using her agility to leap over the kids in the hall. âHmm, Little Kimmy is athletic. That explains her keeping up with me.â She gets closer with every leap that she makes, then takes a huge leap to land right in front of Ron, startling him. She stands with her hands on her hips, and a Seductive smile. âI love it when you play hard to get. Come on, I want you to Ride me Hard & Put me away Wet.â Ron looks like heâs about to have a Heart Attack. âWhat the Hell has gotten into Kim? I gotta do something to get rid of her.â And Ron gets another idea. âUh, yeah. You know what, letâs go to Bueno Nacho. That should get me allâŠSexed up and stuff.â âWhatever you want, Hunk.â Shego grabs Ron and wraps her arm around his as they head off. âWhatever to get your pants down and continue my plan, Moron.â
Back at DrakkenâsâŠ
Kim, still in Shegoâs body, peeks out of Shegoâs Room, to see Drakken, surprisingly, still rambling on about his Master Plan. She sneaks through the Laboratory, unnoticed by Drakken, and enters the Garage of his Secret Lair. Inside, she finds dozens of replacement Hover Pods. âNo wonder he always got a new one whenever we blow up his last one.â She sees a Shiny New one in the center of the room and hops in, starting it up and flying out of the Lair, still unnoticed by Drakken. Kim begins to work on the Hover Podâs Radio Frequency, until she finally gets the one she wants. âWade? Wade, can you hear me?â A blurry image appears on the screen as Wadeâs voice is heard. âHello?â âWade, thank god I got through.â The image clears up to show that it is Wade. âWho am I talking tâŠSHEGO???â âNO! No, Wade, itâs me Kim.â Wadeâs not believing her. âYeah, right. And how do I know youâre really Kim?â âOne on of our Missions, you kept one of the Bebe bots for yourself so you couldâŠâ âOK! OK! Itâs really you. What happened?â Kim looks relieved to be found out. âItâs a long story. But right now, you need to get in touch with Ron. Shegoâs in my body and heâs in Deep Trouble.â
Back in MiddletonâŠagainâŠ
Ron is munching down a Grande Sized Naco, as Shego, in Kimâs body, looks on. Ron has a big smile on his face. âThis always works. Kim canât stand when I eat my food sloppy. She should be bailing out for the Mall anytime now.â Shego is definitely getting grossed out by this scene. âGood God! How did I ever let this Sloppy Dork Fuck me? OH! Most of it isnât even hitting his mouth! UGH! I wanna leave right now andâŠwait a minute, I think Stoppableâs trying to gross me out, so Iâll lose interest. Who knew he was capable of coming up with something smart. But it wonât work.â Shego reaches over and grabs Ronâs hand, looking him tenderly in the eyes. âRonny, Iâm not feeling so well, I need to go home. Could you walk me to my house?â Ron looks up and wipes the cheese from his face. âFinally! Sheâs lost interest. Iâll just walk her home, and itâll be over.â He nods his head and gets up from his booth seat, as the two walk out of Bueno Nacho and down the street towards Kimâs house. Along the way, Ron notices a change in Kimâs appearance. Her eyes donât sparkle as they use too, and the warm smile that graced her face has now been replaced by a sinister scowl. He looks worried, wondering if being zapped with that Device has changed her all around sunny attitude altogether. Shego notices Ronâs staring, and quickly forms a smile on her face so that he wonât get suspicious.
They reach the front door of Kimâs house, and stand in front. Ron smiles at Kim. âWell, here we are. Iâll catch ya later, KP. Gotta hit the Arcades.â Ron turns to head off, but Shego grabs his arm and kicks the Front Door open. âOh, youâll be hitting something alright.â She shoves Ron inside the house and follows him in, shutting the door behind her. No one is home, as Ron backs away from her and climbs the stairs to the 2nd floor. She climbs up after him, as he backs up down the Hallway. He gets trapped in a corner, which ironically has a door into Kimâs Room. Shego moves closer and closer, as Ron begins to sweat from nervousness. Shego comes in inches away from his face, and licks her lips. âDonât worry, Ronny. Iâll give you a good reason to sweat.â She grabs Ron and shoves him into Kimâs room. He stumbles and falls on his back on Kimâs bed. Before he can get up, Shego pounces on him and starts to unbuckle his pants. Ron starts to panic. âWAIT! Kimâ we canât do this.â She reaches in his pants and pulls out his Cock, getting a firm grip on it. âThatâs what you say. But your little Soldier is ready to go.â
Ron gets a major case of DĂ©jĂ vu, remembering hearing that phrase before, but gets knocked for a loop as he feels Shego licking his Cock like an Ice Cream Cone. She slowly licks around the head, before engulfing it in her mouth. She leaves it there for a moment, just enjoying the feeling. âGod, I forgot how good this feels. And how thick he is. Itâs almost a shame that Kim canât be here for this, but Iâll make sure her body enjoys it.â She bobs her head up & down on his Cock, bringing a smile to his face. Ron feels like heâs in heaven, but itâs also a familiar feeling. âOh, man. This feels so good. Itâs like Kimâs a pro at this. But I thought she was a virginâŠat least thatâs what her Diary said.â Ron starts to tremble, looking ready to blow at any moment. Shego sees this and takes his Cock out of her mouth. âAh-ah. Wouldnât want you going off before the Main Course.â Shego crawls onto the bed and lies there with her Ass hanging in the air. Outside of Kimâs window, a Hover Pod is seen landing in the yard. Shego winks at Ron. âGo ahead, Ronny. Any hole you want.â Mesmerized by Kimâs body, Ron pulls down his pants and begins to insert his Throbbing Dick in her, when Kim crashes through her Room Window. âRon, stay back! Shego isâŠâ And Kim, in Shegoâs body, sees Ron readily about to penetrate Shego, in Kimâs body. All 3 stand there, jaws dropped, frozen in the moment.
The Not-So-Lucky Ron Stoppable 3
Thereâs a long awkward silence, as the 3 remain frozen still. Finally, Kim, in Shegoâs body, breaks the silence. âWhatâŠthe hellâŠis going on?â Shego, in Kimâs body, decides that the jig is up. â(Sighs) Well, I almost have my master revenge. Gee, Now I know how Drakken feel.â Ron backs up, finally realizing whatâs going on. âWaitâŠShegoâsâŠin KimâŠand Kim isâŠOH! THIS IS SO SICK AND WRONG!!!â Rage starts to take over Kim. She pulls out the Mini Neutronalizer as she lunges herself at Shego. They both end up falling off of Kimâs Bed and on the other side. A moment later, the same Bright Energy Field that caused this engulfs the two again. After the Field fades off, both women stand up on their feet. Kim looks down and sees sheâs back in her body, not Shegoâs. âFINALLY! Back in my own BoâŠâ Now she realizes that her Breasts & Thong are exposed in the open. Red-Faced, she pulls up her pants and pulls down her shirt, right before getting a Fierce Kick to the Gut by Shego.
âYou may be back in your body, Princess. But that only means youâve given me my powers back!â Shegoâs gloves start to glow bright green. Ron yells out to Kim. âKP, LOOK OUT!â Kim recovers to see Shego charging at full speed. She does a handstand and spins around, whipping her leg into the side of Shegoâs head. Shego is sent out the same window Kim burst in through. She takes a hard fall and lands in the Hover Pod. Kim jumps in the window about to chase her when she sees Shego already taking off. âThis isnât over, Kimmy! You canât protect Stoppable forever! Iâll make him pay for my Ass!â She flies off and disappears in the clouds. Kim looks up, then sighs to herself after all that sheâs been through. Meanwhile. Ron is slowly sneaking towards the door, ready to run for his life. He makes a small creak in the floorboard, which Kim hears clearly. âSit Down, Ron!â Ron gulps, and quickly sits down on Kimâs bed. Kim turns to him with an angry look on her face. Ron is facing the other way, not able to look her in the face. âYou know, in my self-defense Kim, I didnât know Shego took over yourâŠWHOA!!!â Kim grabs Ronâs collar and turns him to her, looking very serious. âExplainâŠNow!â
âExplain what, KP?â âDonât play games with me, Ron. Shego kept talking about her ass when she went after you. And when I was in her body, I felt some pain back there. Now what did you do?â Ron realizes that thereâs no way out of this now. So he hangs his head down and fesses up. âIâŠI fucked her.â And in an instant, Kimâs jaw drops to the ground and her eyes widen. âYou meanâŠshe raped youâŠright? RIGHT?â Ron puts his head in his hands and continues to explain. âActually, it was mutual. You see, while you were out capturing Duff Killigan, Shego set a trap for you, which I fell in to. She then said she was gonna take me hostage to get to you. I tried fighting her off but I couldnât. Then, all of a sudden, she started coming on to me. Then she said that sheâd let me go and lay off of you, if I had sex with her. Iâm only Human, KP!! I couldnât help myself!!â Ron looks at Kim, whoâs in a state of shock right now. She manages to get out a few words. âAndâŠher ass?â Ron laughs nervously. âWell, she didnât want it thereâŠbut I got a little greedy.â
Kim turns away from Ron, still processing in her mind everything he just told her. Ron hangs his head in shame, thinking heâs lost the one true friend heâs ever had. Kim begins pacing around the room, looking up with her fists clenched. âMyâŠbest friendâŠwithâŠmy worst enemy. HowâŠwhyâŠ?â Ron is about to apologize again, but changes his mind, not wanting to piss her off more. Kim stops pacing around and stands across from Ron. âThisâŠthis is soâŠFrustrating! IâŠI amâŠSO Frustrated right now. God! Iâm so frustrated that I couldâŠâ Kim stops, then looks at Ron. After noticing the silence, Ron looks up to see Kim giving him a look. A very familiar look. A look that was given to him by Shego, Bonnie, and Kimâs mother. And upon seeing the look, one thought goes through his mind. âNoâŠFuckingâŠWay.â Before Ron can blink, Kim dives at him and slams him down on her bed. She kisses him, deeply & passionately, shoving her tongue down his throat. She then starts to rip his shirt, getting to his bare chest. Ron finally pulls back from Kim, needing to breath. âWHAT ARE YOU DOING???â Kim looks at him with a Seductive smile. âSampling.â Ron gets even more confused. âSampling?â âIf you want me to believe that Shego really had sex with you, then Iâm gonna have to see how you areâŠfor myself.â Those words almost make Ron have a Heart Attack in disbelief. He never thought it possible. He dreamed, but still never thought it possible.
Kim slowly works her way down Ronâs body, going for the kill zone. She reaches his pants and pulls them down a little, enough to reveal his hardening Dick. âSo this is what youâre working with, Ron. Hmm, it does explain all of the clumsiness.â She gets a firm grip on it when Ron stops her from proceeding. âWait, wait, I thought you were a virgin.â Kim gives her trademark smile to Ron. âWell, technically I am.â Ronâs look goes back to confusion. âTechnically?â âOvernight Field Trips I took with Bonnie and the rest of the Cheerleaders.â Ron is about to say something, but then remembers how freaky Bonnie can beâŠfrom first hand experience. Kim focuses her attention back to âLittle Ronâ âIâve even practiced on a DildoâŠbut never the real thing.â And with that, she takes his Cock into her mouth. Itâs a little overwhelming to her, but she starts to suck on it slowly, moving her tongue all around the head. She works her head down a little bit more, trying to adjust. âGod, Ronâs so big. I can barely fit it in my mouth.â Ron is lying back with a wide grin, in total ecstasy. âOh, man. Sheâs better than Shego, BonnieâŠeven her mom. Her mouth is so warm.â Kim takes his Cock out of her mouth and begins to take off her pants.
Ron now is more nervous than heâs ever been. Kim strips down to her Red Panties, then slowly pulls them down and off. As Kim begins to climb on top of Ron, he panics. âKim, wait. We canât do this! What if your brothers come in?â âThe Tweebs just went to Space Camp. I saw them when their Bus left.â Ron thinks of another excuse. âYour parents?â âMomâs overseas performing Brain Surgery on the British Prime Minister, and Dadâs busy on a Top Secret Project.â Ron tries thinking of anything else, any other reason to get Kim to stop. He fails, and finally decides to give up and give in. âAw, the Hell with it! I donât care about the cost, I gotta fuck her pussy!â Kim climbs on top and Straddles Ron, with a seductive grin on her face. âAre you ready for me, Ron Man?â Ron grins, thinking of all the things heâs about to do with Kim. âReady and waiting.â Kim grabs hold of Ronâs Shaft, and slowly begins to guide it into her Box. The head of his Cock touches her lips, then slowly penetrates, sliding deeper & deeper as she goes lower & lower onto him. Kim starts to bite her bottom lip, not knowing if she can take much more. âOh God, the Dildo was never this thick.â She finally takes it all in, resting herself on his Dick.
Kim starts to rotate her hips a little, remembering some of the lessons Bonnie taught her. As she moves, she looks down to see about Ron. âAmâŠam I doing OK, Ron?â Ronâs eyes are glazed over as he wears a grin that takes up half his face. He nods his head slowly to answer her. Kim smirks to herself and rolls her eyes. âYep, must be doing something right.â Without warning, Ron grabs her hips and pulls her even closer to him. Kim gasps, then moans in pleasure. âOh, Ron! Donât get so rough. This is my first time.â âDonât worry, Kim. Just think of this like the time I taught you in Home Ec. Or when we worked at Bueno Nacho together.â Kim gets a concerned look on her face. âThat doesnât exactly make me feel better, Ron.â âOK, OKâŠthen maybe this will.â Ron starts to go in sync with Kim, pumping in & out of her. Kim starts to get excited. âOh god, Ron!â The Bedsprings start to squeak, as the action picks up. Almost instinctively, Ron raises his hands and grabs Kimâs firm, round breasts. Kim falls forward, putting her hands on Ronâs chest, enjoying having her Tits fondled. âOh, that feels so good!â The two are moving in perfect sync, pounding each other more & more. Ron looks up at Kim, who opens her eyes to look at Ron. Their eyes meet, and Ron stops his motion, to Kimâs surprise. âRon, whatâs wrong?â
Suddenly, Ron grabs Kim and flips her over onto her back. She looks shocked, but Ron gives her a seductive grin before he begins pumping in & out of her again. Kim lies on her back, enjoying the sensation. âOH YES! YES!â Sweat is flying off of the both of them as Ron keeps up the pace. He grips Kim thighs and leans in a little, going deeper inside of her. Kimâs Breasts are bouncing around, almost hypnotic-like. She looks to be in pure ecstasy, as she clenches the sheets on her bed and bites her bottom lip again, looking close to hitting her Climax. âOh God, Ron! I thinkâŠI think Iâm going toâŠâ âMe too, Kim. Iâm about to blow!â Ron pulls out of Kim in the nick of time, then shoots all of his Semen all over Kim. Her stomach, her breasts, even her face gets covered. Ron falls back on the bed, lying next to Kim. The two of them are breathing hard, nearly out of breath. Kim slowly lifts her head to look at Ron. âThatâŠwas Spankinâ.â Ron grins back at her. âBooyah!â
After a few minutes, they both sit up on the bed. Kim stands up and looks at Ron. âIâm going to go take a shower. Wanna join?â Ron doesnât answer, he just stays silent and hangs his head. Kim walks over to check on him. âRon, whatâs wrong? Didnât we have fun?â âOh yeah, Kim! Yeah, we did. ButâŠShego got away, and sheâs still planning on her revenge. Weâre gonna have to watch our backs all the time because of that crazy Bitch.â Kim sits down and puts her arm around Ron. âWell, maybe not if we get to her first.â Ron looks up at Kim, confused. âWhat are you talking about?â Kim develops a sexy, yet evil smirk on her face. âI have a plan.â
The Not-So-Lucky Ron Stoppable 4
â(Sighs) Another day, another doomed Drakken World Domination Plot.â Itâs morning time in Dr. Drakkenâs Lair. Shego sits up in her bed. The pain in her ass has finally resided enough for her to sit. No Alarm Clock goes off, as she didnât bother to set it. She doesnât even bother to look at the time, which is 11:30am. Sheâs wearing nothing but a Dark Green Thong, and doesnât really care. Her Breasts hang perfectly, as the sunshine illuminates them, giving them a glow as it did before. Slipping on her âOh Boyzâ Slippers, she stands up, trying to adjust her eyes to the light, and heads for the bathroom for her morning routine. The door slides open and she walks over to the sink, turning on the faucet. She grabs her toothbrush, and some toothpaste, and begins brushing her teeth. Her eyes finally adjust to the sunshine as she spits out the toothpaste and wipes her mouth. She leaves her bathroom and grabs a dark green Robe hanging on the wall. Putting it on, she steps out of her room into the Main Laboratory area, on her way to the Kitchen.
When she steps out, she notices that most of Drakkenâs equipment is running, but Drakken is nowhere to be seen. She doesnât pay much attention, since this type of thing has happened before. â(Sighs) I swearâŠIâm glad I donât pay his evil Electric Bill. Probably somewhere in the Millions by now.â She passes through the Lab and enters the kitchen, which looks like your typical, run of the mill kitchenâŠkind of out of place in an Evil Lair. She looks in the refrigerator, trying to decide exactly what she should have this morning. After a moment, she pulls out a Carton of milk and decides to have a simple bowl of cereal. Grabbing a box of Evil-Oâs, she pours them into a bowl, followed by the milk, and leaves the kitchen, not bothering to clean up after herself. She plops herself down on a couch in a corner of the Lab, in front of a Big Screen TV. She turns it on, and flips past shows like âSpace Passageâ & âEvil Eye for the Bad Guy, to finally end up on âThe Fearless Ferretâ. âUGH! The Ferret Show?â She looks to her left at a clock on the wall. âEh, thereâs nothing else on around this time.â So she continues to watch the show, and eat.
30 Minutes laterâŠ
Finishing her breakfast, Shego tosses her bowl onto the table, gets up and decides to get dressed. She also notices that Drakken still hasnât shown his face or been heard from. She starts to call out at him. âDRAKKEN! Are we gonna do some evil stuff today or what?â Still no answer. She heads toward the Equipment Room, where she keeps her gloves and spare jumpsuits. âDrakken? Hey, if you locked yourself in the bathroom again, I am NOT getting you out.â She reaches the room and presses a side button to slide open the doors. But what she sees is totally unexpected. Thereâs Drakken, bound & gagged on the floor of the room, looking scared to death. Shego immediately grabs her gloves and turns around. âAlright, show yourselves! Monkey Fist, Killigan, DementorâŠcome out!â She looks at a dark corner of the Lab, figuring that itâs the most likely hiding spot. Sheâs right, but out of that corner stepsâŠRon Stoppable.
Shego is in shock. âYOU??? You did this to Drakken?â Ron smiles, a confident, almost cocky smile. âYou could say that. But Dr. Drak isnât who weâre here for.â Shegoâs look changes to that of smugness. âOh, I get it now. Youâre still mad about me taking over little Kimmyâs body and almost tricking you to have sex with her.â âNo, at least not anymore. Actually, after you left, me & Kim tore up the bedroom. So thatâs not why weâre here.â Shego then raises an eyebrow, listening to what Ron has said. âWait, you said we. That meansâŠâ And before she can react, Shego is hit with a Light-Blue Energy Ray. She falls to the ground, unable to move, with a light-blue glow around her body. Kim jumps down from the rafters and lands right beside Shego. Sheâs holding a bag in one hand, and an Immobilization Ray in the other, leaving no doubt that sheâs the one who shot Shego. âWeâre here, because we didnât want to leave you out of our funâŠand payback.â Shego struggles to move, but canât. She yells out in frustration, and realizes she can move her mouth. âOut of your fun? What the hell are you talking about? What are you gonna do?â As Shego yells continues to yell out, Ron picks her up and puts her on her shoulder, as he & Kim walk over to her room, leaving Drakken by himselfâŠagain.
Ron tosses Shego onto her own bed, then smiles as Kim adjusts the settings on the Immobilization Ray, allowing for limited movement for Shego. Shego looks up at the two, thinking they have something sick & sinister planned. âHey, uhâŠIâm sorry, forâŠthe whole âTricking you into taking Kimâs virginityâ plan. Yeâit was really Drakken that made meâŠâ Kim cuts her off. âCalm down, Shego. This wonât hurt.â Kim leans in closer to Shego and grins seductively. âIn fact, you just might enjoy it.â Kim tilts her head slightly, and lays on a Deep, Wet, Passionate Kiss on Shego, whoâs shocked about it, and didnât see it coming. Kim even moves her tongue into Shegoâs mouth, surprising her more. Shego tries to fight it, but canât because of the Rayâs effect. Then she starts to give in to it. Ron grins to himself, as he watches the make-out session. âDamn, thatâs sexy.â Kim backs away from Shego, and Shego looks down, seeing that just the Kiss Kim gave to her made her dripping wet. She looks back up to see Kim smirking, and starts to think to herself. âHoly Shit! Just the Princess kissing me got me soaking wet. This is some joke. Itâs got to be. Theyâre not really gonna Fuck meâŠare they?â
At that moment, Ron starts unbuckling his pants, letting them drop around his ankles. He then slowly pulls down his boxers, revealing the massive manhood Shegoâs real familiar with. Shego turns to it, and gets lost in a trance, remembering that day under Middleton High School. But Kim quickly grabs her attention again. âDonât worry, Shego. Just think of this as another All-Night Orgy with Team Go.â Ron looks at Kim with shock. âWhat? She actually had an Orgy with her brothers?â âRead it in her diary.â âOh, that is Wrong-Sick.â Ron moves closer to Shegoâs face, and instantly she opens her mouth, welcoming his Cock. âWhat am I doing? Iâm letting the Buffoon and the Princess have their way with me. But damn, heâs such a good fuckâŠand I always wanted Kimmy. God, I want his Cock in my mouth now.â And she gets her wish. Ron inserts his Dick into her warm, drooling mouth. She feels a small bit of gratification, as she works her tongue around his head. âOh God, this tastes so good.â Her sensation is interrupted when she feels her thong being pulled down to her knees. Kim is behind Shego, mere inches away from her wet love lips. Shego can feel Kimâs breath on her, and Kim knows it. âHmm. Time to see if what Bonnie taught me actually works.â She inches closer, then sticks out her tongue and licks inside Shegoâs Pussy.
Shego trembles in pleasure and would fall down, if not for the Immobilization Rayâs effects holding her up. Kim begins to bury herself into Shegoâs ass, as Shego gives Ron a serious Deep Throat Job. The sensation of giving and getting good is almost more than Shego can handle. âOh, God. Itâs been so long since I had two at once. I canât even remember the last time. Oh, I think I might cum just from this.â Ron also looks ready to cum, as he can barely stand from feeling Shegoâs tongue work all around his manhood. Unable to hold on any longer, he lets his load go inside of her mouth. This time Shego is ready, as she gulps down every bit of his semen down her throat. None of it escapes her mouth. Kim gives Shegoâs lips one last, long lick, before backing away, with a small line of saliva connecting her lips to Shegoâs pussy. âThat tasted almost as good as Bonnieâs.â Kim gets up off her knees and pulls down her Capri Pants; She steps out of them and takes off the light red Thong sheâs wearing, before lying on Shegoâs bed, Spread Eagle. âI think itâs time for you to be a giver, Shego.â
Shego slowly opens her mouth, letting Ronâs Cock go free, before turning to Kim. Thereâs a look of struggle on her face. âDAMMIT! Theyâre making me into their Sex Slave. I wanna pay them backâŠbut I want them to Fuck my Brains out, too.â Shego begins to bury her face between Kimâs legs. Kim motions for Ron to come over to her. âCome on, Ron. I want what you gave to Shego.â He grins at her and walks over, as Kim opens her mouth for his Cock. She takes it in, and works her tongue all around his Penis. She isnât able to Deep Throat his meat, but she makes up for it with her tongue work. Shego is licking Kim like a Popsicle, going all around and inside of Kimâs Pussy. Then suddenly, Shego wraps her arms around Kimâs thighs, really pushing herself deeper into her. Kim puts her hand on Shegoâs head, sending her deeper as she moans with pleasure. She didnât expect Shego to be so into it. âOh, man! Her tongue really in there. She mustâve practiced with Adrena Lynn or something to get this good.â Kim keeps up her work on Ronâs Manhood and not after long, heâs back hard. Shego looks up, and sees his Erect Dick. Kim sees Shego eyeing Ronâs Cock and smiles. âRon, I think Shego wants to get fucked. Right, Shego?â And what comes next is something no one would ever expect. Shego smiles, lovingly, and her eyes light up like a Christmas tree. âYes. I want Ronâs Cock in me.â Kim decides to play with Shego a little, since sheâs helpless. âWhat was that, Shego?â She starts to get desperate. âI WANT RONâS COCK IN ME!!!â
Ron develops a smug smirk as he begins to climb onto the Bed. He grabs his Cock and slowly dives in between her lips, putting himself deep inside Shego, who moans in pure pleasure. âOH GOD, YEEEEAAAAHHHH!!!!!!!â Ron begins pumping in and out of her. Shego is wearing a huge grin, when she realizes Kimâs dripping pussy is still in front of her. So she goes to work on it. Kim puts her hand back on Shegoâs head, pushing her deeper, as she uses the other hand to Rub on her Breasts. Ron is in full swing, pounding Shegoâs Pussy much like he did that day under Middleton High. Shego is in Heaven. She closes her eyes and delves even deeper into Kim, who looks ready to climax any second. âOh, God! Sheâs so goodâŠI think Iâm gonnaâŠâ Ron also looks ready to blow. âMe too, KPâŠIâm gonnaâŠâ They both hit their Orgasm at the same time. Ron lets loose another load, this time in Shegoâs pussy. Both Kim & Ron look out of breath, but Shego just looks frustrated, as she looks up at the two. âWaitâŠno, you canât do this. You canât leave me like this. I havenât had my Orgasm yet!â Kim rolls over and out of the bed. âDonât worry, Shego. We wouldnât dare think about leaving you unpleased.â
Kim walks over to Shegoâs Dresser Drawer. Shego begins to wonder what she has planned, but those thoughts are tossed to the side as Ron takes his Cock out of her and lies down on her bed. âI figure that itâs your turn to ride, Babe.â Shego smiles nervously, wanting more of Ron. The Immobilization Rayâs effects are still allowing minimum movement, as Shego climbs on top of his Cock. âYouâre about to get the best ride of your life, Stoppable.â She slips down onto his Penis and begins to grind herself on him. It doesnât take long for her to get into full gear. âOH GOD, THATâS IT!! HARDER!!! YES!!!â The bedsprings are squeaking loudly and the bed is shaking wildly. Shego is lost in her own ecstasy. So lost that she doesnât notice Kim coming up behind her, carrying a 2-way Dildo. She climbs onto the bed and grabs Shego, almost startling her. âWell, since Ron took the one hole, I can settle for the other.â
Shego immediately gets what she meant by that. âWaitâŠNO!â She tries to move, jump out of the way, do anything, but the Rayâs effects are still active. âOh, God! NOT AGAIN!â Kim inserts one end of the Dildo into her pussy, then slowly guides the other end into Shegoâs ass. Shego starts grimacing in pain as Kim pushes it in through her asshole. âAARGH!!! ITâS FUCKING TEARING ME APART!!!â Kim works the Dildo in and out of Shegoâs ass, and herself. Ron keeps pumping into her pussy, not slowing down a bit. Shego begins to enjoy it as she did last time. âYES!!! OH GOD, YES!!! DONâT STOP! DONâT STOP!!!â She begins to tremble all over from the pleasure, and starts drooling uncontrollably, feeling ready to climax right then & there. âYES!!! OH GOD YES!!!! FINALLY!!! IâM GONNAâŠIâM GONNAâŠAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!â She lets out a Huge Orgasm, screaming at the top of her lungs, and falls onto the bed besides Ron. Kim takes the dildo out of Shegoâs ass, and Ron takes his Cock out of her pussy. Shego lies there, pouring in sweat, breathing hard, unable to moveâŠbut extremely satisfied.
Kim gets up from the bed, and grins at Shego. âHope you enjoyed it as much as we did, Shego.â Shego grins at the two, out-of-breath. âYou know, you two really know how to give good Payback.â Ron smirks and begins to get dressed himself. âOh, this wasnât payback. This was to thank you for getting me & Kim together.â Suddenly, the sound of Helicopters can be heard coming from outside Drakkenâs lair. Kim finishes dressing and grabs the Immobilization Ray. âThatâs our Payback.â Shego looks over to her window, and can see FBI Choppers landing. The Agents all pile out of the Helicopters and raid Drakkenâs Lair. Both Kim and Ron are fully clothed now. Kim turns off the Rayâs effects on Shego, and tosses her Rope onto her. Shegoâs still unable to move much from the Wild Sex-a-thon. Kim smiles as she leaves out of her room. âEnjoy your stay in Federal Prison, Shego.â Ron follows her right out. âAnd donât drop the Soap, Girl!â
10 minutes laterâŠ
Both Dr. Drakken & Shego, now wearing her Robe, are handcuffed and tossed into an FBI Paddy Wagon. Drakken has a vengeful look on his face. âKIM POSSIBLE! YOU THINK YOUâRE ALL THAT, BUT YOâŠâ Shego cuts him off. âAW, SHUT THE HELL UP, DRAKKEN!!!â The Agents close the doors as the engine starts. Shego looks through the small barred windows at Kim & Ron. âIâll get you back, Princess. IâLL MAKE YOU PAY FOR MY ASS!!!â The Paddy Wagon pulls off as Ron looks at Kim. âWell, another Evil Villain put behind bars. And it was fun doing it, too.â Kim looks a little concerned as she looks at Ron. âI donât know, didnât go as smoothly as I thought it wouldâŠâ Her look then changes from Concerned to Seductive. ââŠmaybe we should get in some more âPracticeâ.â Kim walks off to the Helicopter that will give them a lift home. Ron follows behind, with only one thing to say about Kimâs offer. âBOO-YA!
The Yori Chapters
Deep inside a Maximum Security Super-Villain Prison rest many evil criminals who have more than threatened the worldâs safety & caused chaos. Thereâs Adrena Lynn, whoâs serving time for Extreme Fraud & Kidnapping, Senor Senior, for rigging the X Games, and Duff Killigan, for trying to clone Tiger Woods.
But deep down, in Solitary Confinement, sits the most dangerous of them allâŠShego. She sits in her cell, similar to the one Hannibal Lector had in âSilence of the Lambs.â On the walls are photos of her arch-nemesis Kim Possible, along with Ron Stoppable. The photos show them hanging out together, enjoying their time. Shego sits on her bed, wearing her prison issued jumpsuit. She stares at the photos on the wall, wearing a look of resentment and pent-up rage.
âI hope you enjoy your moment of heaven princess,â she says with a sinister sneer. âBecause when I get outâŠyour ass is gonna go through Hell! OW!â She jumps up and starts to rub her ass, revealing that sheâs been sitting on a bag of ice all this time. At least she was until the bag melted, and sheâs not happy about it as she yells out of her cell to the Guards. âDammit, MORE ICE!!!â
MeanwhileâŠ
Ron is packing his items from his locker into his backpack, with a huge grin on his face.
âSUMMER VACATION, RUFUS!!!â He yells to his naked mole rat friend. âNothing but fun, sun & Nacoâs by the ton!â
Rufus nods his head in anticipation. Ron finishes cleaning out his locker and closes up his backpack. He slings it over his back and makes a beeline for the door. âAnd you know what the best part is, buddy?â He says as he looks down at Rufus. âKim & Bonnie are at Cheer Camp, Mrs. Possible is overseas performing Brain Surgery, and Shegoâs locked up. Thereâs no way this can turn intoâŠâ
âSTOPPABLE-SAN!!!â
He hears his name said like that, and immediately traces the voice to Yori, his classmate when Ron was an exchange student at the Yamanouchi School. He turns to see her standing behind him, confirming his guess. âStoppable-San, I am in need of your assistance.â
Ron is a little shocked to see her. âYori! What are you doing here? Whatâs wrong?â
She walks up to him, stopping mere inches from his face. âThe Yamanouchi School has assigned me a mission. It is like a Final Exam at your school. If I am successful at this mission, I will have graduated to the rank of Ninja.â
Ron smiles, feeling happy for her. âThatâs great, Yori. But I donât understand why you need my help.â
âI am in need of your special skills, Stoppable-San.â She says. âFor my mission, is to defeat Lord Monkey Fist.â
Upon hearing his name, a cold shiver goes down Ronâs spine. He knows all about Lord Monkey Fist. Originally, they met when he was known as Monty Fiske, a world-renowned Archeologist. But he went psychotic with his obsession with Monkeys, to the point that he had surgery to augment his body so he could become more Monkey-like. Ron always considered Monkey Fist to be his Arch-Nemesis, especially since they both have master the art of Tai Shing Pek Kwar (a.k.a. Monkey Kung Fu). He looks at Yori, and comes to a decision. âAlrightâŠIâm ready to help out.â
She hugs him tightly, feeling gratitude. âThank you, Stoppable-San.â Ron smiles, welcoming her warm embrace. But he then pulls away suddenly.
âUm, YoriâŠIâm all for helping out, but how are supposed to get to Monkey Fist.â He asks. Yori smiles, remembering Ronâs naĂŻve-ness. âHave you forgotten Stoppable-San? The Yamanouchi School has graduates in high places.â
At that moment, a Helicopter appears out of nowhere and floats down beside the two, landing some feet away from them. There are two Helicopter pilots dressed as Ninjas at the controls. Ron rolls his eyes and smiles. âOh yeah, the ninja connection thing.â He says as he & Yori board the chopper. âHey, any chance we could swing by a Bueno Nacho on the way?â
âOh, Stoppable-San.â Yori says as she laughs at what she thinks is a joke. âYou and your American style jokes.â
30 Minutes LaterâŠ
Both Yori & Ron are flying off to Japan, towards the last known destination of Lord Monkey Fist. Itâs been a quiet flight, with Yori wearing a worried look on her face most of the trip. Ron decides to break the silence. âYori, is everything OK?â
She turns her head towards him. âI am OK, StoppableâŠI mean Ron-San. It is just my nervousness. I am afraid that I might not be as brave as you to face up to this challenge. I do not even know where to look for Monkey Fistâ Ron is surprised to hear her say that. Heâs been on a few adventures with her, and sheâs shown a stone cold confidence in her skills. Now, she seems scared. As Ron realizes what sheâs feeling, and idea pops into his head. âDonât worry Yori,â he says as he reaches into his pocket. âI know how to find out.â
He pulls out his Communicator from his pocket and activates it. âWade, Come in.â
Wadeâs face appears on the screen. âRon? Whatâs the problem?â
âI need you to find the location of Monkey Fist.â He says.
âMonkey Fist?â Wade responds. âBut there isnât a mission on him. Although I have been monitoring some strange activity from him. Itâll take a while, though. Should I get Kim back fromâŠ?â
Ron quickly cuts Wade off. âNO! UhâŠno need to. Me & Yori are handling the situation.â
Wade smirks at Ron. âOh, I get it. A little alone time with Ms. Ninja, so you canâŠâ
Ron immediately shuts off the Communicator, not wanting Yori to hear any more. He then quickly changes the subject. âYori, what exactly are we stopping Monkey Fist from doing?â
Yori turns to Ron and explains. âSensei has informed me that Monkey Fist is currently seeking the Chimpanzee Gem.â
âThe Chimpanzee Gem?â Ron asks.
âYes. It is an ancient & powerful artifact.â She replies. âIt can give the holder the power to have mental control over every species of Monkey in the world.â
Ronâs look changes to that of seriousness, and he clenches his fist in anger. âThat fiend! With that much control over all the Monkeys in the world, who knows what he could do? We have to stop him!â Yori smiles at Ron, then leans over and rests her head on his shoulder. Ron wants to move her away, but canât bring himself to do it. A part of his heart, a huge part of his heart, enjoys being with Yori, and enjoys the attention she gives him. He decides to rest himself, until they get to their destination.
2 Hours LaterâŠ
Ron & Yori have checked into the Tokyo Hilton. Ron called in Wade to deliver some Spy equipment that might be needed to assist Yori. He walks out of the bathroom, wearing a 3-piece suit and holding the Communicator in his hands.
âNice duds you got me, Wade.â Ron tells him.
âAnd theyâre not just for show.â Wade says. âThe Cufflinks are actually mini buzz saws, the Bow Tie can emit a powerful sneezing powder, andâŠâ
âLet me guess.â Ron says as he cuts him off. âWhen I click my heels together, my shoes become a phone?â
âActually, when you click your heels together, the shoes become C4 Explosives.â Wade answers. Ronâs eyes grow wide, and he stands with his feet wide apart, not wanting to risk anything. His attention is turned to the bathroom door, as he notices Yori stepping out wearing a traditional Japanese Kimono. Ron is stunned at her beauty, and finds that he canât take his eyes off of her.
âIs there something wrong with my outfit, Ron-San?â She asks.
âNO! No, no. Not at all.â Ron says nervously. âYouâŠlook beautiful.â
âThank you, Ron-San.â She says while blushing. Thereâs an awkward moment of silence as they stand there, gazing at each other like theyâre love sick puppies. After a few moments, Wade chimes in on the Communicator, breaking the silence.
âRon, I found the location of Monkey Fist.â He says. Ron raises his Communicator towards his face. âHeâs at the same Hotel youâre in, down at the Casino.â
â10-4, Wade.â Ron replies as he sends the Communicator offline. He then looks up at Yori. âTime for action.â
15 Minutes LaterâŠ
The Casino, where Wade located Monkey Fist, is packed with Tourists & Regulars. Some betting all they have on the games, others just content with looking on from a safe distance. Monkey Fist is sitting at a Blackjack Table, being dealt cards. Just as heâs about to check his hand, a gentleman joins him at the table.
âDeal me in, too.â The Gentleman says. Monkey Fist turns his head to see that itâs none other than Ron Stoppable whoâs sitting with him. Yori also joins in and sits beside Ron. Monkey Fist look turns to that of rage.
âThe other Monkey Kung Fu Master!â he says between his teeth.
Ron just smiles as he takes his cards in his hands. âActually, itâs Stoppable. Ron Stoppable.â He replies in his best Sean Connery voice.
âWhat are you doing here?â Monkey Fist demands.
âWe know of your foul plan, Monkey Fist.â Yori responds. âAnd we are here to ensure that you will never get your hands on the Chimpanzee Gem.â
Monkey Fist laughs at the two, not really considering them a threat. The Card Dealer offers another card to Monkey Fist, who denies it. The Dealer then offers to Ron, who checks his hand to see a 10 and an 8, equaling 18.
âHit me.â He says. The dealer puts a 3 down on Ronâs hand. He signals to stay. The Dealer shows his hand having a 20. Monkey Fist then shows his hand, revealing 19. Leaving Ron the winner as he reveals his hand as having 21.
âWhoa, I never thought it would actually work.â Ron says, with a look of shock. âIâve always seen it in the movies andâŠâ Monkey Fist becomes enraged and flips over the Blackjack table in a rage.
âEnough of these Foolish Games!â He sneers. âMonkey Ninjas, ATTACK!!!â
As Monkey Fist yells out his order, various people in the Casino are revealed for their true selves, Monkey Ninjas. Even the Blackjack Dealer takes off his outfit to reveal heâs a Monkey Ninja. Ron & Yori find themselves surrounded by a dozens of them, but they donât back down. They get into their fighting stances as the Monkey Ninjas leap & attack. Everyone in the Casino panics and runs out as the fight begins. Yori is more than holding her own against them. Even Ron is fighting back with success, as his knowledge of Monkey Kung Fu shows a little. Monkey Fist stands back and lets the fight rage on, picking his spot to strike. After a moment, he leaps into action and blindsides Yori with a Flying Kick, sending her crashing into a Roulette Wheel. Ron sees the attack and quickly breaks away from his battle.
âYORI!!!â He cries out. Monkey Fist slowly stalks towards her when Ron steps in front of him, blocking his path. âYou keep your hands off of her!â
Ron leaps at Monkey Fist with a flurry of palm strikes, all of which Monkey Fist barely is able to block. Monkey Fist tries to mount a defense, but finds every one of his strikes reversed and countered. Ron then connects with a palm strike that sends Monkey Fist stumbling back, holding his chest. Before Monkey Fist can recover, Ron follows up with a Butterfly Kick that sends him through the Glass Door Entrance to the Casino. Monkey Fist struggles to get to his feet, still holding his chest in pain.
âMONKEY NINJAS, RETREAT!!!â He yells out, as he makes his escape. The Monkey Ninjas follow after their lord. Ron thinks about chasing after them, but remembers Yori. He picks her up from the debris and carries her over to the elevator, so they can get back to their room for her to recover.
3 Hours LaterâŠ
Back at the hotel room, all of the furniture has been cleared from the center of the room to develop a makeshift dojo. Ron & Yori are in the middle of an intense sparring session, trading & blocking each otherâs attacks at a furious pace. Yori attacks with a roundhouse kick, which Ron evades flawlessly. He comes back and lunges at her with a flying spin kick, but she counters by flipping over him and nailing him with a kick to the face. Ron falls on his back, stunned & exhausted.
âYori,â he says, out of breath. âCan weâŠtake a break? Weâve been goingâŠfor 3 hours.â
Yori stands with his back towards him, shaking in aggravation. âI am sorry, Ron-San. I am justâŠvery frustrated.â
Frustrated. Thatâs a word would wake Ron up in the middle of the night. Itâs that word where it all began. Shego felt frustrated, and Ron lost his virginity. Bonnie felt frustrated, and Ron banged her at Camp Wannaweep. Even Kim & her mother felt frustrated when he was around, and it led to wild sex. Now Ron is having a frightening, yet exciting feeling of dĂ©jĂ vu.
âOh no, not Yori.â He thinks. âI mean, yes Yori butâŠwhat would Kim say? I canât. I canât now. I gotta do something.â
Ron gets up and walks over to Yori. âHey, maybe we should try some of that Herbal Tea Master Sensei uses.â Ron suggests nervously. It doesnât help as Yori still has that feeling of frustration.
She turns to look at Ron. âI feel I cannot fight up to my potential, Ron-San.â She says. âIt is as ifâŠI have nothing to fight for.â
Ron puts both of his hands on her shoulders and looks her in the eyes. âYou have plenty to fight for, Yori.â Ron replies. âHonor, Justice, even Love. You canâŠâ
Ron catches himself and realizes what he just said. In the back of his mind he hopes that Yori didnât pay attention to what he said, but those hopes are dashed when Yori looks up at him, seductively. Before Ron can even blink, Yori leans forward and kisses him deeply on the lips. She pulls him closer to her, the kiss rising in intensity with each passing second. After a minute, Ron finally is able to break free.
âWAIT! YORI!!â He yells, out of breath. âWeâŠwe canât. I meanâŠâ
âI need to feel love, Ron-San.â She says as she begins to take off her gloves. âIt will be my inspiration for when I fight Monkey Fist. I need you, Ron Stoppable-San.â
She grabs the top half of Ronâs Ninja outfit, and rips it open, exposing his chest. She then rips open her own top to show a pink lace bra holding back her round, succulent breasts. She then quickly smothers Ron lips with hers, moving her tongue inside his mouth. Ron reaches out and grabs her breasts. He slips his hand under her bra cup and plays with them, squeezing them gently, yet firmly. His eyes then shoot open, as he realizes what heâs doing.
âOh, manâŠI canât do thisâŠbut I donât wanna stop.â He thinks. âTheyâre so soft. Almost softer than KimâsâŠâ
He squeezes them a little harder, causing Yori break the kiss and moan out loud. She then looks at Ron with loving eyes.
âIt is time that I give you pleasure, Ron-San.â She says, as she slowly leads him down to the floor. She lies him down before slowly tugging down on his pants, revealing his already hard Cock. Sheâs a little more than shocked by the size of it. âYou really must be the Chosen One.â She says with a smile.
Ron laughs nervously as Yori grips his member with both hands. âIt will be my honor to pleasure you with my mouth.â She says, before inserting his Cock into her mouth. She wraps her lips around his shaft and slowly works her tongue around the head. Ron almost loses it right there, as his eyes almost roll back into his head.
âFor the love of Nacos, how did she get so good?!â He screams in his mind. âHer lips feel like velvet. Iâm sorry, Kim. But this feels so good.â
Yori bobs her head up & down on his shaft, as he takes her hand and begins to massage his balls. She closes her eyes and takes in all of Ronâs manhood, not quite deep throating it, but getting real close. Ron clenches his fist, as he feels himself getting close to his limit. Yori is now twisting her head as she bobs up & down, making Ron feel like his Dick is in a corkscrew. He looks ready to blow.
âUhâŠYori?â He blurts out. âIâm think Iâm gonnaâŠâ
He feels his load about to shoot out when, in the blink of an eye, Yori comes off of his Cock and moves her head out of the way. A split second later, Ron blasts his load into the air. After a moment, he looks at Yori with a grin.
âI forgotâŠNinja reflexes.â He says.
Yori grins back as she slowly takes off the bottom to her Ninja outfit. âAs they say in your country Ron-San, you have seen nothing yet.â
As she takes off the rest of her outfit, Ron gets a confused look on his face. âActually Yori, I think you mean âYou havenât seen noâŠââ Heâs cut off when he feels the head of his Cock rub against her vaginal lips. Sheâs already straddled him and is about to insert his Dick.
âPlease forgive me, Kim.â He thinks. âBut I just canât bring myself to stop her.â
He can feel his manhood pierce between her lips and into the walls of her wet pussy. Yori sets herself down on his Cock, then begins to bounce her ass up & down on it. She leans in and wraps her arms around Ron, as he grimaces.
âMan, sheâs so tight.â He thinks, as he begins to pound her pussy. The sound of their skin smacking together fills the entire room. Ron places his hands on her hips to guide her movements. Yori begins to bite her lips.
âOh, Ron-San! Yes! You ARE the chosen one!â She yells as he shoves his Cock deep with in her. She begins to bounce in sync with his strokes, sending his Dick all the way into her pussy. Ron grits his teeth, as he feel himself on the verge again. Yori is also close to her climax.
âOH, RON-SAN!!!â She screams as she pulls herself off of his Cock. Not a moment later, Ron shoots out cum all over her bare back. Yori lays on top of Ron, her frustration & doubt all but a memory now. She looks down and gently kisses Ron on the lips, then smiles warmly.
âThank you, Ron-San.â She says, âYou have given me great inspiration.â
The Next DayâŠ
Ron is standing at the Airport Terminal, wearing his regular clothes. He has the Communicator in his hand, and Wadeâs face is on the screen.
âSo Monkey Fist is behind bars?â Wade asks.
âYep.â Ron replies. âWe took him down! With our mad Kung Fu skills, Monkey Fist had no chance.â
Wade has a look of non-belief on his face. âYori did most of the work, didnât she?â
Ron lowers his head, knowing that he canât hide it from Wade now. âYeah.â He then shuts off the Communicator as he sees Yori walking towards him. She gives him a kiss on the cheek and smiles.
âThank you again for your help, Ron-San.â She says. âI would not have been able to defeat Monkey Fist without you.â She then leans in close to Ron. âAnd I will not inform Kim Possible about our âTrainingâ methods.â This brings a blushing smile to Ronâs face. Suddenly, a Ninja appears out of nowhere and hands Ron a plane ticket.
âFirst Class! Spankinâ!â He says with a grin. âHey, you think you could use some of that Ninjitsu to help me with my bags?â
He points to a spot behind him, where about a dozen suitcases lay on the ground. Yori giggles at Ron. âOh Ron-San, always with the American-style jokes.â She says. âNaturally, it will beâŠâ
Ron cuts her off before she can finish. âI know. It will be my honor to carry my own bags.â
The Monique Chapters
âReadyâŠsetâŠGO!!!â
Kim clicks on her stopwatch, as Ron & Monique proceed to munch down a Grande Sized order of Nacos. The three are at the Bueno Nacho, and Ron has yet again challenged Monique to see who can scarf them down the fastest. Ron is in the lead, but after a few more bites, he begins to feel stuffed. Monique, however, is stuffing them down like thereâs no tomorrow. Ron tries to down some more, but itâs too late. Monique wins easily.
âAnd time.â Kim says as she clicks her stopwatch again. âLooks like Moniqueâs the champion again.â She holds Moniqueâs arm high in victory. âIâm surprised you still got it.â Kim says.
âOh please.â Monique says. âEven with my schedule, Iâll always have time to school Ron.â
âYeah, you got lucky this time.â Ron cuts in. âAndâŠthe other 12 times. But NEXT TIMEâŠâ
âSo, still working double shifts at Club Banana?â Kim asks.
âYeah.â Monique answers. âBut I got some vacation time coming up, and Iâm trying to do anything I can to not think about that place.â Just then, a familiar beep is heard coming from Kimâs pocket. She reaches in and pulls out her Kimmunicator to see Wade on the screen.
âWhatâs the Sitch?â Kim asks.
âActually, we got two.â Wade tells Kim. âDNAmy is rumored to have been testing on animals in the Amazon, and Dr. Dementor has threatened to release his mutated Weiner Dogs upon all of Germany if his ransom demands arenât met.â Kim puts her hand on her chin, as she thinks about the situation.
âWell, Iâll handle Dementor.â She says. âAnd if I catch a quick rideâŠâ
âDonât sweat it, KP.â Ron interrupts. âI can handle DNAmy on the solo tip.â Kim gives him a look of non-belief. âWhat? I can!â He says in his defense. âJust as long as she doesnât have Monkeys. No monkeys. Right, Wade?â
âNo monkeys, Ron.â Wade replies.
âI can tag along, too.â Monique says. Kim turns her attention to her.
âAre you sure, Monique?â Kim asks.
âHey, like I said, ANYTHING to get my mind off of Club Banana.â Monique says.
Kim smiles, feeling a little better than Monique will be going with Ron. âThen I guess weâre set.â She says. âWade, weâre on our way.â
An Hour LaterâŠ
Kim is on a Mini-Jet flying over what looks to be Germanyâs wooded area. Sheâs strapping on her skydiving equipment as it looks like she as to jump out of the Jet to reach her location. As she hooks on her parachute, she walks over to the pilot of the Jet. He looks to be a military man, and has a nametag on him that reads âJ. Richâ. She puts her hand on his shoulder and smiles.
âThanks for giving me a lift, Jay.â she says.
âNo problem.â Jay replies. âItâs the least I could do since you helped us save the World Series from being cancelled.â
âNo big.â She says. âAll I did was make sure the president got to the game on time to throw the first pitch.â She walks back towards the rear of the Jet and slides open the door. After making sure her gear is fastened on tightly, she leaps out of the Jet and begins to plummet downward to the earth. After counting to herself to 10, she pulls the cord on the parachute. The chute deploys, and Kim gently glides down to the ground. Once she lands, she notices that her surroundings have more of a Jungle feel. She takes out her Kimmunicator and uses itâs scanning function. After a moment, the results show that she is in The Amazon.
âWhat? Iâm in the Amazon?â She says. Her look begins to change to a frightened one. âThenâŠthat means that Monique & Ron areâŠâ
MeanwhileâŠ
Monique & Ron reach the shore after Windsurfing from a cruise ship they hitched a ride from. Ron looks at his surroundings.
âIs it me, or does the Amazon now have a more woody feel to it?â Ron asks.
âThis doesnât look like the Amazon at all.â Monique answers. Ron pulls out the GPS system Wade gave to him and checks his coordinates. After a moment, he gets the answer.
âWeâreâŠweâre in Germany.â Ronâs face turns to a look of shock. âBut this is where Kimâs supposed to be. That means weâŠâ
He looks up at a nearby cliff and sees a stone castle resting on top. He immediately recognizes it as Dr. Dementorâs Castle Laboratory. âOK, this is the last time I get directions from an old Sea Captain.â Ron says.
âMaybe we should check out this Dementorâs Lab anyway.â Monique says.
âYeah.â Ron agrees. âBesides, itâll be a while for even Wade to get some transportation out here.â
A Few Minutes LaterâŠ
The two reach the massive wooden door thatâs the entrance to his lair. Ron decides to show off his bravery for Monique. âOK, we kick down the door, kick some bad guy butt, then go back to kicking it at the Bueno Nacho.â
âExcept, I donât know any Kung Fu like Kim.â Monique says.
âDonât worry.â Ron tells her. âYouâre with the Ron Man. A Master of Monkey Kung Fu. A Warrior Hero. I got this.â
Ron steps back into his Monkey stance, right before unleashing a devastating thrust kickâŠthat does nothing to the door. He grabs his foot and hops around, yelling in pain as Monique just shakes her head. Suddenly, the door starts to creak, and it slowly comes crashing to the ground. Ron stops hopping in pain, and stands triumphant.
âBOOYA!!!â He yells as he walks into the lair, with Monique following closely behind. They donât have to walk far though, as Dr. Dementor comes out from a dark corner to greet them.
âWhat is the meaning of THIS?â He yells. âWhat? The Nincompoop? What are you doing here?â
Ron looks a little upset by that comment. âYou know, itâs one thing to call a guy a buffoon. But a Nincompoop?â Monique elbows Ron in the arm, getting him back focused. âOh yeah.â He says, getting back on the subject. âWeâre here to stop your mad plan for ransom, Dementor.â
Dr. Dementor just laughs at their threat. âAnd how will you do that, little man.â He says. âYou do not even have your companion with you, the Kim Possible.â
Ron just smiles, confident in his skills. âDonât need KP to kick your demented butt!â He charges at Dementor, ready to tear him apart with his Monkey Kung Fu, but Dementor just smirks and snaps his fingers, which signals dozens of his henchmen to surround him and block off Ron. The Henchmen all have a mutant Dachshund on a lease, which causes Ron to stop in his tracks.
âSo, what were you saying about kicking my BUTT?â Dementor asks. Ron smiles nervously and backs up towards the entrance by Monique.
âUm, those arenât regular Weiner Dogs, are they?â Monique asks.
âNot really, and we should run now.â Answers Ron, as she grabs Moniqueâs hand & dashes out of the Castle. The Henchmen are about to give chase when Dementor stops him.
âSTOP!!!â He yells. âWe cannot give chase, I havenât given the order.â He then pulls out his patented âDramatic Villain Lightâ and shines it under his face. âGET THEM!!!â
Ron & Monique are scrambling through the forests, trying to escape Dementorâs forces. They can hear the dogs barking and they pick up their speed. After a few minutes, Ron stops and looks back, trying to see if he can spot his pursuers. Monique stops when she sees Ron not running with her.
âRon, what are you doing?!â She whispers.
âI think we lost them.â Ron whispers back. âWe gotta make our way back to the clearing. Itâs this wayâŠor is it this way?â Ron gets mixed up and confused about which way they came from.
âYou mean you donât remember where camp is?â She yells silently at him.
âDonât worry.â Ron says. âI know itâs around here someâŠâ Heâs not able to finish his sentence as heâs sent plummeting off of a cliff with Monique, into the darkness below.
Monique lands in a puddle, a bit bruised but OK. She gets up to show that her clothes are soaked, though. She looks up, worried about where Ron could have fell.
âRON?â She yells for him. âARE YOU OK?â
âWAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â
The sound of branches snapping fills the air. A moment later, Ron falls & stops right beside Monique, hanging upside down from a tree, with his pants all but hanging off of him. âUh, yeah. Iâm cool.â
Monique walks over and begins to untangle Ron from the branches. She gets him down and unsnags his pants from the tree. They pull hard and the pants end up flying into the same puddle Monique landed in. Completely wet, Ron decides to just put them on his shoulder and wait for them to dry. They both begin to walk towards a clearing in the woods. As they walk, Ronâs eyes gaze over and notice Moniqueâs wet T-ShirtâŠwithout a bra underneath. He canât help but to stare at her breasts, which are almost an identical copy to Kimâs.
âOh, man,â Ron thinks. âWhy did her shirt have to get wet? I can even see her nipples getting hard.â
And at that moment, Ronâs Cock also starts to get hard. Since heâs now only wearing boxers, Ron walks with his hands low, cupping his groin trying to hide the bulge. They reach the clearing and decide to set up a new camp here. Ron reaches into his pants that heâs carrying over his shoulder and pulls out a tablet. He tosses it in the middle of a clearing. Upon contact, the tablet expands into a two-person tent.
âWadeâs compactable camping equipment.â Ron says. âNever leave home without it.â He pulls out two more capsules from his pocket before giving one to Monique. He tosses his on the ground, and it expands into a Sleeping Bag. Monique does the same.
âWe better get some sleep here.â Ron says. âDementor must think weâre goners from that fall. Wade can get Kim to pick us up tomorrow.â
âYeah,â Monique agrees nervously. âWe should get some sleep.â
They both grab their Sleeping Bags and climb into the tent. Ron canât help but notice that Moniqueâs scared about the situation. As they slide into their bags, Ron tries to comfort her.
âDonât worry about this, Monique.â Ron tells her. âMe & KP have been through much worse than this.â
âYouâŠyou have?â She asks.
âDozens of times.â He replies. âThe face offs with Drakken & Shego, I could tell you stories.â
He starts to, but then decides against it. He doesnât want to think about Shego & the times heâs spent with her, especially in this situation. Not wanting to pitch his own tent inside of his Sleeping Bag, he changes the subject. âUhâŠhave you seen the new jeans Club Bananaâs coming out with?â
âRon, I gotta tell you something.â Monique says as she gently puts her hand on top of his. âIâŠI donât know if weâll make it through tonight. AndâŠI donât wanna die a virgin.â
Ronâs look instantly changes to that of horror. The one thing he was trying to avoid is staring him right in the face. He sits there in shock, but quickly snaps out of it when he notices Monique unzipping his Sleeping Bag.
âWaitâŠMonique!â Ron says. âWeâre in the woods. We canâtâŠâ
âI donât care, Ron.â She says. âBonnie told me about you & her at Camp Wannaweep.â
âGreat!â Ron thinks to himself. âBonnie makes me promise to keep it a secret, and she blabs to all her girlfriends.â
His thoughts are interrupted as he feels Monique sliding her hands down his boxers, and gripping his Cock. âYou know you want to, boy.â She says. âBecause little Ron is standing at attention.â
Ron blushes at that comment, but still remains nervous. âMonique, we canât.â He says firmly, trying to deter her. âThisâŠthis will ruin our friendship.â
She just smiles and leans in closer to him. âSo Iâm guessing you havenât heard of âFriends with Benefits.ââ
Ron has a confused look. âFriends with Benefits? What does that mean.â
Moniqueâs grin turns into a seductive one. âLet me show you, Ron.â
She turns her attention to his Cock, which sheâs been stroking for most of the conversation and is rock hard. She moves in close and runs her tongue around the head. Ron eyes nearly roll into the back of his head.
âOh, crapâŠtoo late!â Ron thinks.
Monique teases Ronâs member, running her tongue all around the shaft, and even licking his balls. Ron grits his teeth in pleasure.
âDamnâŠhowâd you get so good?â Ron asks.
âKim lets me use her Dildo while sheâs off at her âCheerleader Getawaysâ.â She answers, still firmly gripping his Cock. She finally stops the teasing and takes his Dick in her mouth, wrapping her soft lips halfway down around the shaft. She pulls back, and works her tongue to make Ronâs rod smoother on the way down.
âMustâveâŠhad a lot of practice.â Ron says, his voice cracking. He can barely get the words from his mouth.
Monique doesnât answer. Instead she brings her head lower onto his shaft, tightening her lips as she takes more than half of his manhood into her mouth. As she brings her head back, Ron feels himself getting closer to his limit. Monique closes her eyes as she continues with a steady motion. She can feel her panties getting wet just from sucking him off, and she moves her hand slowly down into her panties and rubs her clit. Ronâs eyes wander downward to see her hand.
âOh, man.â Ron thinks. âHer ass, itâs so round. Itâs even bigger than Kimâs. I canât help myself.â
Ron slowly moves his hand along with Moniqueâs. He spreads her legs wide open and begins to finger her throbbing box. Monique responds with a gasp, then a muffled moan. Her tongue wraps all around the head of his Cock, as his fingers delve deeper into her love box with every thrust. Finally, she removes his Cock from her mouth, wanting more than just his fingers.
âOh, Ron!â She yells. âI want it, baby. FMN!â
Ron stops his fingering and looks at Monique. âFMN?â
She grabs him by the collar and pulls him close; much like Bonnie did Ron their first time. âFuckâŠMeâŠNOW!!!â She orders.
Thereâs some hesitation, as Ron thinks about Kim and her feelings. But his thoughts also turn towards Shego, Bonnie & even Yori, and he decides itâs useless to try to fight now. He leans in close and locks his lips with Moniqueâs, keeping them there for more than a few moments. He lets his hands roam under her wet shirt, as he caresses her breasts. Monique breaks the kiss as she gets down on all fours, and pokes her inviting ass in the air for Ron to take. He slowly pulls down her panties to reveal her luscious ass in all of its glory. Ron grabs his rod and begins to guide it within her love walls. He inserts his Cock, and pushes himself all the way in, enjoying the warmth of her pussy. Monique bites her lip in pleasure.
âOH, YEAH!!!â She yells out.
Ron pulls himself back, then begins to stroke his member in & out of her pussy, going slow so to not climax too soon. He leans in and grabs hold of her breasts again, rubbing and fondling them as he keeps his steady strokes. Monique is yelling for more.
âOh god, Ron. Fuck me faster!â She tells him. âDonât hold back, boy! FUCK ME!â
âWhoa! She wants it more than Shego did!â Ron thinks to himself. âWell Stoppable, gotta give her what she wants.â
Ron begins to speed up his strokes, and the sound of flesh slapping against flesh becomes louder & louder. He lets go of her breasts and grabs hold of her hips, guiding his strokes as he penetrates deeper & deeper into her. Monique grabs her Sleeping Bag and clenches it tight.
âOH GOD, YEAH!!!â She screams. âYouâre so big, Ron!â
Ron is grimacing from Moniqueâs tight pussy, but heâs still pounding it mercilessly. âMoniqueâŠtell meâŠwhoâs the man.â Ron says, feeling cocky about having Monique in this position. âWHO THE MAN, MONIQUE??â
âYOU ARE, RON!!!â She screams out. âYOUâRE THE MAN!!! YOUâRE THEâŠTHEâŠâ
Sheâs not able to get the rest out, as she feels a tingling sensation all over her body. Ron feels it to, and pulls out not a moment too soon, as he shoots his cum all over Moniqueâs ass. Monique doesnât even notice, as sheâs busy basking in the glow of her first orgasm. Ron falls back on his Sleeping Bag, looking exhausted.
âCanât moveâŠso tiredâŠmust sleep.â Ron says, out of breath.
He closes his eyes, only to open them a moment later when he feels Moniqueâs lips on his, and her tongue entering his mouth. She Frenches him for almost a minute before breaking the kiss.
âGood night, Ron Man.â She says with a seductive grin, as they both drift off to sleep.
The Next MorningâŠ
Ron is sleeping peacefully in his Sleeping Bag before heâs awakened by the sound of dogs barking. Monique sits up also, wide-awake from the noise. Ron shushes Monique, as he can hear Prof. Dementorâs voice off in the distance.
âSearch around here. Their bodies have to be here somewhere.â They hear him command.
Ron slowly puts his pants back on, then his shoes. He remains in the tent, waiting for the right moment. He can hear them coming closer, and after a moment of waiting, he leaps out & strikes.
âHWUUUAAAAAAAHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â
Ron leaps at Dementor with a flying kickâŠonly to be grabbed by his henchmen just inches away from striking him. Dementor grins at him smugly as he approaches him.
âSo it seems you have survived the fall.â Dementor says. âBut letâs see if you SURVIVE MY TORTUROUS GIFT SHOP!!!â
âNO! NOT THE GIFT SHOP!!!â Ron yells.
Monique peeks her head from out of the tent and sees Ron being held captive. She turns her attention to Dementor, as she recognizes the coat heâs wearing.
âThatâs a Smarty Mart jacket.â She says to herself. âThat means it has the broken seam.â
She looks at the coat, scanning it for a loose piece of thread. She finally finds it in the shoulder. âThere it is!â
She pops out of the tent and leaps at Dementor, grabbing the loose thread and yanking it forcefully. After a second, Dementorâs coat unravels into a load of thread, exposing his bare chestâŠwell, except for the Girdle that heâs wearing. His henchmen are stunned to see this, which allows Ron to grab them by the back of their heads, and crack their heads together. They fall to the ground unconscious. Dementor tries to cover himself up, ends up getting a flying kick to his face, which KOâs him.
âBOOYA!!! Good guys win again.â Ron cheers. But his celebration is interrupted as his Communicator goes off. He pulls it off to see Wade on the screen.
âRON!!! Thank god youâre alive.â He says. âKimâs on her way to pick you up. Just hide out from Prof. Dementor andâŠâ
âChill, Wade.â Ron tells him. âDementor is done for. Took him out, Ron-Style.â
âWhat? Really?â Wade says in shocked. âWell, uhâŠgood work. Kim should be there in a few.â
Wade signs off, just as a helicopter flies over the area. It hovers down to the ground as Kim jumps out. Ron has a nervous look on his face. He doesnât know if Monique will keep this night a secret or not. Monique then leans in and gives him some words of reassurance.
âDonât worry.â She tells him. âWhat happened last night is just between you & me.â
She gives him a playful slap on his rear before running off to greet Kim. Ron just stands there and sighs, unable to even believe all thatâs happened to him so far.
âOâŠK. At least this canât get any weirder.â He says.
MeanwhileâŠ
Back at the Maximum Security Super-Villain Prison, a guard is walking down a long hallway. Itâs late at night, and heâs delivering a prisoner his food. He stops in front of a cell with a glass wallâŠShegoâs cell.
âCâmon, Shego. Time for your dinnerâ The Guard tells her.
Shego turns around and stares at the Guard with seductive eyes. âYe-I was thinking of having something different off the menu.â She says. âSomething likeâŠtube steak.â
She licks her lips and walks closer to the glass wall of the cell. The Guard smiles, and presses a button on the side of the cell to open a hidden door in the glass wall. He walks in, and drops the food tray on the floor. Shego approaches him and begins to run her hand over his chest. She reaches lower, until sheâs inside of his pants. The Guard grins, expecting to get lucky. Heâs wrong however, as Shego fiercely clenches his balls, causing him to wince and cry out in pain. She then delivers a head butt that sends him stumbling back. Finally, she connects with a spin kick and finally KOâs him. He falls to the floor and lays there, motionless, as Shego begins to strip him of his clothes. She puts them on herself and grabs his ID card. Before she leaves her cell to make her escape, she looks back at her wall. More specifically, a photo of Ron Stoppable & Kim Possible together.
âHope youâve enjoyed your dream part of life, Princess.â She says. âBecause your nightmare is about to begin.â
The Killer Bebe Chapters
âOH GOD, RON!!!â
Ron thrusts his Cock in & out of Bonnie. He has her sitting on a workbench with her legs wrapped around his. Ronâs pants & boxers are down to his knees, and Bonnieâs panties are dangling around her ankle. As he continues to pound her pussy, Bonnie becomes louder with her screams.
âYES, FUCK ME RON!!!â
Ron gives her a nervous look. âCool it, Bonnie.â He whispers. âNo oneâs supposed to know weâre in here, remember?â
âSorry, Ron.â She says, blushing. She then shoots her head forward and kiss him deeply, as her screams are muffled by Ronâs mouth. After a few moments, both of their bodies start to tremble. Ron quickly pulls out of her, so not to get her pregnant, and lets his load fly. He sprays it all over the front of her cheerleader mini-skirt, which doesnât make Bonnie happy.
âDammit, Ron!â she yells. âI got practice in like 5 minutes. Now I gotta spend time in the bathroom rubbing this out.â
âIâm sorry, Bonnie.â He says. âThis is the first time weâve done it in the Janitorâs closet. I panicked!â
âWell, learn not to panic next time!â She stands up and pulls her panties back up under her skirt. As she makes her way out of the closet, she gives Ron a long wet kiss on the lips. âIâll see you later, Big Ron.â
She walks out of the closet, leaving Ron by himself. He pulls up his boxers & pants and straightens himself out, before also walking out. Down the hall he can see Rufus waiting on top of his locker. He walks over to apologize to him.
âSorry, Buddy.â Ron says. âBut I ran into Bonnie andâŠâ Rufus interrupts and yells at Ron, in Mole Rat Language. âHey, I couldnât help it. She one of the head cheerleaders. And I know why they call her that now.â He leans his head against his locker. âMan, with Bonnie, Yori, Monique, Kim & Kimâs Mom after meâŠI need a vacation! And since Summer Vacation starts tomorrow, Iâll never be able to escape them unlessâŠâ
His eyes widen and a grin comes across his face. âThatâs it! VACATION!!!â he yells out. âI can cruise to the beach, catch some waves, check out a Bueno Nacho in another stateâŠand no Sex-a-thons to take up my time.â He opens up his locker and pulls out his communicator along with a flyer for a Video Game Tournament in Miami Beach. He punches in Wadeâs number and waits a moment, before Wade appears on the screen.
âHey, Ron. Whatâs the Sitch?â Wade asks.
âNo Sitch this time, Wade.â Ron says. âI wanna invite you on a trip, to Miami Beach. We can get into that Video Game Tournament going on down there.â
âMiami Beach? How can you afford that?â Wade says.
âOh, I still have some of my royalties from the Naco.â Ron tells him. âSo, you in?â
Wade takes a second to think about it, then gives him his answer. âOKâŠsure, Iâm in. I could actually use a break from this computer.â
âThatâs great!â Ron says excitedly. âIâll get Felix to come along also. This is gonna be one slamminâ vacation!â
MeanwhileâŠ
Deep within the Congo Jungle, one of the Killer Bebe bots, Bebe 1, lay on the ground, de-activated. But then, a spark shoots from the neck, then another one. After a few moments, her eyes begin to glow a sinister bright red. Bebe 1 picks herself up off the ground and begins to recalibrate her systems.
âSearchingâŠestablishing connection with Hive Queenâs brainâŠconnection established.â
Bebe 1 starts scanning the area, searching for other Bebes. She finds three more lying nearby, but scattered in pieces. As she walks over to them, she emits an electronic signal thatâs received by the others. Slowly, their parts start to shake & vibrate, then reassemble themselves. After a minute, the Bebes become fully assembled.
âAccessing Queen Bonnieâs consciousness.â Bebe 1 raises her head slightly and begins to access the mind link she still has with Bonnie. 2 minutes later, she lowers her head. âPrimary Objective changed. Must acquire King for the hive.â Bebe 1 says.
âYes. Files show Ron Stoppable is most desirable by Queen Bonnie.â Bebe 2 adds.
âWe must sample Ron Stoppable to see if heâs suitable for our Queen.â Bebe 3 says.
âThen it is agreed.â Bebe 1 tells them. âWe must have intercourse with Ron Stoppable and sample his sperm to see if his is fit for our Queen.â
The four Bebes then turn and head towards the sea with a single objective in mind. âMust Fuck Ron Stoppable.â They disappear in a cloud of dust, using their super-speed to cross the ocean to get to Ron.
One Day Later, in MiamiâŠ
At the Airport, a plane just lands on the runway. It rolls to a stop, and some time later, the door opens as steps are rolled up to it. The first one off the plane is Ron, whoâs wearing a Hawaiian shirt, shorts, flip-flops and shades.
âAH, BOOYA!!!â He yells out. âThis is it, buddy. Miami Beach. Nothing but Sun & Fun.â He walks down the stairs to the bottom. A moment later, Felix comes out of the plane hovering in his wheelchair.
âAnd the Video Game Championships of the East Coast.â He adds as he hovers down beside Ron.
âRight you are, Felix.â Ron says. âHey, whereâs Wade? He said heâd meet us here.â
âAnd youâre late.â The two turn around as the hear Wadeâs voice and expect to see himâŠonly to be greeted by the Wadebot 2.0. âIâve been waiting for five minutes.â
Felix is about to say something when Ron puts his hand up. âUh, Wade? I thought you said you needed to get away from your computer.â Ron says.
âI did.â He answers. âIâm on my Laptop now. Iâm using this while my computer is under maintenance. Now, letâs get a move on.â The Wadebot rolls towards the terminal, leaving both Ron & Felix at the runway.
âIs he always like that?â Felix asks.
â You mean stay at home, never leaves the house to see daylight? Yeah, pretty much.â Ron says. âDonât worry, youâll get use to it. Letâs get going to the Hotel.â The two follow after the Wadebot and into the Terminal.
At that momentâŠ
On the other side of the city, at the National Robotics Corporation, thereâs a break-in at one of their factory areas. Deep inside, the Killer Bebes are standing in front of an Alloy-Modification Chamber. There are only three standing in front of the chamber. A moment later, the fourth & final one steps out of the chamber.
âBebe unit. Did the procedure go successfully?â Bebe 4 starts to feel its skin. It still looks like the same titanium, but once she touches it, it flexes like human skin.
âSkin has become malleable.â She responds.
âThe secondary mission is successful.â Bebe 4 says. âProceed with Primary Objective. Proceed with the capture & sampling of Ron Stoppable.â
The Next DayâŠ
Ron, Felix & the Wadebot are all in the Hotel Lobby. The entire Lobby is hosting a Video Game Tournament, with some of the best players from around the country here to compete.
âWhoa. Looks like we might have some major league competition here.â Felix says. Ron looks around, taking in the whole scene. Heâs about to respond to Felix when, out of the corner of his eye, he sees a blur run across the room. He turns in that direction but sees nothing but Fan-boys. âHey Ron, you OK?â Felix asks.
âHuh? Oh, yeah. Thought I saw something for a second.â Ron tells him.
âHmm, thatâs strange.â Wade says as his face appears on Wadebotâs screen. âIâm getting readings of weird energy signatures.â
âProbably just some of the new games they got here.â Felix says.
âYeah. Iâm gonna hit the bathroom before we get into it.â Ron says. âI need to wash my hands. They smell too much like Nacoâs.â
Ron leaves his two buddies and makes his way through the crowded Lobby to the bathroom. He pushes the door open and enters the Menâs room. A second later, a robot hand reaches out and locks the door before disappearing. Ron looks back to see whatâs going on, but sees nothing. He then glances in the mirror, and sees Bebe 1.
âWAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!! BEBE!!!!!â
She slowly walks toward him, backing him up into the sink. âWhat are you doing here?â he asks.
âWe are here for Queen Bonnie.â Bebe 1 says.
âOh yeah, they must still be obedient to Bonnie.â He thinks to himself. âUh, Bonnieâs back in Middleton. WAAAAAY back in Middleton. Glad I could helpâŠâ He tries to run out but Bebe puts her arm up, blocking his way.
âQueen Bonnie desires you for her needs.â She says.
âYou can say that again.â Ron tells her.
âQueen Bonnie desires you for her needs.â She repeats. Ron rolls his eyes, remembering that sheâs a robot. âBut we must first see if you are suitable for her.â
Ronâs eyes widen like elevator doors swinging open. âWAIT! You donât meanâŠâ
Just then, three bathroom stall doors bust open, revealing the other three Bebe bots. âWe must have intercourse to see your worthiness of our Queen.â Bebe 1 says, as she grabs him by the collar. She forcefully pulls him close and locks in with a deep passionate kiss. Ron waves his arms around wildly for a second, then finally gives into the kiss. Bebe 1 then pulls away from him.
âYou have soft lips now?â Ron asks.
âLatex coated lips with a hint of Cherry.â The Bebe bot responds.
Ron licks his lips to confirm. âYou know, I thought I tasted cherry for a secâŠWAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â The Bebe bot tosses him into a bathroom stall. He lands on the toilet seat, and before he can even blink, the Bebe bots are all over him. Bebe 1 proceeds to kiss him again. Bebes 2 & 3 rip his shirt apart and expose his bare chest. Bebe 4 quickly unbuckles his belt and pulls his pants down.
âHoly shit, Iâm being raped by Killer Bebes.â Ron thinks. âThis is like a bad Star Trek plotâŠor something that some horny writer would think up.â
Bebe 4 has pulled his boxers down to reveal his thick member. She grabs hold of it in her hand. âCommencing with Fellatio Protocol.â
Ron breaks the kiss from Bebe 1. âFell-what? What is she talking about?â IsâŠâ
Heâs interrupted by the sensation of feeling her surprisingly warm lips wrapping around his shaft. Bebe 4 works into a steady motion, almost mechanical but very smooth. Ronâs eyes almost roll into the back of his head.
âOh, man. Sheâs giving me the perfect Blowjob.â He thinks. As he looks up, he sees Bebe 2 standing over him, topless. Before he can speak, she leans in and smothers his face with her breasts. As he grabs hold of them, heâs surprised again by how soft they are. Almost like the real thing.
âHow did your skin get soft?â Ron asks through the mountain of boobs.
âSpecially made malleable alloy upgrade.â Bebe 2 responds.
âMustâve been some upgrade.â Ron says. He puts both hands on her round melons and pushes her away, as Bebe 4 stops her action and removes his Cock from her mouth.
âSemen collection delayed by this action.â She says. âDoubling Fellatio speed.â She puts her mouth back on his Cock and goes double time, bobbing her head like a piston on his shaft. Ron jerks & jumps for a second, as Bebe 3 smothers him with her breasts. After a moment, Ron feels a tingling in his legs and begins to tremble, signaling heâs on the verge of hitting his climax. He then lets go of his whole load into Bebe 4âs mouth, almost filling it up. She takes it all in, then removes his rod from her mouth and backs up. A spark flies from her neck. âSemen collectionâŠcomplete.â She falls to the ground, seemingly deactivated & off-line.
âWhoa. She just went off-line from me coming in her mouth.â He thinks. âThereâs one less Bebe. Maybe now I canâŠâ
Heâs not able to finish his thought, as Bebe 1 sprays a pink mist from the nipples on her breasts in his face. Ron coughs for a second, thinking heâs been poisoned. âOH, GOD! Iâve been poisoned!â
âYou havenât been poisoned, my sexy stud.â Bebe 2 says, as she begins to talk exactly like Bonnie. âIt is a mixture of Viagra & Spanish Fly.â As she says that, Ron can feel his Cock instantly hardening again. It becomes even more rock solid than before. Bebe 3 brings her leg over and straddles herself onto him.
âLetâs go for a ride, Big Ron.â She says as a door slides open down there, revealing an almost lifelike pussy. She guides herself onto his member and brings herself all the way down. Ron grits his teeth, taken off guard by how warm it feels inside of her. Outside of the stall, the Wadebot unlocks the door and enters the bathroom.
âRon? You in here?â Wade asks through the screen. âYou didnât stumble face first into the toilet again, did you?â
âWADE, HELP!!!â Ron screams. âIâm being raped by Killer Bebes!â
Wade has a look of disbelief on his face. âHa, ha, Ron, very funny. Youâre not giving my Wadebot another swirley.â Wade uses the X-Ray on the Wadebot to look into the stalls. What he sees is Ron being rode hard by Bebe 3, while Bebe 1 presses her lips against his. Bebe 2 runs her hands up & down his chest, while playfully biting his ear.
âWhoa! You really are in there with the Bebes.â Wade says. âYou lucky bastard.â
Ron pushes Bebe 1 away from him. âWAAAADE!!!!â
âOK, OK, Iâll help out!â He says, and begins to type in a sequence on his Laptop keyboard. He finishes and waits a moment, but nothing happens. âSorry, Ron. But I canât override their systems. Theyâve upgraded from the last time.â Wade then notices Bebe 4 on the ground, off-line. âWhat happened to her?â Wade asks.
âBlowjobâŠI came in her mouthâŠthen she passed out orâŠwent offline or something.â Ron says, fighting off the advances of Bebes 1 & 2.
Wade thinks for a moment, then comes up with a plan. âIt mustâve been the exertion.â He says. âAlthough they have the upgrades, the Bebe bots werenât originally built for sex. Hate to tell you this Ron, but youâre gonna have to Fuck your way out.â
Ron stops fighting back, looking shocked. âYou gotta be fucking kidding me.â The Bebes continue to advance on him, and he decides that Wade is right. He grabs Bebe 3âs hips to bring he closer, and begins to pound her back. Bebes 1 & 2 stop their action and proceed to just look on. He pushes himself deep within her with every stroke, cause her to twitch & malfunction.
âS-s-s-soâŠso g-g-g-g-goodâŠâ She says as her neck shoots out a spark, just like Bebe 4 did before. The glow from her eyes fade, and she falls limp off of his Cock. Ron looks down and sees that little Ron is still ready to go. He stands up and pushes Bebe 2 against the stall wall, and locks her lips to his as he lifts her legs up & apart. He slides his rod inside of her metal love box. He can feel the lubricant trickling on his Dick inside of her, and begins to pump her hard. The stall walls begin to shake from the impact.
âMan, itâs like having sex with a real woman.â He thinks. As sheâs getting pounded, Bebe 2 begins to malfunction like her two predecessors. Ron continues banging her, as she begins to make noises that sound like moans of pleasure. She looks up as the glow from her eyes slowly fades. âBig RonâŠtoo muchâŠâ are her last words, before she goes offline and falls lifelessly to the ground.
Ron breathes a sigh of relief. âJust one more thenâŠâ He turns around and is met with a passionate kiss by Bebe 1, who has been watching the whole event. She puts her arms around his neck and wraps her legs around him, straddling herself on his Cock. As she begins to bounce, she breaks the kiss.
âYou must pass the final test, lover boy.â She says. âBefore you can be deemed worthy for Queen Bonnie.â The action is hot & heavy inside the stall. Ron begins to sweat from the friction, but Bebe looks strong and fully functional. Ron falls to his knees, then leans forward, putting Bebe 1 on the bathroom floor. They stay together, as Ron continues to stroke into her ruthlessly. After a minute of rough sex, Bebe 1 finally begins to break down. This doesnât go unnoticed by Ron, and he speeds up his motion trying to last out. This sends her into overdrive. She begins to shake uncontrollable.
âYouâŠy-y-youâŠyouâŠâ
âSay it!â Ron says. âYou know you want too.â
âYou are leet, Ron Stoppable.â She says. A loud pop & a big spark flies from her neck, just as Ron blows his load inside of her, filling her up. A Bonnie-like smile forms on her face. The glow from her eyes fade, and she goes offline. Ron stands up and pulls up his boxers & pants, as he looks around at the deactivated Bebes. He opens the door to the stall to see the Wadebot in front of him, with Wade on the screen.
âWhoa, didnât think you could do it, Ron.â Wade says. âGet it? Do itâŠâ
âVery funny, Wade.â Ron says sarcastically. âYou wouldnât happen to have a spare T-Shirt in there?â A lower compartment opens on the Wadebot and shoots a T-shirt right at Ron, and hits him in the head. âOW! That thing does have everything. So what do we do with the Bebes?â
âDonât worry.â Wade says. âI can get and extraction team to take care of them. Now letâs get back to the event.â Ron nods his head in agreement as he puts on the T-shirt and walks out with the Wadebot.
âHey, and WadeâŠâ Ron says.
âYeah, Ron?â
âFelix never finds out about this, OK?â
A Week LaterâŠ
At Middleton Airport, Kim & Monique wait for the arrival of Ron & Felix. They donât wait long as the two of them come out of the tunnel. Kim runs over and hugs them both. âWelcome back.â She says. âSo, you enjoy your trip?â
Felix holds up a silver medal thatâs around his neck. âSecond place in the tournament. Qualifies for a good vacation in my book.â
âYou said it, buddy.â Ron adds as they bump fists.
Kim smiles. âSpankinâ. I was thinkingâŠâ
Suddenly, Bonnie runs up to Ron and wraps around his arm. âHe wonât have time for that, Kim.â She says. âRon has to study the new cheering routines with me. Isnât that right?â She reaches down behind him and squeezes his ass tightly, causing him to jump a little.
He smiles and blushes a little. âUh, yeah. Study. Sorry, KP. Gotta run.â Bonnie drags Ron along with her out of the Terminal and to the Parking Lot, leaving Kim with Monique & Felix.
âYou ever notice how Ronâs spending more time with Bonnie lately?â she asks.
âYeah, probably Bonnie just lording over him as usual.â Bonnie says. âCome on. Weâll walk Felix home and head to Club Banana.â
Later that nightâŠ
Several miles from the Super Villain Prison, and walking along a dark road is Shego. Sheâs wearing a trench coat over her prison issued clothes. A car comes down the road and she puts her thumb out to hitch a ride, only to be passed up. She groans in frustration.
âThatâs it.â She says. âTime to show them some real headlights.â
Another car comes down the road. Shego waits until the headlights on the car illuminate her, then she opens her coat and lifts up her shirt to reveal her luscious round melons. The car immediately comes to a stop, and she walks around to the driverâs side. The gentleman in the car rolls down his window.
âSo, what can I do for you, pretty lady?â He asks.
âWell, you can give me the keys and get the hell out of the car.â She replies, before reaching in and yanking the gentleman out of his car and throwing him to the ground. She unlocks the door from the inside and climbs in. With a grin on her face, she closes the door and puts her hands on the wheel.
âGet ready, Kimmy. Shegoâs coming back to town.â She burns rubber down the road and leaves nothing behind, but a cloud of dust.
The Global Justice Chapters
Through the halls of Global Justice, an Agent is seen running at full speed. The Agent looks vaguely familiar, and has a nametag that reads âJ. Richâ. He dashes past other agents & workers before boarding an elevator. As the door closes, he punches in 82 as the floor her wants to go to. The elevator lifts up in a hurry, as soothing music plays through the speakers. It doesnât soothe the Agent though, as he taps his foot, impatiently waiting to get to his floor.
âCome on, come on.â He says, still waiting.
After a few moments, the elevator finally gets to the floor. He shoots out like a track star down the hall. At the end of the hall is the main battle room, crown jewel of Global Justice headquarters. He runs into the room, and immediately walks toward Dr. Betty Director, the Head of Global Justice.
âMaâam! Important Intel just wired in to us.â He says as he hands her a sheet of paper.
âThank you, Agent Rich.â She says, taking the sheet. She begins to read whatâs on it, as her look slowly changes to a serious one. âItâs just as I feared. People, Codename Mean Green has escaped. I need my best agents active for a level 4-protection mission. Whatever happens, at all cost, we must protect Ron Stoppable!â
About an Hour LaterâŠ
At the local Middleton Bueno Nacho, Ron sits in a booth enjoying a Grande sized order of Nacos. In celebration of Bueno Nachoâs 5th anniversary, heâs wearing a large sombrero. Across from him sits his best friend/girlfriend, Kim Possible. Ron stops his munching on Nacos and offers Kim some.
âYou sure you donât wanna join in on the celebration?â Ron asks.
âNo, Iâm good.â She says. Suddenly, Ron notices an image out of the corner of his eye. He looks in the direction and man dressed in black. Or at least he thinks he does, as the man disappears in the blink of an eye.
âHmm, thatâs weird.â He says.
âWhatâs weird?â Kim asks.
âI couldâve sworn I saw a guy dressed in all black at that table stalking me.â Ron tells her. Kim develops a worried look on her face.
âOkay, youâve been having too many Nacos, Ron.â She tells him.
âNo, I havenât.â He says. âThis is only my 9th order.â She grabs him by the hand and pulls him out of the booth. They both head out of the restaurant and walk down the street, heading the route to get to Kimâs house. Back in Bueno Nacho, the man in black comes out of hiding and spies on the two out of the window.
âTarget is on the move.â He says into a hidden microphone. âWill proceed with shadowing & protection.â
3 Days LaterâŠ
Nothing has changed since that day at Bueno Nacho. Ron still sees mysterious men out of the corner of his eye, but once he turns to look, thereâs no one there. At the Middleton Mall, he hangs out with Kim inside of Club Banana to get his mind off of his âparanoiaâ.
âIâm telling you Kim, there are weird, mysterious Government agents following me all around Middleton.â He says.
âAnd I say youâve been watching too many Mystery movie marathons.â She says, as she grabs a pair of Capri pants from the rack.
âHey, those movies are classics. And theyâŠâ He stops in mid-sentence as he notices yet another figure out of the corner of his eye. This time, he doesnât turn immediately around, so as not to give him a chance to hide. He slowly walks over to a mirror, and stands in front of it so that the man can be seen also.
âKim, come here.â Ron whispers as he motions her over. Kim sighs and walks over to him carrying the pair of pants. She takes a look in the mirror and sees the man Ron was talking about.
âWhoa, you are being followed, Ron.â She says.
âTold ya, and heâs RIGHT BEHIND ME!!!â He turns and points towards the man in black, who just realizes heâs been found out. He runs out of Club Banana, being chased closely by Kim. Ronâs way behind bringing up the rear.
âWAIT UP, KP!!!â
The chase leads to the fountain area of the Mall. The same fountain where Kim & Shego switched bodies. Kim leaps & jumps off of a nearby table and lands right in front of the man in black.
âWhatâs the rush?â Kim asks the man. âI thought weâd have a little chat.â
The Man backs up and sets himself in a Kung-Fu stance, indicating heâs in no mood for talk. Kim also gets into her Kung-Fu stance, and the two stare each other down, anticipating the other to make the first move. Finally, the man attacks first, lunging at her with a snake strike. Kim easily dodges the strike and counters with a spin kick. The two trade blows up close, with Kim countering everything the man in black has to throw at her. After a minute of going back & forth with their strike, they both back off back into their stances, breathing hard but still ready to brawl. Ron finally arrives on the scene and backs up Kim.
âSoâŠwho are you?â She asks the man. âAnd why have you been tailing Ron?â
The man just presses a button on his collar. âI believe my superior can answer that question.â A second later, a trap door opens up and sucks in Kim & Ron. Theyâre transported through a series of tubes until they arrive in the middle of Global Justice Headquarters, right in front of Dr. Director.
âSorry for the uncomfortable trip here.â She tells them.
Ron stands up along with Kim and brushes himself off. âYeah. You know, maybe next time you could have some recliners or beanbags to land on instead of the hard floor.â
âWhatâs the Sitch?â Kim asks Dr. Director.
âUnfortunately, we have a grave situation.â She answers. âCodename Mean Green has escaped.â
Ron begins to chuckle a little. âMean Green? Sounds like some lame movie villain. Why should we be scared?â
âCodename Mean Green is also known as Shego.â Dr. Director says to Ron, who begins to shake with fear. He takes a big gulp and starts to sweat.
âOK, now thatâs scary! SHEâS GONNA TEAR ME APART!!!â Ron panics and hides behind Kim.
âOr possibly worse.â Dr. Director says. âWhich is why Ron Stoppable needs to be under constant watch until she is apprehended.â
âIâm staying too.â Kim adds. âRonâs my best friend, and Iâm not gonna let Shego get to him without a fight.â
Dr. Director begins to pace around the room, thinking over the situation. âHmm, it would help if we had a top-level combatant such as you standing guard. All right. We will set you up two quarters right by each other. In the meantime, take a look around. You might want to familiarize yourself with Global Justice; you might be here for a while.â
As the two leave to explore the facility, Agent Rich approaches Dr. Director. âMaâam. You might want to take a look at Mr. Stoppableâs recent activities.â She nods her head and follows him into the next room, where a group of scientists are gathered around a large screen.
âWhatâs going on here?â She asks.
âWell, weâve noticed some very odd readings from the subject.â One scientist says.
âYou mean Ron Stoppable.â She says.
âYes.â Another scientist replies. âVery strange indeed. And most of them are Hormonal. We still have that micro-camera we implanted from when we were studying his âRon Factorâ. We were just about to examine his actions andâŠâ The scientist holds up a videotape, which Dr. Director snatches from his grasp.
âI think Iâll be watching this.â She says. âMight be priority one classified.â She takes the tape and exits the room down a long hallway. She walks past various workers in her organization until she reaches her quarters. She places her thumb on a number pad and the door slides open, allowing her to enter in. She takes a long sigh and inserts the tape into her VCR, before sitting down on her bed and grabbing her remote.
She presses the Play button and closely observes the whatâs on the tape. The first thing she sees is Ron & Kim battling Drakken in order to save the kidnapped President. Unimpressed, she keeps watching the tape.
âLooks like the same basic mission for Ron & Kim.â She says. âNothing that would heighten his HormonalâŠwhatâs this?â
Her full attention goes back to the tape when he notices Ron & Shego down in the cellar of Middleton High. She watches Shego take his virginity, first sucking him to hardness then riding his Cock until she reached her orgasm. She also witnesses how Ron shoves his member up her ass, against her protests. As she watches, she slowly becomes more aroused.
âOh my.â She says. âI never knew that Ron was soâŠgifted down there. Although it does explain the clumsiness.â
Betty slowly begins to slide her hand between her thighs, feeling herself getting wet. As she continues to look at the tape, watching Ron in the cabin at Camp Wannaweep with Bonnie. She slowly unzips her jumpsuit down just below her belly button, showing a white Sports Bra, then ventures her hand inside. Part of her underwear can be seen, revealing that she wears white cotton panties. As Ron pumps himself on the tape, Betty slowly starts to match her finger movements to his strokes.
âOh yes. Yes, thatâs it.â
She slowly becomes lost in her own world, imagining Ron is there with her at that moment. She can hear Ronâs voice from the tape, so itâs not that hard to imagine. She leans back onto her bed and delves her fingers even deeper between her love walls. Her eyes are closed as she works herself closer to her limit. After a few moments, she opens them to see Ron with Kimâs mother on the tape now.
âMy god! Ron sure has been around in his young life.â She thinks to herself. âAlthough with a rod like that, I can see why.â
As she lies back down on the bed, she spreads her legs wide open. Her fingers probe in & out of her at a furious pace. She feels herself coming closer & closer to her climax. Then, suddenly, she stops. She sits back up on her bed, dripping in sweat.
âThisâŠwill not do.â She says, out of breath. âIf I am to fully understand why Ron Stoppable is being hunted by Shego, as also to why he has been so sexually active, I must take a hands-on approach.â
She stands up and zips up her jumpsuit. Straightening herself out, she regains her composure and exits out of her quarters, on a mission to find out more information about Ron StoppableâŠand his recent adventures.
Inside of Global Justiceâs Gym facility are Ron & Kim. Ron has on a pair of boxing gloves as he pounds the heavy bag. Kim just watches from the side.
âHey, Kim. Check me out.â Ron says as he lays in blows to the Heavy Bag. âCall me âSugar Ron Stoppable.â Float like a butterfly, sting like a hornet.â
He gets in a good shot that pushes the bag away from him. Ron turns to Kim and flexes his muscles, right before the bag smashes back into him, knocking him to the ground. Kim laughs and helps Ron up to his feet, just as Dr. Director steps into the room.
âEverything going alright here?â She asks Kim & Ron.
âYeah.â Kim says. âExcept for Ron being knocked out in the second round by the Heavy Bag.â
âNice gym you got here, Doc.â Ron says. âMaybe I should test my skills out in the ring.â
âActually, I was thinking of having a little sparring session with Kim, if she doesnât mind.â Dr. Director says, turning to Kim.
âItâll be my pleasure.â Kim answers. The two walk together towards the sparring ring and climb through the ropes. Dr. Director unzips her jumpsuit a little, to allow easier movement. Her white sports bra can be seen just enough by everyone surrounding the ring, including Ron. Kim gets into her fight stance, as does Dr. Director.
âHa! The redhead doesnât stand a chance against our boss.â One agent says.
Ron turns to the agent & grins. âYou donât know Kim Possible.â
A referee standing in the ring waves his arm, and the two dangerous females charge each other. Kim leaps in with a flying kick, which Betty easily dodges. Dr. Director comes back with a Roundhouse that Kim easily avoids. They start to trade blows back & forth, gauging each otherâs strength. Ron & the rest of the agents look on in awe.
âWhoa! Sheâs really keeping up with the boss.â The agent says.
âCheck the name, guys.â Ron tells them. âKim Possible, she can do anything.â
Back in the ring, Kim goes for a Roundhouse kick of her own, only to have it blocked by Dr. Director. She in turn, flips over and locks Kim in an Ankle Lock.
âYour skills have gotten better, Kim.â Dr. Director tells her. âBut they just fall short of mine.â
âIâŠbeg to differ.â Kim says, fighting her way out of the hold. She rolls over under Dr. Director, and sends her flying into the air. She lands on her fight, just as Kim grabs her arm and wraps her legs around it, sending her to the ground.
âGO KP!!!â Ron yells from outside the ring.
Kim wrenches her arm, trying to make her submit. âEloquently done, Ms. Possible.â Dr. Director says. âBut not quite good enough.â
She does a reverse somersault and gets to her feet, forcing Kim to break her hold. They both stand up to their feet, ready to go again. Kim is about to charge again when Betty puts her hand up. âI believe thatâs enough for one day Kim, excellent sparring session. Maybe you should get cleaned up.â
âYeah.â Kim says. âI am a little ripe.â
Ron looks on from outside, then takes a whiff of himself. âWHOA! Maybe I should get cleaned up myself.â
Betty hops over the ropes and lands right beside Ron. âTerribly sorry, Ron. But Iâm afraid your quarters doesnât have a fully functioning shower. But you can use mine.â She looks at him with caring & seductive eyes, which Ron doesnât exactly notice.
âOK, itâs all good.â He says. âI just hope you got one of those frilly scrubbing things. They feel good on you once you get use to them.â
They walk together out of the gym and down the hall, towards Dr. Directorâs quarters. As they walk she slowly puts her hand around him. Ron looks up at her. âOh, umâŠabout rooting for Kim back there, DoctorâŠâ
âNo explanation needed.â She tells him. âI understand sheâs your friend. And pleaseâŠcall me Betty.â
âOKâŠBetty. Coolâ He says. They reach her quarters and enter inside. Ron immediately heads towards her bathroom, so he can use her shower. He shuts the door behind him as Betty stays behind. As soon as the door closes, she inputs a code that wonât allow the door to be open by anyone else but her.
âAll according to plan.â She thinks to herself. A moment later, she can hear the shower water running. She walks over to a drawer and grabs a pair of binoculars. Flipping a switch on them, she holds them up to her eyes and looks at a wall. The sight goes through the wall, showing her everything happening in the bathroom, including Ron washing himself in the shower.
âTime to initiate phase 2.â She says to herself. She slowly begins to strip out of her jumpsuit into her bra & panties. Grabbing her robe off of her bed, she slips into it and slowly creeps into the bathroom. Ron doesnât pay attention to her sneaking in, as he continues to wash himself. She lets her robe drop to the floor and takes off her bra, revealing her surprising large round breasts, before bending over and pulling off her cotton white panties. As she moves closer to the shower, Ron finally notices her image against the shower door. He panics and thinks itâs his worst nightmare.
âWAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!! SHEGO!!!â
The shower door opens to show Betty standing there, fully naked, except for the eye patch. âRelax, young Ronald. Itâs me. Weâre completely protected from anyone here.â She says. Ron stands there speechless, not knowing exactly what to say. âI thought you might need some help washing up in here.â She climbs into the shower with him, and shuts the door behind her.
Ron is in a state of shock. âHow do I always get myself into these situations?â He thinks to himself. His thoughts are broken though, as he feels her hands caress his chest, working the soap all around. He then feels her perfect breasts pressed against his back, as she moves closer to him. Her hands begin to roam downward, and Ron knows exactly where theyâre heading.
âYou know, you really are a gifted young man, if I do say so myself.â She tells him. Ron smiles nervously and blushes, as she moves in even closer and whispers in his ears. âSome gifts more greater than others.â She grabs his shaft and begins to lather it up with soap. Ron starts to get weak in the knees.
âOh man, sheâs stroking my cock! And sheâs so good at it.â He thinks to himself. âSheâs starting to make meâŠâ
He doesnât get the chance to finish his thought, as he finds himself turned around by Betty. She leans in and kisses him passionately on the lips, as the shower water rains down on the two, drenching them. Ron tries to fight, but quickly gives into it, remembering the other times he fought it didnât do any good. Betty wraps her leg around Ron, as Ron reaches down and squeezes her round ass, causing her to moan into his mouth.
âKimâs gonna be so pissed if she finds this out.â He thinks. âBut itâs not my fault she came onto me.â
The action is getting hot in the shower, along with the water. Ronâs Cock rubs against her inner thigh, and proceeds to make her even hornier than before. She puts her leg down and breaks the kiss.
âYour experience shows, Ronald.â She says. âI should reward you for that.â
She puts her hand on his shoulder and slowly bends over, until sheâs up close & personal with his manhood. Itâs dripping wet from the shower water. She grabs it with her other hand and takes it all into her mouth. Ron puts his hands onto the shower wall to keep balance, as he feels the warm sensation of her mouth wrapped around his head, then his shaft.
âOh man, she might just be the best blowjob Iâve ever had.â Ron thinks.
She begins to work up a steady back & forth motion, as her lips envelope his shaft. Her body rocks back & forth along with her head, sending her wonderful breasts swinging like a pendulum. As she works on his rod, Ron canât help but to stare at her ass. Betty looks up and catches him staring, and releases his Cock from her mouth.
âNo need to be silent, Ron.â She says as she rises up and pushes closer to him. âIâm all yours in here. You can have all of me.â
Just like before, she wraps her leg around Ron. But this time, she reaches down and grabs hold of his Cock, guiding him inside of her love box. As she slides down onto him, a feeling of ecstasy washes over her. She wraps her arms around him and proceeds to take the lead, as she works up a rhythm of bouncing on his Cock.
âOh yes! Just like that! OH!â She moans. Ron grabs hold of her legs and holds her up. The two of them fuck each other furiously in the middle of the shower, as the water falls over their bodies like a spring rain. Ron feels his legs getting weak, and guides him & her over to the shower wall. He leans her against the wall, and begins to pound her pussy hard.
âOH YES!! THATâS IT, RON! KEEP IT UP!!!â She screams.
The sound of flesh pounding flesh fills the bathroom, along with occasional squeaks made by skin rubbing against the tiled wall. Ron continues to punish her pussy, with every stroke making Betty moan louder. Her entire body is now pulsating with each thrust Ron makes into her. They both begin to reach their limit at the same time.
âBettyâŠIâŠI think IâmâŠâ
âGo ahead, Ron.â She says, breathing hard. âShoot your warm liquid inside of me!â
After a couple of more moments of pounding, he canât hold out any longer, and he letâs loose his entire load inside of her. Betty closes her eyes, as the sensation of him coming inside of her brings her to her orgasm. They both slowly slump down to the shower floor. Ron lies there on his back, still inside of Dr. Director. She lies on top of him, with a heavenly smile on his face. The Shower is still going, and the water quickly washes their sweat away as they both lay there, satisfied.
âThatâŠwas absolutelyâŠmagnificent.â She says, still out of breath.
âBut I cameâŠâ Ron says. âInside you andâŠâ
âDonât worryâŠabout that.â She tells him. âGlobal Justice Scientists give all female agents a pill to prevent any accidental pregnancies.â
âButâŠKimâŠâ Ron says weakly.
âWeâll just consider this Priority One classified.â She says warmly. Ron closes his eyes as he begins to pass out from exhaustion. The last thing he hears is Dr. Directorâs voice. âNow get some rest, Ronald. You deserve it.â
2 Hours LaterâŠ
Kim walks up to the door to Dr. Directorâs quarters. Sheâs about to knock when the door slides open, showing Ron fully dressed, with a towel wiping down his wet hair.
âOH! UhâŠHey, KP.â He says.
âRon, you were taking a shower in there for 2 hours?â She asks him.
Just then, Dr. Director appears behind him. âTerribly sorry, Kim. We were just discussing his knowledge ofâŠMonkey Kung Fu, you called it?â
Ron smiles nervously and nods his head in agreement. âUh, yeah. You know, I got the Mad Monkey skills.â
âIndeed you do.â Dr. Director says. âI shall have to implement that into my agents training.â
Ron walks out of the room and down the hall with Kim, whoâs a little suspicious, but just disregards it. Betty looks on from her doorway, as a pleasant smile grows on her face. The smile fades though, as she notices Agent Rich heading towards her.
âMaâam. I just received report that Shego has gone off the radar.â He tells her. âWe have no idea of where she could be now.â
âThen weâll have to assume the worse.â She says. âShe mustâve found Drakken.â
MeanwhileâŠ
Back at Dr. Drakkenâs secret lair, heâs seen lugging a huge battery towards what appears to be a Mobile Death Ray.
âLousy copsâŠNNGHHâŠtaking my muscle awayâŠUGGHHâŠTHIS IS BENEATH ME!!!â
He places the battery into the slot of the Death Ray, activating it. He then stands up straight, as he back cracks back into place. âDo they really expect an evil genius such as myself to do all the heavy lifting?â He asks himself. âNEVER!!! And with my New & Improved Death Ray, I can get my lovely companion out of that prison, and resume my planâŠFOR WORLD DOMINATION!!!â
He climbs up a latter on the Death Ray, and sits down in the seat at the top. He grabs a pair of goggles and puts them on, as he steers the Death Ray towards a wall. âDonât worry, Shego! The Drak-Manâs coming to saveâŠâ
KRAK-BOOM!!!
The wall Drakken has aimed for comes crashing down. Drakken looks on with shock & confusion, seeing as he hasnât pressed a button yet. He then realizes someone might be out to get him, and hops down from his Death Ray to face them.
âWHO DARES TO TEAR DOWN THE WALL TO DR. DRAKKENâS LAIR???â
He quickly gets his answer, as the first thing he sees through the dust are a pair of glowing green hands. âSH-SHâŠSHEGO?â He says, nervously.
The figure of her can be seen through the dust. She slowly steps into the light, giving Drakken a full view of her, and confirming his guess.
âDra-a-a-kkyâŠIâm ho-o-o-o-me.â
The Not-So-Lucky Kim Possible
She stands over the debris of fallen rocks. The wind whips her jet-black hair back & forth, as she wears the usual scowl she has on her face. Her baggy prison jumpsuit flutters & flaps against the wind. Drakken looks on in worship, as if he were in the presence of a goddess. A huge Joker-like smile forms on his face, getting wider by the second.
âSHEGO!!!â Drakken yells, running over to his Henchwoman. He picks her up & hugs her tight, feeling ecstatic that sheâs returned. âOh, how Iâve missed my dangerous, volatile mad-woman.â
âYeah, missed you too, Drakken.â She says. âNow put me down!â
He stops hugging her and puts her back on her feet. âIf you had waited a while longer, you wouldâve seen blasting guards left & right to spring you free. And look, they made you wear orange. HOW DARE THEY MAKE YOU WEAR ORANGE!!!â
âYeah OK.â She says, not really caring. âLook, out of my way. Iâve been in this thing for far too long. Time to get some style back.â She shoves him aside and runs into her room, slamming the door behind her. Drakken brushes himself off and looks at the damage Shegoâs caused.
âGeez, youâd think she would learn to knock after all these years.â He sees the charred remains of scorched rock and stone. âOh, well. Iâm just glad to have my muscle back. And with Shego back on Team Drakken, we can finally proceed with our plansâŠFOR WORLD DOMINATION!!!â He begins to laugh maniacally, getting lost in his own demented mind.
Inside of her room, Shego has stripped out of her prison wear and stands in front of her closet completely in the buff. The setting sun shines off of the back of her body, giving it a heavenly glow. She turns her head to the door as she hears Drakkenâs laughter.
She sighs. âThat guy has Got to get a hobby.â She turns her attention back to her closet, picking out on of her many battle jumpsuits. She slowly steps into the pants, then pulls them up around her. They form fit, wrapping around her round ass until they completely cover it. She then slips into her top. As she zips it up, her breasts press and smash together, until they are also covered. She slips on her shoes and the look is complete. She stands up and looks at herself in the mirror.
âNow this is more like it.â She says with a smirk. She reaches over and picks up her prison jumpsuit. Her hands begin to become charged with green energy, and she incinerates the suit to ashes. She lets them fall to the floor and walks out of her room, only to see Drakken still laughing maniacally.
âAND COMMODORE PUDDLES SHALL HAVE CONTROL OVER FRANCE!!!â He yells out. Shego nods her head and walks over to him.
âHEY, DRAKKEN!!!â She yells, snapping him out of it. He realizes that heâs been going on for about a while now.
âI did it again, didnât I?â He asks.
âYeah. Didnât you go to Therapy to straighten that out?â She says.
âI tried a few classes, but they werenât my cup of tea.â He says.
âYeah, whatever.â She replies. âSo, what kind of evil âTake over the Worldâ plot do I have to help you with tonight?â
Drakken turns to Shego & smiles. âNow Shego, you know tonight is Friday Night. Which meansâŠâ
Shego grows a horrified look on her face. âOh no! Not That! ANYTHING BUT THAT! NO, NOT KARAOKE NIGHT!!!â
2 Hours LaterâŠ
Shego sits at a table in the middle of the room, right in front of the stage. Her head is down in her arms, as she wishes she were anywhere else but there. âI shouldâve stayed in prison.â She says, muffled through her arms.
Meanwhile, Drakken is onstage with a microphone, butchering classics at a record pace. âMy life is brilliant, my evilâs pure, I saw an Henchwoman, of that Iâm sure.â Heâs singing a James Blunt song, which is ANYTHING but beautiful. Shego buries her head even deeper into her arms, trying to hide her face the best she can.
Drakken continues singing and, against our prayers, reaches the hook. âYOUâRE SHEEEGOOO, YOUâRE SHEEEGOOO, YOUâRE SHEGO, ITâS TRUE!!!â
âI am going to strangle him until he turns blue!â She thinks to herself. âWellâŠbluer!â
A tear begins to fall down Drakkenâs cheek, as he continues to butcher the song. Once he finishes, the crowd gives him a standing ovation, more for him stopping than singing. He walks off the stage and sits back down next to Shego. âDid you see that, Shego?â He asks her with a cocky grin. âI tore it up. I wasâŠâ He stops and pulls out a book from his coat that reads âHip Talks for the Villain on the go!â He puts down the book and continues. ââŠI was off the chizzle, She-Gizzle!â
Shego groans loudly in frustration. âLetâs just go home before I experience more embarrassment.â She says.
âNow, now Shego.â Drakken says. âYou know the rules. Weâre both supposed to go up there and perform songs. Now I think you should go with the Pussycats Dolls andâŠâ Drakken stops talking when he notices Shego holding up her glowing hand, clenched in a fist. âBut we can always do that next week!â He says, smiling nervously. âFor now, lets just get home.â
The two stand up from the table and start to walk towards the exit. Everyone in attendance begins to clap and cheer as they leave. Drakken grins widely and looks at Shego. âYou see that, Shego? These people recognize true talent.â
Shego rolls her eyes as she follows him out. âTheyâre not cheering for your singing, Dr. D.â She says. They walk over to Drakkenâs Hovercraft and hop in. Shego decides to hop in the backseat. She lies back and kicks her feet up on the seats as Drakken hits the ignition and takes off.
As they zoom high into the air, Drakken decides to vent to Shego about her attitude. âYou know Shego, you might wanna try giving Karaoke a try.â He says. âAt least for me. I mean, I was planning on using my Industrial strength Laser Ray to blast you out of prison, and I donât get so much as aâŠâ
He turns back to face her, only to see her dead asleep, snoring loudly. He sighs to himself, and begins to wonder why he employs her. âShe ignores me, she insults meâŠshe even uses my stuff! Why do I keep her around?!â He shakes his fist in anger, trying to figure out the answer. He then notices her frame, as the moonlight glows off of her body. It finally comes into his mind why.
âWell, she does look positively heavenly in this light. Plus she helps out with my inventions, when I liberate them from others.â He says, as he reaches his hand over and rubs the back of his finger across her cheek. âAnd who else can whoop on Kim Possible like she can?â Right at that moment, Shego grabs Drakkenâs wrist and opens her eyes, frightening the bejeebus out of him.
âYou got that right, Dr. D.â She says with a smirk. âBut youâre forgetting one more thing I do better than anyone else.â She lets go of him and flips up into the air, landing in the front passenger seat with Drakken. She opens his coat and starts to unbuckle his pants, which now have a huge bulge in them. âMmmm, Iâve missed my little Drakky.â
Once she gets his pants unbuckled, she reaches in and pulls out his python of a Cock. She licks her lips, then opens her mouth and takes it the entire head. Her tongue runs circles around it inside her mouth, which makes Drakkenâs grin even wider. Her hand strokes his shaft all the way down to his balls, as she makes sure his whole Cock gets the experience. Drakken lies back and lets her go to work on him.
âShegoâŠyou are off the Chizzle.â He says. And that causes her to take his Cock out of her mouth and look at him.
âYeâif you want this to continue, youâll stop saying that.â She says. Drakken smiles innocently and makes a zipper motion across his mouth, indicating that heâll shut up. And Shego goes back to focusing on his large rod. She lets her tongue run over his shaft, as her hand still strokes it, her Raven hair resting against his skin.
Drakken starts to move his hand onto Shegoâs chest, and begins opening up her jumpsuit top. He goes inside and begins to fondle her perfectly round tits. Meanwhile, Shego has his Cock back in her mouth, and has even taken in some of his shaft. But heâs still way to big for Deep Throat. She bobs her head up & down, her velvety lips tightening on his shaft. Drakken begins to squeeze and tweak her nipples, which turn her on even more. Before the two know it, they arrived back at Drakkenâs Lair.
He slowly brings the craft to the ground as Shego takes his Cock out again. She sits up begins to kiss him passionately on the lips. Her tongue explores into his mouth, urging his to do the same, which he does. She presses herself closer against his chest, as the make-out session continues. Drakken can feel her nipples poking into his skin. After a few minutes, she breaks the kiss, leaving a small line of saliva connecting the two villains.
âHow about we take this action inside, and I put on my âspecialâ outfit.â She says with a seductive grin. âYou get the Chocolate Syrup & the Whip Cream, and Iâll get into something more comfortable.â
With that, she does a back flip out of the Hovercraft and onto the floor. She turns and runs into her room and gets ready, as Drakken hops out of the craft and scrambles to the kitchen. He rummages through the cabinets, looking for the items Shego suggested to him. âDAMN! Where is my Coco-Moo?â He says, frustrated. Finally, he finds a bottle that says âCoco-Moo brand Chocolate Syrup. He grabs it, along with the Whip Cream, and heads out of the kitchen to see two of his loyal henchmen standing at attention, awaiting orders.
âDr. Drakken, we await your command.â One of them says.
âUhâŠyouâve got the day off.â Drakken tells them. âGo on, go âchill outâ and stuff.â
âBut boss, you told us to be ready for your World Domination plan.â The other says.
âLook, Shego and I are about to do a little âbrainstormingâ. If you catch my drift.â Drakken says.
âUhâŠIâm afraid we donât, sir.â The first one says.
âOK, then Iâll simplify it for you.â He says as he walks over to his Industrial Strength Laser Ray. âGet out, before you are atomized.â
The two immediately scramble for the door, running in fear of Drakken & his weapon. As the door slides shut behind them, Drakken rushes over to the Living Room area of his lair. After tossing the items on the couch, he takes off his jacket to reveal a surprisingly manly chest. He picks up the can of Whip Cream and looks towards Shegoâs room.
âOh, ShegoâŠâ He says, impatiently waiting for her to come out. He doesnât have to wait long, as her door slides open. She appears in the doorway, wearing green & black lingerie, with the same color stockings & high heel stilettos. As she walks over to him seductively, Drakken quickly starts to unbuckle his pants. He lets them drop to the floor, revealing a pair of âO Boyzâ boxers. Shego stops in mid-step and looks at him strangely.
âO Boyz boxers?â She asks, feeling a little freaked out.
âWhat? They rock out loud.â Drakken says in his defense. âBesides, you got a pair of O Boyz slippers.â
âYeah, but Iâm a girl!â She says. âAh, Nevermind. You got the stuff?â
Drakken begins to shake the can of Whip Cream in his hand. âOh, yes! Letâs get down with our bad selves!â He charges towards her, with intentions of freakiness on his mind. As he approaches, Shego lifts her leg and puts her foot in his chest. She kicks him off, and sends him flying backwards onto the ground, along with the can. She grabs the can and kneels down on a bearskin rug in front of the fireplace.
âNuh-uh, Drakky.â She says seductively. âItâs not that easy tonight.â She gets down on her back on the rug and pulls down her outfit enough to reveal her perfect breasts. She begins to spray Whip Cream on them, just enough to cover her nipples. Once theyâre both covered, She looks at Drakken and motions for him to come closer.
âMama wants you to work for it!â She tells him. âNow crawl over here.â Drakken does as she asks, getting down on all fours and crawling towards her. He hovers over her prone body, and begins to gently suck the Whip Cream off of her nipple. Shego growls ion pleasure, urging him to continue. Drakken starts to work on the other breast, licking the nipple slowly. Once the Whip Cream is gone, he starts to bite her nipple. Gently, but rough enough.
âOh YEAH, Drew! Thatâs what I like!â She yells out. He continues to play rough with her breasts, until Shego is finally tired of waiting. In one swift move, she grabs Drakken and rolls him over so that sheâs on top. She starts to pull down his boxers, once again revealing his massive manhood.
âI want this monster in me now!â She says with an evil grin.
âBut what about the Coco-Moo?â Drakken asks.
âDonât ruin it!â Shego tells him.
Drakken is grinning too, as he gets into the moment. âOh, Shego. Do you think tonightâŠI can try your heavenly ass?â She responds by charging her gloves up with green energy. Drakken smiles and quickly changes the subject. âOK, NO ANAL! NO ANAL!!! ButâŠcould you call meâŠBig Daddy Drakken, tonight?â
âYeânot gonna happen.â She says, rolling her eyes. âNot letâs get down to business.â She starts off by letting his Rod rub against her inner thighs. She works up a back & forth motion, teasing Drakken as long as she can. âYou wanna put it inside of me, donât you?â She says knowingly.
âShego…â He says.
She scoots up a little closer to him, and lets the shaft of his Cock rub against her ass. âYou just canât wait until you split me with this monster, canât you?â She smirks.
âThis is not funny, Shego.â Drakken says, longing to be inside of her.
âAll the way inside of my warm pussy, drilling me balls deepâŠâ
Drakken cuts her off. âDammit, Shego. You donât treat an Evil Genius this way.â
âAlright, Alright! You can put it in me.â She says, getting annoyed. âSo sue me for trying to get some foreplay in.â She grips his shaft and spreads herself wide. As he head comes to her love lips, she starts to grit her teeth. Memories come flooding back of all the times heâs reamed her, and almost split her in two. Itâs very painful for her every time, but itâs an addicting pain. One she canât get enough of. The head of his Cock delves inside of her, and she slowly begins to take in the shaft.
âOh, Shego. You feel tighter than ever.â Drakken declares.
âShut up, Iâm trying to concentrate!â Shego barks at him. She slides down lowerâŠand lowerâŠuntil finally she takes all of him inside of her. It feels like heâs all the way into her ribcage, but itâs a feeling she enjoys. âOh GOD, Iâve missed this!â She yells out.
âAs have I, Shego.â Drakken says with a wide grin. She starts rotating her hips, and begins to ride the Doctor like a wild bull. Her tits jump and bounce around as if they were in a lottery ball machine. At least until Drakken grabs hold of them and squeezes them tight. She bounces off his Cock as if she were on a trampoline. Sweat already beginning to drip off of her body. Partially because of the roaring fire, but mostly her getting drilled.
âOh FUCK! YeahâŠright there! Thatâs the spot!â She tells him, breathing hard. She comes down hard on Drakken, inadvertently causing him to penetrate into her Balls Deep. Her whole body vibrates with every stroke. Her hair is a complete frazzled mess.
âOH!!! Fuck me, Drakken! FUCK ME!!!â Drakken sits up and pulls Shego close to him. Her luscious breasts press against his firm chest. Their eyes meet, and they kiss passionately. As the light from the fire illuminates their body, causing them to glow, Drakken continues to pound Shegoâs pussy into submission. Their mouths become one, and their tongues wrap around each other like serpents. They stay like this for what seems like forever, until Drakken feels a rumbling in Cock that feels like Mt. Everest. He breaks the kiss, as his body tenses.
âShegoâŠIâm gonna cum!â He says, feeling ready to explode.
âC-C-Cum inside of me!â She says, struggling to hold on herself. âFILL ME UP!!!â
He doesnât bother questioning her, instead he just letâs loose his steaming hot load deep inside of her. Shego hits her orgasm at the same time, and begins to leak her love juices all over Drakkenâs Rod. Her body falls limp, and she collapses on top of the good Doctor. The sound of heavy breathing now fills Drakkenâs lair, along with the crackling of the fire.
âNext timeâŠwe should useâŠthe Coco-Moo.â He struggles to say.
âWhateverâŠyou sayâŠBig Daddy Drakken.â She answers.
Meanwhile, in MiddletonâŠ
Kim lies in her bed, under the sheets, right next to Ron. Kimâs parents are both at work, and the Tweebs are off at another camp. Both Kim & Ron are naked, and look like they just got finished with a wild night themselves. Now theyâre making pillow talk.
âNo way.â Kim says.
âIâll bet itâs true.â Ron answers. âI mean, why wouldnât it be? Shego & Drakken? Bet theyâre doing it right now.â
âShego wouldnât go for someone like Dr. Drakken.â Kim tells him.
âIâm telling you, it could happen.â He tells her. âTheyâre probably going at it like rabbits now.â
Kim just smiles and starts to climb on top of Ron. âMmmm, I know something Iâd like to be doing like rabbits now.â
Ron just smiles and gets read for another round. âBOOYA!!!!â
The Not-So-Lucky Kim Possible 1
âALRIGHT, LUNCH TIME!!!â
The guard roams through the halls of the Maximum Security Super-Villain Prison, passing cells that house the most dangerous threats to safety & calm in this world. He pushes a food cart in front of him, delivering their daily lunch. He stops in front of Duff Killiganâs cell and slides a pot inside. Killigan opens the pot and takes a whiff of whatâs inside, only to have his face turn green in disgust.
âWhat is this abomination?â He asks the guard.
âItâs Haggis! Your favorite.â The guard replies.
âThis is not my favorite dish!â Killigan tells him as he walks away. âYa didnae even boil it in the Sheepâs stomach.â
The guard ignores Killiganâs yells and protests, and moves onto DNAmyâs cell. âVegetarian platter for DNAmyâŠâ He keeps going, then stops in front of Adrena Lynnâs cell. ââŠfor Adrena Lynn we gotâŠoh, noâŠâ
He looks up and sees her legs dangling from the ceiling. Fearing the worse, he searches in his pocket for the Key Card to open the cell with one hand, and radios for help with the other. âEMERGENCY! EMERGENCY! We have a code 82! Repeat, a code 82!â He finds the card and slides it through, causing the door to slide open. He runs into the room and looks up, only to find Adrena Lynn alive & well. She comes down hard with both feet onto his head, instantly knocking him out.
âThanks for opening the door.â She says. âSuch a gentleman.â She quickly rushes out of the door and down the hall, only to find her way being blocked by dozens of guards. They give chase, as Lynn dashes through the halls like a track star. She passes a Laundry Cart and grabs a bed sheet off of the top. Making another turn, she finds herself in a dead end, with nothing but a window. The guards quickly catch up and block the only way out.
âGIVE IT UP, LYNN!â The lead guard says. âThereâs nowhere else to go.â
âMaybe for you wet blankets.â She says, getting a firm grip on the sheet with both hands. âBut for me, thereâs always one way.â She kicks the window open and dives out of it.
âEXTREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEME!!!!â
A moment later, the sheet opens up and acts like a parachute, gently gliding her towards the ground. She looks down, and is in shock to see that dozens of guards have already covered the ground and are waiting for her to land. She thinks her plan is doomed, until a News Van pulls up outside of the Prison Walls. The back door of the Van opens, and a rope with a hook attached is shot up at her. She grabs the hook and fastens it to her pants, as the Van pulls off.
âHA! Thereâs nothing like Wind Surfing on a warm, sunny day.â She says, knowing her escape is complete. The rope slowly retracts into the Van, pulling her in also. Once sheâs safely in the Van, she unfastens the hook and hops in the driverâs seat. Her cameraman is the driver. âItâs about time you showed up.â She says. âI was hanging up there forever.â
âSorry. The Van needed gas. Had to fill up.â He explains.
âNevermind that.â She tells him. âNow that Iâm out of the joint, time to plot my payback on the man that ruined my career. Ron Stoppable!â
âSo what do you got planned?â He asks her.
She thinks about it for a second, before developing a fiendish grin. âIâm thinkingâŠAirborne Action. FREAKYYYYYYYYY!!!!!!!!â
MeanwhileâŠ
Ron is lying asleep on top of a heart-shaped bed, with velvet red sheets. He suddenly jumps awake, and looks around nervously, wondering whatâs going on. The first thing he notices is Bonnie crawling onto the bed beside him, stark naked.
âHey, âBig Ronâ.â She says seductively.
âBONNIE!!! Wh-Whatâs going on? Why am I here?â He asks desperately.
âWe just wanted to make you feel comfortable.â Monique says, crawling into bed on his other side, also naked.
âWe would do anything to make you happy, Ron-San.â Ron looks up to see Yori kneeling right over him, naked too.
âMonique? Yori?â Ron starts to panic, as he realizes whatâs going on.
âItâs important for you to be happy, Ronald.â He notices Kimâs mom, Mrs. Possible, standing at the foot of the bed, wearing a doctorâs coat, and nothing else. âDoctorâs orders.â
Ron looks over to see Dr. Betty Director standing right besides her, wearing nothing. âAnd a good young man like you always follows orders.â
Ron is about to open his mouth, when he feels a smooth stroking sensation on his manhood, along with a warm feeling that makes him harder by the second. He looks down to see whatâs causing it, and notices a pair of glowing gloved hands. He instantly knows who it is.
âSo, you ready for another lesson, Stoppable?â Shego says with a sexy grin. Before he can even answer, Kim appears out of nowhere and flips onto the bed, landing perfectly on Ron, mere inches from his Cock.
âClass is in session.â She says.
âWAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHH!!!!!!!â
Ron lets out a loud scream, which shakes him awake. He sits up screaming loudly, until a hand covers his mouth and puts him back down on the bed. Once his vision adjusts, he sees that itâs Kim.
âSSSSHHHHHHHHHH!!!â She says, putting her finger over her lips, before removing her hand from his mouth.
âKP, what are you doing here?â Ron whispers loudly.
âLate mission to stop Dementor from taking over the world.â She whispers back. Ron notices that sheâs wearing a large Trench Coat, along with a pair of Cheerleading Sneakers & Socks. âI past by a 24-hour Bueno Nacho on the way home, and all I could think about was you.â She tells him affectionately.
Ron starts to feel touched. The woman heâs admired and loved over the years, the woman heâs with now, still loves him. But the feeling goes away once he notices his Cock gripped in her hands. âKim, we canât do it here.â He whispers. âMy parents are still home.â
Kim grins softly at him. âThatâs what makes it more exciting.â
She reaches into the Trench Coat pocket and takes out a Condom, Magnum-Sized. As she puts it on his still hard Rod, Ron tries to talk her out of it. âKim, this is too risky. You canât do this.â
She looks at him with a sarcastic grin. âI think youâre forgetting the name, Ron.â
âWell, yeahâŠyou Can do anything.â He says. âBut my parentsâŠthey couldâŠâ He wants to continue, but the words die in his mouth as Kim flips off the Trench Coat to show that sheâs wearing nothing at all, but her sneakers & socks.
âCome on, RonâŠI need my early workout today.â She says. âPlease?â
Her lower lip starts to quiver, and the puppy-dog look is in full gear. Ron shields his eyes, trying not to give into the look that has doomed him so many times before. But his Cock lying against her soft skin works against him. He looks at her, and in an instant heâs putty in her hands.
âAllâŠAlright!â He whispers, caving in. âBut just a quickie!â
She smiles and brings her hips up, before lowering herself onto her love. Ever since the first time they did it, sheâs thought about no one else but him. Her dildo hasnât been used since that day, and sheâs even stopped going on trips with Bonnie & the rest of the Cheer Squad. Whenever she has a moment of free time, her mind goes straight to Ron.
Her hips start to rotate with him inside of her. Ron already finds himself clenching his bed sheets tightly. Out of all the women heâs been with, Kim has been the tightest by far. She starts to move back & forth now, sending his Cock in & out of her at her will. The sound of skin smacking skin fills the room, as Kim picks up the pace. She bites her bottom lip to hold back from screaming out in pleasure. But her moans are harder to keep in. Ron looks ready to blow, and canât stop himself from being quiet about it.
âOH GOD KIM!!! IâM GONNAâŠâ Kim puts her hand on his mouth, shutting him up. Thinking quickly, she leans in close and kisses him on the lips, just as they both hit their orgasm. Both of their bodies tremble, and their moans & screams are muffled by each others lips. Itâs a quiet orgasm between lovers. After a minute, Kim pulls away and breaks the kiss, leaving a thin, yet long line of saliva.
âThanks for the workout.â Kim says as she climbs off of Ron. âSee you at school, Big Ron.â She slips back into her Trench Coat and climbs out of the window, leaving Ron in his bed, tired & satisfied.
âYeahâŠsee yaâŠâ He says, not realizing sheâs already gone. He closes his eyes and grins widely as he tries to get in a few more hours of sleep. At least until he hears a familiar voice.
âOh, noâŠRON! Are you dreaming that youâre a Naked Mole Rat again?â
His eyes shoot open to see his mother staring right at him from the doorway. He screams and covers himself up with his blanket, turning bright red from the embarrassment.
Later that DayâŠ
In the Middleton High School Gym, Kim is with the rest of the Cheer Squad hard at work practicing their new cheer. Theyâve come up on the last routine, which requires two Cheerleaders to be flung high into the air and caught by their teammates. Heather launches Tara into the air, and a moment later sheâs caught by the team. Kim then runs at Bonnie, flips, and lets Bonnie launch her skyward. Sheâs ready to catch her on the way down when she notices Ron taking off his Mascot Head. Instantly Bonnie becomes lost in his handsome looks. Memories of the time they spent together at Camp Wannaweep, and her house when her parents & sisters werenât around, come flooding back. She becomes so distracted, she doesnât notice Kim hitting the floor hard behind her. But Kim gets up and quickly reminds her.
âNice catch, Bonnie!â Kim says sarcastically & angrily through her teeth.
âWell, maybe if you learn to land on your feet, KimâŠâ Bonnie replies, not looking at her.
âYOU WERE SUPPOSED TO CATCH ME!!!â Kim yells. âTHATâS THE WHOLEâŠwait, why are you staring at Ron?â
Bonnie realizes that she has been staring at him, and quickly turns to Kim. âHuh, uhâŠwhat are you talking about? I wasnât doing that.â
âYes. You were.â Kim says. âYou were totally focused on Ron.â
Bonnie starts to panic. She doesnât want word of her affair with Ron getting out around school. And she especially doesnât want her biggest rival being the one to find out. Thinking quickly, she makes up an excuse. âWellâŠtell him to stop wearing such tacky clothing. He looks like a Rodeo Clown.â
She quickly walks away from the group, making sure not to make eye contact. Kim, still freaked out by Bonnieâs actions, walks over to Ron. âHey, Ron.â She gives him a kiss on the cheek before grabbing her gym bag.
âHey, KP.â Ron says. âHow was practice?â
âIt was alright.â She says. âThough something strange happened. Bonnie was supposed to catch me on a routine, but she was too busy staring at you.â
Ronâs heart skips a beat, as thereâs a look of total shock on his face. He turns away from Kim before she can notice. âUhâŠwell maybe sheâs just noticing the Ron manâs appeal.â He says, telling the half-truth. âYou know, many women find guys like me attractive.â
Kim looks at Ron and smiles. âYeah, but at least I wonât have to worry about Bonnie taking you.â She says as they start to walk out of the Gym. Ron smiles innocently and scratches the back of his head, but in his mind heâs thinking about his times with Bonnie. As they enter the hall and pass the lockers, Ron finds himself pulled to the side by Monique.
âWHOA! Monique, whatâŠâ
âHey, Ron.â She says. âHow about you drop by Club Banana later today, and we can test out the new fitting rooms.â
âHey, Monique.â Kim says, appearing behind the two. âWhat were you saying about the fitting rooms?â
Monique starts to get nervous and changes the subject. âOH! Would you look at the time? Sorry, Kim. Canât hang out. Busy, busy, busy. TTYL!â She walks off quickly down the hall away from the two, much to Kimâs confusion.
âNow what was that all about?â Kim asks. A moment later, she hears the ring-tone on her Kimmunicator. She pulls it out to see Wadeâs face on the screen. âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
âTrouble down at LAX.â Wade tells her. âOne of their planes was just hijacked.â
âWeâre on it.â She says as she grabs Ron and heads out of the school.
An Hour LaterâŠ
Kim & Ron are above the clouds, flying through the air with their personal Jetpacks. As they approach LAX, Kim contacts Wade on the Kimmunicator. âWeâre coming up on LAX, Wade.â She says. âThe Jetpacks Dr. Porter lent us are Spankinâ.â
âNo problem, Kim.â He says. âHow does Ron like his?â
Wade gets his answer when he hears Ronâs loud & off-key singing. âHIGHWAY TO THE DANGER ZONE!!! Gonna take it RIGHT INTOâŠTHE DANGER ZOOOOOOOOOONEâŠâ
âRON!!!â Kim yells at him as she ends her communication with Wade. âWeâre here, Tom Cruise. So you can stop with the solo.â
They decrease the thrust on their Jetpacks and slowly begin to glide to the ground. Once they land, they shut them off and walk over to the scene of the crime. âActually, I think I have more of a Brad Pitt look.â Ron says. âOr maybe Matt Damon.â
They pass under the yellow tape and approach a man wearing a business suit. The man immediately turns his attention to them once he sees Kim. âThank goodness you could make it out here.â He tells them. âMy name is William Carter, owner of Will-It airways.â
âWhat exactly is going on here, Mr. Carter?â Kim asks.
âSome Psycho yelling woman barged through the terminals and scrambled onto the runway.â He says. âShe had a cameraman with them, and they took a Mini-Jet. It had some customers that were about to go on a skydiving adventure.â
Kim thinks for a second about who it could be. âWait a minute.â She says, turning to Ron. âYou donât think it could beâŠAdrena Lynn?â
âBut I thought she was locked behind bars.â He says. âDoing the whole 5-to-10 thing.â
âSIR! SIR! YOU GOTTA COME SEE THIS!!!â A Runway worker runs up to the scene carrying a Portable TV. He shows it to Mr. Carter, Kim & Ron. The first thing they see is Adrena Lynn on the screen.
âWHAT WILL SHE DO NEXT???â Adrena Lynn yells out.
âWell, guess that answers our question.â Ron says, stating the obvious.
âIâll tell you what Iâll do next, SHOCK TV, BABY! FREAKYYYYYYY!!!!!!!â She backs up from the camera a little bit, and shows several people behind her, bound & gagged. âIn case you didnât notice, Iâve taken these âExtremeâ wannabes hostage. My demands? Only one. Deliver to me the man who ruined my great career. I want Ron Stoppable!â
Everyone watching the Portable TV is in shock. They all turn their attention to Ron, who is just as shocked as they are. âBoy, you write one bad High School Newspaper article and it haunts you forever.â
The Not-So-Lucky Kim Possible 2
âDeliver Stoppable to me within the hour, or these people will have one hell of an extreme ride! FREAKYYYYYYY!!!â
Adrena Lynn cuts the feed, with her ransom demand already delivered. Kim looks at Ron, worried about him. âLooks like Lynn is still holding some bad blood over you.â She says to him.
âYeah, youâd think the Prison Psychiatrists would help her out with that.â Ron says.
âOK, we have a Crazy Adrenaline Freak, holding people hostage in a plane 30,000 feet in the air.â Kim says, analyzing the situation. âWith my weight, I just may be able to make it with the Jet-Pack.â
âNo need, Ms. Possible.â Mr. Carter says. âIâve chartered as small jet to help you get up to that height.â
âAppreciate it, Mr. Carter.â Kim says, before turning to Ron. âRon, youâre staying here.â
âWhat? No way, KP!â He protests. âWe go in this as a team.â
âNot this time.â She tells him. âAdrena Lynn wants you. And itâs too risky for you to be up that high with her, with nowhere to run. So youâre staying grounded.â
Ron reluctantly agrees and turns away from her, grumbling under his breath. âItâs not fair. Leave me grounded for the mission. I can help out! I mean, so what Adrena Lynn is after me. Itâs not like sheâsâŠâ Heâs cut off when a hand reaches out from the shadows and covers him mouth, pulling him into the shadows.
Meanwhile, Kim has just hopped on the plane, along with several GJ agents whoâve just arrived to back her up. They shut the door as the propellers begin to spin on the nose & the wings. The plane starts to roll along the runway, picking up speed until itâs able to lift off the ground. It soars up into the sky, as the pilot already zeroes in on the plane Adrena Lynn has hijacked.
âFound it!â The Pilot says. Sheâs been hiding above the clouds, but Iâve zeroed in on her location.â
âPerfect.â Kim says. âJust put us up next to her, and weâll handle the rest.â The Pilot does just that, steering the plane until itâs at the same level as Adrena Lynnâs. He positions the wing to hover just beside the adjacent planeâs door. Kim and the GJ Team get ready to board the plane.
âYou sure you can do this, little lady?â One agent asks.
Kim just smiles at him. âCheck the name.â And with that, she runs and leaps out of the door onto the planeâs wing. She does a front flip and propels herself back into the air. She kicks the adjacent planeâs door in and lands on it, ready for combat. âAlright, Adrena Lynn. YouâreâŠnot here.â
She doesnât see her on the plane, only the passengers who were taken hostage. âOh thank god youâre here!â One of them says. âAdrena LynnâŠshe left before we took off. Said the plane is being controlled remotely.â
âDonât worry, weâre here to get you back on the ground.â She says as GJ Agents board the plane and tend to them. She pulls out her Kimmunicator and phones Wade. âProblem, Wade. Adrena Lynn isnât up here.â
âI know.â He says, appearing on the screen typing on his computer. âMy reading show that her broadcast came from on the ground.â
âCan you trace it?â Kim asks.
âNo. She shut off the transmission before I could get a specific location.â He says. âBut I do know the area she was in. Iâm sending out my Wadebot to scan it.â
âIâm on my way, too.â Kim says. âLetâs just hope she hasnât gotten to Ron first.â
Meanwhile, on the groundâŠ
Ronâs back slams against a brick wall as the mysterious hand is still over his mouth. Once the hand is removed, he starts screaming.
âWAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!â
The hand goes back, and Ron hears a familiar voice. âOoh, I always did like a Screamer.â The hand comes back off of his mouth as he instantly recognizes the voice.
âAdrena Lynn?â
She steps out of the shadows to reveal herself. âThatâs right, baby!â she says. âAnd right now, things are gonna get hot & heavy. FREAKYYYYYYY!!!â
Before Ron can ask how, he feels her lips pressed hard against his. Her tongue shoots into his mouth like an arrow, and stays there. She reaches her hand into his pants and begins to jerk his Cock hard, looking like she wants him to come right then & there. Ron is in total shock, and can feel his manhood thickening by the second. Panicking, he pushes her away.
âWhat is WRONG with you, woman?â He says, trying to catch his breath from the passionate make-out session.
Adrena Lynn just smirks at him. âOoh, looks like the Ron Man wants to lead this dance. Then letâs Tango.â
She kisses him again, this time grabbing his hand and putting it deep into her pants. Ron instantly feels that sheâs wearing no panties at all. He pulls his hand back and breaks the kiss, much to Lynnâs annoyance. âWhatâs the matter, babe?â She asks. âNeed a little Kink?â She lifts up her shirt, showing Ron her perky round breasts. Heâs caught off guard as he notices she has both nipples pierced.
âWHOA!!! Did NOT expect that!â Before he can react, She pushes him forward onto the bed of a Pickup Truck. Unnoticed to Ron, Adrena Lynn has a Camera rolling from inside of the Truck, aimed at the two. She hops onto the bed and pulls a remote out of her pocket. A moment later, the Truckâs engine revs up, and it starts to drive down the alley, much to Ronâs surprise.
âHey! Whatâs going on?â He asks, getting nervous.
âIn just a few moments, Ron Stoppable, high school stud, will have his Cock deep within the Cunt of yours truly.â She says. âAnd to make it more exciting, he has to make me come before this Truck reaches Middleton Heights, and drives off the highest cliff! Itâll be extreme, itâll be dangerous, and itâll beâŠFREAKYYYYYYYY!!!!â
âYOU ARE OUTTA YOUR MIND!!!â Ron yells at her.
âProbably, but Iâm also horny as a Mink.â She says, bending down and straddling his legs. âAnd I want Big Cock in me, Baby!â She unbuckles his pants and pulls them down with his boxers to get to his Rod. With both hands, she starts stroking his shaft, trying to get him Rock Hard.
âCome on, Baby!â She says. âGet hard for mama!â
âGotta think about non-sexy things!â He quickly thinks. âBaseballâŠCold ShowersâŠThe School Lunch Lady toplessâŠâ
He struggles to put his mind on hideous and disgusting thoughts, trying to prevent an erection. But itâs no use. A couple of more seconds with her warm hands, and Ronâs hard as steel. âYes! That doctor lady was right!â Adrena Lynn says. âThe adrenaline rushing through your veins makes your blood pump faster! Meaning faster Hard-On!â
The truck turns a corner and barrels down the street, and Ron starts to realize that itâs being remote controlled. Meanwhile, Adrena Lynn now has her tight jeans down around her knees, and is ready for insertion. She brings her love lips to the head of his Cock, and slides down on it slowly, taking it all in. âWhoa! Bigger than I expected.â She says. âBut just how I like it!â
She begins to move her hips, getting the friction going between them. Ron has no choice but to hold on for dear life, as he palms her ass. âThatâs right baby!â She tells him. âGive into the kink.â She then turns her attention to the camera. âWill Ron Stoppable make me reach my climax before the âCliffhangerâ? Stay tuned and find out!â
High in the SkyâŠ
Kim, using her Jet pack, is soaring above Middleton looking for any sign of Ron and/or Adrena Lynn. Sheâs on her Kimmunicator with Wade, whoâs also using his Wade-Bot searching for any trace of the two. âAnything yet, Wade?â She asks.
âNada. She seems to be using some kind of jamming device to mask her location.â He says. âItâll take me a couple minutes to get past its firewalls.â
âWork fast, Wade.â She tells him. âI gotta bad feeling with her, Ronâs in for the ride of his life.â
Back in the Truck Bed, Adrena Lynn is giving him the ride of his life. Bouncing on his Rod like she was riding a Mechanical Bull. âOH YEAH!!!â She screams. âThis is better than when I rode the head bull in Spain!â
âThis doesnât make sense!â Ron says, still holding onto her for dear life. âYou faked your extreme stunts! How did you become brave enough for this?â
âBlame your girl scout girlfriend, stud!â She tells him. âYou could say I lost a little sanity while I was in the big house.â
âYeah, well I think Iâm about to lose something myself.â He says, feeling close to his climax.
âAh, ah, ah! Remember, the only way for the Truck to stop is if I get my rocks off!â She tells him. âIf you come and I donât, that just means we go for the ultimate rideâŠtogether! FREAKYYYYYYYYY!!!!!â
âSheâs right. The Truck wonât stop until she comes.â Ron thinks to himself. âBut Iâm close to popping my cork, and she still looks like she can go a few more rounds. How can IâŠâ His train of thought stops, as he notices her breasts jiggling with each bounce she takes. He also sees her pierced nipples, and the light gleaming off of the metal. Coming up with a desperation plan, he grabs her piercings and starts to tweak them. âAlright Lynn, letâs see how Kinky you are.â
Adrena Lynn instantly starts screaming for more. âOH FUCK!!! YEAH, BABY! WORK THE KINK!!!â She starts to feel it herself. The combo of getting fucked and having her nipples played with is bringing her rapidly to her own climax. âYEAH! I FEEL IT! IâM COMINââŠEXTREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEME!!!!!!!!!â
She hits her orgasm hard, and tosses her head back into the air. Her entire body tenses up, and trembles with pleasure. A moment later, Ron hits his limit, and shoots off his load deep inside of her pussy, filling her up. She then falls on top of Ron, feeling completely drained. Ron feels like passing out himself, but snaps out of it when he remembers that the Truck is still going.
âMustâŠreachâŠremoteâŠâ He says, trying to reach for the remote Adrena Lynn dropped in the middle of her orgasm. Heâs able to get a finger on it, and presses the button, as the Truck starts to slow down. After a minute, it comes to a complete stop. Ron breathes a sigh of relief. But his calm only last for a second, as a metal claw clangs onto the edge of the Truck, scaring him half to death.
âWAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!! DEATH MACHINE!!!!!â
Ron then notices the Claw is connected to the Wade-Bot 2.0, which is there to rescue him. âRon, itâs Wade. We tracked you and AdrenaâŠLynnâŠ?â
Wade sees Adrena Lynn lying on top of Ron, half naked, passed out, Ron still inside of her. âGoing thru Stockholm Syndrome?â Wade asks smugly.
âVery funny, Wade.â Ron says. âNow help me get her off.â
âLooks like you donât really need my help for that.â Wade says with a smirk.
âWADE!!!â Ron yells annoyed.
âAlright, Iâll help.â He says. âYou better get straightened up. Kimâs less than a minute away from hereâ
Ron takes Wadeâs advice, straightening himself up and getting out of the Truck. They just finish getting Adrena Lynn fully dressed when Kim comes down from the clouds and lands right beside them. She runs over and hugs Ron, grateful that heâs OK.
âRon! Thank goodness youâre not hurt.â She says, before looking over to see Adrena Lynn still passed out. âWhat happened?â
âUhâŠshe wasâŠuhâŠâ Ron tries to think of a quick excuse, but nothing comes to mind for him. As he starts to panic more, Wade steps in for the save.
âShe tried to go through with an extreme plan to get rid of Ron.â He tells Kim. âBut got scared at the last minute and passed out.â
âThat makes sense.â She says. âIâm just glad that everyone is OK.â
At that moment, several FBI vehicles roll up to the scene, and Agents pile out to take Adrena Lynn into custody. As Kim begins to talk to the captain on duty, Ron turns to Wade. âThanks, man.â He says. âI almost panicked there.â
âNo problem, Ron.â He tells him. âBut if I were you, Iâd straighten everything out with Kim. And I mean everything.â Ron nods his head in agreement, knowing heâs right.
The Next NightâŠ
Itâs a rainy evening in Middleton, as Kim stands with Ron in front of his house. Kim is dressed in her mission gear, while Ron is wearing his regular outfit. The two are having an argument about going on the mission.
âKim, you gotta let me go with you.â Ron pleads.
âI said no.â Kim tells him. âAdrena Lynn came after you yesterday, and Wade just found out she was hired to do so. Itâs too dangerous now. That means you stay home, until I can figure out whoâs behind this.â
âWell, at least take Rufus with you.â He says, bringing him out of his pocket. Rufus jumps out of Ronâs hand and lands in Kimâs pocket, not giving her a chance to protest.
âAlright, he can come along.â She says. âBut you stay here. Besides, Itâll give you time to study for that big math test. You need to pass it to graduate.â
âYeah, I guess so.â He says solemnly. âYou stay safe out there, KP.â
She leans in and kisses him gently on the lips, before pulling away and reassuring him. âItâs just a quick reconnaissance mission. No big. I find out some information, jot it down, and be back in time for dinner.â
Just then, a Mac Truck rolls up in front of Ronâs house. The Driver honks the horn, signaling Kim. âAnd that will be my ride. See ya!â She runs over to the Truck and hops in, as Ron waves goodbye from the doorway. As the Truck rolls off, Ron goes back into his house and shuts the door behind him.
âAw, man. Left behind again.â He says, upset about not going with Kim. âI need something to take my mind off of this. I wonder if I still have Zombie Stompers?â
On the other side of townâŠ
Deep within a Dark Alley, a dark, shadowy figure wearing a Trench Coat approaches the side of the Police building. A quick flash of lightning shows that the figure is Shego. She raises her right hand, and it begins to glow bright green. And with one quick chop, she tears down the bricks to the side of the building. After the dust clears, we see sheâs ripped into the holding cell area. A moment later, Adrena Lynn comes running out.
âGeez, what took ya?â She says. âI was going stir crazy in there.â
âDrakken forgot to refuel the Hovercraft.â She says, reaching into her Trench Coat. She pulls out a stack of bills and hands it to her. âHereâs your payment.â
âSweet!â Lynn says. âNow I got enough to finance my incredible comeback! FREEE–!!â
Shego interrupts by putting her hand over her mouth. âYeâyou need to stop that now.â She says. âItâs getting annoying.â
âHey, why did you need me to distract Ron Stoppable?â Lynn asks. âI thought you were going after his girlfriend.â
âI am.â Shego tells her. âI just needed to keep the Princess busy while I got the tools to teach her a lesson.â
The Not-So-Lucky Kim Possible 3
âAre you gonna be OK here alone, sweetie?â
Ron stands in front of his doorway like last time, only his parents are the ones standing outside in the rain. Theyâre dressed up and look like theyâre heading out for a night on the town. âMom, Iâm 17. I think Iâll be perfectly fine here by myself.â Ron tells her.
âCome on, honey.â Ronâs Father says. âThe Actuaryâs Convention has already started. And we wanna beat the rain.â Ron gets a kiss on the cheek from his Mom, before she joins her husband in the limo they rented. They hop in and drive off, leaving Ron by himself at home. He walks back into the house, closing the door behind him.
âNo parents, no Rufus, no KimâŠsure is lonely around here.â He says to himself. âI gotta think of something to do. Maybe I should take Kimâs advice, and start studying for my math final.â He thinks about it for a second, then comes to a decision. âI wonder if the O Boyz special is on?â
He runs up the stairs and heads towards his room, where he jumps onto his bed. He grabs the remote and is about to flick on the TV, when he hears a noise coming from outside. Instinctively, he looks at the window. A flash of lightning reveals a shadowy figure standing outside.
âKim?â He thinks to himself out loud. âCould she be back already?â
He climbs out of his bed and slowly walks towards his window, stopping short once heâs right beside it. He takes a deep breath to calm himself down, then jumps in front of the window and opens it wide, just as lightning strikes again.
âWAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!â
âAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!â
âWaitâŠBonnie?â The light from Ronâs room shines out enough to show that itâs Kimâs cheerleading Rival.
âAre you gonna let me in or what, Stoppable?â She says, pushing him out of the way and entering his room. Sheâs wearing her school Varsity Jacket along with her cheerleading outfit, but is still soaking wet from the rain. Ron immediately grabs a towel and wraps it around her.
âWhat are you doing here?â Ron asks.
âYou mean besides standing out there getting drenched waiting for you to let me in?â She replies, in her usual smart way. âI heard Kim went off on a mission and left you here.â She starts drying off her hair, as she walks towards him. âI thought you were lonely and needed company.â
Ron has a confused look on his face. âWaitâŠhow did you find out I was alone?â
She pauses for a second and her eyes grow wide. Quickly, she changes the subject. âHey! Arenât you gonna let me use your shower? I mean I was out there in the rain, in a tree. Do you know how many germs I could have now?â
âOh, uhâŠâ He walks over to his door and points her in the direction of his bathroom. âItâs right down the hall, make a left.â
âThanks.â She says, making her way down there. âAnd no peeking!â
He watches her walk down the hallway. Even though itâs dimly lit, he can still make out the wonderful apple-shape of her ass. Itâs enough to make him poke through his pajama bottoms. Very visible, if not for the darkness. As she turns into the bathroom, Ron continues staring at nothing. His thoughts go back to that night at Camp Wannaweep, and how she helped him âconquerâ his fears. But the sound of a running shower brings him back to reality, and he quickly ducks back into his room, trying to snap himself out of his horniness.
âOK, Ron. Remember, youâre with Kim now.â He says to himself. âSo what you have a cheerleader just as hot as her using your shower right now. Youâre with Kim now.â He stands there, battling with reason & instinct. Steady reminding himself that heâs in a relationship, yet battling the urge to take Bonnie & ravage her in that shower over & over. Finally, Instinct wins outâŠbut not by much.
âOK, just a quick peak.â He says as he walks out of his room and towards the shower. âI mean she probably doesnât even look fit anymore. She has been taking a few more cupcakes at lunchâŠmaybe sheâs getting a little fat.â He reaches the bathroom door, reassuring himself that Bonnieâs not sexy. Unfortunately, heâs dead wrong. As he peeks through the door, he can clearly see Bonnieâs figure through the shower door. Pear-shaped, perky round breasts, long legs, and a heavenly ass. His Cock grows rock hard, and looks like it could penetrate steel.
âOK, I was wrong!â Ron says quietly, pulling back from the door. He quickly retreats to his room and gives himself another pep talk. âAlright, Stoppable. When she comes back in here, just say youâre with Kim now. And you canât fool around anymore. Yeah, simple enough. Iâll just tell herâŠâ
He turns to his doorway, only to see Bonnie standing there wearing his old Bueno Nacho T-shirt, and nothing else. Sheâs drying her hair with a towel as she walks into the room. âTell me what, Ron?â She asks.
Ronâs confidence dies quicker than an Extra on Star Trek. âThat youâre so damn sexy.â
Bonnie smiles warmly at him. âThanks, Ron.â She says. âI needed to hear that. Youâve been a good guy to me, and I think you need a thank you gift.â
She places her hand on his chest, and gently starts pushing him backwards until he falls on his bed. She then walks over to Ronâs stereo and turns it on. Ironically, itâs tuned in on a love song station, which is exactly what she wanted. She begins to dance for him, slowly moving her hips seductively, immediately getting his attention. His eyes grow as wide as dinner plates, his jaw drops, and all of his focus is now on her. As she moves, she lifts up her shirt to reveal black lace panties. Ron looks about ready to burst now.
âOh good gravy, sheâs wearing lace.â He thinks to himself. âNO! Must stay strong, Stoppable! I gotta tell her! I gotta tell her right now thatâŠI wanna hit that so hard.â
She lifts the shirt up more, showing off her navel & her washboard stomach. Ron looks like heâs in a hypnotic state, as she gyrates closer to him. His eyes follow her hip movements, never trailing away, not even for a second. Bonnie then straddles him and lifts up the shirt even more, showing the bottom of her round tits, and basically telling him sheâs not wearing a bra. She moves to the music like a belly dancer, and her moves are just as trance inducing. Her crotch rubs against his, and even between the fabric, Ron can feet how wet sheâs getting. His hands begin to shake as Reason & Instinct battle again for his decision. He wants to grabs hold of her, run his tongue over every inch of her, and plow into her until she loses her voice screaming his name. But Reason wins this round, as he sits up quickly, knocking Bonnie off of him and onto the floor. He gets up and turns off the radio, as Bonnie stands up, obviously upset.
âWhat the hell, Ron?â She asks. âI thought we were going somewhere.â
He takes a long sigh and begins. âLook, BonnieâŠI know what weâve been doing feels good. I mean REAL good. But, IâŠâ
âWait, I got something to say too.â Bonnie says, sounding serious. âRon, youâreâŠannoying, lazy, sloppy, you have the worst taste in clothes in human history, youâre uncoordinated in every sport, you have no large musclesâŠplus youâre voice kinda cracks when youâre angry.â
Ronâs look changes to one of total shock. He canât believe what Bonnie has just said to him in his own house. As his anger grows, he finds it much easier to tell her off. âOh yeah, little lady?â He says, voice cracking. âWell, youâŠâ
âBut youâre a really sweet guy.â She continues. âA lot nicer than some of the jocks I dated. And I know I treated you rotten for a whileâŠbut I really do appreciate you, Ron.â She walks up to him and grabs his hardening Cock through his pajama bottoms. âAnd I wanna show you how much.â
Ronâs back to square one again. He tries to speak, but the words die in his mouth. Reason & Instinct are battling to see what Ronâs choice would be. Instinct takes the win, and Ron leans in close to kiss Bonnie on the lips. They embrace each other tightly, looking like theyâre reunited lovers who just found each other after years. Finally, after what seemed like an eternity, they break the kiss.
âBonnieâŠâ Ron says, still having doubts about this. ââŠI canât. I meanâŠKim andâŠâ
âKimâs not here.â She tells him, gently pushing him back onto the bed. âAnd we were both alone tonight. And no one should be alone.â
She presses a button on his stereo system to get the music playing again, then turns off the light in the room before climbing in bed with him and straddling him once more. They kiss again, this time more passionately. Bonnieâs tongue delves into Ronâs mouth without delay, as they embrace each other. Lightning flashes outside, illuminating the two for a moment. Ronâs hand roams under her shirt, and he starts to fondle her lovely breasts. After a minute, Ron rolls over on top of her, making sure to keep the kiss locked. Now Bonnieâs hands go to work, as she grabs the bottom of Ronâs shirt and starts pulling. She breaks the kiss, but only long enough to pull his shirt off to reveal his bare chest. Ron then lifts her shirt up, enough to bring her breasts out into the open.
âPut it in me, Big Ron.â She says. âFuck me now!â
Ron nods his head and pulls his pajama bottoms down, just enough to let out Ron jr. Bonnie quickly slides her black panties off and lies there, spread eagle, waiting to be entered. Ron brings the head of his rod to her lips, then slowly forced it inside of her. Bonnie starts to wince a little. Even though sheâs been with Ron for a while, sheâs still not use to having someone so big inside of her. Especially since Brick Flagg comes up short in that department. Once heâs deep inside, her face straightens up. She looks up at him, and the two kiss once more. Ron starts working up a slow stroke, much to Bonnieâs delight. The sound of thunder echoes throughout the room as Ron strokes into her over & over. Minutes pass by before Bonnie breaks the kiss, and starts to moan.
âYeah. Oh yeah!â She moans. âGive it to me, Big Ron! Faster!â
As soon as those words exit her mouth, Ron starts to speed up his work. He doesnât go lightning speed as he has in the past, instead he drills into her harder, making her grunt & moan with every thrust. Bonnie starts to grit her teeth, as she digs her fingernails into his back. Not enough to draw blood, but enough for him to feel it. The bed starts to squeak louder, and thunder echoes through the room again, as Ron continues plowing into the Cheerleader.
âManâŠI forgot how tight you are.â He says, feeling tons of friction now.
âYEAH! FUCK ME, BIG RON!!!â She yells. âFUCK MY PUSSY HARD!!!â
âBoy, I am SO glad my parents arenât home to hear that.â He thinks to himself.
Ronâs now drilling her harder than heâs ever done before. The sound of skin smacking against skin rivals the occasional thunder strike heard in the room. Bonnie holds on to his bed sheets tightly, as sheâs now dripping with sweat, looking like she just stepped out of the shower. Her breathing his heavy and her moans get louder each time Ron pounds her soaking pussy. Finally, sheâs had all she could take, and reaches her limit.
âOH, FUCK!!!â She screams. âIâM CUMING, RON!!!â
âY-Y-YOU ARENâT THE ONLY ONE!!!â
He pulls out of her just in the nick of time. A split second later, he sprays his load out like a firehose, covering her stomach & her breasts with his cum. His cock rests on her clit, as he sits there, trying to catch his breath. He wipes the sweat from his forehead, takes a deep breath & exhales, after an intense fucking session.
âThatâŠwas spankinâ.â He says, out of breath. âHow was it forâŠâ
He quickly gets his answer as Bonnie sits up and kisses him passionately. After a minute, she backs away, leaving a small, but long line of saliva. âYou were fantastic, babe.â She tells him. âI never came so hard before.â She crawls off of the bed, leaving Ron sitting there. In the back of his mind there are feelings of satisfaction & regret.
MeanwhileâŠ
On the other side of the world, somewhere near Cairo, Egypt, thereâs a small local cafĂ©, where some of the seediest lowlifes hang out. Inside, the place is fairly empty, save for a few thugs hanging out by the bar. But their attention quickly turns to the door once they notice a blonde haired woman walking through the doors. Sheâs wearing a red dress, with black high heels, and carrying a purse. Immediately, she notices a person in the room. More notably, Adrena Lynnâs cameraman. She walks over and introduces herself.
âHello, handsome.â She says in a high-pitched voice, making her seat on his lap.
âUhâŠhey yourself, beautiful.â He says nervously.
âWhatâs a rugged strong man like you doing in here?â She asks.
âWell, IâmâŠsort of helping out with a big plan.â He says, laughing nervously.
âOoh. And just how âBigâ is it?â She asks, leaning in. She lets her hand pull down just enough to reveal the nipples of her breasts, which drives him crazy.
âOh, mama!â He says. âWell, me & Adrena Lynn are working with some Mad Scientist and his Green Lady sidekick to take down that teen hero. You know, Kim Possible.â
The lady grins and cocks an eyebrow up. âThatâs all I needed to hear.â And before he can blink, he finds his face smashed down on the table. The woman then gets up and connects with an Axe kick, planting her leg down on the back of his neck. She then takes off the blonde wig, revealing her identity as Kim Possible. She digs into her purse and pulls out her Kimmunicator, getting Wade on the line.
âWade, I have a lead.â She tells him. âAdrena Lynn and her flunkie are in league with Drakken & Shego.â
âWell, that explains her breakout.â Wade says. âBut we need more info.â
âAnd thatâs why Iâm going in deeper.â She says, taking her leg off of his neck. She walks towards the exit, being checked out by everyone else in the room, but not dare being approached. She walks out of the door and into the night, determined to find out everything thatâs going on.
The Not So Lucky Kim Possible 4
âHonestly, Ron. You really need to learn how to update your wardrobe.â
Ronâs sitting on the edge of his bed looking at Bonnie, whoâs perusing through his closet and tossing most of his clothes on the floor. âI mean Maroon is not a color you should wear in the fall.â She says, holding up one of his shirts.
Ron reaches over and grabs his communicator. âKim hasnât even checked in yet.â He says. âBetter call Wade to get the 4-1-1.â Before he can activate the call button, Bonnie pushes him down on his bed and climbs onto him.
âI swear, you worry about Ms. Perfect too much, Ron.â She tells. âWhy think about her, when you got Bon-Bon here to yourself.â She leans in closer to him, and grins seductively. âAnd Iâm ready for round 2.â
Just then, the doorbell sounds throughout the house. As soon as Ron hears it, he sits up, knocking Bonnie off of him and onto the floor. He jets out of the room and down the stairs, thinking it may be Kim. Or even worse, his parents. He stops in front of the door, and starts thinking of a plan. âOK, Stoppable. You just gotta be a man, and tell the truth.â He thinks to himself. âBecause the truth will set me free!â
He reaches for the doorknob and opens the door wide, and is surprised to see Monique standing there. âHey, Ron. Whatâs going on?â She says with a grin.
âMonique! What are you doing here?â Ron asks, still startled.
âYeah Monique, what ARE you doing here?â Bonnie asks, coming down the stairs.
âWell, I was in the neighborhood and decided, my good friend Ron could use a big helping of Nacos!â She says, showing Ron a bag from Bueno Nacho from behind her back. âTheyâre Grande Sized!â
âBOOYA! SCORE!!!â Ron says with a big grin, as he reaches for the bag. But Monique pulls it back, out of his reach.
âUh-uh, boy. I gotta warm these up in the microwave.â She tells him. âNow you just go upstairs and make yourself comfortable.â Ron does exactly that, turning around and making his way back up the stairs, as Bonnie comes all the way down the steps. Monique heads into the kitchen and for the Microwave, followed by Bonnie.
âWhat exactly are you doing here, Monique?â Bonnie asks her again.
âThe same reason youâre here, girl.â Monique answers. âKimâs on a mission, Ronâs all alone, and Iâm feeling horny.â
âI have no idea what youâre talking about.â Bonnie scoffs. âIâm hereâŠ. just to borrow some of his notes from History.â
âYeah right, and Iâm Beyonce.â Monique puts the bag into the microwave and turns it on, before turning her attention to Bonnie. âCould you at least help out and get me a few plates?â
âAlright, fine.â Bonnie groans. âBut just because youâre here donât expect to get him anytime soon. You can have him when I get tired or something.â
As Bonnie walks into the cupboard, she quickly finds the door being slammed shut behind her. Outside of the cupboard, Monique pushes a chair under the doorknob to lock her in there. âYou mean when I get tired of him, girl.â Monique says with a smirk. âAnd trust me, I got a lot of endurance in me right now.â She hears the microwave beeping, and walks over to take the Nacos out, before running out of the kitchen and up the stairs, leaving Bonnie trapped in the cupboard.
Once Monique reaches the top of the stairs, she makes a beeline towards Ronâs room, where she sees him about to contact Kim on the Communicator. âOh, Damn!â She thinks. âI canât let him call Kim, itâll ruin everything!â
Thinking quickly, she walks into the room and âaccidentallyâ bumps into Ron, causing him to drop the Communicator on his bed. âMy bad, Ron.â She says. âGuess I better watch where Iâm going. Hereâre your Nacos.â
She hands him the bag as he sits down on his bed. She sits down right beside him, and slides the Communicator further away from him, out of his reach. He opens the bag and unwraps the first Naco, before taking a big bite out of it. âMmmm, these are some tasty Nacos.â He says, mouth full.
âI know something thatâs also tasty.â Monique utters, licking her lips. She places her hand on his thigh and moves it inward. Ronâs too busy scarfing down the Naco to even notice. Her hand slowly moves towards his pants zipper, and she begins to unzip him. She reaches inside and quickly finds his manhood, grabbing firm hold of the shaft. She then slides off the bed and onto her knees in front of Ron, pulling his Cock out. All of this goes unnoticed by Ron, whoâs engulfed in the flavor of his Naco.
âYou know, itâs the little inventions like these that make the world great.â He says, mouth still full. âIf that Thomas Edison guy, or Benjamin Whatshisname invented stuff like this, we wouldâŠhaveâŠaâŠâ
He takes a swallow of his food, then looks down to see Moniqueâs mouth already wrapped around his Cock. Instantly he thinks of telling her to stop, but the heavenly sensation washes over his body as her tongue rolls over every inch of his shaft. Still, he forces the words out anyway.
âMoniqueâŠwe canâtâŠâ
She takes his Rod out of her mouth and starts to stroke it in her hand as she looks up at him. âCalm down, Ron. Whatâs a little fuck between friends?â She says with a seductive grin. âBesides, you were alone tonight. And no one should be alone.â
Suddenly, Ron starts to hear the loud pounding coming from Bonnie downstairs. âWhat was that?â He asks.
âOh, nothing.â Monique says, smiling.
âWait a minute, whereâs Bonnie?â He asks.
âOh, she just ran out for more Bueno Nacho.â She tells him.
âIn the middle of a rainstorm?â
Monique decides to put an end to Ronâs questions, and tackles him to his bed, pressing her mouth to his. Her tongue roams into his mouth, as her hands are hard at work unbuttoning her Cargo Pants. She breaks the kiss and starts pulling them down, revealing a sexy pink thong that wraps around her hips. She kicks off her pants and starts pulling down her thong as Ron backs up to his own headboard.
âLook, Monique, Iâve been meaning to talk to you.â He says.
âI know, baby.â She says. âI missed your Cock in me just as much as you missed my tight, warm pussy.â
She gets her thong off and straddles Ron. Her pussy hovers over his rock hard manhood, and uses her fingers to split herself open, before coming down on his pipe. She starts biting down on her bottom lip. The fight that Ronâs been putting up is now long over, as he decides to just enjoy this moment. He grabs her ass and clenches it, as he starts to guide her movements.
âOh yeah! Thatâs it, boy!â She moans. âFuck me! Fuck me good!â
Her hands are on the top of his headboard, as she leans out over him, her breasts rocking back & forth directly above him, teasing him hypnotically, until he shoots forward and wraps his mouth around her nipple. He sucks them, and licks them, all the while bring Monique closer to her limit. Her moans fill the entire room, and echo throughout the house. Her hips are almost a blur, as she bounces of up & down on his Rod like a trampoline. The two are sweating buckets now, and Moniqueâs hair is wild and frizzled (even more than usual).
âFUCK!â Monique screams. âOH, GOD! IâM GONNAâŠâ
The words down come out of her mouth, but she doesâŠhard. Her orgasm causes her entire body to tense up, freezing in place, before she falls to the bed. Ron sits up, feeling exhausted from the whole event. âAw, man. How am I gonna explain this to Kim?â He says to himself. âI didnât even get off myself.â
At that moment, Bonnie appears in Ronâs doorway, looking pissed. âYou little witch.â She says, pointing at Monique, whoâs just now snapping out of her orgasm-induced ecstasy. âYou think you can keep Ron all for yourself, think again!â
She charges the bed and, using amazing agility as a cheerleader, leaps over Ron and tackles Monique off of it, to the ground. Immediately a Cat Fight breaks out, completely with Hair Pulling and scratching.
âHeâs my Big Ron!â Bonnie says, tugging on a chunk of Moniqueâs hair.
âOh not without a fight, girl!â Monique counters, biting Bonnieâs arm.
Ron looks on with shock from his bed. Countless times heâs dreamed of this moment with countless women taking part in it. In fact, he pinches himself to see if it is a dream. âNope, itâs real.â He says to himself. Then his mind wanders to Kim, and he starts to say something he never thought he would in his life. âOK, I canât believe Iâm about to say this butâŠLADIES, STOP FIGHTING OVER ME!!!â
It doesnât work. The two are still going at it like itâs the WWE. Just then, Ron notices his Communicator beeping, indicating he has a call. âMust be Wade calling about some new cheat codes.â He says, picking it up. But once he answers, itâs Kimâs face that appears on the scream.
âWAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!! KIM!!!!â
Bonnie & Monique stop their fight as soon as Ron says her name. They both duck behind the bed, not wanting Kim to know about their fun with him. âYeah Ron, itâs me.â Kim says, feeling confused. âWhatâs with the screaming?â
âOH! Uh, I was justâŠwatching scary movies. Yeah!â Ron tells her. âItâs the All-Night bloodsucker, brain-eating monster marathon on.â
Behind the bed, Monique & Bonnie try to stay low and out of Kimâs sight, until Monique accidentally smashes Bonnieâs hand. âHey! Do you mind not touching the hands? I just got them manicured.â Bonnie whispers.
âWell maybe if youâd move those boxing gloves out of the wayâŠâ Monique responds.
âWell, better to just have big hands, than big everything else.â Bonnie replies with a smirk.
âOh, that is it!â Monique says. âYOU ARE GOING DOWN!!!â
And at the drop of a hat, the two are at it again. The fight spills out onto Ronâs bed. Right behind Ron, and right in Kimâs sight. âBonnie? Monique? What are they doing over there, Ron?â Kim asks.
The two realize theyâve blown their own cover, and decide to stop the fight. They turn to the screen and wave at Kim, as Ron desperately tries to think of an excuse. Any excuse. âUhâŠMonique was deliveringâŠBueno Nacho and, BonnieâŠwas showing me new cheer moves?â Ron says, hoping that Kim will buy it. Both women nod their heads in agreement and smile, not wanting to get on the bad side of someone who knows multiple forms of Kung-Fu.
âIâm not buying it, Ron.â Kim says. âMaybe Monique, but there would be no way Bonnie would walk into your house.â
âIt is a bit on the Tacky side.â Bonnie says, agreeing with Kim. At least until Monique elbows her in the gut.
âRon, I want the truth. Why is my best friend and my rival in your room, in yourâŠâ She gets cut off as the picture goes wonky. The camera shakes violently, not letting Ron get a clear view of whatâs going on.
âKim? Kim, are you OK?â Ron asks, getting nervous. Bonnie & Monique crowd around him and stare at the screen, which is still shaky and not showing a clear picture. After a minute, the shaking stops and the screen shows the sky, indicating Kimâs Kimmunicator has been dropped. A loud punch is heard connecting, followed by a sickening thud, then footsteps.
âKim! Whatâs going on? Do you need help?â Ron yells, starting to panic. Footsteps are heard, followed shortly by the sound of a body being dragged. The footsteps get softer, and softer, until they can no longer be heard. In fact, nothing is heard. And it puts a fright inside of the three. âOh, god! KIM!!! Please, answer me! KIM!!!â
The Not So Lucky Kim Possible 5
Ron switches frequencies and tries to contact Wade. It takes a second, by heâs finally able to get him on. âRon, is that you?â Wade asks.
âYeah, Wade.â Ron says. âSomething happened to Kim andâŠâ
âI know, Iâm on it now.â Wade says, as he starts typing on his keyboard. âIâm scanning the area for anything unusual signs or energy signatures.â
Ron waits impatiently, looking more worried than heâs been in his entire life. Both Bonnie& Monique are also concerned for Kimâs safety. After several moments of typing, Wade suddenly stops, and it makes the sick feeling in Ronâs stomach even sicker. âWhat is it, Wade?â Ron asks. Wade stays silent, not wanting to tell Ron the info. â Dammit Wade, donât hold out on me. What happened?â
âKim was attackedâŠby Shego.â
âWhy am I not surprised?â Ron says, a look of anger growing on his face. Bonnie & Monique look at each other confused.
âWait, just wait. Who is this Shego?â Bonnie says.
âYour guess is as good as mine, girl.â Monique answers.
âWade, Iâm gonna need a ride, and Kimâs last known coordinates.â Ron tells him, sounding surprisingly professional.
âIâm on it. Iâll alert the Global Justice Airship & Dr. Director.â Wade says.
Ron puts down his Communicator, stands up and walks over to his closet. He begins to pick out his mission clothes and tosses them on the bed, as the two ladies look on, still feeling left out. âI am so confused, itâs not even funny.â Monique says, as she picks up the Communicator and questions Wade. âAlright Wade, give us the 4-1-1.â
âMonique, I donât think nowâs a good time forâŠâ Monique shoots him a look of seriousness, which changes Wadeâs mind. âAlright. Kimâs been kidnapped by Shego, who works for a mad scientist named Dr. Drakken.â
âYou mean that ugly blue guy Kim always talks about?â Bonnie asks.
âThatâs him.â Wade says. âIâm trying to locate his lair now. But regardlessâŠâ
âIâm going in to save her.â Ron says, fully dressed & putting on a black jacket. âThe guys at Global Justice will drop you two off at your houses. Right now, Ron Stoppable has to go to work.â
He turns and is ready to walk right out of the door, when he feels his arm being grabbed. He turns back to see Monique holding on to him. âNot alone you donât, boy. Weâre going, too!â
âUh-Uh! No way! Too dangerous!â Ron tells them.
âRon, Kimâs our best friend too!â Monique tells him. âAnd we arenât just gonna sit back while somethingâs happened to her.â
âUm, Iâm perfectly happy with not saving Kim and staying out of trouble.â Bonnie interrupts.
âOh yeah? Well, OK.â Monique says. âGo ahead. Miss out on your only chance to show up Kim and rub it all in her face.â
Bonnie thinks for a moment, just a moment, before she comes to a decision. âAlright, Iâm in this too.â
The two of them hop off the bed and charge Ronâs closet, picking out his spare mission outfits and putting them on. Ron looks on with his jaw dropped, and wonders how theyâre tagging along with him. He wants to say something, but realizes it wouldnât work anyway. Just then, the sound of Helicopter propellers whirling can be heard from outside. Itâs the GJ Airship. Ron dashes out of his room and down the stairs, before opening the front door to see them on his front lawn.
âWhoaâŠâ Itâs the only word that can come out of his mouth, and itâs more than enough to describe their mobile headquarters. Monique & Bonnie join him at the doorway fully clothed, and are rendered speechless themselves. The door to the airship slides open, revealing the silhouette of a person standing there. After a moment, their eyes adjust to the light to see that itâs Dr. Director.
âWeâve received your message, Ronald.â She says. âAnd weâre ready to take you to the destination. Are both of your friends coming along?â
âWell, actuallyâŠâ
âYes we are!â The two of them says, cutting him off. They both run on board the ship, followed reluctantly by Ron. The door slides shut behind them as the Airship takes off for Kimâs last known whereabouts. Inside the ship, the three are lead into the main bridge, where dozens of GJ Agents are watching dozens of monitors tracking Kimâs whereabouts.
âUnfortunately weâve lost track of Drakkenâs lair.â Dr. Director tells them. âHe seems to have upgraded his cloaking technology. But weâve got our best volunteer man on the job.â
âWade?â Ron asks.
âYes, how did you know?â She asks.
âGet the best man for the best job.â He answers. As they reach the center of the bridge, a scientist approaches them with three shoeboxes, and hands each one to them. They open them up to see what looks to be normal sneakers.
âUgh. Sneakers?â Bonnie says. âYou couldâve at least got us Brand Name.â
âWhat a minute.â Ron says. âThese areâŠâ
âYes. The same Superspeed Sneaker technology used by Kim to defeat the Killer Bebe Bots.â Dr. Director says. âWe believe that they might be helpful in your rescue mission.â
Ron takes them out of the box as he slips out of his old shoes. He puts these on and tests them out, jetting around the bridge five times in the blink of an eye. He stops in front of the three, as if he never left. âBOOYA, SUPER SPEED! But, wonât the shoes get stuck on me if I overuse them?â Ron asks.
âNot at all. Global Justice made significant improvements to the technology to ensure that there are no malfunctions.â She tells him.
âOh, I gotta try these babies on!â Monique says.
Just then, an Agent runs up to the 4 and hands Dr. Director a note. Her look changes to a somber one as she turns to Ron. âRonald, Iâm afraid I have terrible news.â Ron starts to become concerned as she continues. âRufus was just picked up by fellow agents and rushed to the Veterinarian. Heâs in serious, but stable condition.â
A feeling of shock overwhelms Ron, followed by feelings of pure rage. âOh, no. Theyâre done for now.â Monique says. Bonnie nods her head in agreement. Even the two ladies know that you donât harm Rufus, Ronâs best friend.
âNo oneâŠmessesâŠwith the Mole Rat.â
MeanwhileâŠ
Kimâs eyes slowly begin to open. Her vision is blurry, and it doesnât help that thereâs a bright light shining in her face. She tries to move, but find that her wrists and ankles have been shackled down. Someone has her locked up. And Kim finds out who once she hears a familiar voice.
âWakey, wakey, Sleeping Beauty.â
Her vision clears up just in time, to see Shego standing in front of her, wearing a confident smirk. Sheâs wearing a black & green halter top along with a long skirt, and high heeled boots. âShego.â Kim says coldly. âI take it youâre the one that attacked me in the alley.â
âYou got that right, cheerleader.â She says. âTook you a while to wake up, too. Guess I donât know my own strength.â
âWhy did you chain me up?â Kim asks. âDidnât Drakken have some lame plot like hang me over a pool of rabid piranhas?â
âYeâDrakken had a plan with electric eels or something, but I talked him out of it.â She says. âBecause I have much bigger plans for you, dear Kimmy.â
âWhat do you mean, âbigger plansâ?â Kim asks. Shego walks up to Kim and gently runs her finger under her chin. She then grabs a handful of Kim and whips her head back, before kissing her on the mouth, aggressively. Her lips smother Kimâs, almost not giving her any room to breath. She grabs hold of Kimâs breasts and fondles them roughly. Clearly, sheâs not in a mood to be gentle. As Shego forces her tongue down Kimâs throat, Kim begins to feel something firm between Shegoâs legs. Shego then pulls back quickly, but still leaves a long line of saliva that connects their mouths. Kim looks up at Shego, trying to catch her breath.
âOK, youâve officially have creeped me out!â Kim tells her.
âOh, I havenât even begun, princess.â Shego takes a few steps back, then stops and stares at her prisoner. She reaches for the slit of her skirt and flings it aside, revealing exactly what Kim felt between Shegoâs legsâŠa large black strap-on. âLike it, Kimmy? I had it tailor made to match what your boyfriendâs packing.â
âSo youâre gonna put that thing up my ass.â Kim says.
âOh, not just your ass.â Shego says, an evil grin growing across her face. âYour mouth, that little wet pussy, every hole you have is gonna be filled by this baby! In fact, letâs start now.â Shego pulls a remote from the bosom of her breasts and presses a flashing red button. A moment later, Kim starts to feel her chains loosening. But before she can throw a punch Shegoâs way, Shego grabs the back of her head and forces her mouth on her strap-on. Kim struggles to pull herself away, but canât move her arms enough to push off of her.
âOh, yeah! Suck it, you little whore!â Shego says. She pushes Kimâs head down even further, trying to force her into deep throating the Strap-on. Kimâs eyes begin to water, as she struggles to even breathe. Shegoâs enjoying every moment. Even though sheâs not feeling anything from Kim, sheâs getting off just by watching her struggle & suffer. After a minute, she pulls Kimâs head off of her and grins evilly. As Kim coughs and gasps for air, Shego looks down at the handy work sheâs done. The Strap-on is well lubricated enough for entry.
âI must say you do good work, Kimmy.â Shego tells her.
âYouâre gonna pay for that, Shego.â Kim says angrily.
âNo, princess. Youâre gonna pay!â Shego presses the button on her remote again, and the chains retract, pinning Kim back against the wall. She walks over and hikes up Kimâs skirt, revealing a pink thong underneath. âGetting a little risquĂ©, eh Kimmy?â
She pulls down the thong to Kimâs knees, then starts teasing her by rubbing the Strap-on against her love lips and her clit. âYou thought I forgot about that day, didnât you?â Shego asks, her look growing more sinister. âThe humiliation I felt when you and your little boyfriend had your way with me. Over and over! Well princessâŠTime for me to return the FAVOR!!!â
She rams the strap-on deep inside Kimâs snatch, almost knocking the breath out of her in the process. Kimâs eyes go dead for a moment. Thereâs a mixture of pleasure & pain that sheâs feeling. But right now, its much more pain than it is pleasure. She lets out a groan, which only excited Shego more.
âYes! Scream for me, you little bitch!â She starts pumping in & out of her, pushing it as far as it can go with each thrust. She pulls down the top of Kimâs dress, then rips apart her bra to expose her breasts. She grabs a firm hold of them & fondles them roughly as she leans in close to Kim. âWhatâs wrong, Kimmy?â She asks smugly. âYou donât look like youâre enjoying this. I know I am.â She shoots in for another kiss, causing her head to smash back against the wall. Her tongue probes every inch of Kimâs mouth. Itâs enough to suck out her fillings (if Kim had any). She pays special attention to her lips this time, especially the bottom one, biting down on it hard enough to draw blood as she moans with pleasure. She then pulls away again, be pulling down her halter-top and showing off her own tits.
âYou might as well stop resisting, Kimmy.â She tells her. âCause Iâm not stopping until you come!â
âGetâŠreal.â Kim says, trying to resist the urge of having an orgasm. âBesidesâŠGlobal Justice & Ron will be here to take you & Drakken down!â
âOh, sweetie. You see, me & DrakkenâŠWEâRE COUNTING ON THAT!!!â She goes back to pounding Kimâs pussy unmercifully with the Strap-on. Her nipples begin to rub against Kimâs, as Shegoâs breasts almost engulf hers. Kim tries to hang on, but the massive size of that Strap-on is too much to take. Finally, she feels herself reaching her limit, and closes her mouth, not wanting to give Shego the satisfaction of knowing she gave her a screaming orgasm. But she canât help but grunt it out, and Shego hears enough to know that sheâs succeeded. She pulls out of her and backs up, covering herself back up with the Halter Top.
âWas it good for you?â Shego says with a superior smirk.
âDonât flatter yourself.â Kim tells her, feeling a little out of breath. âI was thinking of Ron the whole time.â
Shego grins a little at Kimâs joke, then smacks her hard across the cheek, leaving a red mark on her face. Kim turns back to Shego and looks at her coldly. âYouâre gonna pay for that one, too.â She says.
âYeah, yeah, send me a bill.â Shego says, turning her back on Kim. âItâs not like Ron Stoppableâs coming to save you now.â
At that momentâŠ
On the other side of Drakkenâs hidden lair, Ron, Bonnie & Monique lurk in the shadows. All three are wearing the Superspeed Shoes. They look on as Drakken works hard on engineering his latest plan for World Domination. There are dozens of Doom-Vees at the bottom around him, all equipped with various Drakken Death Weapons. As his minions begin to board the Doom-Vees, Ron tells Monique & Bonnie his plan.
âOK, you too use the speed shoes to go and find Kim.â Ron says. âIâll stay here and handle Drakken.â
âBut howâre you gonna do that?â Monique asks.
âBy doing with Ron Stoppable does best.â Ron answers. âBeing the distraction. Now go!â
The two ladies each give Ron a kiss on the Cheek, before sprinting off down the hall, looking for Kim. Ron decides to take action now, and he hops down off of his ledge and rushes to an empty Doom-Vee. In the blink of an eye, he opens the door, shuts it, and turns on the engine. âI always did wanna drive one of these babies.â He says. âLike those Rap stars in the videos. Maybe I canâŠWAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!â
He presses down on the gas pedal and immediately the Doom-Vee rolls out of control. Itâs like a bumper car now, and it smashes & demolishes the others relentlessly. Drakken turns to see whatâs the cause, and immediately sees whoâs in the driverâs seat. âITâS THE BUFFOON!!! GET HIM!!!â
His henchmen scramble to get to the remaining undamaged Doom-Vees, only to have Ron bash into them. Itâs a massacre of metal & car parts as the henchmen dive out of the way of the out-of-control SUV of Mass Destruction. When Ron finally gets it to stop, every other Doom-Vee is totaled beyond compare. He hops out of the ride and looks at the damage. âWhoa! Hope you had those rides insured, Drakken.â
He immediately feels Drakkenâs hands grabbing his collar and is rammed into the side of the Doom-Vee by him. âNo, but youâre gonna need it right now!â Drakken says.
Ron escapes his grasp and rolls into his fighting stance. âAlright, whereâs Kim?â
âPossible? Sheâs having fun with Shego right now, and Shego doesnât want to be disturbed.â Drakken says, walking over to a switch. He flips it and the platform the two are on begins to rise into the air, as the ceiling opens up above them. âI know what youâve done to my Shego, and sheâs getting her revenge on little Kimmy right now.â
Drakken presses a button on his left glove, and his body begins to shake. Suddenly, muscles begin to bulge wildly, ripping through his lab coat until itâs shredded to pieces. His new hulking physique almost towers over Ron as he walks towards him. Ron hops back and gets into his Tai Shing Pek Kwar stance, ready to rumble.
âFor kidnapping Kim, and hurting Rufus, Iâm taking you down hard!â Ron says.
âBring itâŠBuffoon.â Drakken replies.
The Not So Lucky Kim Possible 6
It starts to rain on the roof of Drakkenâs lair. The moon barely peeks out through the clouds, and is the only thing illuminating the two. A flash of lightning off in the distance adds more light, but only in flashes & only for a moment. The sound of thunder echoes through the night followed only by the sound of raindrops hitting the ground. The two stare down each other, not moving, not flinching even once. Ron stands poised in a perfect Kung Fu stance. Various thought roam through his mind, all of them about how to take down Drakken. Dr. Drakken is standing there patiently, waiting for Ron to make the first move, so he can crush him with his bare hands. After what seems like forever, Ron finally breaks the silence.
âHench-Co Strength Enhancer?â Ron asks.
âYes. Now in glove form.â Drakken answers. âI know you & Possible put my Shego in prison. It wonât happen again.â
âWait, your Shego?â Ron says. âYou mean you & her?â
âAre tight-knit. Are âHooked-Up & Off the Chainâ as your generation would say.â Drakken tells him.
âHeh, I knew it. Kim so owes me a Grande Naco Meal.â Ron declares with a smirk.
âHa! You still think you got a chance to make it out of here.â Drakken says. âHow utterly buffoon-like.â With that, Drakken charges Ron like a bull thatâs just seen all red. Ron barely dives out of the way as Drakken drives both fists into the ground, smashing them through the pavement. He pulls them out and lets a haymaker fly. Ron ducks it and counters with several hard punches to Drakkenâs gut, which have absolutely no affect on him. Drakken laughs and swats Ron away as if he were a fly. Ron rolls across the ground before stopping himself and picking himself up.
âAnd that fool Monkey Fist said that Tai Shing Pek Kwar should be feared.â Drakken says, snickering. âHa! What a joke!â
Ron brushes himself off and gets back in his fighting stance. âOh, you best be fearing the Monkey Kung Fu.â
Itâs Ron who charges this time, ready to rip into the mad doctor. But Drakken is ready. He lets a big right hand fly, but Ron flips and avoids it. Drakken tries to come back with a left hook, but Ron ducks that and maneuvers around him in a circle. Drakken is now swinging for dear life, with none of his attacks even coming close to hitting Ron. âGRRRR!!! STAND STILL, YOU BUFFOON!!!â Drakken thinks heâs caught Ron off guard, and claps his hands together to smash his head. But Ron ducks, and counters with a devastating flip kick that sends Drakken off of his feet and to the ground. Ron flips back into his Monkey Kung Fu stance.
âHWAAAAAHHHHH!!! You wanna piece of Ron?â He asks with a smug grin.
âWhen Iâm done with you, youâre gonna be in pieces!â Drakken yells. He charges again, intending to flatten Stoppable with one blow. Ron stands perfectly still, waiting for the right moment. Drakken storms closer, and closer, until finally he has him where he wants him. Ron flips up and over the charging Drakken, and comes back down with a flying stomp. But Drakken anticipates the move, and swings his arm out, swatting Ron down to the ground. Before he can recover, Drakken puts his foot on his chest, pinning him down.
âYouâre in for a world of hurt now, Buffoon.â
Meanwhile, downstairsâŠ
âLetâs take a break, shall we, Kimmy?â
Shego walks over to the side of the room that has a large Widescreen TV on the wall. She grins as she grabs a videotape off of her dresser. âWe can watch a little movie.â
âOh god, did you & Drakken make a sex tape?â Kim asks smugly.
âWaitâŠhow did you know about theâŠnevermind! Anyway, you should really keep a closer eye on your Boyfriend, Kimmy.â Shego tells her. âYou never know where his Cock might roam.â
She inserts the tape into the VCR and presses play. A moment later, the screen shows Ron, being ridden hard by Adrena Lynn. Kim drops her jaw in shock, as Shego grins evilly. âThatâs right, princess. While you were out playing âHunt the Bad Girlâ, she was playing Hide & Seek with Boy Toyâs Rod. Doesnât that just burn your toast?â
Just then, a loud thump from the fight upstairs is heard. Immediately Shego charges up her gloves, ready for any attack. âIâll be back in a sec.â She tells Kim. âIn the meantime, you can enjoy the show.â Shego carefully walks out of the room and down the hall, looking to see exactly whatâs going on. A moment later, Bonnie & Monique run into the room from the other direction.
âGood thing these Speed Shoes can jet us between spots in a second.â Monique says. âOr that distraction wouldâve neverâŠâ She gets a good look at Kim and notices the look of shock on her face. âKim, whatâs wrong?â
âRonâŠcheated on me.â Kim says. Once her hand is free, she points at the TV, showing the two footage of Ron & Adrena Lynn.
âHow could that little perv cheat on me?â Bonnie says?
Kim then turns to her in shock. âWhat do you mean cheat on you?â
âLook, KimâŠwe gotta fess up.â Monique says, still helping her get loose. âIâve been having sex with Ron. Really great sex. But itâs my fault. Totally my fault. I pressured him into itâŠIâm sorry, I just couldnât help myself.â
âMonique, I am shocked!â Bonnie gasps. âFor you to do something soâŠnaughty. ItâŠâ
âOh, cut the act, Bonnie.â Monique tells her. âYou were riding Ron like a Mechanical Bull before I came over tonight.â
âWellâŠif she wouldnât keep him all to herself, this wouldnât have happened.â Bonnie replies.
They finally unlock all of the shackles and free Kim, who steps down off of the wall. She shoots the two of them a cold look, which makes them feel even guiltier than before. âSo, when did it first happen?â Kim asks Monique.
âThe Dementor mission. When you were sent after DNAmy.â Monique replies.
âAnd you?â Kim asks, turning to Monique.
âCamp Wannaweep.â She replies, but not wanting to.
âBut Ron really does care about you, Kim.â Monique tells her. âIn fact, heâs the one that started this rescue mission.â
âWhere is he now?â Kim asks.
âThe last time we saw him, he was about to fight that weird blue guy.â Bonnie says.
âDrakken! Come on, heâs gonna need our help.â Kim grabs her purse and dashes out of the room, followed closely behind by Bonnie & Monique. As they run down the hall, Kim pulls out her Kimmunicator from her purse and dials up Wade. A moment later, he appears on the screen.
âKim! Thank god youâre OK.â He says.
âIâm fine.â She tells him. âBut where is Ron?â
âHeâs up on the roof of the complex, and it looks like heâs battling Drakken andâŠoh, no.â
âWhat âoh, noâ Wade?â Kim asks.
âDrakkenâs giving out the same readings that Ron gave out when he had the Strength Enhancing Ring.â Wade tells her.
âWhich means Drakken now has Super Strength.â Kim realizes. âWeâve got to hurry. Ronâs life might be in danger!â
Back on the RoofâŠ
Drakken is putting all of his weight down on Ronâs chest, trying to keep him down. He raises his fist high into the air, and prepares to punch a hole right through his head. âAny last words, Buffoon?â He asks.
âYeahâŠfor the last timeâŠmy nameâŠis RonâŠSTOPPABLE!!!â
He rolls out of the way, a split second before Drakkenâs fist comes crashing down. He gets to his feet and delivers a Dropkick to Drakkenâs chest that sends him stumbling back. But Drakken quickly recovers and charges again. Ron meets him with a Leg Sweep that takes Drakken off of his feet. He then stands up and gets back into his fighting stance.
âYeah, thatâs right, Drakken. Youâre getting whooped on.â Ron says. âWhooped on by a buffoon! WaitâŠthat didnât come out right.â
Drakken pounds his fists on the ground in frustration and gets up. He charges Ron again, fists swinging wildly. Ron avoids every attack heâs throwing, but just by the skin of his teeth. He backs up from Drakken, trying to get some space between. Soon, Drakken begins to slow down and tire, which gives Ron the opening he needs. He jumps & twists in the air, hitting Drakken in the face with a Butterfly Kick. Drakken stumbles back, seriously stunned. And before he can recover, Ron leaps into the air, flips over and nails him in the back of the head with a Scissors Kick. Drakken flips over and lands hard on the ground, defeated.
âRon StoppableâŠyou think youâre all thatâŠbut youâre not.â He says, right before passing out.
Ron reaches down and presses the button on Drakkenâs glove, disabling his Strength and returning his body back to normal. He then puts one foot on his chest and stands triumphant.
âBoo-Ya.â
He folds his arms over his chest and holds his head high, knowing heâs defeated one of the most dangerous mad man villains ever known. Right now, Ron Stoppable feels on top of the world. But the feeling doesnât last, as a bright green energy blast hits him on his side.
âAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!â
The blast sends him flying clear across the roof. He slides on the wet roof, all the way to the edge of the Lair, until his arm & leg dangles off the edge. On the other side of the roof, where the attack came from, stands the villainess herself, Shego.
âAnd that is for my ass.â
Her hands are still glowing as she slowly walks towards him, but she stops once she notices Kim, Bonnie& Monique climbing onto the roof. They look at the fallen Drakken, then Shego, before noticing Ron down at the edge of the Lair.
âRON!â All three scream, as they rush over to save him from falling off the ledge. Kim gets there first and pulls him back, as Bonnie & Monique surround him. His arm is badly burned, and he looks ready to pass out from the pain. He looks up to see Kimâs face, and smiles.
âDidâŠdid we beat the bad guy?â He says, just before passing out. There are tears welling up in Kimâs eyes, but she wipes them away to reveal a look of pure rage. She stands up and turns towards Shego, ready to rip her to shreds.
âAw, Kimmy mad cause I hurt her boyfriend?â Shego asks. Kim says nothing, instead she walks towards Shego, stopping several feet away from her and getting into her own fighting stance.
Monique puts her arm around Ron, as Bonnie does the same. âWhoop her ass, Kim!â Monique tells him. âTake her down hard!â
âYou better not let her get away with this, Possible!â Bonnie adds. âYou better make her pay!â
Kim starts to stare down Shego, angrier than sheâs ever been in her life. Her muscles are tense, and she looks like she could knock her head off dozens of miles away with one kick. Shego however is looking confident, as she smiles at the Kim. âLooks like your fan clubâs put a lot of faith in you.â She says. âToo bad itâs not gonna help.â
âRemember when I said you were gonna pay?â Kim asks her. âWell, hereâs the check, bitch!â
Kim throws the first punch, connecting with Shegoâs jaw. And the fight is on! The two trade lightning fast blows, blocking & countering only to have their own attacks blocked & countered. This goes on for a full minute until Shego kicks Kim in the chest, and sends her sliding backwards. Kim stops herself and comes back with a flying kick to Shegoâs jaw, which sends her to the ground. She quickly gets up and starts to charge her, but then notices that her lips been busted open.
âWhatâs wrong, Shego?â Kim asks smugly. âYou donât look like youâre enjoying this. I know I am.â
Shego wipes the blood from her lips and growls before charging Kim. She lets loose with a flurry of strikes which Kim blocks easily. Kim then mounts her own counter attack, landing well-placed strikes to her face & chest. Shegoâs reeling backwards, and out of desperation sparks her hand up and waves it across Kimâs face. The light blinds her, and Shego takes advantage by delivering a brutal Roundhouse Kick to her jaw that sends her spinning to the ground. Shego starts to laugh fiendishly as she watches Kim struggle to her feet.
âYou might as well stay down, princess.â She tells her. âYou have no chance in hell of beating me.â
âAfter all these years, ShegoâŠâ Kim says, pushing herself off the ground. ââŠyou should really check the name!â
She twists into a Spinning Split Kick, nailing Shego twice and sending her stumbling back. Kim gets to her feet and charges her. As she swings, Shego grabs both of her wrists, stopping the attacks. But Kim grins and darts forward, nailing her out of the blue with a devastating Headbutt. As Shego stumbles back again, Kim follows up with a Haymaker that sends her spinning towards the ledge of the Lair. Shego stops herself from going over and gets her bearing, when she sees Kim barreling towards her. Kim leaps into the air, plants one foot in Shegoâs chest, then the other under her chin, connecting with a devastating Flash Kick. It sends Shego over the edge, and she goes screaming down towards the blackness below. Kim looks on as Shegoâs body fades into the darkness, feeling a strong sense of vindication at that moment. But her attention is drawn back to Ron when she notices the Global Justice Airship appearing behind her. She turns to see various agents attending to Ron and handcuffing Drakken, as she runs over to Dr. Director.
âIs Ron gonna be OK?â She asks.
âHe has 2nd Degree Burns across his arm and a mild concussion.â Dr. Director says. âBut heâll be perfectly fine once we get him to a medical facility.â
âI know the perfect one.â Kim says.
8 Hours LaterâŠ
Kim (dressed back in her mission clothes), Monique & Bonnie are sitting in the Waiting Room of the Hospital. In the Operating Room, Kimâs mother, Mrs. Dr. Possible, is working on Ronâs injury with other experienced Doctorâs from around the world. Theyâve been there for 8 hours, and havenât even thought about leaving for one moment. Finally, the Operating Room doors swing open, and Ron is wheeled out. All three of them stand up as heâs followed by Kimâs mom, who starts to take off her equipment.
âMon! Ron! Is heâŠ?â
âRonâs gonna be perfectly fine.â Mrs. Possible says, giving her daughter a reassuring smile. âGlobal Justice have outstanding equipment. His arm will heal up from the burns as long as he keeps the cast on and nothing will come from his concussion. But he will have to stay off his feet for a few weeks. Which means no saving the world for quite a while for him.â
âDonât worry.â Kim says, smiling. âIâll make sure he gets some rest.â
âGood. Iâm gonna go home and check on your father & the twins.â Dr. Possible says. âYou three can visit with Ron, but try not to stay too long. He needs his rest.â
Kimâs mom walks off as the three walk over into Ronâs Hospital Room. They see him lying in bed, watching TV. His arm is in a cast, and his head is bandaged. The three rush over to him and hug him tight, almost suffocating him. âHey, OK! Itâs good to see you guys, too.â Ron says.
They let go and give him some air. âRon, you are the man, boy!â Monique says.
âI canât believe you took down Drakken all by yourself.â Kim adds. âYou do have mad Monkey Kung Fu skills.â
âHeh, heh, yeah.â He says, before his mood turns serious. âListen, KimâŠthereâs something I gotta tell you. About Bonnie & MoniqueâŠâ
âI know.â Kim says. âThey spilled when they came to free me. And I know Adrena Lynn forced you too.â
âYeah, well thatâs only half the story.â Ron says, deciding to let it all out. âIt wasnât just Monique, Bonnie & Adrena Lynn. There were more.â He takes a deep breath and lets go with his confession. There was Yori, Dr. DirectorâŠand youâre mom. Iâm sorry, Kim. Iâm so sorry.â
Kim stands there in utter shock. Her jaw drops down so low you can fly a 747 through her mouth. Monique & Bonnie are also staring at him in shock of what they just heard. âD-D-Dr. Possible?â Monique says.
âOKâŠremind me to keep my mother away from you, Stoppable.â Bonnie adds.
âLook, I know you could never forgive me for all this, but I hopeâŠâ
Kim puts a finger up to silence Ron, as she huddles up with Monique & Bonnie.
âAlright. All of thisâŠis VERY frustrating.â Kim says. âBut he did tell us about it. Which was honest.â
âI agree.â Monique says. âMost boys would try to keep that a secret as long as they could. Plus, he did save the world.â
âWell, donât expect sympathy from me.â Bonnie tells them. âHe cheated on me and broke my heart. I will never forgive him.â
âHe wasnât your man in the first place!â Monique yells at her!
âAlright, Bonnie. Thatâs fine.â Kim says. âThen youâll have no problem staying far away from him as long as you live.â
Bonnie starts to think it over, and comes to a conclusion. âWell, to err is human and all that.â
They break the huddle and turn back to Ron. âAlright Ron, weâve come to a decision. We forgive you.â Ron smiles, feeling relieved that he hasnât lost three friends. âBut weâre gonna have to lay out some ground rules. First, from now on, your Cock goes into no one else but us.â
âNo problem, KP.â Ron says. âI am totallyâŠwait, did you just say âusâ?â
âWeâve made an agreement.â Kim tells him, with a seductive smirk. âSince weâre all friends, and friends share, weâve decided to share your Rod.â
âOK, Iâm having serious reservations about this.â Ron says. âI mean, are there certain days or weeks? And donât I getâŠaâŠsayâŠinâŠâ
He stops in mid-sentence as he feels Kimâs hands grip his Cock from under the sheet. âNow, now, Ron. My mom says you need to take it easy.â Kim says. âAnd you donât wanna disobey Doctorâs Orders, do you?â
âYou know, I think Ron needs to be rewarded for saving the World.â Monique adds, also grabbing hold of Ronâs Manhood.
âI think so, too.â Kim replies, pulling back the sheets and letting his Rod out into the open. âBonnie, wanna join in?â
Bonnie folds her arms & looks away. âI refuse to share him with others. I have my dignity.â
âFine.â Kim says. âYou can stand there & watch.â With that both Kim & Monique start working over Ronâs Cock. Kim engulfs the head into her mouth, as Monique runs her tongue all around the shaft. Bonnie turns her head away, trying not to look interested. But the sounds of their moans along with Ronâs proves to be too much for her, and she caves in like an avalanche.
âI hate you, Kim.â She says, climbing on the hospital bed and joining in on the action. She focuses on his balls, massaging them and taking them into her mouth, as Kim works the head & Monique works the shaft. Ronâs feeling like heâs died and gone to heaven. He doesnât even bother to try and stop them, knowing this probably wonât ever happen again in his life. After several minutes, the ladies switch spots, with Kim working his balls, Monique engulfing his head and Bonnie licking the shaft. They keep this up until Ron becomes as hard as Titanium. Then they let up.
âOK, I think heâs good & ready now.â Kim says.
âGood, so move out of the way while I go to work.â Bonnie says. She tries to climb onto Ron when Monique stops her.
âUh, who said anything about you going first?â Monique asks her. âIf anything, it should be me.â
âUh, my boyfriend.â Kim says. âSo I get first crack.â
âLadies, ladies!â Ron says. âThereâs enough of the Ron-ness to go around for all of you.â
âYouâre right, Ron.â Kim says. âBonnie, Monique, you two can go ahead of me.â
Bonnie looks at Kim with suspicion. âWhy the change of mind, all of a sudden?â
âBecause I figure Ron needs a warm up, before he gets to the main course.â Kim says with a smirk.
âHa! Youâll be lucky if I leave enough of him before your turn.â Bonnie replies.
âUh, LadiesâŠâ Ron goes unheard in the argument, as Bonnie begins to pull of her Cargo Pants. She kicks them off and takes off her thong before climbing on top of Ron.
âJust watch.â She says with a smirk. âThere will be nothing left after his Bon-Bon gets finished with him.â She grabs firm hold of his Cock and uses her fingers to hold her love lips open. As she takes all of his manhood inside of her, she begins to have second thoughts about her boast. Instantly, she starts getting weak in the knees, and puts her hands on Ronâs chest to keep balance. But Bonnie doesnât want to lose out to Kim, and begins riding his Cock for all heâs worth. Kim & Monique are enjoying the show.
âWow, you were right, Monique.â Kim says.
âI told you.â Monique replies. âJust like a Mechanical Bull.â
âGood Technique.â Kim adds. She finds herself sliding her hands inside her pants & her panties and rubbing herself gently. Monique, however, has been fingering herself since the sight of Ronâs Rod, and has finally had enough.
âOK, thatâs it. Itâs time to get this party started.â She says, pulling down her Cargo Pants, along with her pink thong. âRon, itâs time to see if you got some skills with that tongue.â
Ron starts to panic a little as he realizes what she means. âWait, you mean that? But I donât have that much experience withâŠWHOA!!!â Monique climbs onto the bed and straddles Ronâs face, so that she faces Bonnie. Ron quickly decides to go to work, and rolls his tongue all over her snatch lips & her clit. Monique trembles with pleasure as she tries to keep balance herself.
âGOT-DAMN RON, you are multi-talented.â She screams.
A smirk appears on Bonnieâs face as she looks at Monique. âYeah, I felt that tongue at Wannaweep. You wonât be long now.â
âOh, the hell with that!â Monique says. âYouâll be screaming Ronâs name and shaking long before I hit my limit.â
An angry look develops on Bonnieâs face. âOh yeah? WellâŠâ She starts to panic, knowing Moniqueâs right. She can feel herself about to cum at any moment, and it leads to her doing the unthinkable. She grabs the back of Moniqueâs head, brings her close and kisses her on the lips, deeply & passionately. Moniqueâs eyes shoot wide open, as she feels Bonnieâs tongue probe inside of her mouth. At first she wants to pull away from her, but slowly she starts to enjoy it. Bonnieâs hands start to caress & fondle Moniqueâs tits as they continue to kiss. Kim just looks on in awe.
âI canât believe it.â She says. âI never thought that would happen.â
The kiss doesnât last much longer though, as both feel themselves on the verge of a hard orgasm. They pull apart and try to ride it out. âOH GOD, RON!!!â They both scream, hitting their climax at the same time. Bonnie pulls Ron out just as he sprays his load inside her thighs. Monique squirts out her loves juices before falling onto the bed, exhausted. Bonnie does the same, landing right beside Ron.
âLooks like itâs a tie.â Kim says.
âYou mean they both came at the same time?â Ron asks.
âYep, right after Bonnie made out with Monique?â Kim tells him.
Ron looks at her shocked. âYou mean, they were kissing? And I didnât see it? And we couldnât get it on tape?â
âNope.â Kim says, taking off her Cargo Pants & thong. âI guess youâll just have to settle for me.â She climbs over Monique & onto the bed, straddling Ron. She takes his still-hard Cock and slides down onto it, wincing with every inch she takes in. She starts working her hips, and Ron quickly picks up the rhythm and follows hers. He lifts up her shirt and starts fondling her breasts, just the way she likes it.
âKPâŠyou are on today!â Ron says.
âSo are you, Ron.â Kim grabs Ronâs hands and starts to guide their movements. Soon, their hips start moving at top speed. Every thrust Ron makes sends his Cock deep into Kim, and brings them both closer to their limit. Soon, Ron finds himself not able to hold on any longer.
âOH GOD, KP! IâM GONNA CUM!!!â He yells.
âME TOO, RON!!!â She screams back.
She doesnât bother to get off of him. Not this time. Both of their bodies tense up as Ron spills his load deep inside of Kim. She can feel it filling her up, and itâs a heavenly sensation. She falls forward, catching herself before she lands on Ron. It takes a moment, as Ron catches his breath, but he finally realizes what he did.
âKimâŠdid I just come inside of you?â He asks.
âYeah.â She answers. âAnd it was wonderful.â
âB-But what ifâŠâ She stops his chatter by pressing her lips against his. He wants to ask the question, but the warm feeling of her lips smothering his makes him not care. She lies down on top of him, her breasts pressed against his chest. And with Monique cuddling with him on his left side, and Bonnie snuggling him on his right, Ron drifts off to sleep, feeling like the luckiest man alive.
The Fearless Ferret Chapters
âAH, ITâS ALL MY FAULT!!!â
Ron sits on the edge of Kimâs bed, head buried in his hands and a feeling of overwhelming guilt running through him. Just last night he & Kim were on a mission in the Great Northwest, trying to stop DNAmy from converting all wildlife into her mutated minions. A chase from her lair led through the wilderness, and it also led to Kimâs leg becoming broken. But as Ron continues to blame himself for the accident, Kim, lying in bed wearing a leg cast, tries to convince him otherwise.
âRon, itâs not your fault.â She tells him. âNo one couldâve predicted that motorbike would run out of fuel when I tried to make that chasm jump.â
âYeah, but I was right behind DNAmy.â Ron debates. âI couldâve stopped her. You knowâŠif I hadnât gotten roughed up by her Chipmunk bodyguards.â
âWeâll catch her again, Ron. Donât worry.â She says, placing her hand on his shoulder, then slowly moving it downward. âIn the meantime, I know something that will make you feel better.â
Ron begins to enjoy Kimâs touch. âYeah, real betâŠNO! UH-UH, No!â He jumps to his feet and fends off her advances. âWe canât do it, Kim. Youâre injured.â
Kim just smiles seductively. âOh, youâll be careful, Ron. I know first hand that you can take real good care of my body.â
âYeah, real goâŠSTOP THAT!!!â He says, snapping out of her âspellâ. âLook, I gotta go. You just get some rest. Besides, you got the Possible Family Reunion this weekend.â
As Ron walks out of the room, Kim folds her arms over her chest in a huff & pouts. âIâd get plenty of rest if I had your Cock, Ron.â
Outside the room, Ron makes his way down the hallway and towards the stairs when he hears a familiar beeping. Reaching into his pocket, he pulls out Kimâs Kimmunicator. âOh, man. I mustâve took it by accident.â He says, deciding to answer it. âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
Wadeâs face appears on the screen. âBad news. Duff Killiganâs just broken out of prison, and it looks like heâs trying to restart his old plan.â
âYou mean the cloning Tiger Woods and creating a Golf Army for World Domination plan?â Ron asks.
âBingo.â Wade says.
âYou know, some Villains just arenât inventive anymore. I mean, come up with something fresh.â Ron says. âIâll let Kim know andâŠwait, I canât. She canât stop Killigan with a broken leg.â
âWell, maybe we can bring in Global Justice to work with us.â Wade suggests.
That normally would be a great idea for Ron, but he remembers that Dr. Betty Director said she would like to ârun testsâ on the Ron Factor more. âNO! No, not them.â Ron says, shooting the idea down. âNo Wade, Iâm gonna have to do this solo.â
âUh, Ron? You do remember the last time you went Solo?â Wade asks. Ron remembers it well. To give Kim some family time with the Possibles, Ron went solo after Dr. Drakken. He ended up stranded with him in the frozen tundra, and almost killed by Shego. Luckily, a shared love for a Christmas Special saved him (along with Kim & her family). On that day, Kim threatened to break Ronâs legs if he ever went solo again.
âGotta risk it.â Ron tells him. âBut maybe I can find a disguise so Kim wonât know itâs me. Only problem is whereâŠâ As he walks down the stairs, he begins to hear familiar theme music. Looking down onto the Living Room, he sees the Tweebs Jim & Tim watching old reruns of âThe Fearless Ferret.â Inspiration strikes Ron, as well as an idea.
âWade, I need to make a call to Timothy North. A hero is about to Return.â
3 Hours LaterâŠ
âIf somebody told you I was just the boyfriend & sex toy of a Hot Redhead Crime-fighting CheerleaderâŠsomebody lied.â
Ron sits perched atop an apartment building, staring down at a warehouse just across the street. Heâs decked out in his Fearless Ferret costume as he watches the activity down below. Killigan is instructing his minions (who, as you couldâve guessed, are dressed up as Caddies) to move the Golf equipment that theyâre robbing from the Warehouse. Ron continues to observe with a vigilant eyeâŠat least until he feels the suit tightening up on him.
âOw. Ow! OW! HERO SUIT WEDGIE!!!â He stands up and begins tugging on the suit, trying to loosen it as much as he can. A moment later, Rufus hops out of his pocket and begins to loosen his Wonder Weasel suit, feeling it tighten up on him. Heâs just returned from the Vet, fully healed after the Showdown Ron had with Dr. Drakken months ago.
âOK, Rufus. Youâve been out of the game a while. You sure you can do this?â Ron asks, causing Rufus to respond angrily. âHey! Iâm not questioning your skills! We all know you still got the Rufus factor! Now letâs go, buddy!â
Ron pulls out a grappling gun and fires it at the Warehouse roof. It connects, and, whatâs even more shocking, Ronâs pants stay on. Rufus seems to say something of that nature to him. âYep, finally found the perfect solution.â Ron tells him. âIâm wearing triple-threaded suspenders!â With that, Rufus jumps on Ronâs back, as Ron leaps from the rooftop. He swings on the rope towards a Warehouse window, and crashes through it. As Killigan & his henchmen look up, Ron lands on a large stack of boxes, ready for a fight.
âWho the devil are you?â Killigan asks, confused.
âYouâre worst nightmare.â Ron says menacingly. âThe Fearless Ferret.â
It takes a moment for those words to sink in, but once they do, the reaction becomes one that Ron wasnât looking for. The henchmen break into hysterical laughter, most of them rolling on the floor & holding their stomachs. Even Killigan is laughing it up, almost unable to speak.
âAYE!â He says, still chuckling. âThatâs what we fearâŠa furry woodland creature!â
âHA! My Dad use to watch the show!â One of the henchmen yells between laughs.
All of this starts to mess with Ronâs confidence, but he quickly shakes it off. âHey! Iâm the Fearless Ferret. I should be feared andâŠWAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!â
Ronâs clumsiness sets in, and he slips off of the stack of boxes. But his luck also kicks in at the same time, because as he falls, he grabs on to a long lever. Pulling it down, he releases thousands of Golf Balls that bounce & roll on the ground. Killiganâs henchmen start slipping around on them, trying to keep their balance. Within moments all of them are lying on the ground, effectively dazed. Killigan looks back at Ron in rage.
âI donât know who ye are, Boyo.â He says. âBut ye just made ya last mistake!â Digging into his pouch, Killigan pulls out what appears to be an ordinary golf ball. Grabbing a nearby club, he drops the ball on the ground and smacks it towards Ron, whoâs knows exactly what it is.
âEXPLODING GOLF BALL!!!â He yells, ducking for cover along with Rufus. The golf ball hits the stack of boxes & explodes, causing the stack to avalanche down onto Ron. Killigan takes this moment to gather his troops into the truck, before hopping in himself.
âCOME ON, BOYS! Weâll come back for the other stuff later!â Killigan orders, as the truck pulls off. The factory is now empty, and the floor littered with golf balls. The large pile of boxes remain motionless, as Ronâs survival is now in question. But itâs only for a moment, as the pile begins to move. A large box is tossed out of the way and Ron peers his head up through a pile of packing peanuts, spitting several of them out of his mouth.
âThank god for packing peanuts, right Rufus?â
Rufus pops up right beside him, spitting a peanut out of his mouth. âUh-huh.â
âBut Killigan was right.â Ron says. âThis suit is just not a fear-striker. Itâs too 60âs. We need to update our wardrobe.â Rufus looks at Ron and sounds like heâs making a suggestion. âNaw, Smarty-Mart doesnât stay open 24/7 anymore. But Club Banana does. Maybe Monique can hook us up!â
An Hour LaterâŠ
At the Club Banana outlet in the Middleton Mall, Monique is going through her daily job routine. Just as she finishes putting the money in the vault, a customer walks into the store. Monique turns to see that itâs Zita Flores, and sheâs not happy.
âWhatâs up with you, girl?â Monique asks.
âMen!â Zita answers coldly.
âHad a bad date?â Monique inquires.
âMore like no date.â Zita answers. âHe stood me up. I waited 2 hours at the theatre for that bum and he didnât even show up! Iâm done with dating! I havenât had a good one since I was going out with Ron, anyway.â
âRon? Ron Stoppable, Ron?â Monique says. âYou were going out with him?â
âYeah, but we had to break up.â Zita says.
âWhy the hell did you do that?â Monique probes.
âWell, youâve seen the clumsiness.â Zita tells her. âI mean, can you imagine him in bed?â
âI donât have to imagine.â Monique says, developing a smirk. âAll that clumsiness goes away between the sheets. He is a Pro in the sack.â
âYou mean, you & him?â Zita asks.
âMe & him, him & Kim, him & Bonnie, me, him & Bonnie, you name it.â Monique answers, as the smirk grows wider. âWith me & him it happened on one of Kimâs missions. That boy can wear you out & make you a happy woman.â
âI canât believe it.â Zita says in slight shock. âRon StoppableâsâŠa stud?â
âSuper Stud!â Monique counters. âHeâs like the perfect guy. Heâs nice, caring, considerate, hung like a horse, can go all nightâŠâ
At that moment, the very same Ron Stoppable storms in through the doors and runs up to the counter. âMONIQUE, I NEED YOU!!!â
Moniqueâs grin grows even wider as she looks at Zita. ââŠAnd the boy delivers.â
âOh, hi Zita.â Ron says, just noticing her. âMonique, I need you to make me a new Fearless Ferret outfit. Only your fashion expertise can help me.â
Monique looks over the outfit Ron is wearing, and agrees that he does need change. âOh yeah, you definitely need something more modern, boy.â She says. âThe Vintage look is so last year. Iâll do it, but itâs gonna cost you.â
âNo problem!â Ron says, pulling a credit card from his pocket and showing it to her. âStill got a few greenbacks saved from my Naco royalties!â
Monique shakes her head as puts his hand down. âUh-uh. Iâm talking about the âotherâ payment.â
Ron instantly knows what she means by âotherâ payment, and kicks himself for not expecting it coming. âAlright.â He sighs. âBut just a quickie. Killiganâs still out there andâŠâ
âHold on, stud muffin.â Monique says, stopping him. âZitaâs joining us tonight.â
âWait, Zita?â Ron asks. âBut she doesnât know.â
âI just told her.â Monique says, taking Ron by the arm.
âCanât anyone keep a SECRET ANYMORE?â Ron yells as Zita grabs his other arm. The two women proceed to pull along Ron towards the employee back room area.
âRufus, watch the register for me!â Monique says, as Rufus jumps out of Ronâs pocket. He climbs up to the main counter and watches the register as Ron gets pulled away.
âWait! Canât we reschedule?â He begs. âKilliganâs gonna get away!â
âHey, if you wanna look good catching the bad guy in your Ferret suit, you gotta pay.â Monique tells him. âAnd I assume youâre doing this Without Kimâs knowledge?â Ron shuts his lips tightly & turns away, but itâs enough of an answer for Monique. âMm-hmm. Thatâs gonna cost extra.â
They lead him into the back room and shut the door behind them. Monique pushes Ron onto the couch in the room, then straddles him so he canât get back up. âYouâre lucky you caught me working the grave-shift.â She tells him. âWeâve got all night to have some fun.â
Ron is about to say something in dispute, but ends up with Moniqueâs lips smothering his. Zita takes a seat right beside the action and looks on, as Monique & Ron get started with a hot makeout session. Ron begins to lift up Moniqueâs shirt, as she does the same with his. Monique breaks the kiss so she can take her shirt all the way off, revealing a Club Banana black lace bra. She then pulls his shirt all the way off, revealing a white tank top underneath.
âOK, Iâd just like to register a complaint, that Iâm not exactly for this idea.â Ron says.
âComplaint registered.â Monique says. âWeâre still doing it.â She switches her focus to his pants, tugging down on them along with his boxers to get to the main focus, Ronâs Cock. Zitaâs eyes widen in shock as she takes her first glimpse at it, a look Ron has seen all too many times before.
âWOW!â She says. âWell, that does explain all the clumsiness.â
âYou know, every girl always says that.â Ron says. âI canât help the size of it. Itâs justâŠoh, man.â
He quiets up when he feels Moniqueâs tongue run around the head of his Cock. Itâs quickly joined by Zitaâs tongue, which works the shaft. Both women are huddled between Ronâs legs, giving him the time of his life. They caress his balls, while kissing & licking each & every inch of him. The double team culminates when they meet at the top, and begin French kissing each other, with the head of Ronâs Rod right in the middle. Their lips engulf the head, as their venture their tongues all around it & into each otherâs mouths. Ron feels ready to pop his top at that moment.
âOh manâŠIâm gonna comeâŠâ
And thatâs when Monique brings the action to a stop. âWell, we canât have that happening too soon.â She says, as she starts to pull down her Capri pants, along with her panties. Zita follows suit, kicking off her shoes & pulling off her sweat pants, along with her thong. She then looks over at Monique.
âHey, you mind if I get first ride?â She asks.
âIâve had him plenty of times. Go right ahead.â Monique tells him.
âWait, do I get a say in this?â Ron asks. He gets his answer when Zita starts climbing on top of him.
âHope you know how to use this Joystick, Ron.â She says, grabbing hold of his Rod. Splitting her love lips open, she lowers herself onto him, trembling in pleasure with each inch taken in. Once itâs all inside of her, she looks up and says some words of encouragement.
âDios Mio!â
âWhat does that mean? Did I do something wrong?â Ron asks nervously.
âRelax, boy.â Monique tells him. âTrust me, it means something good. As for nowâŠâ She pushes Ron flatly down on the couch and climbs on top of him, straddling his face with her legs. ââŠYou can put that mouth to another use.â
Seeing no choice in the matter, Ron decides to go to work, licking & sucking her pussy. Monique lets out a moan of passion as she enjoys Ronâs mouth. Meanwhile, Zita looks lost in ecstasy. She moves in sync with Ron as he pumps into her with each hip movement. Biting her lower lip, she grabs the side of the couch for balance, never feeling anything like what Ronâs packing.
âOh fuck! Itâs so thick & big!â She says, leaning forward & catching herself before she falls. Her motions now have her bouncing on Ronâs pipe like she was on a trampoline. He breasts jiggle & shake with each stroke he makes deep inside of her. Going back to Monique, sheâs beginning to breath hard. The sensation of Ronâs tongue probing inside of her and her clit being sucked is almost too much for her.
âFUCK! Oh, youâre so good, Ron!â She yells, feeling herself approaching her limit. The two women are now soaked in sweat, closer than ever to hitting their climax. Zita is the first to reach hers. A split second later, she pulls herself off of Ron, allowing him to cum, as he sprays his load between her round rear cheeks. A split second after that, Monique experiences her orgasm. Her body almost collapses from the intensity, but she catches herself long enough to climb off of Ron. The room is now silent, save for the three trying to catch their breaths.
âSoâŠis that enough payment?â Ron asks.
Monique slides back into her panties and stands up. âFor right now, stud. Iâll get started on getting your new wardrobe. Should take me just a couple of hours.â
âA couple of hours?â Ron says. âWhat am I supposed to do till then?â
Monique stops at the door and turns back to Ron, wearing a sly grin. âOh, Iâm sure Zita can come up with some good ideas.â
Ron takes a long gulp before turning back to Zita, who looks ready for more. âHow about we play Everlot?â She suggests, which raises Ronâs hopes, until she finishes. âIâll be the village, and your Cock can raid me.â
As Ron prepares for yet another night of passion-filled naughty sex (without Kim), all he can do is yell out the name of the woman responsible for him being here.
âMONIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIQUE!!!!â
The Fearless Ferret Chapters 2
âAnd then, the dreaded beast of the Cursed Woods fell at my feet.â
Kim feels like sheâs trapped in a Torture Chamber. The Possible Family Reunion is one day in, and already the boredom is at maximum capacity. She lies in her bed, wishing to be anywhere else. Battling Shego & Drakken, chasing down Motor Ed, avoiding the death traps of the Seniors, ANYWHERE but here. To her left sits Larry, her cousin. To the right, Joss, another cousin. Right now, Larry is discussing his recent âepicâ battle online on Everlot.
âAnd after I got his magical shield and majestic sword, you know what happened?â
âNo Larry, what?â She asks, not really wanting to know.
âHe resurrected.â Larry continues. âAnd then I battled him again for 16 straight hours. Wouldâve been 17 but I had school. And thenâŠâ
âUh, Larry?â Joss says, interrupting. âHow bout yâall mosey on downstairs andâŠget yourâŠaction figure collection. So you can show âem to us.â
âHeh, fantastic idea.â He says with a grin. As he stands up and rushes out of the room, both Kim & Joss breathe a sigh of relief.
âThanks, Joss.â Kim tells her. âThat bought some time. Itâll at least take an hour for him to find all of them.â
âYep, and that leaves us with time to talk about your missions!â Joss replies. âLike the time you were in Cambodia, and you had to chase down Shego through theâŠâ
Kim lets out a silent sigh, not really wanting to relive her missions over again. But a savior comes through her door in the form of her boyfriend, Ron Stoppable. âHey, KP. Hey JP.â Heâs wearing a Black Jacket & Khaki pants, a drastic change from his usual wardrobe.
âRon!â Kim says, sitting up in excitement. âThank God youâre here!â
âCanât stay for long, though.â Ron tells her. âHowâs the leg?â
âMy mom says Iâll be out of the cast in a week. And walking normal in about 2.â Kim tells him. âIâm surprised that there havenât been any mission calls. No criminals to capture. No oneâs even broke out of jail.â
âHeh-heh, yeah.â Ron agrees, nervously. âI guess itâs just a slow crime dayâŠer, week. Hey, letâs see whatâs on.â He turns on Kimâs TV, about to look for a show they can watch together. But the first thing to appear on the screen is a news report about KilliganâŠand the Fearless Ferret.
âReports say that the Mad Golfer was stopped by a former TV show hero, now turned real life crime-fighter, the Fearâ!â Ron quickly shuts off the TV, fearing his identity & plan exposed.
âRon, what was that all about?â Kim asks, raising an eyebrow.
âWha? Oh, Nothing, nothing!â He says. âItâs just thatâŠI remembered a studyâŠthat said too much TVâŠcan make you blind!â Both Kim & Joss look at Ron strangely. They feel heâs acting weird, but since he does most of the time, they dismiss it. Joss goes back to talking with Kim, when Ronâs Kimmunicator goes off. He walks over to the window and answers it.
âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
âKilliganâs at the Upperton Chemical Plant.â Wade tells him. âI think heâs going after the experimental cloning formula, to start his army.â
âOn it, Wade.â Ron says, before looking up to the night sky. He rips open his Jacket a la Clark Kent to reveal a new Fearless Ferret costume underneath. âThis looks like a job for the Fearless Ferret.â
âWhat did you just say, Ron?â Kim asks, causing him to panic and quickly close his Jacket.
âNOTHING! Nothing! Uh, gotta go! Iâll drop by later! SEE YA!â He scrambles out the door in a rush and heads downstairs, passing multiple members of Kimâs family. Instead of going out the front door though, he heads towards the garage area. Opening the door to the garage, he finds the Tweebs, Jim & Tim, finishing up on his Moped, which is now an advanced Ferret-Cycle.
âNice job, guys.â Ron says, hopping on. âAnd the colors match the outfit!â
âJust remember the deal, Ron.â Jim tells him.
âA souped-up ride for half of your Comic Book collection.â Tim adds.
âAlright, alright.â Ron says. âBut remember, Kim knows nothing about this. Cause IâŠWAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â Clearly not able to handle the power of his new ride, Ron rockets out of the garage & down the street, barely hanging on to the handlebars as he makes his way towards Upperton.
1 Hour LaterâŠ
After unwillingly driving off-road in an impromptu shortcut, Ron reaches the Chemical Plant. He peeks in through the Loading Dock entrance and sees Killigan, commanding his minions to load barrels full of the cloning formula onto trucks. He pulls his head back as Rufus peeks up out of his pocket, looking up to him for a plan.
âOK, last time we came through the window.â Ron says. âThis time, weâve gotta be more dramatic. I say we bust down the door and unleash the Monkey Kung Fu. You with me, buddy?â Rufus gives him the thumbs up, indicating heâs with him all the way. Ron turns and backs away from the door, getting a running start. Once heâs a fair distance away, he charges full speed, intending to reduce the door to splinters. Instead, he bounces right off the door, and he feels like the bones in his arm have been reduced to splinters.
âOW, OW, OOWWW!!! THAT DOORâS MADE OF TITANIUM!!!â He screams, holding his arm in pain. A moment later, the door falls forward and onto the ground, causing Killigan & his henchmen to turn their attention to Ron, whoâs now standing in the doorway, still holding his arm.
âYou again?â Killigan asks.
Ron jumps into his Monkey Kung Fu stance. âYeah! And this time weâre bringing the Butt-Kicking!â
âThe Buffoonery is strangely familiar.â Killigan says, almost recognizing. âOh well, CADDIES! Rough him up on the Back 9!â The Caddies charge toward Ron, whoâs more prepared this time around. He takes off his Jacket to fully reveal his new Ferret costume, which is mostly black & Dark Brown, and has the Ferret logo on the chest. Ron & Rufus then leap into battle. Ronâs Monkey Fu skills come out this time around, as heâs able to handle the henchmen with ease. Rufus helps out by tripping them up, and biting those that sneak up behind Ron. Within moments, Killiganâs gang is taken down, and Killigan is left alone.
âNow itâs just you & me.â Ron says, sounding threatening. Killigan, instead of fighting this time, decides to make a break for it. But Ron pulls out his grappling gun and aims it at him. âYou wonât escape again, you golfing man-WAAAAHHHHH!!!!!â Unfortunately, the gun goes off prematurely. The hook bounces off a barrel, the side of a truck, a lighting fixture, and a metal beam, before rocketing back down and circling around Ron, tying him up with the rope. Killigan takes one last glance behind him and then stops, seeing that Ron is now incapacitated.
âHA! Ya goofed up, laddy!â Killigan says, as his henchmen start to regain consciousness. âBOYS! Letâs say we dump him in the Water Hazard.â
The Caddy-dressed henchmen surround Ron, trapping him on all sides. He tries to break free, but the ropes keep him tightly bonded. As the slowly close in, Ron calls for his one ace in the hole.
âWONDER WEASEL!!!â
In a flash, Rufus runs into the picture and climbs up on Ronâs shoulder. âQuick, use the 3rd pouch on my Ferret Belt!â Rufus climbs down his body and goes to his left side. Opening the pouch, he finds nothing but the keys to the Ferret-Cycle. âNo, 3rd from the right. And hold your breath!â Ron tells him. Rufus scampers to the other side and opens the pouch, holding his breath. What comes out is a dark powder that quickly fills the air. Ron starts to jump up & down so that the powder can spread out more. The henchmen stop in their tracks, and one of them gets a whiff of the powder.
âAH-CHOOOO!!!!!â
Itâs Sneezing Powder. Within seconds, everyone begins to sneeze uncontrollably. Even Killigan, who calls for a retreat. âLetâs goâŠAH-CHOOâŠback to theâŠAH-CHOOâŠThe Hideout! AHHH-CHOOOOOO!!!!!â The gang makes a mad dash for the trucks, sneezing hard along the way. The trucks burn rubber out of the plant and down the road. A moment later, Ron appears from the plant hopping as fast as he can, trying to escape the powder. Once far enough away, he falls down on his side. Rufus begins to chew through the rope, and frees up his friend/partner. Ron picks himself back up and notices the trucks careening in the distance.
âBOOYAH! Looks like itâs a victory for the Fearless Ferret and Wonder Weasel!â He says, to which Rufus agrees. âLetâs go home, buddy.â
The Next DayâŠ
âOK, I got Bloody Combat, Doom-Bringer 6, and Breaking & Entering: Las Vegas.â
Ron is at a local Video Game store with Kimâs twin brothers. He promised to take them there for the day so that the Possible Family can have one day of the reunion without something blowing up. Right now Jim & Tim are looking for any more violent video games they can rent. Ron decides to walk over to the counter and pay for the ones he has now. But when he gets a look at the cashier, his face turns pale white.
âZITA!â He yells, not expecting her to be working here. âUhâŠHi! IâŠdidnât know you were working here.â
âYeah, the Theatre didnât pay that much.â She tells him. âPlus, I get to be close to my love.â
âYourâŠlove?â Ron gulps nervously.
âVideo games, silly.â She says, before leaning in close to his ear. âBut youâre a close second, stud.â That comment causes him to drop the games he was carrying onto the counter. Zita just giggles and starts to ring them up. âOK, that comes to a cost of $18.99. But, Iâll just give you store credit.â
âWow. Thanks, Zita. Thatâs nice andâŠwhat a minute!â He says, getting suspicious. âWhatâs the catch?â
âOh, I think we can work up some âotherâ payment.â She says, causing Ronâs heart to drop.
âUhâŠthis place doesnât have a back room, does it?â He asks.
âNo.â She answers. Ron breathes a sigh of relief, but itâs a short-lived on when she leans in and whispers to him again. âSo weâll just have to have a quickie out here.â
His heart stops for 3 good seconds, and his eyes grow as wide as dinner plates. His first thought is that she canât be serious. But remembering what heâs been through with the other women of Middleton, including Kim, he quickly believes her. âWe canât do it here.â He silently disputes. âKimâs little brothers are right here.â
âDonât worry.â Zita says, before turning her attention to Jim & Tim. âHey, you guys wanna try out the new Death-A-Geddon 2008 machine?â
Jim & Timâs eyes light up. âDO WE?â
âItâs right in the other room.â She tells him, pointing towards a doorway that leads to the Arcade. In a flash the Tweebs bail out on Ron and into the room, leaving him & Zita alone.
âOK, you may have gotten rid of the Twins, butâŠâ Ronâs cut off by Zitaâs lips pressing against his. Gently, she leads him around to her side of the counter and breaks the kiss. Her hands then go to work unzipping his pants, before reaching in and pulling out his Cock.
âCome on, Ron. Raid me.â She whispers into her ear before turning around. Hiking up her dress, she pulls down her panties just enough for easy access. Ron takes one look at her heart-shaped backside and grows rock hard. Not wanting to draw attention to himself, he decides to just get it over with.
âHow do I get into these situations?â He thinks to himself, approaching Zita. He pushes his Rod deep into her, making her let out a low moan of pleasure. Ron is very careful to make as little noise as possible. His strokes are slow & quiet, but deep. His heartbeat accelerates as he looks around, hoping not to get caught by an innocent customer walking in.
âI canât believe Iâm doing this.â He says quietly.
âDonât worry.â Zita assures him. âThis is down time. No one will walk in here for a couple of hours.â
The reassurance doesnât ease Ronâs nervousness, but he keeps going, wanting to get it over with. Zita starts gripping the counter edge, as she feels Ron hitting spots no one else ever has. It doesnât take long until she gets close to her limit.
âOh RonâŠRonâŠIâm gonna cum!â She yells silently.
âMe too!â He answers, before pulling out. They both reach their climax, and Ronâs sprays his load all over Zitaâs ass. Leaning on the counter, Zita holds her head up with her hands and enjoys the afterglow of an afternoon orgasm. Which came just in time, cause as Ron zips up, the Tweebs dart back into the room.
âThat game was Killer!â Tim says.
âYeah, did you see the Mega-Cannon that blew up Russia?â Jim adds.
âYou missed it, Ron!â Tim tells him. âWhat were you doing out here?â
âUh, justâŠpaying for the games, thatâs all.â Ron says, joining back up with them.
âWell, why does your friend look so sweaty?â Jim asks, referring to Zita.
âOK! Letâs just get home so we can blow up stuff in the games!â Ron tells them, quickly changing the subject. As they step outside, they hear the honking of a car horn. Looking around for a moment, they notice Mrs. Possible waiting for them in the family Station Wagon. Jim & Tim run over and hop in the backseat. But as Ron walks over, he gets a call on the Kimmunicator from Wade.
âUh, gotta take this. You go ahead.â Ron says. As the Station Wagon pulls off, Ron answers the call. âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
I have Intel that Killiganâs hitting the Middleton Chemical Plant tonight.â He tells Ron. âProbably to steal the cloning formula you stopped him from getting back in Upperton.â
âThen weâre gonna be waiting for him.â Ron replies.
Later That NightâŠ
It only took Ron a little over an hour to get into his Fearless Ferret costume and get to the Middleton Chemical Plant. Once he arrives, heâs surprised to see that the plant is empty. He & Rufus hop off of the Ferret-Cycle and decide to investigate the building. Sneaking in through an open door, they walk through the dark, cavernous plant, searching for any sigh of light.
âMan, itâs Dark.â Ron says. âWish Iâd remembered to bring my Ferret Flashlight.â
Suddenly, the lights to the plant come on, and Ron & Rufus find themselves surrounded by dozens of Caddies, Killiganâs henchmen. Standing on a catwalk with his finger on the light switch, is Killigan himself. âWill this do?â He asks sarcastically.
Ron gets ready for a fight, but is swarmed by the Caddies, who all dog-pile on him. âHEY! NO FAIR! THIS IS CHEATING!!!â Within moments, the Caddies have Ron & Rufus tied up & helpless. They carry them up the stairs and onto the Catwalk where Killigan is standing.
âIâve had enough of your shenanigans, Boyo.â He tells Ron. âYuir not gonna stop me from creating my army. Iâll make sure of that.â He points downward to a gigantic vat, filled with some sort of boiling hot bubbling liquid inside.
âEWWW, What is that?â Ron asks.
âThat is your demise, laddy.â Killigan answers. âYou will be boiled alive in Haggis!â
âHaggis?â Ron says. âWhatâs that?â
âItâs a traditional Scottish dish, involving the heart, liver & lungs of a sheep, oatmeal, suet & stock.â Killigan tells him. âAnd itâs all boiled along with a sheepâs stomach & pigâs intestines.â
âOH GOD, NO!!!â Ron says, freaking out. âHEELLLLLLLLLLLLP!!!!!â He wiggles to try and break free, but itâs of no use. Luckily, and unknowingly, he does manage to activate the Kimmunicator. Wade listens in, and hears Ronâs cries for help.
âOh, man. Ron got caught.â Wade says. âAnd who knows what Killigan will do to him. What do I do?â He thinks about the situation and his options. The Wadebot isnât advance enough for combat & calling in Global Justice might take too long. Realizing that, Wade comes up with his only choice.
âSorry Ron, gotta do it.â Wade says, putting out a call to Kimâs Kimmunicator. A moment later, Kim picks up on the other end.
âWade, is something wrong?â Kim asks.
âYouâŠcould say that.â Wade tells her.
âIt has something to do with Ron, doesnât it?â Kim says.
âYouâŠcould say that, too.â
âWadeâŠâ
âOK, OK! Look, it hasnât all been quiet since you broke your leg.â Wade confesses. âKilligan broke out of jail and is trying to recreate his clone army. Ron stopped him as the Fearless Ferret two times, but now heâs been captured. And thereâs no one else I can call whoâs closer!â
Thereâs a long pause from the other end, as Kim grows a displeased look on her face. âWeâre gonna have a long talk about you two saving the world without me.â Kim tells him, reaching over to grab her crutches. âBut right now, I have to save my boyfriend.â
âAre you sure you can do it, Kim?â Wade asks. To which Kim smirks.
âYouâre forgetting the name.â She answers. âI can do anything.â
The Fearless Ferret Chapters 3
20 Minutes LaterâŠ
Back at the Middleton Mall, Monique is in the middle of locking down Club Banana, after a long day of work. She finishes up and makes her way to the mall exit, when she notices Zita walking in her direction. âHey, Monique.â
âHey, girl. Whatâre you doing here?â Monique asks.
âLooking for Ron.â She answers. âI thought heâd be hanging at the Bueno Nacho. Looks like I just missed him.â
âCome on, I know all his usual hangouts.â Monique says, getting in the mood for having him herself. âIt shouldnât take long for us to find him.â
âGood, then you can help me out.â
Recognizing the familiar voice, Zita & Monique look to their left to see Kim standing there on one leg, holding herself up on crutches. Sheâs wearing a displeased look on her face, indicating that she might know about their time spent with Ron. And even though her leg is broken, Monique & Zita still fear that she can take them down very easilyâŠespecially with crutches. Panicking, Zita takes the quick & desperate way out.
âIt was Moniqueâs idea!â She says, before dashing off in the other direction.
âWhat theâŠoh, Iâm gonnaâŠâ Monique is about to chase after her, when she remembers Kim is still standing there. She then nervously turns back to her and smiles. âHey, girl. Howâs that leg? You know the Club Banana staff really misses you.â
âCut it, Monique.â Kim tells her, sounding serious. âYouâre the one that made Ronâs new Ferret Suit, right?â Monique nods yes. âWell, youâre gonna have to design a new one.â
âHold up, you mean like a âFerret Girl suitâ?â Monique asks.
âI canât believe Iâm saying this butâŠyes, a Ferret Girl suit.â Kim answers.
Monique begins to look Kim up & down, looking at her body type and going over measurements in her head. âWell I can definitely work something.â She says, as the two make their way back to Club Banana. âBut whatâs this all about?â
Monique starts unlocking the doors as Kim begins to explain. âRonâs been captured by Killigan.â She says. âAnd I canât go in there as myself. If Killigan sees me, he might find out Ronâs identity. So I need the disguise myself asâŠFerret GirlâŠâ She shudders after saying those two words. ââŠWhich will give me a better chance at saving him.â
Monique unlocks the doors and the two walk in, making their way to the rear changing rooms as Monique grabs several articles of clothing along the way. As they enter one of the rooms, Kim contacts Wade on the Kimmunicator.
âOK, Wade. You need to give me any more info you know about.â She says.
âAlrightâŠRon WHOA!!!â Wadeâs gaze suddenly becomes fixated forward. Kimâs about to ask whatâs wrong until she finds out for herself. Monique has taken her shirt off, and is now wearing just a bra as she checks the size of her shirts with the ones she just grabbed.
âHey, did you know we wear the same size?â Monique asks.
Kim rolls her eyes and shuts off the visual feature of her Kimmunicator. âAw, man.â
âFocus, Wade.â Kim tells him.
âOK. Ron didnât want you to get involved because of your broken leg & the family reunion.â Wade tells her.
âItâs the Christmas Trip all over again.â Kim says, as she takes off her shirt.
âKilliganâs trying to revive his Clone Army of Tiger Woods.â Wade continues. âRon almost stopped him completely, but Killigan set up a trap at the Middleton Chemical Plant. I canât get full audio & video of where he is inside of there, but I did find out that heâs hanging over a vat ofâŠHaggis?â
âHaggis?â Monique asks, helping Kim with her clothes.
âThe Heart, Lungs & Liver of a Sheep boiled in itâs own stomach.â Kim tells her, which makes Monique cringe.
âAnd I thought Mystery Meat was bad.â She says. âWeâve gotta save Ron.â
âGood News!â Wade chimes in, before the screen shows a map of the streets of Middleton. One street is highlighted bright red. âI found the quickest route to get to the plant. You should get there in no time.â
âGood. Weâre on our way.â Kim says, hanging up on Wade. She then stands up and looks at herself in a mirror, wearing the Ferret Girl outfit Monique assembled for her. âSo how do I look?â
âLike a crippled superhero.â Monique says.
âYeah, youâre right.â Kim agrees, before turning to Monique. âWhich means weâll have to go with plan B.â
âPlan B?â Monique asks.
âGood thing we wear the same size.â Kim adds, which immediately lets Monique know what plan B is.
âOH, NO! No way! I am not putting on that Ferret Costume! You cannot make me Ferret Girl!â
15 Minutes LaterâŠ
âI canât believe you made me Ferret Girl.â
Kim did indeed persuade Monique to don the costume, as Kim is in her new mission outfit. The two are driving in Kimâs car, towards the factory where Ron is being held. âAlright, remember the plan.â Kim tells her. âYou draw their attention, while I stop Killiganâs plan & free Ron.
âWhat? Wait a minute, you mean Iâm the distraction?â Monique asks.
âNot distraction.â Kim says, trying to shy Monique away from that word. âMore likeâŠdiversion.â
âTheyâre both the same thing, Girl.â Monique says.
Kim is about to debate more, but stops when she notices the factory coming up. âYou might wanna buckle up, Monique. This is gonna get rough.â
Monique does exactly that, putting on her seatbelt as Kim slams down the Gas Pedal to the floor. Barreling down the road, they crash through the Plant windows and skid to a stop, right in front of Killigan & his men, who are in the process of lowering Ron to his doom. A moment later, Monique steps out of the car and faces them down.
âWho the devil are you?â Killigan asks.
âI am Ferret GirâŠuh, Woman.â Monique says. âThatâs right, Ferret Woman! And you guys better release the Fearless Ferret or thereâs gonna be trouble. Donât make me open up a can of ass-whooping on all yâall!â
Thereâs a moment of silence as Moniqueâs threat sinks in. But the moment is short, as Killigan gives his reply. âGET THE LASS!!!â
âEep.â Monique makes a break for it as dozens of Killiganâs henchmen chase after her. At least until Kim gets involved. She power-slides the car into their path, taking out several of them. The others jump on top of the car, trying to force their way in. But Kim just puts the car into a rapid spin, sending each & every one of them flying all over the plant. As Killigan views his henchmen getting roughed up, Monique sneaks up to the Main Control Panel platform. Flipping a switch, she stops Ron & Rufusâ descent, and moves them over to her.
âWhat theâŠMonique? Youâre rescuing me?â Ron asks.
âYeah, but it was Kimâs plan for all of this.â She answers, as she starts to untie him.
âWas it her plan for you to be Ferret Girl, too?â Ron adds, causing Monique to grab him and pull him close.
âOK one, itâs Ferret Woman. And two, I am NEVER wearing this costume again, got it?â She says.
âGot it.â Ron answers, knowing she means business. As she frees him, the two are interrupted by Killigan.
âYa think me daft, Boyo?â He asks. âYa think ya can pull the wool over me eyes? I know this was a distraction. But you wonât be escaping me.â He pulls out several of his trademark exploding golf balls, intending to use them. Ron, Rufus & Monique feel trapped, until Ron notices Kim rocketing towards them. Or more exactly, a load-bearing beam thatâs under them.
âAny last words, laddy?â Killigan asks.
âActually, I got twoâŠBOO-YAH!!!â Ron quickly grabs his Grappling Gun and fires it at a ceiling beam. A moment later, Kim takes out the lower beam, causing the entire platform to crumble and fall. Ron grabs Monique & Rufus just as the hook attaches to the ceiling beam, and the three swing down towards Kimâs car. Both Monique & Rufus make perfect landings in the seats. Ron, however, ends up upside-down & stuck in the sunroofâŠwith his pants down.
âAw, man. Of all the times!â He says, wiggling his legs, trying to free himself.
Killigan starts to pick himself up off the ground, but Kim fires off a net that entraps him, leaving him helpless. With the mission a success, Kim turns the car around and heads out of the plant towards home, with Ron still hanging out the sunroof.
Later That NightâŠ
âAnd weâre here.â
Ron walks into Kimâs bedroom, carrying Kim in his arms, with Monique right behind him. The three are lucky enough to have the house to themselves, as Ron places Kim gently on her bed. Rufus was dropped off at Ronâs house. Monique puts Kimâs crutches off to the side as Ron plops down, exhausted.
âOK. I carried you all the way up the stairs to your room.â Ron says. âNow will you forgive me?â Kim nods her head no. âOH, COME ON!â
âRon, you went on a dangerous mission by yourself against Killigan.â Kim tells him. âKilligan! He has âKillâ in his name. What if something had happened to you?â
âHey, I only did it so you wouldnât have to go.â Ron responds. âI was worried about your health. IâŠdidnât want anything to happen to you.â
âOh RonâŠthatâs so sweet.â Kim says.
âSo does that mean you forgive me?â He asks.
âNot even close.â She answers. âBut, I know a good way you can start.â She reaches over and starts to unbuckle his pants, which causes Ron to protest.
âOh, no. We canât do this, Kim. Youâre injured andâŠandâŠoh, man.â Ron quickly finds out that heâs lost the argument, as Kim wraps her velvet-like lips around his Cock. As she bobs her head back & forth on the shaft, Monique moves to the end of the bed. She slowly & gently pulls off Kimâs pants & panties. Then, grabbing a dildo from Kimâs drawer, she starts to get into the action herself, probing the Dildo inside of her. Kim lets out a soft moan of pleasure, as she continues to suck off Ron. She takes in half of his Rod with each motion, as her tongue rotates around the head. Ron has to brace his hand against the wall just to hold himself up.
âYouâreâŠnotâŠplayingâŠfair.â Ron says, feeling that this isnât the way he wanted to get her forgiveness. Regardless, Kim continues and even starts taking in more of his Cock, as she plays with his balls. Monique is going to work herself, using the dildo to make Kim good & wet downstairs. After several minutes, Kim finally stops and takes out his Cock, feeling that itâs hard as steel.
âI think you know what to do from here, Ron.â Kim says with a smirk.
Monique climbs on top of Kim and hands her the dildo, before turning around to face Ron, whoâs already positioned himself. âOK, again Iâd like to register a complaint that Iâm not for this idea.â
âComplaint registered.â Kim & Monique answer. âWeâre still doing it.â
âIâll hold Kimâs legs up so she wonât hurt herself.â Monique says, holding her legs apart enough to give Ron clear entry. Ron sighs, but decides to go through with it. Grabbing hold of his member, he brings it to Kimâs wet pussy and pushes it deep inside of her. Kim winces slightly, still not completely use to the size, but the look is quickly replaced by one of sheer enjoyment. Ron starts his strokes, going slow so that he wonât hurt her.
âYes. Yes!â Kim moans. âYeah, Ron. Give it to me, baby.â
Itâs the first time sheâs felt his Cock in a long time. With increased missions and work at school, she & Ron barely have had time for each other recently. Ron has missed this moment also, and nearly becomes lost in it. On instinct his strokes go deeper inside of her, but he remains at his steady, slow pace. But while the two have their fun, Monique feels like sheâs left out.
âOK, is it me, or am I the odd partner out?â She says.
âI can fix that.â Kim says, turning her attention to Moniqueâs backside. She pulls down her tights, along with her thong, low enough to reveal everything. Grabbing hold of the dildo on the bed, she begins to rub it against Moniqueâs love lips, before pushing it deep inside of her. Monique gives the same reaction Kim did, a small wince, then a passionate moan for more.
âOh yeah, girl!â She says. âWork that thing inside of me.â
âFeel left out now, Monique?â Kim says, before feeling an incredible sensation wash over her body. âOH GOD RON, Thatâs the Spot!â
Ron has been the only one able to hit Kimâs G-spot, and heâs just reached it again. As he continues to pump his Cock into her pussy, she fights to hold on, not wanting this to end. Not wanting to come just yet. But itâs a losing battle, and she feels herself approaching her limit.
âOh! Ron, Iâm gonna cum!â Kim yells.
âMe too!â Monique adds, and a moment later, they both hit their climax. Their bodies tremble, their orgasms nearly overwhelm them. Monique gently puts Kimâs legs down before collapsing onto the bed. A moment later, Ron pulls out, and feels left out.
âAw man, I didnât even cum this time.â He says.
âAllow me to solve that problem.â Monique says, grabbing hold of his still firm Cock. Taking it into her mouth, she starts to suck him off, rotating her tongue around the head of his Rod. Her technique isnât as developed as Kimâs, but she can take in more than Kim ever could. Soon Ron feels himself being brought to his limit.
âOKâŠOK, thatâs gonna do it!â He says, just as Monique pulls his Rod out of her mouth. A moment later, he lets off, spraying his load all over her face and Kimâs stomach. Finally spent, Ron falls forward and into bed, where Kim cuddles up beside him, along with Monique.
âAlright, youâre forgiven, Ron.â Kim tells him, which brings a smile to his face. âBut if you go on a solo mission again, Global Justice wonât hide you from me. Got it?â
âGot it.â He answers, smiling nervously. Kim then rewards him with a deep goodnight kiss.
âGoodnight, Ron.â She says, reaching over and turning off the lights. As Kim & Monique drift off the sleep, Ron canât help but to stare at his Fearless Ferret costume lying on the chair. Sure the adventures were death-defying & dangerous, but thereâs still a hint of pride and heroism inside of Ron that would have him put it back on, and once again become the Furry Avenger of Righteousness. At least until Kim catches him staring.
âRon, youâre never wearing that suit again.â She says.
âAnd I wonât be dressing up as Ferret Girl!â Monique adds.
âAlright, alright.â Ron says, getting the point. âA man canât dream?â
The Motherâs Day Chapter
âWAAAAHHHHHH!!!!!!! MONKEYS! WHY DID IT HAVE TO BE MONKEYS???â
Ron ponders this question as he drives an ATV through the deep African Forest, while being chased by dozens of Monkey Fistâs monkey ninjas. Strangely enough, today was supposed to be something simple. Ron got the idea of picking some Lotus Blossom flowers and giving it to his mother for Motherâs Day. He also got a few for Kimâs MomâŠbut thatâs when Monkey Fist showed up.
âI do not know how you discovered the secret of eternal youth those flowers hold Stoppable,â Monkey Fist yells to him, chasing him, âbut you will NOT have a chance to use it!â
âDude, what are you talking about?!?â Ron yells back, taking his eyes off the forward path for a moment. Ron doesnât know that Monkey Fist intends to use those flowers in a mystic potion that would give him immortality & internal youth, which he will use to proclaim himself as a Monkey God. As Ron looks back to the path, he finds that the moment shouldnât have been taken, because heâs heading for a cliff.
âRufusâŠit looks like this is gonna be a rough ride.â Ron says. Rufus peeks out of Ronâs jacket pocket and sees the upcoming cliff, then covers his eyes, expecting the worst. But fate steps in once again for Ron, and a rope ladder rolls down right at the edge of the cliff. Timing it right, Ron leaps off the ATV and grabs the ladder, which he now sees is attached to a Global Justice Helicopter. The Helicopter pulls him up as most of the Monkey Ninja plummet off the cliff to the water below. Monkey Fist stops short, and curses himself for Ron escaping.
âHow does he get so lucky?â He asks, before yelling up to Ron. â WE WILL MEET AGAIN! AND NEXT TIME YOU WILL NOT ESCAPE ME AGAIN, YOUNG STOPPABLE!!!â
âAH-BOOYAH!!!â Ron yells back, sort of like a victory call. He climbs all the way into the Helicopter and takes the nearest seat, still clutching the flowers he picked for his & Kimâs mothers. âHey, Helicopter dude. Do you drop off at the front door?â
2 Hours LaterâŠ
âOh Ronald, theyâre beautiful.â
Mrs. Stoppable clutches the dozen Lotus Blossoms her son has just given her, before thanking him with a kiss on the forehead. âHowâd you get these?â
âEh, I know a guy.â Ron says nonchalantly, referring to Wade, who clued him in on their location. Mrs. Stoppable thanks her son again, before climbing into a Station Wagon being driven by Ronâs father.
âWeâre gonna go out for a Motherâs Day Brunch.â He says. âYouâre gonna be OK alone?â
âYeah, Iâm good.â Ron answers. âGonna go visit Kim to give these flowers to her mom.â
Ronâs parents bid their goodbyes and pull off, as Ron grabs his Moped. He hops on and begins his drive over to Kimâs house. As he rolls down the road, his mind canât help but to wander to that innocent day where he dropped off Mrs. Possibleâs medical bag, and ended up getting a special âCheck-Upâ himself. Nearing Kimâs house, he remembers the plan he made for this instance.
âOK. Just get there, give Kim the flowers, and get the hell out of there.â He thinks to himself. As he pulls into the driveway, Kim is at the front door to meet him. âAw yeah, thisâll be easier than I thought.â
âHey, KP.â Ron says. âGot these for your mom.â
âTheyâre perfect, Ron.â Kim says, thanking him with a hug. âIâll take them right up andâŠâ Sheâs interrupted by the sound of an explosion. The two turn around and look across the street to see a Dirt Bike rocketing down the roadâŠand Kimâs little brothers, Jim & Tim, chasing after it.
âGRRRR! TWEEBS!!!â Kim growls. âIâll be right back, Ron. You take these up to my mom.â
âWha? Your mom? Sheâs here?â Ron asks.
âSheâs up in her room in bed!â Kim yells back to him as she chases after her brothers. Within seconds, Ronâs face turns pale, his heart rate slows down, and a cold sweat forms on his forehead. This is not what he had planned.
âWHAT? WAIT, KIM!â Itâs too late. Kimâs already a block down the street, and out of hearing distance. Seeing no other choice, Ron reluctantly walks into Kimâs house and up the stairs. With each step he takes, his heart beats a little faster. The last thing he wanted to see was Kimâs Mom in bed. As he reaches the top of the stairs, he takes a deep breath and plans to himself.
âOK. Go in her room, drop off the flowers, and get the hell out of there.â He says to himself, slowly walking forward. He approaches Mrs. Possibleâs room and peeks in, only to see her staring back.
âHello, Ronald.â She says.
âUhâŠheheh, Hi Mrs. Dr. P.â Ron responds before slowly walking in the room, being sure not to make eye contact with her. âUh, I just came to drop off these flowers and Iâll be on myâŠâ
âOh, those are beautiful, Ronald.â She interrupts. âBring them over here.â
He hesitates for a moment, but then complies. Turning to her, he sees that Kimâs mom is wearing an old long-sleeve nightshirt with the face of a Teddy Bear in front and is wrapped under the covers. Ron brings the flowers over and she takes a short whiff of them, enjoying the aroma. âThank you, Ronald.â She says. âYou can put them on the nightstand.â Ron places them there and turns to make a hasty retreat out of the room, but he feels Kimâs mom grabbing his wrist, stopping him. âWhatâs the hurry? Donât you have another present?â
âUhâŠanother present?â Ron says nervously. Mrs. Possible elaborates by removing her covers, revealing that sheâs wearing nothing but socks underneath. All the willpower in the world isnât able to help Ron as he lays his eyes on her bare pussy. He develops a Hard-on in 0.6 seconds, and itâs one that doesnât go unnoticed.
âThatâs the present I mean.â She says.
Beads of sweat form on Ronâs forehead, as he realizes exactly whatâs going on. âMrs. P youâre trying to seduce me!!!â
Mrs. Possible just smiles back at him. âWould you like me too?â
At that moment, Ron gazes deep into her eyes. And for some reason, all doubt and resistance fade from his mind. Thereâs something in her eyes that reminds him of Kim, and soon he finds himself no longer in control of his actions. Letting his pants drop to the floor, he steps out of them, and his shoes, and climbs into bed with Kimâs mother. She spreads her legs apart, inviting him inside of her. The hesitation he normally feels at this moment is nowhere to be found, and he goes forward. Pulling his boxers down to his knees, he grabs hold of his Cock and brings it to Mrs. Possibleâs love lips, before pushing all the way in.
âMmmm, thatâs the present Iâve been waiting for.â She says, moaning in pleasure. Ron pushes deep into her, then pulls back, starting off his stroking motion. Mrs. Possible grabs the covers and drapes them over Ron & herself, as Ron continues to pump into her. He slowly becomes engulfed in the moment, and lifts up Mrs. Possibleâs nightshirt, revealing her bare breasts.
âMy goodness, Ronald.â She says. âYou certainly are assertive today. I like it.â
Ron just smiles back. And though heâs giving it all he has, and enjoying every moment, in his mind thereâs a different reaction to this situation. âWHAT AM I DOING???â He thinks to himself. âIâmâŠIâm fucking Kimâs Mom. IN HER OWN HOUSE! WHILE SHEâS HOME!!! OKâŠOK. As long as I finish before Kim finds outâŠâ
âMom?â
The thought dies in his head, as Ron instantly recognizes the voice. He doesnât want to turn towards the source, but knows he has to. Slowly, both Ron & Kimâs mom turn their heads towards the door to see Kim standing there in disbelief, jaw dropped to the floor.
âYouâŠand RonâŠAGAIN?â
âI am so dead.â Ron thinks to himself.
âUm, Kimmy? I can explain.â Mrs. Possible says.
âI donât think I want you to.â Kim says, walking over and sitting on the bed beside them.
Mrs. Possible puts her hand on Kimâs shoulder & explains. âYou see honey, IâmâŠa bit of a Nympho. ItâŠruns on the female side of the family. In fact, itâs the main reason your father married me.â Kim turns to her mother as she continues. âSo, when I saw young RonaldâsâŠgift, it was almost too much for me to bare.â
âYouâreâŠa nympho.â Kim says, not fully believing her as Mrs. Possible nods her head yes. âOK, then prove it.â
Kim slowly leans forward towards her mother and puckers her lips, while closing her eyes. Mrs. Possible is a bit shocked as what her daughter is trying to do, but she doesnât turn away. Instead, she meets her halfway through and they lock lips. Itâs an innocent kiss at first, as Kim keeps her lips pressed against her motherâs, trying to see if she pulls back. But what she gets is the unexpected. Mrs. Possible ventures her tongue into Kimâs mouth; causing Kimâs eyes to shoot open wide in shock. She didnât expect to find out what her motherâs tongue feels like, and she expected even less to like it. She likes it so much, in fact, that she starts to climb in bed beside her. Mrs. Possible grabs Kimâs Baby-T and pulls it off over her head, breaking the kiss only for a moment.
âOK.â Kim says. âI believe you.â
They resume with their makeout, which continues to get hotter by the second. Ron, in the meantime, is in total shock. His heart skipped several beats when they started kissing, and now he finds himself balls deep inside of Kimâs mom, ready to cum like a firehose just from watching the action.
âOK, no offense, but Iâm about to explode just from watching this.â He says, causing the two to break the kiss.
âWell, we should at least let him join in.â Mrs. Possible says, wanting him to finish.
âAnd I have the perfect motivator.â Kim adds, turning her attention to Ron. She kisses him, just as deeply and passionately as her mother kissed her. As Ron kisses her back, he grabs hold of Mrs. Possibleâs thighs and continues to penetrate her deeply. Kim starts taking off her shorts, along with her thong, leaving nothing but her socks and a bra on. As they break the kiss, Kimâs mom gets her attention again.
âOH! Oh, Kimmy. Suck on my tits!â She says. Kim complies, wrapping her lips around her motherâs nipple and tonguing it. She fondles her other breasts, as Ron starts to drill her hard. Each stroke brings her closer & closer, until she finally canât hold out any longer.
âOH! Oh Ronald!â She yells. âYouâre making me Cum!â
âSame hereâŠMrs. P.â Ron says, giving out a few more strokes before he hits his limit. He lets loose his load, spraying it deep inside of her. Itâs a sensation Kimâs mother welcomes, as itâs been so long since sheâs felt it. Kim sits up and looks at her mother, whoâs basking in the afterglow. Ron, however, doesnât feel as good.
âOH MY GOD, I JUST CAME IN YOUR MOM!!!â He yells. âWhat am I gonna do?â
âRelax, Ron. Momâs on the pill.â Kim tells him, before looking at her mother with concern to confirm it. âRight, mom?â
Mrs. Possible nods her head yes. âMe & your father thought it was best, especially after the twins.â
Ron breathes a sigh of relief. âSoâŠwhat happens now?â
âI take my turn.â Kim says pushing Ron onto the bed as he pulls out of Mrs. Possible. He lands right beside Kimâs mom and, a moment later, Kim herself starts to mount him. Mrs. Possible just rolls on to her side and grins, ready to watch the impending action.
âMy little Kimmy always did know when to take charge.â She says, as Kim slips onto Ronâs still-hard Rod.
âOK, this is kinda weird us doing it in front of your mom, KP.â Ron says.
âOh Ronald, donât think of me as a spectator.â She says, before bringing her lips to his. She kisses him more gently than she did her daughter, but still lets her tongue roam into his mouth. After a short hesitation, he comes back with tongue-play of his own. The kiss lasts well over a minute, before Mrs. Possible breaks it. âThink of me as âjust waiting my turnâ.â
âOK, still weird, but thereâs no way in hell that Iâm stopping!â He says, ready to continue. Kim starts off by moving her hips, slowly at first to work the rhythm. She puts one hand on the headboard for balance, as Ron holds onto her hips. Kim lets out a soft moan, and bites her lower lip, enjoying this moment.
âMmmm, nice technique, honey.â Mrs. Possible says.
âThanks, mom.â Kim says, picking up her pace. âRonâs been a big help. Oh God, Yes!â Kim begins to fondle her own breast with her free hand, tweaking the nipple to get off even more. After a moment more of looking on, Kimâs mom decides to join in.
âLet me help you with that.â She says, sitting up towards Kim. Putting one arm around her daughter, she uses her other hand to play with one of Kimâs breasts, while she licks the other.
âOH! Damn mom, youâre good!â Kim tells her, loving the experience. Mrs. Possible attends to her daughterâs breasts some more, as Ron starts to plow into her balls deep. Kim & Ron are pouring down in sweat, and Mrs. Possible is starting to glisten herself. The covers have now been tossed aside and are lying on the floor. Mrs. Possible removes her mouth from Kimâs breast and takes off her nightshirt, tossing it aside & letting her perfect breasts out in the open. Ron takes a one good look at both pairs of breasts in bed with him, and gets pushed over the limit.
âAw, man! KP IâM GONNA CUM!!!â He yells.
âMe too, Ron!â Kim answers. âCum inside of me!â
A few strokes later he does exactly that, shooting a hot stream of semen deep into Kim. Her body tenses up, as she experiences her own orgasm, which is followed by a look of pleasure that washes across her face. Ronâs now breathing a little heavily, but as Kim climbs off of him, heâs surprisingly still hard. This astonishes Mrs. Possible.
âWow, Ronald. Youâre staying power is amazing.â She says. âCare to go for Round 3?â
Most of the time in this situation Ron would bow out. But after glancing upon Mrs. Possiblesâ bare body, he wants to do anything but. âYou know it, Mrs. P!â
âHow about we try a new position?â She suggests, turning away from him onto her side and raising one leg into the air, inviting Ronâs Cock once again. He positions himself behind her and guides his member to her pussy lips. As Kim climbs over the two to face her mother, Ron slides himself back inside of Mrs. Possible. Heâs reminded of how warm it is inside of her as he begins to work up a steady hump. Mrs. Possible coos in pleasure and begins to rub her clit. But Kim stops her before she can get further into it.
âLet me help you with that.â She says, using her hand to rub her motherâs clit. Mrs. Possible does the same to her daughter, and the two kiss once more. All three pairs of legs wrap around each other as Kim pushes herself closer to her mother. Their breasts press against each other, nipples poking each other, which only serve in making the two Possible women even hotter. Meanwhile, Ron has nearly lost himself in the moment, as he pounds Mrs. Possibleâs pussy without mercy. Kim & her mother break the kiss, this time leaving a long, thin line of saliva between them. Kim then switches her attention back to Ron, and lets him share in the makeout session. Their tongues roam in & out of each otherâs mouth, as Ron continues to ream Kimâs mom continuously. He gropes Mrs. Possibleâs tits, almost mesmerized by how soft they are & how they feel. The couple breaks the kiss, just as Kimâs mom turns her head to look back at Ron. And almost on instinct, Ron & Mrs. Possible lock lips. Her hands venture inside of Kimâs pussy, which is now wetter than ever. Kim lets out a loud moan of pleasure, feeling herself being brought to another orgasm. Kimâs mom isnât far behind her, as Ronâs Cock continues to probe deep inside of her. Ron & Mrs. Possible break their kiss, just as the two Possible women reach their limit.
âOh, Mom! Iâm gonna cum!â Kim yells.
âCum with me, Kimmy!â Mrs. Possible says, still fingering her daughter to an orgasm. A moment later, both Kim & her mother let out dual screams of passion, reaching their limit. A moment after that, Ron reaches his and unleashes a second load deep inside of Kimâs mother. The room slowly falls silent, as all three lie in bed almost motionless, only the sound of their heavy breathing filling the room. After a few more moments, Kim breaks the silence and looks up at her mother.
âHappy Mothers Day, mom.â She says. âHope you like the gift.â
âI love it, Kim.â Mrs. Possible says. âAnd Iâm glad Ron could give me double.â
âHappyâŠto help outâŠMrs. P.â Ron says, feeling totally exhausted. The three continue to lie there, not moving, and not wanting to. Mrs. Possible is the most satisfied of the three. With Ronâs Cock still deep in her pussy, she embraces her daughter Kim and kisses her once more, grateful for a memorable Motherâs Day.
The Tokyo Drifting Chapters
âRon, how could you say that?â
Kim looks across the table at her boyfriend Ron in shock. The two are enjoying a meal at Bueno Nacho, or at least they were until Ron stated something to make Kim upset enough to drop her Chimerito. Ron swallows the bite he took out of his Naco and continues.
âIâm sorry, KP. But youâre kinda dull.â He says.
âRon, Iâm a teen super spy who saves the world on almost a weekly basis.â She counters. âHalf of the missions we go on involve death-defying situations!â
âI know.â Ron agrees. âBut you do all that exciting stuff to save the world. Other than that, you live a pretty dull life. Youâve never done anything wild & crazy, just because. In fact, youâre kinda predictable.â
âI am not dull or predictable!â Kim counters. âI can be spontaneousâŠI can do something wild & crazy without it involving saving the world.â
âSure you can, KP.â Ron says, not really believing her. As he picks up his Naco for another bite, his eyes glance down at the wrapper it came in, and for the first time he notices some words on the wrapper that are barely visible cause of the grease. âWhat theâŠâ
Putting his Naco down, he grabs a napkin and wipes the grease from the wrapper so he can read whatâs on it. Once all the grease is off, he reads the wrapper, which says: âYou have won a free trip to the Grand Opening of Bueno Nacho Tokyo.â
âOH, YEAH! BOOYAH, SCORE!â He cheers. âWe just won a free trip to Tokyo!â Rufus emerges from Ronâs pocket and celebrates with him, before breaking into some Kung-Fu poses. Kim however, doesnât look as excited.
âThatâs great, Ron.â She says. âBut we canât go to Tokyo. I mean, what if thereâsâŠâ Sheâs interrupted by the sound of her Kimmunicator going off. Taking it out from her pocket, she answers the call. âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
âJust got an alert from Middle High-Security Prison.â He says. âMotor Ed was there and helped with a breakout.â
âHis cousin Drakken?â Kim asks.
âNo, get this. He broke out Adrena Lynn.â Wade tells her, surprising Kim & Ron. âThey were last seen hijacking a Cruise Ship on their way to Japan. Tokyo, to be precise.â
âThen itâs off to Tokyo.â Kim says, grabbing her jacket. Sheâs about to stand up from the table & leave when she notices Ron sitting there, wearing an âI told you soâ smirk with his hands folded over his chest. âIâŠwas gonna suggest going there anyway.â
âSorry, KP.â Ron says, not believing her. âBut when it comes to you doing anything, being spontaneous isnât on your list.â He gets up from the table and heads towards the exit, with Kim following behind. Though she doesnât admit it, Kim is thinking that her boyfriend just might be right. Aside from her heroic missions, which often have life-or-death situations, she hasnât done anything exciting other than baby-sit her twin brothers. And itâs them who start the excitement.
âI can be spontaneous.â Kim thinks to herself, developing her trademark Determination mentality. âI can do anything!â
Meanwhile, on the other side of the worldâŠ
Itâs late night on the streets of Tokyo, as the neon lights shine brightly, illuminating the Entertainment district of the city. There are Citizens walking the street, either on their way home or on their way to fun another fun spot to spend their time, all of them going on their way without a worryâŠuntil a gigantic Monster Truck comes barreling down the road. The Tokyo Citizens flee in terror as the Truck, with the name âBig Green Dragon Monsterâ on each side, crushes anything & everything in its path. Driving the Behemoth vehicle, not surprisingly, is Motor Ed. In the passenger seat is the newly freed Adrena Lynn.
âUh, why does it say âBig Green Dragon Monsterâ on the side of the truck, baby?â She asks him.
âCause I canât remember the name of that Lizard Dude who fought that Monkey Dude in the movie!â Motor Ed replies.
âUh, you mean Godzilla?â She says. âAnd why would you name this truck Godzilla?â Motor Ed brings the truck to a stop after she asks that. Pushing a red button just above the CD player, he activates one of the truckâs special features. The headlights slide down into the truck, and dual flamethrowers pop out. A moment later, they shoot out waves of flames that incinerate everything directly in front of it, leaving nothing but charred remains & ash. Needless to say, this sight excites Adrena Lynn.
âFRRRREAKYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY!!!!!!!â She says, wearing an almost sadistic grin.
âSERIOUSLY!!!â Motor Ed adds. âItâs all part of my killer plan, babe.â
âWhat is your plan, anyway?â She asks.
âOh, Iâm gonna enter my killer dragster in the Tokyo Underground Grand Prix.â He tells her. âThe Grand Prize is an experimental Jet Engine from NASA! With that puppy in my pride & joy right here, we can crush anything that gets in our way! Plus, Iâd be a shoo-in to win a ton of Car Shows. Seriously!â
âOh YEAH!â Lynn says, getting more excited about the plan. âAnd I can film the whole thing, and sell it to PPV! The ratings will be sky high, along with the greenbacks!â
âYeah, weâll be rolling in the dough, babe!â Ed adds.
The excitement begins to overwhelm Adrena Lynn, and she starts getting aroused. Subtly she starts playing with herself, one hand groping her breasts and the other in her pants rubbing her pussy, making it wetter by the second. And by the second it also starts to get less & less subtle. âBaby, I want you to crank this monster to the highest gear!â She tells Motor Ed.
âNo problem!â He replies, pushing the stick shift to 6th gear and roaring forward. At this moment, he finally notices Adrena Lynn feeling on herself. âHey, babe. You want some excitement? I can let you take the wheel, seriously! Know how to drive a stick?â
Adrena Lynn leans towards him and slips her hand into his pants. âOh, I wanna try a different Stick Shift!â The evil newly couple kiss passionately, shoving their tongues into each otherâs mouths as Lynn begins to unbuckle Motor Edâs jeans. Getting them loose, she grabs hold of something large in his pants. Breaking the kiss, she looks down to see his python-like Cock in her hand. Apparently, Drakken & Motor Ed have something in common.
âHOLY CRAP!â She says, in total shock by the size. âThis is all you?â
âOh yeah!â Ed replies, smirking in pride. âThink you can handle it, my extreme queen?â
âIâll die trying! FREAKYYYYYYYYYY!!!!!!â And with her gung-ho attitude in full gear, she dives into his lap headfirst, engulfing the head of his Cock into her mouth. Unfortunately, it doesnât get easier for her from there. Sheâs barely able to get another inch into his mouth, before she fills it up. Motor Ed sits back and enjoys the feeling, until he sees Lynnâs ass almost pointing skywards, waiting to be handled. Reaching a hand over, he pulls her jeans down just low enough to uncover her round luscious bare ass.
âWhoa! No panties!â He says. âSeriously! I knew there was a reason I loved you!â
She removes his Cock from her mouth and looks up at them. âOh, I always go commando! 24/7!â Knowing she wonât be able to fit anymore into her mouth (without unhinging her jaw), she proceeds to lick his shaft & head, while jerking him off with her hands. Motor Ed begins to finger Lynnâs pussy, using his middle & ring. After bathing his Rod with her tongue, she engulfs the head again, and moves her tongue back & forth. Itâs a great sensation for Ed. But after a few moments, he wants a little more.
âWhoa, babe! Babe!â He says, as she removes his Cock from her mouth again. âDonât get me wrong, your mouth is fantastic. But Big Ed wants to park his truck into your garage.â
âOoh, yeah!â She agrees, taking her pants all the way off. âI wanna ride this bull!â
She straddles him between her legs, having his Cock nestled between the crack of her ass. She lifts up her shirt enough to expose her perky round breasts, with both nipples still pierced. Lifting herself up, she comes down and engulfs the head. But begins to have a little problem as she gets to the shaft.
âOh God, itâs huge!â She says.
âWhoa, Lynn. You sure you can take it, babe?â Ed asks.
âFuck Yeah I can take it!â She answers, thinking back to a time where she shared & jail cell with Shego. Shego told her about her nights with Drakken, and how she was able to handle his Cock. Slowly she starts taking in the rest of his monster, using Shegoâs advice as a guide, until Motor Ed is balls deep inside of her. âYEAH! IT FIT! NOW LETâS GET HARDCORE, BABY!!!â
Ed is more than happy to comply, as he begins to pump his Cock in & out of her. Lynn grabs him and pulls herself close before kissing him again, shoving her tongue back into his mouth. Ed puts his hands around her hips and holds onto them as he continues to drill into her. Out of the corner of his eye, he spots a long row of cars. Breaking the kiss, he gets an idea.
âHey Babe.â He says. âHow about we put a few rough bumps into this ride?â
Adrena Lynn knows exactly what heâs talking about, and excitedly nods her head yes. Putting his arms around her, he grabs the steering wheel and turns towards the row of cars, before putting his hands back on her hips. The two brace themselves, but donât have to wait for long. The Truck hits the first car, causing Lynn to bounce up higher, leaving only the head of Edâs Cock inside of her. A moment later, the truck crunches the car, and Lynn comes back down hard, Edâs Cock slamming deep inside of her.
âOH, FUCK YEAH!!!â She screams. âGOD I LOVE THIS RIDE!!!â
The truck rolls over another car, and Lynn gets another big bounce, having Edâs Cock slamming into her deep regions again. It continues with each car they crunch, and it starts to bring the two to her limit. Motor Ed is taking pleasure in his idea, as he watches Lynnâs tits bounce majestically from inches away. Soon, he no longer wants to be a spectator where they are concerned. He lunges forward & wraps his mouth around one of them, sucking on them & biting her nipple as he tweaks her piercing on the other nipple.
âFUCK!!!â She screams in pleasure. âThatâs right, baby! WORK THE KINK!!!â
He continues to do just that, as his Cock continues to drill her snatch relentlessly like a Jackhammer. Soon, Lynnâs not able to hold out any longer.
âIâm gonna cum!â She says. â OH YEAH!!! EXTREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEME!!!!!!â
Her entire body tenses up as she hits her orgasm hard. At that moment, Motor Ed hits his limit, and erupts deep inside of her like a Volcano, shooting off his load. Her pussy begins to drip with cum as it runs down his Cock. Ironically, they reach the end of the long row of cars at that moment. Motor Ed brings the truck to a stop as Adrena Lynn lies against him, basking in the glow of a huge orgasm.
âHeyâŠbabe.â He says, out of breath. âHow bout we take this party back to HQ?â
âOh yeah, baby!â She says, all for the idea. Motor Ed stomps on the gas and pulls off, not bothering to look behind him. If he had, he wouldâve seen the massive amount of damage his Monster Truck has caused. Dozens of cars have been crushed, hydrants broken as water shoots up out of them like a Geyser. The entire road looks like an F5 Tornado has hit it. Motor Ed wouldâve been proud.
Back around the worldâŠ
Kim & Ron are seated in First Class on a Commercial Plane. Wade was unable to get a ride for them, so they decided to head there under the guise of Contest Winners, since Ron did win. As the plane flies over the Pacific on its way to Tokyo, Kim gets her mission briefing from Wade as Ron kicks back & relaxes.
âSome Undercover Global Justice sources tell me that Motor Ed & Adrena Lynn are planning to enter some illegal underground racing Grand Prix.â He tells Kim. âFirst prize is an experimental Jet Engine from NASA.â
âNo doubt to be used by Motor Ed if he wins.â Kim adds.
âHe almost created havoc with the Keplar.â Wade says. âWe canât let him get his hands on this Jet Engine.â
âHe wonât.â Kim says. âWade, Iâm gonna needâŠâ
âUh yeah, just give her the usual, Wade.â Ron chimes in, to Kimâs chagrin. âShe wonât be changing up.â
âPlease & thank you.â Kim adds, before signing off. She lets out a low groan before turning her attention to a passing Stewardess. âExcuse me, could you get me aâŠâ
âCup of water and a bag of those Honey Roasted Peanuts.â Ron finishes, which gets to Kim.
âRON!â
âWhat? Just trying to speed up the boring process, KP.â Ron replies.
âI am NOT boring, dull OR predictable!â She tells him.
âHey, thereâs nothing wrong with being safe.â Ron says, as he rises from his seat and walks past Kim. âIâm sure lots of people lived their lives without doing something wild & crazy just for the hell of it. Of course they had boring livesâŠâ
Ron stops when he notices Kimâs arms are folded over her chest and sheâs wearing a peeved look. Deciding it best not to continue, he walks off down the aisle and enters the Plane Bathroom, leaving Kim to herself.
âI can be spontaneous!â She says to herself. âThere was the time at Camp Wannaweep whereâŠno, that turned into a mission. Well, the time where I wentâŠno, that was to save the president. Well, that time whenâŠno, that was to preserve the timeline against Shego.â She lets out a hard sigh, and puts her head in her hand. âRonâs rightâŠeverything exciting I do is mission related. I havenât so much as jaywalked or shoplifted. WellâŠthatâs gonna change right now.â
Developing an idea in her head, she gets up from her seat and walks down the aisle towards the bathroom Ron went into. When she reaches the door, she gives it two knocks, before hearing Ronâs voice on the other side.
âUh, Occupied. Be right out in a second.â He says, but Kim doesnât want that. Reaching into her pocket, she pulls out a credit card & slides it through the crack of the door, jimmying it open. Ron looks over at the doorway to see his girlfriend there.
âWhoa, Kim. Uh, this is the Guys Bathroom.â He says.
âI know that.â She answers. âBut you & me are about to join an exclusive club.â
âHuh, they got clubs opening up at the school?â Ron asks.
âNo.â Kim answers, her look becoming more seductive by the moment. âThe Mile High Club.â
âWhat kind of club is that?â He asks. âDo you have to be a Denver Bronco fan to join?â
âNo, all you have to do is have sexâŠ30,000 feet in the air.â Kim says, advancing towards him. Then it hits Ron, like a rock. Heâs heard the term before, along with the stories. But in a crowded plane like this, itâs not something he had planned for today.
âWHOA! Whoa! Hold on! Wait! KP, there are like over 100 people on this plane!â
âThen weâll have to be extra quiet.â She replies. âRufus, go watch our seats.â
Hopping out of Ronâs pocket, Rufus scampers out of the bathroom and back to their seats, where he finds a package of Honey Roasted Peanuts waiting. He opens the package and pops on in his mouth, while back at the bathroom; Kim closes the door & locks it.
âWait, this is about me teasing you for not being spontaneous.â Ron says, coming to that conclusion. âCanât we start out with something else, like Jaywalking?â
âNow whoâs being safe?â Kim says smugly, as she leans in close to Ron. He turns his head away from her, knowing that if he feels her lips, heâll become like putty in her hands. Unfortunately, she knows about how ticklish he can be, and gently runs her finger across his chest. He stifles a giggle, but the sensation is too much and he ends up laughing. Kim takes the opening and lunges herself at him, locking her lips with his. The two hit the wall as Kim puts her arms around Ron, locking him in close. The taste of her strawberry lipstick is almost too much to bear, as Ron begins to kiss her back. His hands roam down her body until they reach her round backside. He gives her cheeks a gentle squeeze, before reality hits him and he realizes where he is. Panicking, he breaks the kiss & backs up.
âOK, NO!â He says, trying to sound firm. âThere is no part of me that wants to join the Mile High Club!â A moment later, his pants drop down to his ankles, and a raging hard-on is revealed through his boxers. âNot now, pants! WHY HAVE YOU BETRAYED ME?!?!â
âThey have a good idea.â Kim says, bending over to take off her white pants. She pulls them all the way down, then steps out of them, showing Ron her red panties with a white heart on the front. Ron takes one look at them and loses all resistance in his mind. The couple lock lips again, kissing more passionately this time. So much so that they lose balance and in up on the toilet, Ron sitting down with Kim on to of him. Ron starts to move down Kimâs neck, kissing the certain spots he knows she loves. And it works, as Kim becomes even more aroused than when she first decided to do this. After a moment, she stops him, getting another idea.
âWait, wait.â She says. âLets try something new.â
Using her Cheerleading training & acrobatic skills, she slowly flips into a handstand before landing on Ron, in a somewhat standing 69 position. Ron doesnât have to think about what Kim wants to do.
âSpankinâ!â He says, pulling her panties off just enough to get to her wet snatch. He dives in, tongue-first, and begins licking & sucking on her to no end. Kim goes to work as well, pulling out Ronâs Cock & shoving it into her mouth. Her head bobs back & forth, as her tongue rubs against his head & shaft. She even uses her hands to caress his balls, wanting to give him the full treatment. Ron meanwhile is concentrating on Kimâs clit, tonguing & sucking on it while he fingers Kimâs pussy. He then shoves his tongue back into her snatch, and uses those fingers to run her clit. The pleasure hits Kim immediately, as she wraps her legs around Ron. Instinctively, he begins to pump himself into Kimâs mouth. She welcomes it, and times it so her tongue circles the head of his Cock with each thrust in. After minutes in this position, Ron calls for a stop.
âWait! KP!â He says. âWe canât stay like this.â
Kim flips off of Ron and lands on her feet, though she stumbles a bit due to the blood that rushed to her head. âYouâre right, Ron. Besides, time to move on to the main event.â
She hops up on the bathroom sink and spreads herself open, pussy wet from her juices & Ronâs saliva. Not wanting to turn back, Ron gets to his feet and positions himself in front of her. Pushing forward, he slides his Cock deep inside of Kim, causing her to grunt, then moan in pleasure. She places her feet on the adjacent wall, then pulls Ron towards her & kisses him, almost like sheâs giving him incentive to fuck her hard. It works, as Ron starts to pound her pussy, going as deep as he can with each stroke. Kimâs panties now hang loosely off of one leg. Ron pulls up her sweater and begins to grope her breasts. They break the kiss, leaving a line of saliva, but still stay close to each other.
âYeah, Ron! Fuck me! Fuck me good!â She cheers.
âDamn, I love your tight pussy, Kim.â Ron tells her.
âYeah, just for you.â She replies. âOnly you.â
She clenches the side of the sink tightly, not only to keep her balance but also to stave of the force of Ronâs thrusts. Sweat begins to drip & roll down both of their bodies, as the mirror Kim leans against begins to fog up. She takes one hand and starts rubbing herself, almost in unison with Ronâs movements. Their grunts & moans fill up the tiny bathroom, but thankfully arenât loud enough for someone outside to hear them. Kim continues to get reamed by Ronâs member, and feels she canât hold out any longer.
âOh yeah! Yeah! Yeah!â She says, trying to remain quiet. âRon, Iâm gonna cum.â
âMe too, KP!â He replies, ready to blow.
âCome with me, baby! UUUUUUUUHHHHHHNNNNNNNN!!!!!!!!!!â
In one moment, the loving couple cums together. Ron unleashes his load deep inside of her, not bothering to pull out & not worrying since Kim reminded him sheâs on the pill. He pulls out as his Cock continues to pour out cum, spraying it between Kimâs legs. Exhausted, he puts his hands on the sink to stop himself from collapsing. All thatâs heard in the bathroom now is heavy breathing, until Kim breaks the silence.
âSo, Iâm not spontaneous?â She asks with a grin.
âOK, OK. You win.â Ron says, giving in. âYou can do anything.â
âBetter believe it.â She tells him, before pulling him close again and kissing him once more. The kiss is short-lived though, as the two feel the plane bouncing and slowing down.
âOh, crap!â Kim says. âThe planeâs landing!â
âWhat? How did we get to Tokyo this quick?â Ron says. The two quickly scramble to get their clothes back on and get themselves straightened up. After a couple of minutes, theyâre fully dressed. Ron walks out of the bathroom first, not wanting to draw any attention. He waits by the door for everyone to exit the plane. Once itâs clear, he opens it back up and Kim comes out. Rufus runs up to them and hands Kim her Kimmunicator, which she picks up from him. Kim & Ron then look at each other and breath a sigh of relief, before laughing over the situation.
âOK. Next time I think Iâll stick with Jaywalking.â Kim says, as the two exit the plane.
âWell, at least youâve taken your first step to living an exciting life.â Ron tells her, just as her Kimmunicator goes off.
âWhat is it, Wade?â Kim asks.
âWhat happened?â Wade asks. âI tried to call you but I only got Rufus.â
âUhâŠwe wereâŠgoing over tactical plans for the mission.â Kim says, wanting to keep her Mile High experience secret.
âWell anyway, I got a guide for you to show you around Tokyo.â Wade says. âShe should be there right now.â
âRoger, Wade.â Kim says before hanging up. She turns to Ron to relay the news, and sees him with his jaw dropped, wearing a look of shock. âRon whatâs wrong? You act like youâve seen aâŠâ Kimâs gaze turns to wear Ron is looking, and she immediately understands the look on his face. The guide that Wade got for them is very familiar, especially to Ron.
âStoppable-San. It is good to see you again.â
âYori.â Kim utters, with a hint of coldness & jealousy.
The Tokyo Drifting Chapters 2
PrologueâŠ
âI wish I were dead.â
Those are the words Dr. Drakken thinks in his head, as he sits on the edge of his bed, forced to share a Cell with Frugal Lucre, a two-bit crook with a one-bit personality. For hours heâs been forced to listen to Lucre âdiscussâ future plans on how heâll take over the planet and rule it on a $39 budget. Countless times Drakken has entertained thoughts of shoving a pillow down his throat, ending his ranting for good. The only thing stopping him is his knowledge that heâll go to the Box, and he feels heâs spent enough time there for a lifetime.
âAnd Club Banana outfits would be OUTLAWED in my regime!â Lucre continues, before noticing the time. âWell, it is getting late. Letâs get some shut-eye, buddy. And save some rest time.â
Lucre lies down in his bed and turns away from Drakken, ready to get some sleep. âFinally.â Drakken utters under his breath, shutting off the light & lying down in his own bed. As he lies on his back, he looks out of his cell window. The expression on his face isnât the one of a plotting genius, or even that of a vengeful madman. No, itâs a look of defeat Drakken is wearing.
âItâs over.â He says to himself, referring to his dreams of World Domination. âItâs truly over. My evil Lairs have been seized by Global Justice, my minions are either locked up or working with two-bit villainous hacks, and my HenchwomanâŠâ He stops right there, not wanting to think about it any further, especially since he doesnât know whether Shego is alive or dead.
âI give up.â He says, looking up at the stars. âIâve lost. I have nothing left to live for, so there is absolutely no use for me to go on in this miserable world! JUST GET IT OVER WITH!!!â
KRAA-SHOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!!!â
The ceiling of Drakkenâs cell caves in, sending debris to the floor. A moment later, a green light shines down on the evil doctor. The light begins to pull at him, lifting him up off the ground and pulling him from his cell. Drakken is in shock, and before he can ask whatâs going on, he is beamed inside of a giant black Flying Saucer. The beam shuts off, and the Saucer zooms off into the night. Surprisingly, through all of this, Frugal Lucre has not even flinched, as he remains in his sound slumber.
On the spaceship, Drakken finds himself lying on the floor, staring up at bright lights. âAm I dead?â He asks, still in shock over what happened. âIs this heaven orâŠis thisâŠthe bad place?â
He begins to shiver in fear, thinking that for what heâs done in his life, he might be in the âBad Placeâ. But he finds that not to be the case, as a Titan-sized figure walks up and stands over him. Drakken examines the figure to see that it has a slender & shapely body, which leads Drakken to deduce who it was that freed him from prison.
âYou? ButâŠI thought you where never coming back.â
End Prologue.
âWelcome back to Japan.â
Yori greets Kim & Ron with a warm smile as she approaches them. Ron canât help but to stare at her outfit, which consists of a red & black mini-skirt, jet-black thigh high stockings, black high heels & a red blouse. Yori hugs Ron first, causing Kim to twitch slightly in anger. Yori then walks over to Kim & hugs her, catching Kim off guard.
âYori, itâs good to see you.â Kim says, not really meaning it. âBut what are you doing here?â
âThe Yamanouchi School is holding a special Ninja conference here.â She says. âYour friend Wade-San informed me of your need for a guide.â
Wearing an unpleased look, Kim raises her Kimmunicator and contacts Wade. âWadeâŠâ
âShe was the closest friend that I could contact.â Wade tells her. âYouâre notâŠjellinâ, are you?â
âNot Jellinâ!â Kim answers, hanging up on him again. Yori then escorts the two over to a waiting Rickshaw with two runners.
âOh, Cool!â Ron says, as he hops on first. âI always wanted to ride in one of these.â Before he can blink, both women join him on either side, Yori on his left, & Kim on his right. The runners take off, pulling the three behind them as Yori starts briefing them.
âI will be able to assist you if needed on your mission.â She says.
âYou wonât be.â Kim quickly replies. âThis will be a simple infiltration andâŠâ Kim is cut off by the sound of her Kimmunicator going off. She answers it and sees Wade face on the screen again.
âProblem, Kim.â He says. âThe Grand Prix Committee has a bylaw stated in the rules that wonât allow you to enter.â
âYou canât be serious, Wade.â She says. Wade responds by pulling up the exact statement onto the screen. Kim reads it from beginning to end, realizing Wade was telling the truth. Ron takes a look at it as well.
âBoy, theyâve really done their homework this time.â He says.
âThis changes things.â Kim says. âWeâre gonna have to find a driver willing to partner with us andâŠâ
âHey, hey, hey!â Ron says, interrupting her. âYou donât need another Driver when you got the Ron Man behind the wheel. I can use our ride to enter the race.â
âRon, itâs not that simple.â Kim says. âRemember, the Grand Prix calls for a two-man team. Youâll need a partner to help you.â
âI would be honored to assist Stoppable-San in the race, Kim.â Yori chimes in.
Kim develops a displeased look, but doesnât want to alert Ron to it. âGreat. Thank you, Yori.â She says, with a hint of coldness.
âHey, I just wanna get to check out the sites of Tokyo.â Ron says, opening a Tour pamphlet of the city. âCool! Thereâs this place that offers something called âHappy Endingsâ. Must be some Theme Park for Kids.â
Yori begins to giggle at Ronâs comment. âOh, Stoppable-San. Always with your American-Style jokes.â
âRon, âHappy Endingsâ here are reallyâŠâ Kim leans into Ronâs ear and finishes her explanation. A moment later, Ron begins to blush bright red.
âTHATâS what it stands for?â He says, shocked. âThey actually have places like that here? What kind of Country are they running???â
Later That NightâŠ
âI am NOT Jellinâ!â
Inside of her hotel room, Kim stands by her bed wearing nothing but her bra & panties. Thereâs a black stealth ninja outfit lying on the bed, as she talks with her best friend Monique, whoâs on the Kimmunicator.
âDoesnât sound that way to me, girl.â Monique says. âYou donât trust Ron?â
âI trust Ron.â Kim tells her. âI donât trust Yori. You shouldâve seen what she was wearing when she met me & Ron at the airport!â
âUh, Kim? Youâre starting to sound like Bonnie.â Monique says. Kim realizes this and catches herself before she goes any further.
âIâŠjust have a feeling.â Kim continues. âShe could try anything to steal my boyfriend. I know what sheâs capable of.â
âProbably cause sheâs a little like you?â Monique says with a smirk.
âDonât go there, Monique.â Kim tells her, as she finishes putting on her Ninja Stealth Suit. She puts the hood over her head and her mouth before walking over to the dresser and picking up her Kimmunicator.
âWhere you going now?â Monique asks. âSpying on your Boy Toy?â
âNO!â Kim replies, but the thought had occurred to her. âI got some Intel on where theyâre holding the Jet Engine. And Iâm gonna get it back.â She shuts off the call and places her Kimmunicator in a secret pocket. Turning towards the window, she gets a running start before diving head first out of it. As she begins to plummet downward, she pulls out her grappling gun and fires it, hooking it on to a nearby rooftop, then swinging towards her destination.
Meanwhile, in another Hotel RoomâŠ
Ron sits on the corner of Yoriâs bed, waiting for Yori to come out of her bathroom. Heâs wearing his standard clothes, along with a leather racing jacket. As he waits, his mind jots back to the last time Yori & Ron were in the same Hotel Room together, and he has to tell himself to forget that memory.
âOK. OK, Iâm ready. I am ready!â He tells himself. âThat sexy Kimono, Iâve seen it before. No big deal. Iâm ready for however she looks!â
âStoppable-San, I am ready.â
Ron turns around, expecting to see her wearing the same Kimono she did last time. But itâs the complete opposite. What Yori is wearing is what could be described as Kryptonite for even the strongest-willed man. She stands in the doorway, wearing a Little Red Dress, which is almost an exact copy of Kimâs Little Black Dress. Yori has finished off the look by wearing a pair of black high heels. Ron has only one thing to say about the outfit.
âI am so not ready.â
âWith this outfit, I can be a distraction to the other drivers.â She says. âI can be the, how you say, eye candy.â
âYeah, Candy.â Ron thinks. âCandy good. Wanna lick. Wanna eatâŠNO! NO, NO! NO! IâM WITH KIM! MUST STAY LOYAL!!!
Yori begins to walk towards Ron, but unfortunately sheâs forgotten one thingâŠin her life, sheâs never walked in high heels. Tripping after the first step, she stumbles towards Ron and tackles him. The two end up on the bed, with Yori on top of Ron.
âMy apologies, Stoppable-San.â She says with an embarrassed smile. âUnfortunately, Sensei did not train me in walking in High Heels.â
âHeh, no problem.â He replies. The two stay like this for moments, neither bothering to move. Ronâs hand is on Yoriâs hip, and instinct is telling him to move it lower. Luckily, Yori climbs off of him before he gives in.
âWe must journey to the Race area before we are late.â She says, making her way towards the door. She walks out, with Ron lagging behind him.
âThis is gonna be a long night.â He says.
A Little While LaterâŠ
There is a large gathering of amateur Street Racers in front of a poplar Casino, which is where the Race will begin. Most of the cars are just souped-up versions of Dealership Sedans and the like. But one ride stands out from the restâŠa Light Blue Muscle Car, which looks to have a Booster Rocket attached to the rear. The Driver, not surprisingly, is Motor Ed. He stands in front of his car with Adrena Lynn at his side.
âWe are gonna burn rubber in this monster, babe. Seriously!â He says.
Just then, Adrena Lynnâs cameraman runs up to them. âI got the camera, Lynn.â
âItâs about time!â She tells him. âGet in the backseat. I want an up-close shot of the two of us winning this race.â
Thereâs a smug look on Motor Edâs face, as he grins over the thought of easily winning the Grand Prix with his Super Muscle Car. But his attention is soon turned elsewhere, when he notices a Purple Car speeding towards the race area at an incredible speed. As it gets closer, the car slows down and skids to a stop, right beside Motor Edâs right.
âWait a minute, I recognize the wheels.â Ed says. âThis is Redâs Ride!â
âKim Possible?â Adrena Lynn says. âBut, she was banned from this race!â
âAnd you are lucky she was banned, lady!â Ron says, stepping out of the car. âNow you only have the Ron Man to deal with.â
Motor Ed looks over the car, checking it from bumper to bumper to see if any modifications have been made. Noticing none, he begins to laugh at Ron. âHA, HA! Dude, Seriously! You expect to beat me in that puny car?â
âWhat? This car is all muscle!â Ron says, walking over to the front and opening the hood. âItâs got an engine that AAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!â As soon as the truck flies open, dozens of bats fly out & attack Ron, swarming him all around. âWHY DO THEY KEEP COMING BACK TO ATTACK ME? WHY???â
âGENTLEMEN, TO YOUR RIDES!!!â
Thatâs the signal, and every Race competitor hops into their car & starts their engines. Motor Ed jumps into his ride, followed by Ron, who was finally able to get rid of the bats. High above the Starting Line sits âBig Daddyâ Brotherson, one of the evil Villains responsible for this Grand Prix coming to, and heâs hear to kick off the race.
âOn your marksâŠget setâŠGo!â
The sound of screeching tires fills the air, as the dozen cars peel off from the Starting Line and roar down the road. Motor Edâs Muscle Car leads the pack, followed by the other criminals chasing behind him. Ronâs car, however, has not left the Starting Line.
âStoppable-San! We have not started!â Yori tells him.
âI Know!â He replies, frantically searching for something. âBut I canât find my racing music!â He keeps looking around, until Rufus pops out of the glove compartment holding a CD up high. âRufus, you are the Naked Mole Rat!â Ron grabs the CD and pops it into the player before pressing the ignition button. A moment later, the car rockets from the Starting Line at blinding speed. Within seconds, itâs caught up to the rest of the field. Adrena Lynn, still in the lead with Motor Ed, just happens to look in the rearview mirror, and spots Ron catching up.
âOh, Crap! Theyâre gaining!â She says, getting worried.
âNo sweat, my extreme queen.â Motor Ed tells her. âThings are gonna get slippery for the Sidekick! YAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!â
Pressing a button on his dashboard, Ed activates dual hoses in the back of his car. The hoses shoot out gallons of oil, which spills all over the road. Some cars are sent careening uncontrollably in every direction. Ron sees the slick made by Motor Ed, but is unable to avoid it. Turning hard, he puts the car into a wild spin.
âRUFUS!!!â He yells. âGRIP TIRES!!!â
Rufus hops on the dashboard and jumps onto a green button. The Grip Tires activate, and the car is taken out of its spin. Ron stomps down on the gas and speeds off, with only three surviving cars chasing behind.
âStoppable-San.â Yori says. âI fear at this speed, we will be unable to capture the our foes.â
âThatâs only because Iâm still in First Gear.â Ron says, grabbing the stick and switching it to second. âBOO-YAH!!!â The car switches gears and burns rubber up the road, eventually even catching up and driving to the side of Motor Edâs car, much to his shock.
âOK, that ride is really starting to harsh my mellow! Seriously!â He says. The two cars reach a part of the race where the track splits in two, due to a Train Track in the middle. Coincidentally, a Freight Train is barreling down the tracks, with most of its cars being flatbeds. Adrena Lynn takes this moment to take action.
âDonât worry, baby.â She says, kissing Motor Ed on the cheek. âIâll deal with this extreme wannabe!â She hops out of the car through her window and climbs onto the roof. Timing her jump right, she leaps from the car onto a flatbed on the Train.
âMAN, I love that woman! Seriously!â Motor Ed says, after witnessing her stunt.
Yori saw it too, and as Lynn moves over towards Ronâs car, she decides to take her own action, by climbing out to join her. âWHAT ARE YOU DOING???â Ron asks, but itâs too late. Yori leaps from the car onto the flatbed; rolling to her feet in a fighting stance, ready to face Lynn.
âWHOA! Looks like the Sidekickâs got someone on the side.â Lynn says. âDoes Kimmy know about you?â
âYou will not harm Stoppable-San.â Yori replies, remaining serious.
âOoh, protective of your man!â Lynn continues. âBut just a little FYI, I already had himâŠdeep inside me!â
Yoriâs eyes narrow, as he anger grows. âYou will pay for that remark.â
âOh I love it when the hero girls talk tough!â Lynn says. âFREAKYYYYYYYYYYY!!!!!â
Adrena Lynn charges forward with her attack, only to be flipped over and slammed onto the flatbed by Yori. Lynn quickly responds with a kick to her chest as she stands back up, but before she can attack again, Yori grabs her and locks in a headlock.
âSurrender!â Yori demands. âI do not wish to humiliate you further!â
âSeeâŠthatâs the problem with you Goody-Goods!â Lynn says, struggling to break free. âYouâŠnever knowâŠhow to fightâŠDIRTY!!!â
Lynn stomps down on Yoriâs foot, causing her to break her hold due to the pain. She follows up with an elbow to the gut that sends her stumbling back before she falls to her knees. Lynn stands up straight & slowly walks over to Yori, feeling confident that sheâs defeated. But in the blink of an eye, Yori comes back with a Roundhouse Kick that spins Adrena Lynn and sends to the ground, leaving a bruise on her cheek. Lynn is up immediately, ready for Round 2, until she sees that the Train is going underground into a tunnel. Acting quickly, she jumps back on Motor Edâs Muscle Car and hops in through the window. Yori does the same with Ronâs car, barely making it. The road joins back together, and Ron & Motor Ed race side by side down the homestretch.
âThat car should be in the Junkyard, dude! Seriously!â Motor Ed yells to Ron, as he side-slams him with his Muscle Car.
âOh yeah, wellâŠthe 1980âs called. THEY WANT THEIR MULLET BACK!!!â Ron responds, side-slamming Motor Ed back.
Ed looks out of the window at where Ron rammed him. âDUDE, NOT COOL!!! I just got a custom paintjob!â
The Finish Line is now in sight for both of them, as they speed towards it. Ron is in the lead by a nose, and thatâs when Motor Ed flips a secret switch under the steering wheel. A moment later, the Booster Rocket activates, and Motor Edâs Muscle Car jets past Ron, leaving him in the dust. A second later, it crosses the Finish Line for the win. Ronâs car is the second one across, followed eventually by those racers who were able to finish.
âAw, man.â Ron says, leaning back in his seat. âWe failed.â
âCongratulations, Ron.â
Ron looks down at the dashboard to see Wadeâs face on the screen. âWade, I came in second. I didnât win.â
âRon, thereâs another race.â Wade tells him. âYou just came in second in this one. If you win tomorrow, you win the Trophy.â
âSWEET!â Ron says, getting excited. Before he can thank Wade though, he sees Motor Ed & Adrena Lynn speeding past them, going the other way. âWade, theyâre on the move. Maybe I shouldâŠâ
âDonât worry about it.â Wade interrupts. âI got Motor Ed on Satellite Surveillance. Kimâs still on her mission so in the meantime, you & Yori can take part in the after party. They got a buffet, live music, even a Sauna.â
Upon hearing Wade say that last word, Yori begins to develop and idea in her head. âCome, Stoppable-San. Let us, how you say, mingle!â She grabs Ronâs arm and pulls him out of the car through the passenger side. He barely has time to shut the door and put the alarm on as Yori drags him into the middle of the party.
Some Time LaterâŠ
After a few hours spent gathering information on Motor Edâs ride from other Race contestants (and hanging out at the free buffet), Ron has decided to take a rest & wind down. Inside of a Sauna Room, he sits on a bench, wearing nothing but a towel to cover himself. Rufus sits along side him, wearing a towel wrapped around his head.
âMan, we really gotta get one of these things for back home, buddy.â Ron tells Rufus, who agrees by nodding his head. âBest thing about this room? Thereâs absolutely no way that I can be anywhere nearâŠWAAAAAAAHHHHHHH!!!! YORI!!!â
Ron is proven wrong again, as he sees the Ninja student walking into the room, wearing nothing but her headband & a towel to cover herself. âUh, YoriâŠthis is the Guys Sauna.â
âActually, in Japan they have some Saunas that are shared by men & women.â She tells him, grinning as she walks over. âThis is one of them.â Yori sits down right beside Ron, and then looks over at Rufus.
âRufus, I believe they wanted you to DJ the party outside.â She says. Rufus stands up and takes off his towel, before scampering out through the door, which closes behind him. Ron & Yori are now left alone.
âUh, soâŠthat was an exciting race.â Ron says nervously, steering the conversation to something far from sex.
âIndeed it was, Stoppable-San.â She answers, leaning closer to him and laying her head on his thigh.
Immediately Ron can tell what she has planned, and decides to put a stop to it. âYori, Iâm with Kim now, you know that. Sheâs my girlfriend. And even though youâre hotâŠreally, really hotâŠI canât. I just canât.â
âI understand.â Yori says, which surprises Ron.
âYou do?â
âYes. As I have told Kim, I believe in destiny, which has put the two of you together.â Yori tells him, which brings a calm to Ron. Slowly he begins to relax again, feeling that nothing will come to pass tonight. Unfortunately, as before, he is wrong again.
âBut, I also believe that you have the power to control your own destiny.â Yori continues.
âYeah, IâŠhuh, what?â Ron says, before feeling Yoriâs lips pressed against his own. She leans in and causes him to lie on his back, but Yori makes sure that the kiss stays locked. Her hand ventures under Ronâs towel, and she begins to stroke his Cock gently, bringing him to a hard-on. Eventually, Ron is able to break away.
âWhatâŠwhat are you doing?â Ron asks, starting to feel strange.
âDo not fight it, Stoppable-San.â She says. âMy lipstick is made from a rare plant near the Yamanouchi School. It has the abilities to increase your desire for another.â
Ron can tell that sheâs telling the truth, as he slowly starts to feel the effects of her lipstick going into action. His willpower is weak, and thoughts of ravaging Yoriâs body begin to fill his mind. Yori removes her own towel, showing off her sexy, well-toned, shapely body. She then snatches Ronâs towel off of him, leaving the two both completely naked.
âYoriâŠcanâtâŠâ Ron says, still trying to fight the effects.
âDo not worry, Ron-San.â She seductively tells him, straddling herself onto him and grabbing his member, ready to insert it. âKim does not have to know.â
Getting on her knees, she brings the head of his Cock to her love lips, then slides it inside of her. The sensation is one that she has missed sorely. Even with the many male ninja students at the Yamanouchi, Yoriâs never wanted anyone else but Ron. She shows him just how much sheâs missed this, by rotating her hips, moving in a circle with Ron deep inside of her. The sensation is almost too much for her to bear, as she has to grab on to a nearby towel rack to maintain her balance. She looks down at Ron and smiles, and right then, Ron canât help but to smile back. The drugs have taken full effect on Ron, and suddenly he feels to urge to grab her ass, latching onto it as he slowly begins stroking in & out of her.
âYes, Stoppable-San!â She says. âDo not fight it! Give in a Fuck me!â
He does exactly that, pushing himself deep into her snatch, going in rhythm with her as she starts to bounce on his Rod. Yori moves her hands to his chest, placing them there to hold her balance better. She increases her speed, leaning closer into Ron, as her hips almost become a blur. Their eyes meet, and a powerful lust develops between the two, causing them to kiss each other passionately. Their tongues venture into each others mouths without abandon, as they trade moans of pleasure. Eventually, the heat from the Sauna & the heat from the action become too much for Yori to handle, and she feels herself approaching her limit. So much so she breaks the kiss.
âSTOPPABLE-SANâŠâ She yells. âYOU ARE MAKING ME CUM!!!â
A moment later, she does cum, having a major orgasm thatâs stronger that the last time she was with him. The intensity causes Yori to fall on top of Ron, feeling spent. Ron, on the other hand, isnât near tired and hasnât had his orgasm yet.
âYoriâŠâ He says, the lipstick & heat from the Sauna affecting him. âIâŠdidnâtâŠcum yet.â
âThen fuck me until you do, Stoppable-San.â She replies, wanting more herself.
With that, Ron sits up and wraps his arms around her. The two kiss yet again as Yori wraps her legs around him. Ron stands up with her in his arm and places her against the wall. From there, he gets started again, ramming his Cock deep within her, holding onto her legs and keeping the spread wide. Yoriâs exhaustion fades at this point, as she seems to have caught her second wind. Breaking the kiss, she cheers him on.
âYES, RON-SAN! FUCK ME!!!â She tells him. âSHOW ME WHY YOUâRE THE CHOSEN ONE!!!â
She puts on arm around him and the other against the wall, forcing herself to stay balanced. Her body is smashed between the wall and Ron, who continues to pound her pussy relentlessly. Shockingly, the look on Yoriâs face has changed. As she bites her lower lip, she wears a look that reveals how bad sheâs needed this. The stress & frustration of being the star Ninja student of the Yamanouchi has faded from her, all thanks to RonâŠand his special gift. Ron & Yori are pouring down sweat now, and they keep adding to the steam in the room. Yori leans her head back against the wall, feeling herself coming close to her limit again, and this time sheâs not alone.
âI-Iâm gonna cum, Yori!â Ron announces.
âYes! Me too!â She replies.
He gives her a few more strokes before pulling out, barely in time, and spraying his load between her legs & inside her thighs. A moment later, Yori reaches for the temperature switch and turns off the heat. Thatâs good for Ron, who falls to his knees and collapses on the floor, with Yori on top of him, burnt out completely by the heat & the sex. Both of their bodies are glistening now, and Yori grabs her towel and puts it over herself & Ron, should someone walk in.
âYou are, how you sayâŠthe Man, Stoppable-San.â Yori tells him, before lying her head on his chest to rest. Ron just smiles at her, happy that sheâs satisfied, and that itâs all over. And as the effects of Yoriâs special lipstick wear off, one realization pops into Ronâs mind.
âKim is gonna kill me.â
The Tokyo Drifting Chapters Part 3
Itâs 2am in the morning, and after a long drive from the Racecourse, the Roth SL Coupe finally pulls into the parking lot of the Hotel. Ron is the first one out of the car, as he sleepily walks over to the passengerâs side. Opening the door, he reaches and picks up Yori, carrying her in his arms. Ron slams the door shut as Rufus activates the alarm.
âCome on, Rufus.â Ron says exhausted. âLetâs get upstairs.â
As Ron & Rufus walk over to the nearest elevator, Ron notices that Yori is sleep in his arms. 4 times they did it in the Sauna, and neither of them were able to walk afterwards. It took 12 cans of Red Bull delivered by Rufus just to get Ron to his feet. Rufus hops back in Ronâs pocket as they board the elevator and Ron presses their floor number. The doors slide close, the elevator journeys up to their floor, and Ron thinks over the events of today.
âHow do I get into these situations?â He asks himself. âI didnât even try! I hid out in the Sauna to get away from her!â
Just then, his eyes wander downward onto Yori and her firm & shapely body, wrapped in her little red dress. âBut she is so hot! And she actually likes me! How many girls can say that? WellâŠexcept for Bonnie, Monique, Zita, TaraâŠâ He stops right there, knowing that if he continues heâll name half the women of Middleton. âWell, at least Iâm good. As long as Iâm not found out byâŠâ
DING! The elevator reaches its floor. And as the doors slide open, Ron sees the last face he wanted to at that moment.
âWAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!! KIM!â
Instinctively he drops Yori, causing her to land on the floor, waking her up. Ron leans over and helps her up as Kim questions them.
âWhere have you two been?â
âWe were at the Race, KP.â Ron answers nervously. âWe didnât win but thereâs another race tomorrow and we have a chance to take the prize then.â
âBut the race ended at 10.â She says. âAnd itâs 2am now.â
Ron is speechless now. Thereâs nothing that he can tell her that sheâll believe, and begins to think that itâs all over. But luck shines on him, as Yori chimes in. âStoppable-San and I stayed to see if we could find out further information. Unfortunately we were not able. Were you successful?â
âNo.â Kim says. âIt looks like the only way weâll get the Engine back is to win that race tomorrow.â
âIâd better get back to the room.â Ron says, walking off. Yori follows after Ron, but stops suddenly, right beside Kim. The two are each facing opposite directions, and they donât look at each other. But then again, they donât have to. Tension begins to build between them, though neither let the other notice it.
âHey Yori,â Kim says, âI just wanted to make sure that you were OK with Ron being MY boyfriend now.â
âIt is OK, Possible-San.â Yori replies before asking a question of her own. âTell me, what rank is your Kung Fu again?â
âBlack Belt, 2nd Degree.â Kim replies, with a hint of smugness in her voice.
âSo, you are only 2 levels from reaching my degree.â Yori replies, returning the smugness. âGood night, Possible-San.â
âGood night, Yori.â Kim answers, now showing a hint of anger. She knows Yori was indicating she could easily take her, and begins to sense that a battle might be on the horizon.
22 Hours LaterâŠ
âWelcome Back to Adrena Lynnâs PPV Return Extravaganza! FRRREAKYYYYYYYYYY!!!!!!!!!â
Itâs 11:58pm, and the Tokyo Oceanfront is the venue for the final race. It will take place all alongside the docks & roads of the ocean. At the Finish Line sits the Jet Engine, which is the Grand Prize for the winner. At the Starting Line sits the racers. Motor Ed & Ron are the two lead cars, followed by the four others who were able to survive the last race. Yori again joins Ron in the race, and again wears the Little Red Dress. Adrena Lynn sits on the hood of Motor Edâs car, giving her final words to her âadoring publicâ before the race starts.
âThis will be our Greatest Victory!â She declares. âOnce Motor Ed crosses that Finish Line, we will have the most powerful engine on this Planet! Think of the havoc and mayhem we can cause!â
âSERIOUSLY!!!â Motor Ed yells from the driverâs seat of his ride.
âAnd the best part about thisâŠNo Kim Possible to mess this up!!!â Lynn laughs almost maniacally as she kicks her legs up in joy. But that joy would quickly leave her if she knew she was being watched. High above the Starting Line, perched on a crane, sits Kim, whoâs just watched Adrena Lynnâs boastful telecast on her Kimmunicator.
âThatâs what you think, Adrena Lynn.â She says.
Just then, Wade appears on the screen. âYou know this is almost cheating.â
âNo itâs not.â Kim counters. âIâll just be providing Ron with the quickest Route for winning the race. Just call me his âKPSâ.â
âAnd youâll also be able to keep an eye on Yori, Miss jellinâ.â Wade says with a smirk, causing Kim to hang up on him. As the racers down below get into their cars, Kim readies herself by activating the Jetpack on her back.
âJust making sure Little Miss Ninja keeps her hands to herself.â Kim says, confirming Wadeâs remark.
The time is now 12pm midnight, and a nearby Clock Tower begins to toll its bell. It echoes throughout the whole Oceanside area, as the racers wait for the final toll, which will signal the start of the race. Ron & Motor Ed are side by side with their respective rides. Motor Ed begins to rev his engines, in an attempt to intimidate Ron. But Ron just smirks, and counters with his own tactic.
âRufus?â
The Naked Mole Rat pops out of the glove compartment carrying a CD. Popping it into the CD player, the system begins to play rock that sounds a lot like AC/DCâs Hells Bells. The Clock Tower is on its 9th toll, as the start of the race looms.
10th toll, Ron now revs his engines.
11th toll, Both Ron & Ed prepare to stomp the gas for a quick send-off.
12th toll, they leave everyone else in the dust.
The roar of their engines now fills the air, as they rocket down the docks. Within seconds theyâve reached over 100mph, and it appears none of the other racers can catch them. High in the night sky though, Kim watches over them, easily keeping up with them in her Jetpack. The two trade leads by inches, going back and forth trying to jump in front of one another. Motor Ed finally gets fed up, and side slams Ron.
âSee ya at the Finish Line, Sidekick! YAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!â
Ron loses control for a moment, but itâs enough to send the Coupe into a Dockside Fish Market. He crashes through several booths, sending fish everywhere, including his windshield.
âRufus, Wipers!â Ron yells. Rufus goes to work and activates the wipers, tossing the fish aside. But as Ron gets back control, he finds himself far behind Motor Ed. âAw, man. Weâre trailing!â
âNot for long, Ron!â
Ron & Yori look down on the dashboard, surprised to see Kimâs face. âOK. Thereâs a fork in the road coming up. Go right and itâll lead you into an alleyway. There you can ramp off of a Garbage Truck andâŠâ
âWait? Garbage Truck?â Ron says. âOK, have you been playing my video games again, KP?â
âRon, we have to win this Race!â Kim tells him.
âShe is right, Stoppable-San.â Yori says. âWe must take this shortcut!â
The fork in the road appears for Ron and as instructed, he banks right. Going into the alley, he spots the Garbage Truck, which is now emptying a dumpster and looks like the perfect makeshift ramp. Ron closes his eyes and stomps the gas, barreling towards it at full-speed. Luckily, he hits the makeshift ramp perfectly and is sent airborne. Opening his eyes and looking around, Ron sees that heâs now several stories in the air.
âWhoa! I can see our Hotel from here.â He says.
âStoppable-San, the landing!â Yori says, getting him refocused. They brace themselves for impact and hit the docks, but are still able to maintain their speed. A quick glimpse in the rearview mirror shows that now theyâre way out in front of Motor Ed & Adrena Lynn.
âBOOHOHOHO-YAH!!!â Ron cheers as he switches gears and extends the lead.
âNOT COOL! TOTALLY NOT COOL!!!â Ed says. âHow did Sidekick get in front of us?â
âI donât know! IâŠâ Lynn stops herself when she notices a figure, flying pass the full moon in the night sky. She picks up the camera she was using earlier and uses the zoom feature to identify it. A moment is all she needs as she gets her close up. âItâs Kim Possible!â
âRed?â Motor Ed says. âBut she was banned from the race!â
âShe must be helping them beat us. Donât worry babe, Lynn will put a stop to this!â She grabs a Jetpack that was hijacked from Drakkenâs Lair and straps it onto herself. Opening the passenger door, she leaps out and activates the pack, rocketing into the air. Surprisingly, she knows how to use the pack well, as it only takes her a few moments to reach Kim.
âIâm sorry, but this is an No Redhead Race!â Lynn says, flying to her side.
âNo redheads, but they let the dumb blonde in?â Kim snaps back.
âYou canât help your boyfriend down there.â Lynn tells her. âMy man Motor Ed is gonna burn your sidekick!â
âYou & Motor Ed?â Kim says a bit surprised. âWell, it makes sense. You two are the most annoying! FREAKYYYYYY!!!!!â
Lynn is insulted, obviously, and decides to end the friendly banter. âItâs such a nice night, how about we go for a dip?â Without warning, she grabs Kim & wraps her arms around her. Turning downward, she sends herself & Kim into a tailspin, planning to drown Kim in the Pacific Ocean. But Kimâs able to power out of her hold.
âNo thanks, Iâm not a night-swimmer!â At the last moment, Kim pulls up and barely misses taking a drink. Flying low to the water, she rockets under the docks. Lynn is right beside her though, and the two begin to trade blows. Meanwhile, right above them, at the same speed, Ron & Motor Ed drive down the docks, barreling towards the home stretch. Kim & Lynn keep up their fight, until they notice a dead end coming up fast. Flying out from under the docks, the two resume their battle higher above the waterâŠand right next to the two lead racers, Ron & Motor Ed.
âStoppable-San! Look!â Yori says, pointing out to his left where theyâre battling.
âWhat? Aw, man! KPâs in trouble!â Ron becomes worried, but still focuses on the race. Motor Ed on the other hand, lends his support.
âGO, LYNN!!!â He yells from his Muscle Car. âTAKE RED DOWN!!!â
Ed ends up getting side slammed for his support by Ron. âGO, KP!!!â
As the battle continues, Kim easily avoids Lynnâs attacks. But an errant kick lands on Kimâs Jetpack, and disables it. Adrena Lynn takes advantage of this and grabs Kim by the back of her shirt. âI think itâs time you take that dip, Red. Itâll do wonders for your skin. FRREAKYYYYYYYYY!!!!!â
âPossible-San is in Danger!â Yori says after seeing what happened.
âI know!â Ron responds. âBut I have to win the race!â
âThen I will help Possible-San.â Yori says, opening the sunroof. She starts climbing out onto the roof of the Coupe, much to Ronâs chagrin.
âWhoa! No, No! Too Dangerous! YORI!!!â She doesnât listen. Lynn lowers herself down to sea level and starts trying to drown Kim. Thatâs when Yori takes action. Leaping from the Roth SL Coupe, she plummets downward off of the docks, hoping her timing is right. It is, and she lands on Lynnâs back.
âWhat theâŠno joyrides, Ninja Girl!â Lynn says, trying to shake her off. Using Yoriâs distraction, Kim reaches up and presses a button that puts the Jetpack in overdrive. The three women soar high into the air, far ahead of the two leading racers and towards the finish line.
âKIM!!â
âLYNN!!!â
Both Ron & Motor Ed shift to maximum gear in an attempt to get to their ladies in time. Several miles ahead, Kim, Yori & Adrena Lynn come falling back to the earth. They land on a cloth banner above the finish line, before falling out of that and hitting the pavement. The crowd gathered around is in stunned silence, as they just came out of nowhere. A minute passes, and all three women start to move. Adrena Lynn is the first to her feet, and she slowly limps over to Yori, intending to make her pay.
âYouâŠare about to getâŠand extremeâŠBEATING!!!â
âAHEM!â
Lynn stops in her tracks, as she hears the sound of someone clearing her throat. Turning her head, she sees Kim back on her feet, banged up, roughed up, but still ready to fight. Lynn decides to take out Yori quickly, before dealing with Kim. But when she turns her attention back, Yori is already standing on her feet, in her fighting stance. With both women surrounding her, Lynn knows the odds are slim to none.
âMommy.â
Kim & Yori end it there, with Yori hitting a roundhouse kick to Lynnâs head, and Kim hitting a Leg Sweep to Lynnâs anklesâŠsimultaneously. Lynn hits the ground hard, instantly KOâed by the double maneuver. Kim & Yori arenât able to celebrate their victory yet though, as they make out two pairs of headlights speeding towards them in the distance. Carrying Adrena Lynn off the track, the two stand in the crowd and await the winner of the race. They donât have to wait long, as the two cars roar past the finish line. But they were side-to-side, resulting in a Photo Finish. As the cars skid to a stop, a black & white image appears on a billboard screen over the finish line. The image shows that, just by a few inches, Ron has won the race.
âTHE WINNER OF THE TOKYO UNDERGROUND GRAND PRIXâŠRON STOPPABLE!!!â
âBOO-YAH!!!â Ron cheers, celebrating with Rufus inside the car.
âThis is such a downer, dude. Seriously!â Motor Ed says, being on the losing end. He then spots the Jet Engine up on the stage, surprisingly unguarded. âOK, new plan! Steal the engine anyway, then drive off into the night!â
âThereâs something wrong with that plan though, Motor Ed.â
He turns to his left to see Kim & Yori in his car window, fists cocked back.
âUS!â
They deliver a double haymaker, putting Motor Ed out of commission, just like Adrena Lynn. The two then congratulate each other with a high five, as Ron runs over to them.
âKP! Yori! You OK?â
âWe are fine, Stoppable-San.â Yori tells him.
âNo big, Ron.â Kim adds. âSo not the dramaâ
âMan Iâm glad to hear that!â He says, hugging both women. Instantly they begin to swoon over Ron caring so much about them, but that feeling fades when they remember that itâs a shared hug. Kim & Yori then trade cold looks, neither of them wanting the other to be near Ron.
The Next MorningâŠ
âOK. The Engine is back on its way to NASA, and your plane should be ready by the time you reach the airport.â
âThanks, Wade.â Kim tells him over the Kimmunicator before hanging up. With their mission done, Kim & Ron pack up their gear for the long trip back home. Yori is in the room as well, wearing her traditional schoolgirl outfit, to give her wishes to Ron for a safe journey. As they finish packing, Kimâs eyes glance over to Yori, and the tension in the room rises again. Ron, whoâs standing between them, can feel it almost immediately and decides to put a stop to it.
âOK, thatâs it. Thatâs it!â He says, zipping up his luggage before turning to Kim. âLook, KimâŠI got something that I have to tell you. You seeâŠâ
âI took advantage of Stoppable-San.â
Kim & Ron turn to Yori, surprised that she confessed. âIâŠwas weak, and I could not help my actions. I know that it was very dishonorable. I apologize, and I beg for your forgiveness.â
Kim is caught off guard by Yoriâs confession. With the case of Bonnie & Monique, theyâve constantly tried to keep their fun with Ron a secret. Yori came right out with it, and it causes her anger & jealousy to subside. âItâs OK, Yori.â Kim replies. âI knowâŠRon can have that affect on people.â
âThank you, Possible-San.â Yori tells her, bowing in respect.
âWell, we better get going.â Kim says. âCome on, Ron.â Ron grabs most of the luggage and follows Kim towards the door. But once Kim walks out, Yori flips over to the door and slams it shut, before locking all the locks.
âUh, Yori? What are you doing?â Ron asks confused.
âI feel it is only fitting that we partake in a special long goodbye kiss.â Yori answers seductively, indicating she wants more than a kiss. She approaches him and playfully runs her hand across his chest. âDo not worry, Stoppable-San. It will take Kim 10 minutes to kick the door down.â
KRUNNCCHH!!!!
âMore like 10 seconds.â Kim says, nearly kicking the door off its hinges.
She slams it shut behind her and crouches into her fighting stance, as does Yori. Ron decides to back up to a safe distance as the two circle each other slowly. Both of them look at each other, trying to find any weakness of their style. After a minute, they see none, and Kim goes on the attack. She leaps at Yori trying to grab her, but Yori avoids her and hops onto the bed. Kim follows up by grabbing her legs and sending down hard on her back. She tries to jump on top of her, but Yori rolls out of the way, before nailing Kim with a kick to the back of her head. Kim in turn grabs Yoriâs leg, and counters with a kick to the gut that sends her stumbling.
âUh, Ladies?â Ron says, trying to break them up. âMaybe we shouldnât fight here, you know, with the breakable stuff weâll have to pay for.â
Neither listen. Yori charges Kim with a Flying Kick, intending to put her down. But Kim reverses it and slams her hard into the adjacent wall. As Yori falls to the floor, Kim jumps on top of her and locks in a Sleeper, wanting to end this. Yori doesnât go down, though. Instead, she starts elbowing Kim in her stomach & sides, until she finally canât help but to release the hold. They back away from each other, but look far from finished. And itâs when they charge each other again that Ron decides to step in.
âOK! NOW THIS HAS GOT TO STOâ!!!â
It only takes a split second for Ron to realize heâs made a stupid mistake stepping between these two warriors. It happens in slow motion, but the pain still comes quickly for him. A right hand shot by Kim, followed by a Haymaker left from Yori. Both shots meant for each other, both shots landing in Ronâs head. The force of the attacks sends Ron flying backwards, crashing into a corner in the room. Immediately both Kim & Yori stop their duel.
âRON!!!â
âSTOPPABLE-SAN!!!â
They run over to check on him, as he barely looks conscious.
âThis is my fault.â Yori says solemnly. âMy jealousy overpowered my better judgment, and now I have injured Ron-San.â
âHeâs taken worse.â Kim says. âHeâll be OK. ButâŠI gotta say that I was jealous, too. I guess with all the time he spent with you in the past, I was afraid you steal him away from me.â
âIt is not that, Possible-San.â Yori tells her. âIn fact, I would even be willing to share him with you. But you not want that.â
Kim looks back at Yori wearing a grin. âYouâd be surprised.â The two women help Ron to his fee and place him in bed. âAlthough, I donât think Ron will be willing to agree with that.â
âHere.â Yori hands Kim a tube of the lipstick she used on Ron. âIt is made from a rare plant near the Yamanouchi School, and will increase Stoppable-Sanâs desire for us.â
âOhâŠman, what happened?â Ron wakes up to see both Kim & Yori lying next to him in bed.
âYou got hit by both of our best shots.â Kim answers.
âOh yeah.â Ron says, the memory coming back to him. âUh look, if youâre about to start again, let me get to someplace save. Like Kansas!â
âWe have come to an agreement, Stoppable-San.â Yori tells him. âThere will be no more fighting. We will focus more on the Yin, than the Yang.â
âOK, Yin sounds good.â Ron says, a grin coming to his face. âWhat exactly do you mean by the Yin?â
âShe means that weâre gonna start making it up to you, if you know what I mean.â Kim translates, rubbing her leg against Ronâs crotch.
âOK, Yinâs starting to sound bad.â Ron says, trying to escape the bed. âI donât think my Cock can take Yin!â
Kim puts her hand on his chest and climbs on top of him. Leaning in, she kisses him passionately on the lips, ending his protests. Kim pulls back from Ron and Yori quickly takes her place, not even giving him a chance to breath before she presses her lips to his. A double dose of the lipstick has more than worked, as Kim can feel Ron developing a roaring erection, even through his pants.
âThis lipstick works quick, Yori.â Kim says, rolling off of Ron and taking off her pants.
Yori breaks the kiss and hikes up her mini-skirt, before pulling off her pink Hello Kitty panties. âIt is a very potent formula.â
âI just want it to be said,â Ron chimes in, pulling down his own pants, âthat Iâm gonna need a crate of Red Bulls after this!â
âItâll be worth it, Ron.â Kim says, climbing back on top of him and wearing her seductive look. Itâs a look thatâs almost as powerful as the Puppy Dog Pout, and Ronâs will power is useless against it. Kim slides herself onto Ronâs hard pipe, and starts to move her hips. Yori joins in also, straddling herself across Ronâs head and putting her pussy in perfect position. Ron doesnât have to be told what to do, as he grabs hold of her hips and runs his tongue along the lips of her snatch. Yori lets out a pleasurable moan, and grins.
âYou areâŠvery gifted with your tongue, Stoppable-San.â She says between moans. Meanwhile Kim is working Ronâs Cock, moving her hips in rhythm and slamming herself down onto him, putting his Rod deep inside of her. She looks over at Yori and grins.
âGuess this shows you that I donât have a problem sharing.â
âI believeâŠthere is something elseâŠwe can share.â Yori responds. Before Kim can ask what, sheâs pulled towards Yori, and her lips become smothered by hers. Usually this would be an awkward moment for Kim, but because of her experiences with Bonnie & her mother, sheâs grown use to the feel of a womanâs lips, and even welcomes Yoriâs tongue. As they continue making out, Kim lets her hand roam over to Yoriâs perky breasts and begins to caress them. Yori returns the favor, turning it into an all-out grope session, until the two feel themselves being brought closer to their limits.
âOh Ron, Iâm Gonna Cum!â Kim yells.
âAs am I!â Yori declares.
Kim gives Ronâs Cock one last bounce, then stops, having her orgasm. Ron hits his limit also, spraying his load deep inside of Kim without abandon. Last to cum is Yori, as Ron licks her to an orgasm, causing her to squirt out her love juice all over his face. After a minute of rest, Kim climbs off of Ron and rolls out of bed. Itâs at this moment where Yori discovers that Ron is still hard, and ready to go.
âI believe you should take this opportunity to use the road less traveled, Stoppable-San.â Yori says, moving herself in position for Ron to enter her.
âOK, Yori, I really donât understand the Sensei talk.â Ron tells her.
âShe wants Anal Sex, Ron.â Kim says, as she searches through her luggage.
âPossible-San is correct.â Yori says.
âOH!â Ron says. âThen it is my honor to invade your ass!â
âIndeed.â Yori responds. Ron grabs hold of his Rod as Yori back herself up on her knees. He brings the head of his Cock to her asshole, then plunges it in slowly along with the shaft. Yori winces and grits her teeth, experiencing her first real live Cock inside of her ass. But the pain subsides, and is replaces by waves of pleasure.
âYes! YES! Fuck me, Ron-San!â She yells, moving her hips up & down in conjunction with Ronâs strokes. She takes in half of his member with each thrust, and is enjoying every moment of it. But pleasure turns to shock once she gazes up and sees Kim climbing into bedâŠwearing a Strap-On.
âPossible-San?â
âHope you donât mind that I brought a little help.â Kim says.
Ron looks around Yori to see what Kimâs wearing. âIsnât that Shegoâs Strap-On?â
Kim nods her head yes. âTook it while Global Justice raided Drakkenâs Lair.â
âWho is this Shego?â Yori asks.
âNevermind!â Ron & Kim say, quickly changing the subject. âDonât worry, Yori.â Kim tells her. âIâm sure your Ninja training can help you handle this.â
Not wanting to look weak in front of Ron, Yori leans back and spreads her legs wide. She puts her hands on either side of the bed to keep her balance as Kim moves in closer. She grabs Yoriâs black stocking-covered legs and pushes the Strap-On deep into her snatch, making her utter a delayed moan.
âIt feelsâŠso good!â Yori proclaims, as both of her holes are now being attended to. Ron begins to probe deeper into her ass with each stroke, while Kim is already drilling her deeply. Kim takes off her shirt and tosses it aside, as she continues to pump Yoriâs pussy now wearing nothing but a purple lace bra. Yori bites down on her lower lip and shuts her eyes, feeling waves upon waves of sexual bliss wash over her, until itâs too much to bear.
âI am cumming again!â She yells.
âYouâre not the only one!â Ron adds.
Kim & Ron give one final stroke, pushing deep inside of Yori, giving her a huge orgasm. Ron cums at the same time, shooting his load deep into Yoriâs ass this time. Somewhat exhausted, Yori pulls Ronâs Cock out of her ass and collapses to the bed on his side. Kim remains kneeled on the bed, as all three catch their breaths. After a couple minutes of silence, Yori makes a surprising statement.
âI do not wish this to end.â She says, taking off her blouse and unhooking her bra before tossing the on the floor.
Kim canât help but to smile after hearing that. âI donât think Ron wants to stop either, Yori.â She says, pointing at Ronâs Cock, which despite the laws of human physics, is still Rock Hard.
âYeahâŠwell, itâs kinda got a mind of itâs own, sometimes.â Ron says, rolling over to face Yori. She puts one leg around Ron and invites him into her soaking wet pussy. He takes the invitation, and slides his Cock deep within her. As he works up a steady stroke, Yori leans in and kisses Ron again, her firm, perky breasts pressed up against his chest. What Yori doesnât notice is that Kim has moved behind her, and is now poised to use her Strap-On again.
âI think Iâll be taking the back door entrance.â She says, splitting Yoriâs cheeks open and pushing the Strap-On into her ass. Yori responds with a look of shock. Her eyes widen and she breaks the kiss to let out a loud moan.
âOH! IâŠI have never beenâŠpleasured like this before.â
A cocky smirk develops on Kimâs face as she continues to ream Yoriâs ass relentlessly. Yoriâs entire body is now glistening in sweat. She canât even speak a word, as only grunts & moans emanate from her lips. Ron & Kim are reaching spots inside of her she never knew existed, and itâs becoming overwhelming to her. She uses one hand to grip the bed sheets tightly. The other hand, surprisingly she uses it to reach back and draw Kimâs hips closer, wanting her to go deeper with the Strap-On. Kim & Ron continue to give Yori double penetration. Non-stop, for minutes on end, they drive themselves into her holes as deep as they can go. After what feels like hours for the three, Yori & Ron reach their limit.
âRon-SanâŠyou are making me cum once more!â
Ron quickly pulls out of her as Yori experiences her third consecutive orgasm. He then has one of his own, spraying his load in between her legs and onto her stomach. Kim also pulls out of Yori, exhausted from making her come. All three lie in bed, almost motionless save for their heavy breathing. It takes a few minutes, but Ron is the first to break the silence.
âHey, KP.â He says. âWeâre gonna miss our plane.â
âWeâll catch the next one tomorrow.â Kim replies.
âIndeed.â Yori adds.
The Hollywood Chapters
PrologueâŠ
âI have returned to you, Great Blue!â
Drakken feels a pair of large hands picking him up off the floor and lifting him into the air with surprising ease. With the light out of his eyes, heâs finally able to get a clear view of his liberator from Prison, the one that freed him from Upperton Maximum. It is the Amazon-like warrior from LorwardiaâŠWarmonga. She brings him in close and hugs him tightly, nearly turning his torso bones into powder.
âW-W-Warmonga? Y-Youâre back?â Drakken struggles out.
âI was foolish to leave you for that imposter on the planet known as Pluto.â She tells him, easing up on her hold. âOnly a being of your intelligence could be the Great Blue.â She then drops her head in shame. âMy apologies for doubting your greatness.â
Drakken canât help but to grow a fiendish smile upon his face. The fact that his Alien Super-Powered enforcer has returned has given him the ultimate Trump Card. âUhâŠyeah. YEAH! The Great Blue accepts your apology!â He declares, playing the part. âButâŠit will take time for complete forgiveness.â
âThen I vow to gain that forgiveness, my Great Blue!â She pledges, pulling him close again & hugging him tight enough to make more powdery bones. After a moment, she finally lets him down, and Drakken drops to the ground, unable to feel anything below his neck and above his waist. After a minute, he becomes thankful for the ability to use his lungs again and gets up, regaining his composure before taking a look around Warmongaâs Warship. He notices the advance technology that makes it up, even more advance than what equipped the ship on his first visit.
âThis is off the HEEZY!!!â Drakken declares, developing a fiendish grin. âWith this technology at my disposal, I can bring the entire world to its kneesâŠif I only knew how.â He lets out a frustrated groan and begins tapping the side of his head with the bottom of his right hand. âCome on, COME ON! ARGH! All that time in prison mustâve stifled my criminal creativity! This would be easier if I had Shegoâs sarcasm to deal with.â
âThe Great Blue speaks of the Mean Green Woman?â Warmonga asks.
âHuh? Oh, yeah.â Drakken answers, his mood changing to a solemn one. âI donât know where she could be, or if sheâs even alive. And itâs all thanks to that Buffoon, and Kim Possible!â He slams his fist down on a nearby consol, enraged as the events of his last showdown with Kim & Ron play over in his head.
At that moment, Warmonga takes Drakken by the hand and picks him up, carrying him in her large arms. âCome, Great Blue. Warmonga knows how to assist with your problem, and make you happy.â
Thereâs a hint of seduction in her voice that doesnât go unnoticed by Drakken, but he quickly disregards it. She carries him through the Technical Bridge of the ship and over towards a Purple Door. Once they reach the door, it slides open to reveal her personal quarters, which noticeably has a very large bed in the middle of it. Drakken is caught off guard by this sight, and it causes him to slip out of Warmongaâs arms and fall to the ground again.
âOK, this is gonna lead either some place really good or really bad.â He says, picking himself up.
âWarmonga will stimulate the Great Blueâs mind, by making him feel good.â She tells him, leaning down closer to him. Putting her massive arm around Drakken, she smothers his lips with hers; giving him a passionate & wet kiss the likes of which heâs never experienced. Things become even more overwhelming when her large tongue ventures into his mouth, almost flattening his. After a moment, she breaks the kiss and backs away, leaving Drakken dumbfounded by the experience. Walking over to the bed, she climbs onto it and lies down in the middle, spreading her legs wide open. She motions her finger to call Drakken to her.
âI am all yours, Great Blue.â
Not wanting to waste another second, Drakken strips out of his prison jumpsuit, leaving on only a tank top & a pair of boxers with green hearts on them (a present from Shego a few years back). He climbs into the bed and begins scaling the Amazon-like alien.
âMy word, this is almost like climbing Mt. Everest.â He thinks to himself. Reaching her breasts, he grabs onto them with both hands, and finds that they are even bigger than his head. He pulls her outfit down and brings her watermelons out into the open. Wrapping his mouth around on of her nipples, he begins to suck on it; feeling like a mini-Tootsie Roll is in his mouth.
âYes, Great Blue.â Warmonga cheers. âHave your way with me. Give me your Devine Rod.â
Drakken pulls down on his boxers; just enough to bring out his âDevine Rodâ, as Warmonga literally rips her outfit off, exposing the rest of her well-toned, shapely (and very large) body. She waits in anticipation as he brings the head of his Cock to her love lips, then pushes inside of her snatch. Drakken finds himself balls deep inside of her. As he looks up, there is no sign of pain coming from her face. If anything, itâs all pleasure.
âYes! More, Great Blue!â She begs. âFill me up with your greatness!â
âThis is Phenomenal.â Drakken thinks. âItâs almost like the perfect fit. Not like Shego, always complaining about how we should use lubricant.â
He pulls back and gives her a good thrust, and finds that Warmongaâs body has barely even moved. Itâs at this moment Drakken decides not to hold back, and begins to pound his massive Cock inside of her like a Jackhammer. Even though her body remains almost perfectly still, Warmonga can feel Drakkenâs Cock probing deep inside of her.
âMore, Great Blue. Please!â She pleads. âYour loyal servant begs for more!â
Drakken responds by grabbing her legs, intending to lift them higher. He finds it to be a daunting task though, almost like bench-pressing weights. Getting them to his desired height, he starts plowing into Warmongaâs snatch without mercy, slamming into her so hard the sound echoes through the room, along with her moans of pleasure. Itâs enough to bring Warmonga to her limit, somewhere she hasnât been in a long time due to her travels through space.
âYES! YES!!!â She screams. âYOU ARE MAKING ME CUM, GREAT BLUE!!!â
Drakkenâs on the verge himself, and gives her one last stroke when he feels Warmongaâs legs wrap around him, locking him in like an Anaconda. She sinks her fingers into the fabric of her bed (literally) as her orgasm hits. Itâs an intense one, as her legs tighten, almost squeezing the air & life out of the Mad Doctor, and turning him even bluer than was thought possible. After a moment, Warmonga releases her leg hold, causing Drakken to gasp for air. He falls almost lifelessly on top of her, unwilling to move, fearing she may have shattered his pelvis & hipbone.
âWas Warmonga helpful, Great Blue?â She asks, not even feeling spent.
âStrangelyâŠyes.â Drakken answers, exhausted. âIâve just come up with a plan for Global, NO⊠Galactic Domination!â
End Prologue
Four Months LaterâŠ
In the basement of the Senior Villa Mansion, Senor Senior Junior guides a now completely healed & blindfolded Shego down its stairs carefully, holding her hand. Today is the day he has planned ever since she revealed her obvious desire for vengeance against Kim. He wants to reveal a special present to her, which is why sheâs blindfolded. They reach the bottom of the stairs, where Junior leads her to the center of the room, which has a large tablet thatâs covered by a sheet. Stopping right in front of the tablet, Shego becomes fed up and upset.
âAre you ready for your surprise, my dear villainous vixen?â Junior asks.
âAlright, you know what? Enough of this.â She says, snatching her hand away from his and taking off her blindfold. âWhatever Stupid surprise you got down here, you can justâŠjustâŠâ
She stops in mid-sentence once she lays her eyes on what awaits in the middle of the room. Junior removes the sheet to reveal on the tabletâŠwhat appears to be a normal suit, all black, with some parts trimmed dull green. A LOT like the jumpsuit Shego is currently wearing, only more skintight. She walks up to the tablet and looks at the suit, unimpressed.
âTHIS is your surprise?â She says. âYou made up all this fuss for a stupid Suit!?â She slams her fist onto the tablet in anger, which triggers a low, soft humming sound. Shego looks back at the suit and notices that the dull green trims are now glowing bright neon green. It doesnât take her long to put two and two together.
âWaitâŠthis, this kinda looks like Kimmyâs Battle Suit.â
âBut it is your Battle Suit!â Junior announces. âYou have been such a downer talking about revenge on that Kim Possible, so I had my fatherâs scientists work on a duplicate of that tacky Kim suit. They told me it has all of the same capabilities and more. And I handled the design. Black is so much your color.â
Not caring about what Junior just said, Shego picks up the suit and holds it up in front of her, admiring the style. âOh yeah. I gotta try this baby on.â
Taking the suit, she heads for the nearest bathroom and walks in, slamming the door shut behind her. The scientists in the room begin preparation for battle-testing the suit, as Junior stands out of the way, wearing a cocky smirk on his face.
âDid you see the design? Totally my idea.â He says, nudging his elbow into a nearby scientist. Juniorâs nudging stops when he hears the ringtone of his cell phone activated, playing âHelloâ by the Oâ Boyz. He pulls out his cell and answers the call. âYouâve got Junior. Talk to me, babe.â
âJunior? Baby?â
He instantly recognizes the voice. âCamille?â
âUgh. About time I got through. These roaming charges are like, such a pain!â
âI know!â Junior agrees. âAnd all of the weekend minutes really put a cramp in myâŠWait! Why are you calling?â
âOH! Junior, I need your help!â
âWhat is the matter?â Junior asks.
âThereâs this like, crazy, overweight lady whoâs running around Hollywood destroying Movie Studios with herâŠfurry things! I think it might be Rosie OâDonnell. But the worse news isâŠshe like, destroyed the studio that wanted to do MY movie!â
âNot to be offending to you Camille, but I do not see what this has to do with me.â Junior says.
âWell, maybe you could come down and, like, help me stop her.â
âOh, No!â Junior replies. âNo. We are, how you say, the Splits-ville. It is over between us. And there is nothing you can say that would change my mind.â
âThe Studio your father owns is her next target.â
âAAHHH! Father will be furious!â Junior begins to panic, and gives in. âOK, I will travel to the Town of Tinsels to meet you. But this is business! That is all, so none of the hanky-panky!â
Junior hangs up the phone and sighs. The last thing he wants to do is see Camille Leon again, especially with Shego slowly warming up to him. But he has little choice in the matter, due to the situation. Junior makes his exit, climbing the stairs out of the basement, just as Shego emerges from her Changing Room, wearing her Battle Suit. She doesnât notice him leaving, as several scientists swarm her and lead her over to a makeshift Target Range.
âMs. Shego, if you could just follow us over to the Target Range, we canâŠâ
âYeâsave it!â She says, cutting the scientist off. âI already know what to do.â She stands behind a white line, facing the range. A moment later, several likenesses of Global Justice Agents pop up all in one line. In the middle, thereâs a likeness of Dr. Director, and Kim Possible. Grinning almost sadistically, Shego unleashes a blinding flurry of energy blasts at a rapid-fire rate, all of it enhanced by the suit. The plastic targets are obliterated within seconds, leaving nothing but their melted remains and no way to identify them even remotely. The grin on Shegoâs face grows wider, as she looks at her right hand, feeling the enhanced power.
âOh YEAH! Momma Likes!â She says. âJunior, come here! I wanna test out the strength of this baby!â She looks around and sees no sign of him. âJunior?â
âIâm sorry, maâam, but Master Junior was called away on business.â The Mansion Butler says, descending the steps into the basement. âThough he did leave me with a request to see that you remain comfortable here.â
âDonât bother, Jeeves.â Shego responds, putting her hand up to deny the request. âSomethingâs telling me Juniorâs going where the action is. Well, heâs gonna have company on his trip. And if Iâm luckyâŠâ She ignites her right hand with a massive load of energy, turning it blindingly bright green as she holds it in front of her face, and clenches it into a fist. The sadistic grin still resting on her face. ââŠMaybe Iâll run into the Princess along the way.â
The Hollywood Chapters 2
âAlright you maggots, Listen up!â
Ron sits in the front row of desks inside of a darkened classroom, surrounded by his Varsity Football teammates. At the front of the room Mr. Barkin walks back & forth in front of a Chalkboard which has a Football Play drawn on it. He looks out at his student-players like a Drill Sergeant looks out at troops, and addresses them as such also.
âThe Championship Game is 2 weeks away.â He continues. âSo we need to make sure that we have each & every play locked into our minds Perfectly! Meaning we go over our ultimate play one more time! NowâŠis EVERYONE paying attention?â
Barkin directs his gaze over at Ron, referring especially to him. Ron responds by bringing out a notepad & pencil. âDonât worry Mr. B, Iâm ready to take notes.â Rufus hops up onto the desk and salutes Barkin, ready to help Ron out.
Barkin just turns and walks over to the chalkboard. âAlright. Now, the Quarterback drops back and hands off to the Halfback. The Halfback drops the ball for the Quarterback. The Quarterback picks it up and drops back while the Fullback blocks the Linebacker. The Halfback runs back around the back of the line for the Quarterback. The Fullback takes out the Linebacker. The Quarterback gets back behind the Fullbackâs back and throws to the Halfback so he can run it back! And if you donât execute the play, youâll all be on your backs! Am I understood!?â
Barkin looks back out to his student-players only to see each & every one of them confused beyond belief. Especially Ron, who looks like heâs just experienced a Brain Shutdown. Even Rufus is baffled over âThe Playâ. Barkin just drops his head and sighs, shaking it slowly as the School Bell rings. A moment later, the players snap out of it and head out of class, including Ron.
âWeâre going over these plays again on Monday, people.â Mr. Barkin calls out to his players. âAND YOUâRE ALL DOING LAPS, ESPECIALLY YOU STOPPABLE!!!â
âAw, man.â Ron responds, walking down the hall. âItâs not my fault we canât tell whether thatâs a play or plans to a Nuclear Device.â
He makes his way past rows of lockers and through dozens of students until he reaches his destination, Kimâs locker, with Kim standing in front of it. âHey, Ron. Why do you look so burnt out?â
âBecause my brainâs been cooked like a Naco.â He responds.
Kim just smirks, knowing heâs been through another Barkin session. âThen maybe this will cool it off.â She leans in and gently kisses his lips, putting her arms around him. The kiss is short, but when Kim breaks it, she sees that itâs more than enough to put a smile on her boyfriendâs face.
âOh yeah.â He says, grinning. âCool as a cucumber.â But Ronâs coolness fades when Kimâs locker door flies open and a beam of light shoots out, generating into what looks like a Ghost image of a Woman.
âWAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHH!!!!!! LOCKER GHOST!!!!â
âCalm down, Ron.â The two turn back towards Kimâs locker to see Wadeâs face on the computer screen. âItâs a special message from Global Justice. Straight from Dr. Director herself.â
Sure enough, the ghostly holographic image sharpens into Dr. Betty Director. âGreetings Kimberly, Ronald. Global Justice is in need of your special skills again.â
âWait, why didnât you just zoom us to your Headquarters like you always do?â Ron asks.
âThe Transportation tubes are being upgraded for faster travel from Middleton.â She tells him. âBut to the matter, we need you for a mission in Los Angeles. More specifically, Hollywood.â
âHollywood? BOOYAH!!!â Ron cheers, pulling a pair of shades out of his pocket and putting them on. âFancy Cars, Movie Stars, and the Bling-Bling Life, hey Rufus?â
Rufus pops out of Ronâs pocket, also wearing a pair of shades. âMm-Hmm!â
âRon, weâre going there for business.â Kim tells him.
âIndeedâ Dr. Director agrees, before continuing. âThere have been reports of wild riots & severe vandalism caused by gigantic animal creatures.â
âGigantic Animals?â Ron says. âOh wait, you canât meanâŠâ He gets his answer when the hologram shows an image of several Furry-like creatures, all being led by DNAmy.
âYes, it seems that DNAmy has made her return.â Dr. Director says.
âNo big.â Kim responds. âWeâll get the first ride out West.â
âIâm working on it right now.â Wade chimes in, before typing away at his computer.
âPlease & thank you.â Kim tells him, before shutting the locker door. She & Ron begin to make their way down the hall when a familiar voice is overheard.
âDid someone say Tinseltown?â
Almost out of nowhere, Bonnie appears in front of Kim & Ron, her ears catching the mission briefing Kim was given. âYouâre gonna need some backup for this, K. Someone who can hobnob with the stars.â
âSorry, B.â Kim snaps back. âBut hobnobbing snobs arenât needed for this mission.â
âThatâs right! This is a mission for Team Possible!â This time out of nowhere, Monique walks up and puts her arm around Kim, grinning. But Kim shoots her down also.
âSorry Monique, but itâs just me & Ron this time.â Kim tells her. âMissionâs too dangerous with those animals loose, plus itâs not fashion related.â
âOh, come on!â Monique says. âWhoâs to say you wonât need a new look fighting evil? BesidesâŠâ She grabs Kimâs shoulders and pleads with her. ââŠI NEED to meet MC Honey & the Oh Boyz!â
Kim just smiles and removes Moniqueâs hands. âSorry, Monique. But I got you next time, girl.â She says, before walking off with Ron, leaving Bonnie & Monique behind. The two look Kim & Ron together, making their way to the exit, and canât help but to feel a bit of resentmentâŠBonnie far more than Monique.
âThis is so not fair.â Bonnie says. âThey get to party in Movie Star Land while I have to remain here in boring Middleton.â
At that moment, Monique develops a smirk on her face. âYou knowâŠwe donât have to stay behind.â Bonnie turns to her, confused about what she means. âJust watch.â
Monique turns towards Kimâs locker and opens it up. With a few keystrokes, she activates a channel that connects her to Wade. âWhatâs the problemâŠMonique? What are you doing on here?â
âWe need the location Kimâs ride is leaving from.â Monique tells him.
âMonique, you know I canât do that.â Wade replies. âThis mission is Global Justice priority, meaning Authorized Personnel Only.â
âOh, I think I have the clearance needed.â Monique counters, clutching the bottom of her T-shirt with both hands. She then lifts it up enough to reveal her bare round breasts to Wade, flashing him for 2 seconds before pulling her T-shirt back down. The 2 seconds were enough though, as Wade stares back at her in shock.
âI arranged a ride from Middleton Union Station.â He says, in somewhat of a daze.
âThanks, Wade.â Monique replies, before shutting the locker door. She & Bonnie then make their way to the rear exit of the school, when Bonnie remarks on what she just saw.
âUsing your sex appeal to gain information? Youâre picking up some of my best traits.â
Later that NightâŠ
At the Middleton Union Station, a fully loaded passenger train is just pulling out, ready to make a speedy trip to itâs destination, Hollywood. The 5th passenger car is where Kim & Ron make their stay, packing their mission gear into the overhead compartment before sitting down in their seats. Across the aisle from Kim sits a familiar looking woman whoâs reading a pamphlet. Sheâs wearing a light gray suit jacket with a blue blouse underneath, a brown business skirt, black high heals and a baby blue headband. Neither Kim nor the mysterious woman pay attention or even notice one another, not even when the woman gets up from her seat. As the train moves into full gear, she exits the 5th car and enters the 4th, the First Class car. The woman looks around to see a row of doors in front of her, each leading to a private room where the occupant can ride, dine & sleep in peace. She walks over to the 3rd door on the right and looks through the window to see Senior Junior sitting there, staring out of his window as he watches the farmland pass him by. But when she opens the door to his cabinet, the Conductor of the train approaches her.
âExcuse me maâam, but I will need to see your ticket.â
The woman turns towards the Conductor to introduce herself. âWell Hi! Iâm Miss Go, the talent agent of that wonderful up-and-coming actor in there, Senior Junior.â
Shego a.k.a. Miss Go grins at the Conductor, whoâs just fallen for her ruse. âReally, heâs a movie star? On my train?â
âYou got it.â She answers cheerfully. âI was just about to talk to him about his latest roleâŠuh, as a Train Conductor in his next movie!â
âOh, this is like a dream come true!â The Conductor swoons.
âTell ya what, how about I get you his autograph, and then later he can get some pointers from you for his role?â Miss Go asks.
âAbsolutely!â He responds, before heading off to check other tickets. âOH! Iâm going to be chatting with an actual movie star! Oh, happy day!â
As the Conductor heads into the next car, Miss Go reverts back to her classic Shego self. âYeâthat guy, one Boxcar short of a Freight Train.â With that, she opens the door to Juniorâs room and walks in, startling him.
âOOH! Uh, pardon, Miss. But this cabin isâŠShego?â
âUGH! I Hate playing the goody-two-shoes!â She says as she snatches off her blue headband and letting her Jet Black hair flow freely.
âWhat are you doing here?â Junior asks.
âNo, no, no, no!â Shego says, sitting down across from him. âI ask the questions here. Now whyâre you heading off to Hollywood?â
âI am afraid that is of a private matter.â Junior responds.
âUh-huh. And Iâm afraid Iâll throw you from this train if you donât spill!â Shego counters.
âAAHHH! OK!â Junior screams, giving in. âI am on my way to the Tinseltown to save my fatherâs investment. There is a crazy woman wreaking havoc in Hollywood, and she threatens to destroy my fatherâs Film Company.â
Shego begins to think for a moment on that explanation. âHmmm, let me guess, crazy lady had giant furry animals with her?â
âWhyâŠYes.â Junior replies, shocked by Shegoâs accurate guess. âHow did you know?â
âCause its DNAmy.â She tells him, shaking her head. âI knew they couldnât keep her in the Looney Bin. Youâre lucky I came along, youâre gonna need some help putting her down.â
âB-But, you were supposed to stay behind and train with your spiffy new suit.â Junior tells her.
âYeâJunior? I do my best training when Iâm ACTUALLY kicking ass.â Shego replies. âI donât waste time with stupid Training sessions. Speaking of wasting timeâŠâ
Shego develops a seductive grin across her face as she reaches for the light switch & flicks it off, leaving nothing but moonlight barely illuminating the room. She then slowly creeps over towards Junior and lies against him, almost straddling his left leg. âThis train ride is gonna be a long trip. We should keep ourselves busy.â
She presses her lips against his in a deep kiss, while she lets her left hand roam down his Juniorâs body, until she reaches his pants. Using both hands now, she gets them unbuckled and starts stroking his Cock, pulling it out into the open. Juniorâs hands go to work also, as he reaches behind Shego and starts to palm her firm, round ass. But after a couple of gropes & rubs, he notices something a little surprising, and itâs enough for him to break the kiss.
âYouâŠyou are not wearing panties?â
âI work better when I go Commando.â She says, grinning back at him. Itâs all Junior needs to hear, as they lock lips again. He resumes squeezing and groping her ass, even running his fingers across her pussy lips. But he does well to stay away from her asshole, knowing that action near there is like setting off a Nuclear Bomb for her. As they continue to suck on each otherâs lips, they feel themselves becoming ready. Juniorâs Cock is hard as steel & ready for entry, while Shegoâs pussy has never been wetter. Ceasing with the foreplay, Shego brings her hands up and literally rips open her blouse, exposing her breasts. She then breaks the kiss and brings her left leg over, straddling herself onto him. She hovers for a moment, hiking up her, before bringing herself down onto his Cock.
âOh, Fuck yeah!â She swoons. âReady for a long ride, Junior?â
Gently wrapping her arms around his shoulders, she slowly rocks her hips; moving them at an angle and bringing his Cock nearly all the way out, before taking all of it back in. Junior puts his hands on her hips and lays back, enjoying the ride.
âMmmm, so did Camille every ride you like this on your tape?â Shego asks seductively.
Junior is a little hesitant to answer the question, but does anyway. âUnfortunatelyâŠNo. In fact, that tape is the only time weâve done it.â
Shego shoots him a surprised look. âSeriously?â
âYes. In fact it is the reason we broke up.â He confesses. âThat and she slept with the Oh Boyz while on their tour.â
âGeez, I thought it was just rumors. She is a slut.â Shego says, before turning her full attention to Junior. âAnd I bet she has nothing on me.â
She speeds up her hip movements and begins going at a moderate pace. Leaning back in, she French-kisses Junior, letting her tongue explore his mouth. Muffled moans emit from her as he begins thrusting in unison with her. Juniorâs hands move down lower, clenching her ass yet again. In his mind, Junior knows that Shegoâs right. Sex was OK with Camille, but itâs heaven with Shego. He can feel her bare breasts pressed against his chest, as she sucks on his lips and wrestles with his tongue. After minutes of steamy close-up action, Shego finally breaks the kiss, leaving a small, thin line of saliva connecting their mouths. She drags her hands gently down to his chest and begins to ride his Cock a little rougher than before.
âOh you love it, donât you?â She says, bringing in dirty talk. âYou love it when I ride your Cock.â
âOh heavenly father, yes.â Junior declares. His eyes are focused on Shegoâs plump, round breasts as the moonlight shines down upon them, giving them an almost heavenly glow. His Cock continues to penetrate deep inside her, but heâs getting closer to his limit, and canât hold on for much longer.
âShegoâŠI feel I may be coming soonâŠâ He warns.
âHuh, what?â She says, snapping out of her euphoria state. âNo! No, not yet! Mamaâs getting hers this time, now make me cum!â
She clenches her fist tightly, and Junior knows that she is serious. He begins picking up his own pace, pumping in & out of her snatch faster than she expected. Shego has to grab onto his shoulders to keep balance, but she holds on as her limit nears.
âYeah, Oh Fuck, Baby!â She cheers. âKeep fucking me! Just like that!â
It takes nearly all of his willpower to hold back his urge to cum, as Junior continues to pound her pussy relentlessly. Shego bites her lower lip and tightens her grip on Juniorâs shoulders. Her orgasm hits and she stifles a scream, but it still comes out as a load moan. Her body trembles momentarily, and she tosses her head back and relishes the moment.
âFuck! That was so good.â She says, nearly feeling spent. As she brings her head back, she looks at Junior and notices he hasnât come yet. âYou wanna cum, baby? Yeah. Come on! Shoot it all inside of me!â
She rocks her hips back and forth again, wanting to bring Junior to his limit. It doesnât take long, as his orgasm hits and he shoots his load deep into her snatch. Shego leans forward and kisses him once more, muffling his moans so that they wonât be heard. He continues to let off almost like a firehose, and excess cum starts dribbling out of her pussy. Shego doesnât care though, and neither does Junior. After a minute, they break the kiss, and Shego smiles at him.
âBet that bimbo never made you cum like that, did she?â She asks.
âNotâŠevenâŠclose.â Junior responds, drifting off into slumber. Shego soon joins him as she rests her head against his chest, and the two fall asleep.
The Next DayâŠ
A nearly 24-hour ride finally comes to an end when the train reaches its destination, Los Angeles. The almost cavernous train station is huge enough to hold 40 to 50,000 people, so itâs no surprise that Shego & Junior were easily able to get off the train and travel through the station without detection. Kim & Ron are still by their train, as they wait for the cargo loaders to finish unloading their equipment.
âWhy did Global Justice give us all of this stuff?â Ron asks.
âMost of it is surveillance and Covert Ops.â Kim answers. âItâs just a bunch of High-Tech Binoculars and junk.â At that moment, a huge wooden crate is slammed down in front of them. âExcept that.â
âUh, sir?â Ron says, getting the attention of one of the loaders. âThis crate isnât ours. Iâd think we remember something this gigantic.â
âItâs got your names on it.â The Loader responds, before turning to help the other passengers. Kim looks at the stamp put on the front of the crate. The stamp reads: Kim Possible & Ron Stoppable property.
âOur names are on it.â Kim says, looking suspiciously at the crate. âBut I donât trust it.â
Ron feels the same way, and puts his ear to the crate, trying to listen for anything suspicious. Strangely, he does hear sounds coming from inside. âO-OK. Either this crate is haunted, or itâs a trap from one of our foes. RUFUS!â
The loyal Naked Mole Rat pops out of Ronâs pocket, scampers up to his shoulder, and then leaps onto the crate. Taking a moment, he paces back & forth along the edge of the crate, until coming to a sudden stop. He then leaps into the air and stomps down on the edge, jimmying the crate open. The door slowly teeters and falls down, giving Kim & Ron a look at whatâs inside. What they see is a shock within itself. Bonnie & Monique were the ones in the crate, and theyâre lying in a very suggestive position; Bonnie on top of Monique, legs straddled.
âUhâŠHi, Kim.â They both say to the Redheaded Spy, whoâs not wearing a pleased look.
âMind telling me why you hijacked my luggage to come along?â She asks.
âYeah, and why youâre lying like that.â Ron adds.
Finally noticing the position theyâre in, the two quickly push off & separate from each other. âLook, like it or not Ms. Perfect, you need me.â Bonnie tells Kim, standing to her feet. âStars know information. Big stars know more information. And Iâm the one who can get it.â
Bonnie folds her arms and smirks at Kim, expressing the brashness Kim & Ron have become use to throughout the years. Itâs a different story with Monique, though.
âYou HAVE to take me with you, girl!â Monique pleads, grabbing Kimâs arm. âThis may be my only chance to meet MC Honey! You canât deny that for your Best Friend!â
Kim just sighs and activates her Kimmunicator. âWade, Iâm gonna need a pickup to send two stowaways back to Middleton.â
âActually, I think they should stay.â
Kim cocks an eyebrow up when she notices the voice is not Wadeâs. âDr. Director?â
Like clockwork, her face appears on the Kimmunicator screen. âGlobal Justice scientists have just made a breakthrough. They believe that there could be a âBonnie & Moniqueâ factor that enhances your mission success.â
Both Kim & Ron drop their jaws in shock. âYouâre kidding, right?â Kim asks.
âNot in the least.â Dr. Director answers, her usual serious self. âSince youâre the events that occurred at Drakkenâs complex, your missions have been far more efficient & successful when they accompany you, even in the face of impossible odds. I think they should remain while our scientists examine their effect. Your ride should be there to pick you up shortly.â
The communication is cut off, leaving Kim stuck with her two star-struck classmates. âYou heard the woman.â Bonnie tells her with a smug grin. âYou need the âBonnieâ factor to help you with your mission stuff.â
âThatâs the Bonnie & MONIQUE factor.â Monique chimes in.
âYouâre right, I do need it.â Kim agrees, developing a smug grin of her own on her face. âBut now, I need your âfactorâ to help carry the bags.â
Both Kim & Ron walk away, leaving the heavy luggage with their two classmates. âOh, no. I do NOT do heavy lifting. Find some otherâOOMMPHH!!!â
Bonnie feels a heavy bag jammed into her gut by Monique, whoâs carrying 4 of her own. âOh yes you do, if you wanna hobnob with the starsâŠBon-Bon.â Monique moves on ahead to catch up with Kim & Ron. Reluctantly, Bonnie picks up the rest of the bags and follows behind, grumbling under her breath along the way.
As the four exit out of the Train Station, they hear the honking of a car horn. Looking around, Kim spots that their ride has arrived for themâŠan all-white Stretch Limo with 14-karat gold trimming and a Jacuzzi in the back. The back door of the Limp opens up to show the person responsible for this rideâŠPop Diva Superstar Britina.
âHeard you needed a ride, Kim.â She says. âAnd I thought youâd like to ride in style.â
The sight of a true Hollywood star up close proves to be too much for Bonnie & Monique, and they promptly freak out. Charging the Limo, they toss the luggage over to the side and barge their way in. Unfortunately, it was the side Ron was standing, and he ends up buried. Kim climbs into the Limo and glares at the two.
âNice job, ladies.â She says sarcastically. âI think you gave Ron a concussion.â
âWellâŠheâs a strong guy. Heâs on the Football Team.â Bonnie says, defending herself.
âAnd you Monique?â Kim asks, turning to her best friend.
âWellâŠBonnie did it, too.â Monique replies, before turning her attention to Britina.
âDonât worry about it, Kim.â Britina tells her. âMy bodyguards can handle the luggage.â
Kim looks back out of the car window to see several large men walking over to the pile of luggage. Within seconds they lift up each & every bag, freeing Ron from his suitcase captivity. âHeh, yeah, thanks guys. But I had that. Just a couple of more seconds I wouldâve powered my way out.â Kim just smiles as Ron climbs into the Limo and sits beside her. Bonnie & Monique continue to marvel over Britina as the Limo pulls off away from the Train Station.
Later That NightâŠ
Deep in the heart of Beverly Hills rests Britinaâs summer home, now currently a covert base of operations for Global Justice. Not many agents are there though, and those that are remain well hidden. Team Possible is in the process of making themselves at home. Bonnie & Monique tour the Mansion while Kim gets a further mission briefing from a GJ Agent. Once informed, she turns around to see Ron walking up, fresh off of discovering a Bueno Nacho Restaurant on the 2nd floor.
âOK, does every rich celebrity have a Bueno Nacho in their house?â He asks, feeling a little jealous. âWhy didnât I think of that when I was rich?â
Kim is about to answer him when her Kimmunicator goes off. She pulls it out of her pocket and answers as it shows Dr. Directorâs face on the screen. âKimberly, we need to discuss your tactical plan for confrontation. Especially if youâre going to be using the Battle Suit.â
âCool, I could go for a little mission briefing.â Ron says, putting his arm around his girlfriend.
âSorry, Ronald. But this briefing is only for Special Level One agents & associates.â Dr. Director informs him.
âYou should get some sleep anyway, Ron. We had a long trip.â Kim says, as a small hole pops open under her. She drops into it and is sent to Global Justice Headquarters, leaving Ron at the Mansion.
âWell, maybe KP is right.â He says. âI am a little tired. AndâŠâ
âRon! There you are!â
He turns around to see Britina walking up behind him. âI need your help with something in my room. You know, kinda guy stuff.â
Ron smirks and cracks his knuckles, ready to go to work. âYep! No problem, Britina. I am all over it. You got the Ron Manâs strength at your disposal.â Feeling useful, Ron follows Britina up the main staircase leading to the 2nd floor. They reach the top and proceed down a long hallway, which looks to have a dozen doors on each side. After a bit of walking, they finally reach Britinaâs room. She opens the door and invites Ron to go in first.
âTHIS IS YOUR BEDROOM???â Ronâs jaw drops as he stares into her bedroom, which more than dwarfs his by comparison. In fact, at this moment, Ronâs pretty sure he can fit his entire house into this room.
âYou just go sit on my bed.â Britina tells him. âIâm gonna get a little more comfortable.â
She walks into her bathroom and shuts the door behind her as Ron sits down on the edge of her bed. Looking around the room, he sees various awards that Britina has won over the years for her music. Her walls are covered with Gold & Platinum Records, and a large bookcase by the door holds her music awards.
âWhoa. I canât believe Iâm seeing this.â Ron says to himself. âSheâs got a lot of awards stacked up in her bedroom. WaitâŠIâm in her bedroom. That usually meansâŠâ
Before he can finish his sentence, the door to the bathroom swings back open, showing Britina in more âcomfortableâ wear. She has on a tight Baby T-shirt, white lace panties, thigh-high white socks and white high heels. Seductively she strolls over to her bed, causing Ron to panic and climb into it. Itâs at this point that he notices the bed is heart-shaped.
âHow the hell did I miss that?!â He thinks to himself, before turning to Britina. âWait! We canât do this, Iâm dating Kim!â
âI know.â Britina says, climbing into bed and over towards Ron. âBut I also heard about everyone else youâve been with. And since me & Kim are BFFâs, I know she wonât mind sharing.â
Ron lies down on the bed as Britina hovers over him, ready to experience âThe Ron Factorâ. âItâs just that, Iâve been through so many photo shoots and so many tours that I never have time for this.â She tells him, grabbing his pants and tugging them down to his knees. âIt just gets so frustrating. But I know that the Ron Man can help me with that.â
Frustrating. That very word sends a chill down Ronâs spine. Heâs heard it so many times before, and he knows exactly what it leads to. Britina grabs his hand and willingly places it on her ass, then leans in to get things started. She gets closer, and closer, andâŠ
âWell, well, well.â
Both Ron & Britina turn towards the bedroom door and witness an unexpected and frightening sightâŠBonnie standing in the doorway.
âCaught with your pants down, huh Ron?â
The Hollywood Chapters 3
âIâm gonna need Witness Protection.â
Those five words play through Ronâs mind as he finds himself caught in a compromising position, with Britina on top hovering over him, her lips just inches from his. Bonnie leans against the doorway wearing a white guest robe that was given to her.
âUh, this isnât what it looks like?â Ron says, hoping for the best.
âThatâs funny, because it looks like youâre about to get freaky with a Big Name Celebrity.â Bonnie replies, walking into the room and untying her robe. âAnd it looks like Iâm gonna join in.â
She opens up her robe and takes it off, letting it fall to the floor. Ronâs eyes widen in shock as he sees Bonnie is wearing the exact same outfit that Britina has on, right down to the lace panties. âLike it?â Bonnie asks, semi-posing for Ron. âI subscribe to the Britina Line in Victoriaâs Secret.â As Ron lies there stunned, Bonnie climbs onto the heart-shaped bed and joins the two. âYou donât mind the company, do you?â
Britina shakes her head no at the question, but Ron has a different response. âOK, I mind! I very much mind right now!â
âMaybe we shouldnât.â Britina says. âI mean he really looks like he doesnât want to do this.â
Bonnie just smirks and points a finger down Ronâs body. Britina follows the finger and notices the raging erection Ron has, one that threatens to nearly rip his Dick out of his boxers. âThe Cock never lies.â Bonnie tells her.
âOK, that is out of my control!â Ron counters. âHonestly, it could happen to any man!â
âWould you stop resisting, Ron?â Bonnie tells him, as she moves her left hand into his Boxers and starts stroking his Rod gently. âYouâre about to have sex me AND a Hot Celebrity. Youâre basically living the dream.â
She lies down over Ron at the waist and grabs his Cock with her right hand. Licking her lips, she proceeds to start licking the head & shaft, before engulfing half of it into her mouth. Before Ron can say anything in protest, he feels his lips being smothered by Britinaâs. A conflict is then set off in himself, part of him once this to end, but another part agrees with Bonnie and wants to keep this going even further.
âAw, man. I shouldnât be doing this!â He thinks. âBut this is a once in a lifetime chance. Ahh, curse my male need to screw a Celebrity!â
And itâs that male need, along with Bonnieâs tongue, that makes him give in. He returns the makeout to Britina, even inserting his tongue into her mouth, which she more than invites. His hands explore her body, paying attention to her breasts first. He lifts up her T-shirt and begins to fondle them, as Britina wraps her arms around him. Meanwhile Bonnie is working Ronâs Cock around in her mouth, using her right hand to grip the shaft and her left hand to caress his balls. She takes most of it out of her mouth, only leaving the head as she rotates her tongue around it, before she swallows it back up. After a minute of fondling, Ron starts to move his hands lower, until he reaches Britinaâs heavenly round backside. He pulls them down a little, just below her cheeks, and delves his two fingers into her awaiting snatch.
âOOOHHHHHH!!!â Britina lets out a satisfied moan, breaking the kiss. Ron takes this opportunity to taste her breasts, wrapping his lips around her nipple. She places her right hand under her breast and holds it up for him to lick & suck on more.
âOh yeah, thatâs it. Keep licking, Ron.â She moans, enjoying the sensation. Ronâs fingers continue to go to work on her pussy, which is now becoming slick & wet enough for entry. At that moment, Bonnie removes her mouth from his Rod, as Ron grabs Britina and rolls over, putting her on the bed under him. He kicks off his pants and pulls his boxers down to his knees, more than ready to give her his Cock. Bonnie sits to the side, feeling a bit jealous.
âHmmph! It should be me going first.â She utters under her breath, turning away and pouting.
Grabbing hold of his Rod, Ron guides it through her wet pussy lips and plunges it deep inside of her. Britina gives off a sudden gasp, not completely ready for all Ron has to offer. She recovers quickly though, and narrows her legs so that her thighs rub against Ronâs sides. The feel of her soft, velvety skin intoxicates him, as he begins to stroke himself in & out of her wet snatch. Still, thoughts of Kim linger in his mind, and Bonnie doesnât help the situation.
âYou should be thanking me, Ron.â Bonnie says seductively, bringing herself closer to him. âKim would never let you have the chance to fuck a Celebrity.â
Before he can even reply to that remark, she kisses him, smothering his lips with hers and running her tongue into his mouth. As he continuously pumps Britinaâs pussy, his right hand begins to roam down Bonnieâs body, until it reaches her firm round ass. Then, just as with Britina, Ron pulls her panties down below her cheeks and begins to rub his fingers against her lower lips. The pleasure from it causes Bonnie to break the kiss and moan aloud in passion. Grabbing hold of his shirt, she pulls it off over his head before falling back onto the bed, landing beside Britina.
âOh GodâŠheâs so good with his handsâŠand his Cock.â She says between gasps and moans.
âYou have no idea.â Bonnie replies with a grin.
Ron, now bare-chested, starts to pick up his pace and drills deep into Britinaâs snatch. He moves her left leg so that her ankle rests on his shoulder. With a clearer path, he continues to drill her a little harder, making her gasp & moan loudly with each thrust. She grips her bed sheets and hangs on, taking as much as she can and wanting more.
âGod, itâs been so long!â She thinks. âNot even Nicky Nick could make me feel like this.â
She grits her teeth as she feels Ronâs hard pipe reaching deeper then sheâs ever felt, even with a dildo. Sweat drips off of her body, and her ponytailed hair is now a frizzled mess. She starts to fondle her own breasts, as she gently bites her lower lip, feeling a level of pleasure she hasnât ever experienced. Within moments she feels herself nearing her limit at a rapid pace, unable to stop it and unwilling to.
âOH FUCK, IâM GONNA CUM!!!â She screams.
âUGH! ME TOO, BRITINA!!â Ron answers.
He gives her one more stroke then pulls out of her, just in time as he starts shooting his load out, spraying it over her stomach, breasts, and even hitting her face. She couldnât care less, though. Itâs the longest & hardest orgasm sheâs ever experienced, and all she wants to do is bathe in the afterglow. But as Ron pulls out, he finds that thereâs someone else who wants that same feeling.
âYou better have enough left for me, Ron.â Bonnie tells him, grabbing hold of his shoulders and pulling him down on top of her.
âJustâŠ5 minutes, Bonnie.â He replies, a bit exhausted from his go-around with Britina. Unfortunately, that wasnât what Bonnie wanted to hear.
âSo you think you can fuck Britina and just finger me?â She counters. âNo. Way. Start using your tongue.â
Bonnieâs bossy nature rears itâs ugly head, and it almost takes Ron out of the mood. But remembering that Bonnie wonât hesitate to tell Kim about this keeps him going. Moving down her body, he kisses her breasts, then her stomach and lower, until he reaches his destination. He moves between her legs and dives in head first, putting his tongue to work on his snatch. Bonnie lets out a moan of pleasure as she feels Ronâs tongue probing into her.
âOh yeah, Ron! Thatâs it!â Bonnie tells him. âLick it!â
She puts her right hand on his head, running her fingers though his blonde hair and holding him there. Ron continues to âhave dinnerâ between Bonnieâs legs, kissing & licking her inner thighs along with her love lips. Bonnieâs now gripping the bed sheets tightly, as he breathing becomes labored. Ron really gets into eating her out, so much so that he brings his hands up under her rear and elevates her lower body inches off the bed. At this point, Bonnie is approaching her limit like a runaway Freight Train.
âFUCK, RON!!! YOUR GONNA MAKE ME CUM!!!â
A few seconds later she does, hitting her orgasm so hard she gushes into Ronâs face, causing him to drop her back down to the bed. As he wipes his face clean, Bonnie looks up at Ron, still feeling spent from the orgasm, and gives her opinion of his performance.
âNext time use you better use your tongue better, Ron.â
And with those words, Bonnie has broken the last straw. âThat does it, woman!â He says, grabbing her hips and rolling her over onto her stomach. Bonnieâs in shock about whatâs going on, but sheâs too winded now to fight back. Gazing down, it only takes a quick look at Bonnieâs soaked pussy and a few strokes of his Cock to get Ron ready.
âYou want Big Ron Bonnie, you got Big Ron!â He says, leaning forward. He guides his Rod to her pussy, then shoves it balls deep inside of her, causing her eyes to widen in shock.
âAAAAAAAAAAGGGGGGHHHHHHH!!!!!!â
Immediately Ron starts giving her the pleasure she wanted in droves, slamming his Cock deep inside of her with each stroke. The impact of skin slapping skin echoes throughout the room, and is enough to snap Britina out of her Orgasm-induced daze. Ron reaches under Bonnie and lifts up her T-shirt, exposing her breasts. He fondles the right one, rubbing & tweaking her nipple as he leaves the other pressed against the bed. Bonnie moves her right hand under herself and begins to rub her clit feverishly, as she bites down on her lower lips trying to stifle loud moans of pleasure. As Britina rolls over and looks on with amazement, Ron holds onto Bonnieâs hand with his own from behind. Their bodies shimmer with sweat that makes them glow even in the low light. In all the times Bonnie has been with Ron, never has he been this deep inside of her. Her usually perfect hair looks like an Atom Bomb struck it, and she can barely keep her eyes open, overwhelmed by Ronâs Rod ramming into her from behind continuously. He keeps his body close, working his hips in a constant motion that brings both of them closer to their limit again. Soon, neither is able to hold back.
âGOD! RON, IâM GONNA CUM!!!â Bonnie cries.
âME TOO!!!â Ron replies. Giving her one last deep stroke, Ron pulls out and unleashes his second load, spraying it all over Bonnieâs luscious & sweat-covered ass. Bonnieâs body trembles in ecstasy. That orgasm was unquestionably huger than the one Ron gave her with his tongue. Ron, dog-tired, falls almost lifelessly to the bed, landing between Britina & Bonnie. Breathing heavily, he can barely move a muscle, and doesnât notice Britina cuddling up next to him until she comes into his vision.
âWow! I canât believe you made her cum that hard.â She says.
âYeah.â Ron responds tiredly. âBut sheâsâŠgonna kill meâŠfor beingâŠso rough.â
Just then, Ron feels Bonnieâs arm drape across his chest. Exhaustedly she begins to sit up and crawl towards him, wearing a vindictive look. Ronâs too tired to try and escape so he braces himself for whatever beating or tongue-lashing Bonnie wants to inflict. He gets the latter, though not in the fashion he expected. Bonnie wraps her lips around his and French kisses Ron, bringing her leg up and wrapping it around his. After a minute, she finally breaks the kiss and looks at him with fatigued eyes and a bushed, but satisfied grin.
âThanksâŠBig Ron.â She says, before resting her head on his shoulder.
âYeah, thanks Big Ron.â Britina adds, turning Ronâs head towards her and applying her lips to his. The two lovely ladies lie huddled close to Ron Stoppable, who just canât help but to feel like, so many times before, the luckiest man alive.
âNo problem, ladiesâŠmy pleasure.â
At That MomentâŠ
On the other side of Beverly Hills, a large celebration has just gotten underway. Dozens of celebrities have flocked to one Mansion, ready to party until sunup. In the middle of it all is the eternal party girl, Camille Leon. She dances with several half-naked Speedo-clad males around her, not having a care in the worldâŠat least until the doorbell rings. Breaking away from the party, she walks over to the already open front door to see Senior Junior standing in the doorway.
âJunior, I am so glad you came!â She says, wearing a joyous grin.
âYes, I wouldâve been earlier but it is so hard dodging the Paparazzi.â Junior replies, before several photographers out of nowhere surround him. He poses for their pictures for a moment, before they scatter away.
âUgh. Like, tell me about it.â Just then, they flood back and swarm Camille as she poses for their flashes. As they disperse again, Shego comes out from the darkness outside wearing a confused look.
âOâŠK? Whatâs with the flash happy photographers?â
âWho is this, Junior?â Camille asks annoyed.
Shego just looks back at her feeling somewhat shocked. âYou donât know? Wait a minute you gotta be kidding me. You donât know who I am?â
Camille leans forward and takes a closer look at her. After a minute, she finally recognizes the face. âOH! Youâre that green lady who hangs out with the blue guy and wears those tacky clothes.â
That sentence is enough to send Shego into a furious rage, as she clenches her fists and ignite them. âWHAT DID YOU SAY YOU LITTLEâ?!â
âHeh, she is tired from the trip here.â Junior interrupts, putting his mouth over Shegoâs.
Camille just rolls her eyes and walks away. âWhatevs.â
Junior breathes a sigh of relief, successfully avoiding any clash between Shego & Camille. But he pays for his actions when Shego delivers a sharp elbow to his gut. âNext time, Iâm dragging her around Beverly Hills by her hair!â
âPlease, Shego.â Junior tells her, holding his gut. âWe need to assist her with this problem, so that my fatherâs movie company will not be destroyed.â
âJust remember, Iâm getting 6 Million out of this, got that?â Shego reminds him.
âYes, of course.â Junior agrees. âI need to talk to Camille for more information. You can go do the mingle at the party.â
âYeâI donât mingle. These snooty Hollywood parties just plainâŠHELLO!!!!!!â Several objects of affection come into Shegoâs view, as she spots the Speedo-clad men who were just dancing with Camille. âMAMAâS READY TO PARTY!!!!â
With a look of lust in her eyes, she storms through the party crowd over towards the men. Junior looks concerned with Shegoâs decision at first, but waves it off. Spotting Camille by the bar, he makes his way over there. âOK, I am here. Now what about my fatherâs studio being attacked?â
âHuh?â Camille replies, losing track of thought for a moment. âOH! Like, some psycho TV Talk show reject called DNAmy is running around with animals, trashing all the Hollywood studios! Luckily, they didnât hit the one that wants to do my life story. I was thinking of having Heather whatâs-her-name play me in the movie, but maybe not, cause of the lips.â
Junior just rolls his eyes as Camilleâs self-serving rant reminds him of why they split. âOK, that is very good.â He interrupts. âBut has this DNAmy attacked my fatherâs studio?â
âUh, no.â She tells him. âShe, like, hasnât been seen in a few days. I think she went underground to her hideout or something.â Suddenly, she switches the subject as she reaches over and playfully runs her fingers down Juniorâs chest. âIâm so glad you came, Junior. Maybe we canâŠpick up where we left off?â
She slowly leans forward and puckers her lips, intending to plant them on Juniorâs. But as she gets a mere inch away, she feels someone sharply pulling her hair back, and her along with it. A moment later, Shego appears in front of her.
âNuh-uh. Sorry Ms. Heir Head, but those lips are my property.â She punctuates that statement by planting a wet one on his lips, almost smothering them as she wraps her arms around him. Camille growls and walks away from the scene, pouting & fuming at the same time. After a minute, Shego finally breaks the kiss, allowing Junior to breath.
âHeh, thanks for the save.â He tells her. âBut you didnât have to make it so believable.â
âWho said it wasnât?â Shego replies. âYour lips are mine. Now lets find her bedroom so we can conduct some business of our own.â
âButâŠthe Speedo MenâŠâ Junior questions.
âYeâgood looking, but severely lacking where it counts.â She answers, grinning seductively at him. No more needs to be said between them, nor is there. Taking off from the bar, the two make their way from the bash and upstairs, to have a party of their own.
The Next AfternoonâŠ
âRON? RON, WHERE ARE YOU???â
Kim scouts the vast halls of Britinaâs mansion looking for her boyfriend. The Global Justice briefing last night ended so late, she went straight to sleep once she got back. But now thereâs an alert: an attack is being waged on another Hollywood Studio, one thatâs filming a Comic Book Superhero Movie; and Ron is needed.
âRON, WE GOT A SITCH HERE!â
The sound of her voice finally jars Ron from his sleep. The sunlight from the window shines down upon him, causing him to avert his eyes until he can adjust his vision. Heâs about to call out to Kim, when heâs instantly hit with what happened last night. All that happened. As his vision clears, he notices heâs still in the same bed as Britina & Bonnie, whoâre both starting to wake up themselves.
âWHERE ARE YOU, RON?â Kim calls out, causing Bonnie & Britina to sit up in shock. Instinctively they cover his mouth to prevent him to spilling his location. Bonnie then rolls out of bed, puts on her lace panties and runs over to the bedroom door. She opens it up slightly, so that her body blocks the entire view of the room.
âYou mind taking it down a notch, K?â She asks.
âSorry to ruin your beauty sleep, B.â Kim replies sarcastically, before noticing where Bonnie is. âUh, why are you in Britinaâs room?â
Bonnieâs heart skips a beat, but she quickly shrugs it off so not to alarm Kim. âWhat? We were just having a Girl-to-Girl sleepover.â
âDressed like that?â Kim asks, referring to the sexy outfit Bonnie is wearing.
âCan I help it if I like to look hot when I sleep?â Bonnie counters. Inside of the room, Britina is helping Ron gather his discarded clothes as he puts them on. She then opens a side door that allows him to sneak back into his room, which he quickly flees into.
âNevermind. Look, I need to find Ron.â Kim tells her. âWeâve got a mission andâŠwait a minuteâŠâ She starts to put two & two together, realizing thereâs a reason Bonnieâs standing in front of the door like that. Charging forward, she budges past Bonnie and swings the door wide openâŠonly to find Britina in the room.
âHey, Kim.â Britina says.
âOKâŠâ Kim replies. ââŠBut if Ronâs not in here, thanâŠâ
âKP!!!â
Kim turns around to see Ron hopping into view outside of the doorway, fully dressed in his mission clothes, albeit sloppily, and trying to put his other shoe on. âI heard Wadeâs report. We gotta get to that lot!â
Kim turns and walks out of the room, feeling somewhat confused. âButâŠI couldâve swornâŠâ
âYou know, just because you have green eyes Kim, doesnât mean you always have to go all Jell.â Bonnie remarks, wearing a smug grin before she shuts the door. Kim folds her arms over her chest still feeling that something went on while she was gone. But she ignores that feeling for the mission.
âCome on, Ron. Letâs go.â
30 Minutes LaterâŠ
At the Budding Star Pictures lot inside of a large studio, a movie is being filmed about the exploits of TV hero The Fearless Ferret. On the set, the Director, who ironically is the same one who offered to do a movie about Kim & Ron some while ago, is addressing the lead actor, whoâs dressed up as the Ferret.
âOK. In this scene, youâre gonna have the final climactic battle against your archenemy, the White Stripe! Heâs gonna make a grand entrance, and then you two make with the punching.â The Director then hurries off the set and sits in his chair, ready to film the scene. âLIGHTSâŠCAMERAâŠand ACTION!!!!!!â
THOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!!!!!!
The entire sidewall to the studio crashes down to the ground, startling everyone in the building. Dust & Debris fly into the air, causing everyone to cough and gasp for air. For a few moments, no one can even see their hands in front of them. Finally, the dust settles and it is revealed just exactly what was the cause of the collapsing wallâŠa Giant Man-Skunk.
âWHOA! Did they make some costume changes to White Stripe?â The Ferret Actor asks. He gets his answer when a womanâs voice is heard.
âMEANIES!!!â
DNAmy comes out from behind the Skunk, and frowns at the cast, including the Director. âYou couldnât just let my creations play the monsters in your movie. YouâŠyou had to go withâŠstupid dumb actors! WellâŠnow youâre gonna pay for it!â
She orders her Man-Skunk to turn around, which he does. He then lifts his tail into the air, which causes a mass riot as dozens of cast members, screen-workers and the like scramble for their lives (and their noses), trying to find the nearest exitâŠor at least a clothespin. Help comes to them though, as the Roth SL Coupe 2.0 crashes through a window and lands between the panicked movie workers and DNAmy. The doors to the Coupe fly open and out step Kim & Ron, ready for action.
âSorry Amy, but youâre about to end up on the Cutting Room floor.â Kim says.
âOooh, Kim Possible!â DNAmy fumes. âAlways in my business. Well, youâre about to get the business end!â The Man-Skunk points his rear end towards the two heroes, taking aim at them.
âWAAAAAAHHHHHH!!! SKUNK BUTT! SCATTER!!!!â The two scramble and take cover behind a nearby prop wall. The Skunk lets off, spraying itâs stink onto the wall, but thankfully missing Kim & Ron. âOK, I didnât sign up for this!â Ron says. âMaybe evil Monkey Kung-Fu Men and Killer Swamp Monsters, but not Man-Skunk things!â
âWe have to find a way to disable that Skunk!â Kim says, right before finding her solution. She grabs a long rope behind Ron thatâs attached to a rafter up near the ceiling. âI got an idea, but I need youâŠâ
ââŠTo be the distraction.â Ron finishes. âYou know, being the distraction can get very dangerous at times.â
She counters by giving him a quick kiss on his lips. âAnd thatâs why youâre my Dangerous Man.â With that, she runs to the far end of the studio, hoping to get a good running start.
âMan, I always fall for that.â He says, part of him happy that he did. He then turns his attention back to DNAmy and her Skunk enforcer, coming out of hiding.
âHEY, YOU! YEAH, YOU! YOUR MOTHER WAS AN ALLEYCAT!!!!â That gets their attention, and sends Ron off running for dear life. As the Man-Skunk takes aim, he notices a figure high in the air, swinging down towards him. Itâs Kim, and heâs too late to react. She swings right into him, nailing both feet into his chest and sending him flying across the studio, crashing into another set and knocking him out of the fight. She hops off of the rope and faces down DNAmy, who doesnât look like sheâs done just yet.
âYou always have to hurt my babies!â She scolds. âBut Iâve brought more playmates.â
Snapping her fingers, she signals for several large Man-Poodles to invade the studio. They all jump in and surround Kim, which doesnât go unnoticed by Ron.
âKP, I GOT YOUR BACK!!!!!â He charges forward, ready to defend his girlfriend with all of his strength. But a few steps into his rescue, he notices that heâs now surrounded by more of DNAmyâs creaturesâŠLarge Chipmunk Bodyguards. Specifically, the same oneâs that attacked him when Kim broke her leg.
âUh, you guys arenât here to sing Christmas Songs, are you?â Ron gets his answer when the Chipmunks attack. âOW! OW! AH, HEY! NO! NOT IN THE FACE!!!!â
Kim is having her own trouble, as the Man-Poodles are proving more formidable than the last time she faced them. She attacks one with a jump kick, leaps off of him, and hits a mid-air spin kick on another one. But as soon as she lands, several of them rush her and pin her to the ground. A few more approach her, cracking their knuckles, ready to rough her up at DNAmyâs command. Meanwhile, Ronâs barely able to hold his own against the Mutant Chipmunks, and he notices his girlfriend is down.
âKP, NOO!!!!!â
Desperate, he breaks away from his fight and dashes toward Kim, thinking he can only save her. Fortunately, backup arrives in the form of Global Justice agents. They flood into the studio, most of them on Jetpacks, and easily neutralize the threat. Nearly all of the Mutant creatures are captured and detained in nets. All except for the Man-Skunk, who escapes amid the chaos along with DNAmy. Several GJ Agents help Kim to her feet just as Ron gets there.
âKim! Are you OK?â
âIâm fine, Ron.â She says, cracking her neck to get the stiffness out. âThose Poodles are a lot tougher than last time.â
Ron breathes a sigh of relief, thankful that Kimâs OK. âAw, man. I shouldâve been there. Stupid Chipmunks surrounded me andâŠâ
âRon, donât beat yourself up.â Kim tells him. âI had trouble with DNAmyâs creatures, too. In fact, I might need the battle suit for this.â
âBut what if the battle suit doesnât work? What ifâŠâ Kim puts her hand over Ronâs mouth, having heard enough of the negativity.
âRon, Iâll be fine. Iâll handle those creatures next time.â She removes her hand from his mouth and gives him a warm smile. âBesides, remember the name? I can do anything.â
Ron nods his head in agreement, and Kim turns and walks over to a head GJ Agent to inform him what went down. Deep down though, heâs still worried about Kimâs welfare, and heâs not about to stand around and do nothing about it. Pulling out his special Ronunicator, he dials up a connection to Wade, who appears on the screen within seconds.
âWade, I need you to set up an appointment for me.â
Much Later that NightâŠ
âThis is the place.â
Ron stands outside of a Country Club Banana, located in the heart of Beverly Hills. Throughout the day he had Wade search for a special Clothing Designer; his intention, finding someone that could make a replica of Kimâs special battle suit. Wade already has the technology to imbed into the clothing, though it is experimental. Ron looks at a sheet of paper heâs holding in his hand, and confirms the address. Then taking a deep breath, he proceeds to walk towards the front doorâŠat least until he hears a familiar voice.
âWHAT ARE YOU DOING, BOY???â
Ronâs heart nearly jumps out of his chest, and he has to regain his composure from the shock. But it gives him time to recognize the voice. âMonique?â
Sure enough, Kimâs best friend comes out of the shadows to face Ron. âWhy are you out here in the middle of the night?â
âWait, what are you doing here?â Ron asks.
âI was out for a midnight stroll on the Hollywood Walk of Fame.â She replies sarcastically. âIâm the one asking the questions!â
âJust go home, Monique.â Ron tells her, sounding serious. âThis is something I need to do alone.â
âOh, I ainât going anywhere.â She counters, folding her arms over her chest. âSo you better start spilling about this Sitch.â
Ron lets out a low groan, knowing that Monique means every word, and decides to fess up. âLook, Iâm here to meet someone that can make me a special outfit for missions.â
Monique looks at Ron in shock. âYou went to some unknown designer for new mission threads and didnât ask me? I designed Kimâs Clothes!!!â
âNot that kind of outfit!â Ron counters. âI need a battle suit so I can help Kim went she needs it! TodayâŠshe couldâve gotten hurt. And all I could do was get knocked around by some Mutant Chipmunks. Well thatâs not gonna happen again!â
âRon, WaitâŠâ
He doesnât listen. Instead he storms forward and barges through the open doors and into the darkened Country Club Banana, with Monique right behind him. After taking a few steps, the two stop in the middle of the room and look around in the darkness. Wade informed Ron that the contact would meet him here at this time, but neither sees anyone. After a moment passes though, they hear a voiceâŠa surprisingly familiar one.
âWell, look who finally showed up.â Ron & Monique turn towards a dimly lit corner in the room to see the last person they ever expectedâŠHoodie of the Fashionistas. âAnd heâs sporting Kimâs accessory.â
The Hollywood Chapters 4
Hoodie leans in the corner with her arms folded over her chest. Sheâs wearing her trademark purple Hoodie (of course), along with a part of matching athletic short shorts, thigh-high gym socks and silver sneakers. The hood covers her eyes, but her trademark sly yet cocky smirk can be seen clearly. Her presence shocks the two Team Possible membersâŠwell, Monique more than Ron.
âA FASHIONISTA???â
Monique grabs hold of Ronâs collar and begins shaking him by it back & forth in anger. âYou went over me for a Fashionista?!â
âI didnât know it was gonna be a Fashionista!â Ron replies, defending himself. Monique finally lets go of him as he grabs his Ronunicator and contacts Wade. âWade, need an explanation.â
âShe was the only designer I could find close enough to do the job.â Wade answers, his face appearing on the screen. âDonât worry though, none of the other Fashionistas are in the area. Or the city for that matter.â
âWhatevs! I broke away from those hacks.â Hoodie tells them. âThey expected me to handle Evening wear? I only do the sporty look.â
âBut howâd you get out of jail.â Monique asks.
âGood behavior.â Hoodie responds. âAnd I figure since the sidekick needed an upgrade to his wardrobe, itâs my chance to break into the Solo spot.â
âYeah, well forget it.â Monique tells her. âRon doesnât need the help of a criminal to get what he needs. Ainât that right, Ron?â She doesnât hear an answer, and when she turns to him, she finds that heâs actually thinking it over. âRON!!!â
âI know, I know, sheâs a Villain!â He says, before turning to Hoodie. âButâŠyou can make a Funky Fresh Off the Hook battle suit for me, right?â
âFor shiz-nit!â Hoodie answers. âAt a price.â
âI knew it!â Monique interrupts.
âNot a problem.â Ron replies. âStill got some left over Naco Royalties!â
He pulls out a Platinum Credit Card, which only causes Hoodie to smirk. âCash is good, but not what I meant.â Slowly, her smirk turns into a seductive grin, and it sends a chill down Ronâs spine. âYou see, while I was on LDâŠâ
âLD?â Ron asks.
âLockdown.â Monique translates.
âAnyway,â Hoodie continues, âWhile I was on LD, I heard that Extreme Junkie Adrena Lynn bragging about how she had the best lay. She told me Shego went for a fun ride, too. And both mentioned you by name.â She strolls slowly Ron, then playfully running her finger down his chest. âSo youâll get your special new suitâŠjust as long as you give me the workout of my life.â
Ron gulps nervously. âPlease tell me you mean at a Gym or something.â
âOh, I think we can work our Aerobics on right here.â Hoodie changes the direction of her finger, sliding it down Ronâs body, closer & closer to his waist and what lies below it. That is, until Monique reaches out and grabs her wrist.
âUh-Uh!â Monique says, as Hoodie snatches her arm away. âMy boy Ron is not paying ANY price, especially what youâre asking!â
Hoodie just scoffs. âAnd whoâs he gonna get for the Top Design, Little Miss Retail?â she asks, referring to Monique.
âOh, thatâs funny.â Monique responds sarcastically. âWell FYI, Little Miss Retail MADE Kim Possibleâs mission outfit.â
âYeah, from the Fashionistas design.â Hoodie scoffs.
âWas it the Fashionistas design to include the Gloves?â Monique asks smugly.
Hoodie is about to reply when she stops herself. âYou added the gloves?â
âThought they would set off the outfit.â Monique smirks. And right before Ronâs eyes, the conversation takes a turn. He watches as the argument turns into an agreement, then into a trade of ideas, and then into a brainstorming session about Ronâs new suit. Monique & Hoodie are now discussing the features & design, and after a few more trade of ideas, the battle suit turns into a Battle Hoodie.
âWe can style it like his shirts.â Monique says, drawing blueprints down on an old receipt. âKeep it loose-fitting, since he runs a lot.â
âHot.â Hoodie responds. âAnd Black & Blue for the color. He definitely needs a darker tone.â The confusion almost overwhelms Ron as he looks on. Soon though, it becomes very clear to him âWeâre gonna need to get his measurements to do this right.â
Monique nods her head in agreement, then turns to Ron, wearing a seductive look. âOh, I think that wonât be a problem.â
Ronâs seen that look too many times before, especially from Monique. Using his experience from past situations like this, he decides to run for dear life. Unfortunately, Ron doesnât know about Hoodieâs agility, which is on par with Kimâs. A few flips and Hoodie has the exit blocked as she lands right in front of him.
âSomeoneâs a little shy, isnât he?â She says, slowly backing him up.
Ron backs himself into the counter, and into Moniqueâs reach. âHeâs always like that, until you get him started.â She proceeds to do just that, pulling him close and wrapping her lips around his. The thing Ron has found out during his time with Monique is that sheâs a better kisser than Bonnie, and almost on par with Kim. This makes it harder for him to resist the urge, especially when she presses herself against him. The two stumble backwards and end up in the Country Club Banana window display, knocking over several mannequins before they hit the glass window. A moment later, Monique breaks the kiss.
âOK, wait!â Ron says. âDonât you need rulers and measuringâŠstuff, to check out my size?â
âRon, donât argue with the designers.â Monique replies with a smirk. Just then, Ron notices Moniqueâs hands going to work unbuckling his pants. Before he can react to it though, Hoodie draws his attention by unzipping her hooded sweatshirt and showing Ron her perfectly round, firm breasts.
âDonât worry, you can look AND touch.â She tells him, leaning in closer. Around this moment Ronâs logic nearly shuts down completely and he becomes driven by desire. Grabbing one of her breasts and groping them, she meets Hoodie halfway and presses his lips to hers. They lean back against the window, as Ron lets his hands wander over her body. He delves his left hand into Hoodieâs sweatpants and begins to feel around her firm backside. Itâs at that moment that he feels Moniqueâs mouth going to work. He glances down to see her pulling down on her blouse as she inhales his Cock deeper into her mouth. Soon, Hoodie breaks up the kiss and decides to join in. She slowly drops down lower and takes hold of Ronâs manhood just as Monique releases it from her mouth. The two then work either side with their tongues, while Monique hands tend to his balls. After a few minutes they then switch up, with Hoodie swallowing the head and rolling her tongue around it, while Monique keeps licking the shaft. The double tongue action is almost more than Ron can handle.
âOhâŠaw, manâŠIâm gonna cum soonâŠâ He utters, just loud enough for them to hear as they stop their progress.
âCanât have you going out to early.â Hoodie tells him, standing back up. She then grabs her sweatpants and pulls them down, all the way to her ankles, along with her sports thong. Standing bent over, she waits to be penetrated by Ronâs lumber. âShow me what you got.â
Ron knows itâs too late to back away now, as he lets his pants drop to his knees and grabs hold of his Rod. Bringing the head to her moist lips, he slowly pushes through them and deep inside, until every inch of him is within her. She lets out an almost joyous moan, as she places her hand against the window glass.
âSo deep.â She says. âDonât stop now, baby. I want it hard!â
âYou heard the lady, Ron.â Monique adds, inserting herself back in the action. As Ron starts pumping himself in & out of Hoodieâs snatch, Monique makes herself more comfortable by dropping her tight jeans and stepping out of them. She then tends to Ronâs lips again, kissing them as he plows deep into Hoodie, who now has both hands on the window. Ron holds on to her hips and continues to pound her from behind, so hard that it forces Hoodie into the window more. The side of her face is pressed against the glass, along with her luscious melons, shown for anyone to see. Luckily for the three, the streets of Beverly Hills are barren at this hour, and thereâs not a soul in sight. At that moment, Monique breaks the kiss and shifts her focus.
âYou mind if I join in, girl?â She asks, moving towards the window and in front of Hoodie.
âMmmm, not at all.â Hoodie responds, wearing a seductive grin. She then presses forward again, squashing her breasts against Moniqueâs. Hoodieâs right hand moves lower and into Moniqueâs panties as she begins to rub her snatch, while still feeling Ron penetrating the deepest part of her. Mixed sensations are flowing through Monique at this moment. She can feel the coolness of the glass window as she braces herself on it from behind, and Hoodieâs warm front pressed against hers. All of it adds up to a tremendous amount of pleasure for all three, especially Ron & Hoodie, whoâre close to their respective limits.
âMan, feels likeâŠIâm gonna come.â He says.
âOhâŠGod, me too!â Hoodie replies. Her knees begin to buckle and her hand slips down the window as Ron gives her one final stroke. He then pulls out in the nick of time, letting loose his load all over well-toned ass, as she trembles from her orgasm. Itâs so overwhelming that her knees give way, causing her to collapse. Luckily, Monique catches her before she hits the ground. The same cannot be said for Ron, as he falls to his knees and hits the floor in exhaustion. He lies there wants this to be a moment of rest for him, unfortunately, as always, itâs not.
âI hope that ainât all you got, stud.â Monique says, climbing onto Ron.
âYou know, being fitted for an outfit is exhausting work.â Ron quips.
âSpeaking of work, think youâre up for another round?â She asks.
âDo I have a choice?â He asks.
Monique grins at Ron, then leans in and presses her lips to his to jumpstart his engines. It works, as Monique feels Ronâs manhood stiffening up for another go around. Ronâs feeling up and ready himself, as he wraps his arms around Monique and sits up with her, keeping their bodies close and the kiss intact. He can feel her erect nipples pressed against his chest, and it only arouses him more, as it does her. After a minute, Ron finally breaks the kiss.
âOK, not fair.â Ron tells her. âThatâs the same thing Kim does when she wants me to fuck her.â
âWho do you think taught it to me?â Monique replies with a smirk. Reaching down between them, she grabs hold of his thick shaft and guides it towards her wet snatch. She brings it to her lips, and then lowers herself down onto it, taking in all of Ronâs manhood. Ron wraps his arm around her as Monique braces herself, and starts to ride Ronâs Cock for all itâs worth.
âOh yeah, thatâs it, Baby!â She moans. âFuck me, Ron.â
He thrusts himself deep inside of her pussy over & over, as Monique rocks her hips in unison. It doesnât take long for either of them to become lost in the moment. Monique was always energetic, almost rivaling Kim. She puts one hand on the back of Ronâs neck and uses the other one to fondle her breasts. Her legs almost completely wrap around Ron as he continues pounding her pussy, but soon fatigue catches up with him and he finds himself back on his back, lying down. Monique doesnât slow down a second though, and as Ron grabs hold of her hips, she begins to ride him harder, rocking her hips more and slamming herself down onto his pipe.
âOH GOD!!!â She screams. âIâm almost there, keep fucking me, Ron!â
Monique can feel her limit approaching, and wants to ride it all the way out. Putting both of her hands on Ronâs chest, she starts to ride at a frantic pace, biting her lower lip as sweat flies off of her body. Soon, the fast pace of her hip movements bring her right there.
âRON, IâM GONNA CUM!!!â
âME TOO, MONIQUE!!!â
Monique is the first to have her orgasm, and the intensity causes her to nearly lose her balance. She then pulls herself off of Ron, just as his orgasm hits. He shoots off a load that hits Moniqueâs stomach & breasts, and thatâs when he feels a set of lips wrapping around the head of his Cock. Raising his head, Ron finds that the lips belong to Hoodie, and sheâs swallowing every drop of cum Ron lets loose, making sure not to spill anything. Her lips & tongue work makes him cum even harder, and she takes it all down the throat. Once heâs finally done, Hoodie removes her lips from his Cock and grins back at him.
âMmmm, thanks for the protein drink, stud.â She says.
âHehâŠmy pleasure.â Ron grins. But slowly, the grin fades from his face and is replaced with a look of remorse, one that doesnât go unnoticed by Monique.
âOK, you mind telling me why you look bummed out after Hot Sex?â She asks.
âCauseâŠI think I crossed the line this time.â Ron answers. âI cheated on KimâŠwith a villain. I mean Iâm probably going to get nada out of this.â
âI told you, Iâm on the straight & narrow.â Hoodie tells them.
âSheâs telling the truth, Ronald.â
Hearing that familiar voice, Ron reaches over to grab his Ronunicator. The face he sees on the screen confirms his guess on who the voice belongs toâŠDr. Director. âAnd youâve been very helpful to Global Justice.â
âI have?â Ron asks, tired & confused.
âIndeed.â She answers. âYou see, the former Fashionista Hoodie was released from prison as part of the âTurning Leafâ program we just started. It gives perennial lawbreakers & super villains the opportunity to turn to the right side of the law.â
âYou mean, Hoodieâs working for Global Justice?â Monique asks.
âExactly.â Director replies. âAnd when word of Ronâs need for a super suit in the likeness of Kimâs got to us, we sent the best woman for the job.â
âYou mean, she wouldâve made the suit for me anywayâŠand I couldâve avoided the guilt sex?â Ron asks.
âActually, her having intercourse with you proved to us her commitment for being on the side of Justice.â She tells him. âSo no worries, Ronald. You will get that suit that you requested.â Dr. Director signs off and ends the communication. But as Ron puts his Ronunicator back down, Hoodie starts crawling on top of him.
âBut I still need to get down the right âmeasurementsâ.â She says, not bothering to hide the seduction.
âUh, Monique?â Ron looks over to her for help, hoping that she will intervene and save him. But as Monique stands up and pulls up her panties, it doesnât look good for him.
âSorry Ron, gotta work more on the blueprint.â Monique tells him. âBut you can help Hoodie get the âmeasurementsâ right.â
âMONIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIQUE!!!!!!â
Still Later That NightâŠ
Itâs now past 2am, and the parties in Beverly Hills are just starting to wind down. Unfortunately, one party girl is not in the mood to call it a night. Camille Leon rides in the backseat of her jet-black Limo, staring out of her window in a state of extreme boredom. She doesnât want to go home, especially since she had an incident earlier with Shego that involved Hair Dye & a push-up bra, and almost resulted in Camille having her hair set on fire.
âUgh! There is nothing to do in this town!â She scoffs. âLike, why didnât I just fly to Hawaii to hang with those yummy male dancers? I couldâŠâ She cuts herself off when she notices the scene outside of her car window: Ron & Monique sneaking out of the Country Club Banana through a side exit in the alley. âThatâs Kim Boy-Toy, which means Miss Teen Crime-Fighter must be in town.â
Slowly, a sinister grin grows onto her face. âI think I know a way I could have some serious fun tonight.â
Meanwhile, Ron & Monique are making their way onto the main street. Their deal with Hoodie is complete (after several âmeasurementsâ for size), and sheâs now off to complete the Battle Hoodie. Right now Ron would love nothing more than to get into bed and get some rest. But that doesnât seem to be in his future, as an incoming alert sounds on his Ronunicator. He pulls it out to check it, and hears Kimâs voice.
âRon, I need backup. I made a discovery on this mission weâre but I need your help. Come to the Posh Nightclub on Rodeo Drive, Iâll be in the back.â
The communication ends right there, and confounds both Ron & Monique. âThat Club is just a block away.â Monique says. âBut I thought Kim was in Hollywood doing the spy thing.â
âThe spy thing mightâve led her here.â Ron replies. âCome on.â Monique takes the lead as the two run from Country Club Banana across the street to the front entrance of the extravagant Posh Nightclub. Thereâs a long line of partiers that rounds the corner, all of them waiting to get in for a chance to rub shoulders with the whoâs who of Tinseltown. But Ron bypasses all of them and heads towards the door. He gives a nod to the Bouncer by the door, who instantly recognizes Ron. Two years back Kim & Ron saved him from a collapsing building in an earthquake, and that grants Ron access to the club as the Bouncer opens the door for him. Monique, however, is stopped at the door and turned away, until Ron steps in.
âYo, main man, the Hottieâs with me.â Ron tells the Bouncer, putting his arm around Monique. âItâs all good, itâs all good.â
âWord.â The Bouncer replies, letting Monique through. The two continue through the front door, with Monique wearing a look of shock.
âDid you just get us into one of the Hottest Nightclubs in L.A.?â She asks in disbelief.
âYep.â Ron replies smugly. âYou just gotta know how to speak the lingo, Monique. And the Ron Man can speak the lingo.â
âUh-huh. You & Kim saved that Bouncerâs life before, didnât ya?â Monique asks.
âWhaâŠoh, well thatâs not the point.â Ron counters. âThe point is weâre in with Hollywood stars! BOOYAH!!! I am SO in my element!â
As the two enter the main room of the Club though, Ron realizes that may not be true. The room is packed with celebrities and the rich, all of whom make Ronâs yearly salary at Smarty-Mart every 2 minutes. âI am SO not in my element!â
âYou donât need to be, thereâs Kim!â Monique says, spotting her near the back of the club. Ron & Monique make their way through the crowd, trying to reach Kim. Along the way though, they end up getting separated and head off in completely different directions. After a minute, Ron reaches the rear of the Club first, and finds his girlfriend waiting for him.
âRon, you made it.â She says.
âIâm here, KP.â Ron replies. âWhatâs the Sitch?â
Instead of answering, Kim greets Ron with a hug and a small kiss on his lips. One that seems strange to Ron. She then takes his hand and leads him through a doorway into the private VIP Room of the club. The room is empty, and dimly lit.
âUh, Kim? Is everything alright?â Ron asks.
âOh itâs fine, baby.â Kim answers seductively. âI just needed to see you nowâŠall of you, if you get what I mean.â
âSo, this is like a booty-call?â
âOh yes.â Kim responds, before giving Ron another peck on the lips. âAnd this booty is all yours.â
âHeh, thatâŠthat sounds good.â Ron says, smiling over that idea. âThereâs just a small problem, though.â
Suddenly, Ron kicks Kimâs legs out from under her and flips her onto a nearby black leather couch. He lands on top of her and pins her down by her wrists.
âYouâre Not Kim Possible!â
âUgh! What?â She says. âWhat are you doing, boyfriend? Of course Iâm Kim Possible.â
âNo youâre not.â
Both Ron and âKimâ look over to the doorway to see another Kim standing there holding a black bag, this one with Monique. âI am.â
Her ruse failed, âKimâ begins to morph herself out of her current form and into her true identityâŠCamille Leon. âBut, how did you know? I played the good girl and everything.â
âBecause my lady doesnât kiss me like you did.â Ron says, getting off of Camille as Kim approaches him.
âThis is how I kiss my man.â Kim says, before giving a demonstration. She wraps her lips and arms around Ron, making the make-out passionate, as it always is between the two. Ron puts his hands around her waist as they work their tongues back & forth from each otherâs mouths. After a minute, they finally break away; leaving a thin line of saliva that connects their mouths, and shocks Camille.
âUck! How trampish!â Camille says.
âYouâre one to talk.â Kim replies.
âSo, wait?â Ron interrupts. âWas the distress call real orâŠâ
âFake, made by Camille.â Kim says. âWade caught her hacking into the Kimmunicator signal to contact you. Thatâs when I decided to tail her and see what she was up to. Ron, why donât you & Monique go party in the club, while I handle Ms. Heiress.â
Ron nods his head in agreement, knowing that his girlfriend more than has this situation under control, and walks back out of the room with Monique in tow. As soon as the door closes though, Camille leaps from the couch at Kim, intending to take her down. Rookie mistake. In one motion, Kim sidesteps the attack, grabs Camilleâs left hand, pulls out a pair of handcuffs, leads Camille into a nearby Stripper Poll and cuffs both of her hands together around said poll, leaving her helpless.
âWhat theâŠwhat are you doing?â Camille asks.
âRelax, Iâm just gonna ask you a few questions.â Kim answers.
âWhat, like some interrogation?â Camille says. âWell tough luck, redhead. Cause my lips are sealed.â
At that moment, Kim walks over to the black bag she dropped at the door, reaches down and searches through it. After a moment, she pulls out the item she was looking forâŠa 10-inch Strap-On Dildo
The Hollywood Chapters 5
Kim slowly attaches the Strap-on to herself, wearing a smug grin thatâs hard to hide, even for her. Itâs been silent in the room for a full minute, and Camille starts to get nervous.
âWhatâŠwhat are you doing back there?â She asks.
âJust getting the right tools ready.â Kim answers, before slowly making her way towards Camille.
âY-You, you mean like torture?â Camille says, becoming more nervous. âYou canât do that, youâre the good guy.â
âYou really need to check the name, Camille.â Kim tells her. âYou know, I took a look at your profile, and it says youâre into a lot of things. Lounging at the Beach, Going ShoppingâŠAnal Sex…â
Those last two words make Camille shiver & widen her eyes in terror. âUhâŠlike, what are you talking about?â
âNo use, Camille.â Kim tells her. âEverybodyâs seen the tape with you & the O Boyz.â
âDamn!â Camille utters under her breath. She attempts to break free by scraping the chain of her cuffs against the Stripper Poll, but itâs no use. But she continues to try, that is until she feels her tight white jeans being pulled down to her knees, exposing her pink thong. It continues as Kim pulls down the thong, leaving Camilleâs bare ass exposedâŠand helpless.
âUh, youâreâŠnot really gonna do thisâŠare you?â She asks.
âHmm, letâs see. Youâre a known criminal whoâs withholding information, and you tried to seduce my boyfriend while disguised as me.â Kim states. âOh, Iâm very sure.â
And with that, Kim proceeds with starting the âInterrogation.â She brings the head of the dildo up to Camilleâs ass cheeks, stopping for a moment when she reaches her asshole, then pushing one inch in.
âAAGHH!!â Camille yells, startled by the size of it. That doesnât stop Kim though, as she pumps forward, putting two more inches into Camille.
âYou know, I still got a lot more to go.â She says, looking to see if Camille will crack. Surprisingly, the heiressâ lips remain shut, which puts a smirk on Kimâs face. She pushes the dildo into further her ass; five inches, six, seven, eight, nineâŠuntil the dildo Strap-On disappears. Camilleâs legs begin to wobble & weaken. This is the most sheâs ever had in her ass and while it was painful at first, itâs now an experience in pleasure. She clenches the stripper pole, trying desperately to hold her balance.
âWhoa, impressive.â Kim says about Camille taking all of the Strap-on. âBut letâs see how long you can last.â
Kim pulls out of Camille halfway, before pumping her asshole with the Strap-on. Camille lets out a grunt with each thrust Kim gives her, and shockingly becomes wetter by the second. As Kim continues to punish her backside, Camille tries frantically to free herself again, only this time so she can finger her soaking pussy. After a minute, Kim notices just how wet sheâs become.
âYouâre starting to enjoy this.â She says, stopping her pumping motion. âIâll keep going gently if I get the answers I want. Now, mind telling me what youâre doing out of prison?â
âUgh, uhâŠI got out on good behavior?â That wasnât the answer Kim was looking for, and she lets Camille know by forcibly shoving the Strap-on deeper. âOH, GOD! OK, I escaped! I morphed into one of the guards and broke out!â
âThat makes sense.â Kim says, slowing down her strokes. âBut what are you doing in Hollywood?â
Camille just scoffs. âLike, I AM Hollywood. This town would fall to pieces if I wasnât in it.â Kim takes a moment to think, and determines that itâs not the whole truth. She shoves the Strap-on back deep into Camilleâs ass, startling her. âAGH! Look, I told you the truth!â
âNot the whole truth.â Kim replies, quickening her thrusts. Camille can now feel every inch of the Strap-on probing her faster & faster, and sheâs unable to do anything to stop it, but cave in.
âOK! I had a deal with some Movie Company to make a movie about my life!â Camille confesses. âAnd then, that tubby mess DNAmy started wrecking studios! She almost attacked mine!â
âSounds about right. And donât worry, Iâll handle DNAmy.â Kim says, before switching the subject. âNowâŠabout you & RonâŠâ
Camille starts smiling nervously. âUh, wellâŠyou see, I didnâtâŠAAAGGHHHH!!!!â
Kim slams the Strap-on into Camille ass and begins pounding it mercilessly. âYou see, Iâm getting tired of my arch foes ending up having their way with him, and it ends now. So this is a clear message, telling you that RONâSâŠâ
She gives Camille a deep thrust.
ââŠOFFâŠâ
Then another one.
ââŠLIMITS!!!â
And a final thrust the finishes it.
âAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!!!!â
Itâs the largest & longest orgasm that Camille has ever experienced, and it almost makes her go completely limp. Her eyes nearly roll into the back of her head, and as Kim pulls out of her, she falls to her knees almost lifelessly. Her snatch is still soaking as Camille is left helpless; the sight brings a smile to Kimâs face, as she turns away.
âNow I know how Shego felt when she did that to me.â She says, referring to the last time she faced Shego. Taking off the Strap-on, she stuffs it back into the black bag and leaves the room, back into the main club area to look for Ron & Monique. It takes a few minutes, but Camille is able to snap out of her orgasm-induced daze. She tries to morph into someone smaller so she can escape the cuffs, but finds it hard to concentrate, or even summon the strength.
âDammit, Iâm too weak!â She says, frustrated. âThis is so not fair, I so do not deserve this. Thereâs no way this moment can get any worse.â
As those words leave her lips, she hears the door opening again, followed by a familiar voice.
âI knew weâd find the little slut here.â
Turning herself around on the pole, Camille looks to see that last person she ever wanted to see in a situation like thisâŠShego, whoâs accompanied by Junior carrying a large brown leather bag.
âWhat theâŠwhat are you doing here?â Camille demands.
âShego wished to shake down nightclubs for their earnings.â Junior tells her.
âGotta stay in practice.â Shego adds, clenching her fingers and stretching them out before looking over at Camille. âDid I just miss some Hollywood Orgy or something?â
âNO! I wasâŠuhâŠnothing!â Camille says, not wanting Shego to know about the humiliating ordeal. Unfortunately for her, Shego begins to catch on.
âOh just leave her.â Junior says. âShe was probably with that Nicky Nick again. They like to do the weird stuff like this.â
âNoâŠno, I think itâs something more.â Shego says with a grin as she walks over to Camille. She squats down and gently lifts up Camilleâs head, meeting her eye-to-eye. âSo how about it Blondie, wanna come clean?â
Camille turns her head away from Shego, snuffing her. But that only puts a sinister smirk on her face. âOkay. You wanna keep your lips shut for the first time, fine by me.â Shego says, walking over to the bag Junior was carrying. She unzips it and digs through the contents before pulling out her item of choiceâŠa 12-inch Strap-on. âI got ways of making you talk.â
A wave of dĂ©jĂ vu washes over Camille as she peers her head over to ShegoâŠand sees the lethal weapon in her hand. Her ass begins to pulsate in pain just from the thought of her using it, but strangely, a small part of her wants it to be used. Shego attaches the Strap-on to herself, as Junior looks on in shock.
âYouâŠyou carry a Strap-on with you?â He asks.
âItâs intended for a certain someone else.â Shego confesses as she slowly walks over to the still helpless Camille. âButâŠI think I can give it a test run here. But first, I think it needs some lubrication.â
With those words, Shego grabs the back of Camilleâs hair and shoves the dildo into her mouth. With forceful thrusts she moves it in & out of her mouth, as Camille struggles to break free. Inadvertently though, she does the job well, and a moment later, Shego pulls out to reveal a soaked dildo. As Camille coughs and gasps for breath, Shego slowly moves behind her, eyeing Camilleâs still bare backside.
âLooks like someoneâs already done a number on you.â She says. âHope you donât mind if I take the backdoor entrance as well!â
On that last word, Shego, without warning, puts the dildo to Camilleâs asshole before slamming it deep forcefully, almost causing Camilleâs eyes to pop out of her head. Her breath is knocked out of her and she barely has time to recover as Shego starts to pound her backside mercilessly. She grabs hold of Camilleâs hips and jackhammers her ass, slamming into it with reckless abandon on each thrust.
âAre your lips a little looser now?â Shego says with a grin, enjoying it. âWanna tell me who did this to you?â
âGAH!!!â Camille responds, almost unable to put together a complete sentence. Her grip on the pole is starting to weaken, as are her knees and her will to hold out. It doesnât go unnoticed by Shego, who only begins to pound her harder in order to get the answer she wants.
âI can do this all day!â Shego tells her with a sadistic grin. âTALK! Who did this to you?â
As Camille feels an even bigger orgasm coming on, her will finally breaks.
âItâŠIT WASâŠKIMâŠPOSSIBLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLEEEEEEEE!!!!!!!!!â
At that moment, everything gives out for Camille. Her body goes limp, and as Shego pulls out of her, she drops to the floor, barely able to lift a muscle. Shego rips the Strap-on off of her in a blind rage, one thatâs growing by the second.
âWHAT??? That Redhead is in this town!?â She growls. âAndâŠshe stole my thing? Oh, then Iâm gonna have a real fun time tonight!â
Igniting her hands with her concentrated Kinetic Energy, she storms towards the door intending to start a womanhunt for the Crime fighter to have that talk. At least until Senior Junior jumps up and stands in her way.
âWait, you cannot leave to do that!â He tells her.
âOut of my WAY, Rich Boy!â Shego barks. âIâm gonna make Miss Cheerleader pay for stealing my thing!â
âYour thing?â Junior asks, confused.
âMy thing!â She replies. âWhere I do the torture, with the Strap-on, and, itâs just thatâŠBACK OFF, BEEFCAKE!!!!â
âWAIT! My fatherâs Studio is still in peril!â Junior pleads. âI am still in need of your assistance! You cannot just leave me!â He falls to his knees, begging for her not to run off in his hour of need. Itâs a pathetic sight to her, and a familiar one as she remembers Drakken being like that so many times before. And itâs enough to change her mind.
âAlright, ALRIGHT! Iâll stay!â She says, as Junior stands back up. âBut once your Daddyâs studio is safeâŠIâm going Cheerleader hunting.â
Even Later That NightâŠ
The time now is 4am on the dot, and the Parties that have littered around Beverly Hills have just come to an end. The night air that was once full of loud music and celebrity chatter is almost eerily silent. Sunrise is just a little over an hour away, and Ron is just now lying down in bed in the guest bedroom, with Rufus resting on his shoulder. Wearing only his black mission shirt, gray socks and a pair of blue & white Boxers (gift from Kim), Ron exhaustedly flips through the gigantic Flat-screen TV in front of him, until he finds something of big interest to him on.
âAw, Score!â He says as his eyes light up. âA Captain Constellation Marathon!â Rufusâs eyes light up as well, and the two prepare for some vintage action-adventure untilâŠ
âRON!!!â Kim yells from the bathroom, causing him to change the channel. Itâs clear she isnât over Ron & her Dad practically brainwashing her into loving the show.
âAw man! The Rockets were go, too.â Ron sulks, as does Rufus.
âArenât you supposed to be going to bed?â Kim asks, still in the bathroom.
âWell, itâs not my fault that Britinaâs Guest TV has over 2,178 Channels.â Ron tells her. âI mean Iâm still in the 500âs here. A TV like this can give a guy insomnia.â
At that moment, the light in the bathroom is turned off and Kim steps into the doorway, wearing a white sheer top, thigh-high stockingsâŠand nothing else but a seductive smirk. âThen I got just the thing thatâll cure it. Rufus?â
Immediately the Naked Mole Rat scampers away from Ron & out of the room, giving Kim & Ron their privacy. Kim slowly strolls over to the bed as Ronâs eyes follow her every move. Reaching the bed, she climbs into it and crawls over to her man, then straddles him, ready for action. She can feel that Ron is ready as well, with a raging erection that threatens to rip through his boxers.
âDamnâŠsexy!â He says about Kimâs bedtime outfit.
âI knew youâd like it.â She replies with a smirk. âJust something I found in my Momâs closet.â
And like clockwork, the thought of Mrs. Possible wearing the very same outfit Kim is fills Ronâs mind. That only serves to make him even harder, to the point where he canât wait. Kim scoots back and pulls down his boxers, letting his Cock out into the open. Gripping it with her right hand, she guides herself down onto his pipe, taking every inch of him. But instead of starting right off, she just sits there and enjoys the moment, as does Ron.
âOh God, I need this.â Kim moans. âDamn mission trailâs gone cold. I canât find any clue on where DNAmy could be.â
âDidnât Camille tell you anything?â Ron asks, putting his hands on her hips.
âShe only knew about the attacks.â Kim replies.
âYou mean she wasnât involved with them? Then whyâd she lure me to that club?â
âBecause she wanted you to herself.â Kim tells him.
It takes a moment, but Ron gets what she means. âOh. OH! UhâŠwell, Iâm flattered butâŠâ
âDonât worry, I took care of her.â Kim says. âPlus it gave me a chance to try the Strap-on interrogation.â
âWait, you used a Strap-on on Camille? And didnât let me see?â Ron asks upset.
âYep, missed the show.â Kim tells him with a sexy grin. âBut youâve got a front row seat to a better one right now.â
She puts her hands on his chest and rocks her hips slowly, being in no rush for this to end quickly. Ron moves his hips up & down in unison, pumping her snatch and making it wetter. The moonlight shines in through the window and dimly illuminates the room. As he pumps into her, Ron finds himself unable to take his eyes off of Kimâs breasts which jiggle & bounce hypnotically with her movements. Taking his left hand, he runs it under her top and begins to grope them, much to her enjoyment.
âUHN!!!â She moans, as Ronâs Rod continues to reach deep inside of her. He moves his right hand further and begins to palm her perfect bottom, gently squeezing it as she rides him. After a few minutes, Kim moves her hands, then reaches down and starts pulling off Ronâs shirt. He helps her along the way, and then tosses it to the floor, showing his bare chest. Kimâs top is next as she takes it off and tosses beside Ronâs shirt. Ron leans forward and presses his lips to hers, while palming her ass with both hands now. After a moment he breaks the kiss and starts moving down her body, pecking certain spots and making her even more excited.
âOh God, Ron.â She moans, before surprisingly pushing him back down. She leans down with him and shoves her mouth into his, all while still rocking her hips back & forth. Ron always did love it when Kim takes charge in the bed, and this instance was no different. Her tongue ventures into his mouth and he quickly welcomes it with his. Her breasts are pressed against his chest, and he can feel just how hard her nipples have become. Minutes pass before Kim breaks the kiss and sits back up. She increases his speed, feeling the urge to cum, and Ron follows suit.
âOh yeah! Fuck me, Ron.â She yells. âFuck me good!â
Her hands go back onto his chest as he begins to drill into her pussy, letting out grunts with each thrust. His body begins to glisten with sweat, as does Kimâs. Her usually well-kept red hair is now becoming frazzled, and her breathing heavier. Taking her left hand, she begins to rub her clit as Ron pounds her snatch. She bites her lower lip, and feels an orgasm coming on, but tries to hold out as long as she can. Unfortunately, with Ronâs Cock working her, itâs not very long.
âOhâŠOh, Fuck! Iâm gonna cum, Ron!â
Ron tries to hold out himself, but that too is a futile effort. âKPâŠI hope youâre still on that pill!â He doesnât know the answer, and it would be too late anyway. He shoots a hot stream of Ron-ness deep inside of her, as Kim basks in the glow of her orgasm. Both of them cum at the same time like always. Kim then climbs off of her man and lies down beside him.
âSo not the drama.â She tells him. âThe pillâs still working, so no big.â
She gives him a peck on the cheek before rolling over, with her back towards him. Usually around this time Ron would go off to sleep right beside Kim. But as he takes a quick glance down, he sees Kimâs body again, which makes blood rush back to âlittle Ron.â Knowing he wonât get any good sleep with this hard-on, he decides to make use of it.
âUh, Kim? Still sporting a hard-on here.â He tells her, which brings a grin to her face.
âThen we should do something about it.â She answers, all but inviting him to go for it. He doesnât have to be told twice, as he rolls over and gets into the spooning position. He lifts up her leg slightly and guides his Dick through her soaked love lips and back deep inside of her.
âUhh. Oh yeah.â She moans, welcoming his Cock back within her. She reaches down and pulls the bed sheet over her & Ron as Ron starts to plow her from behind. He wraps his right arm around Kim and fondles her breasts again, as she rubs her legs against his. The soft fabric of her stockings arouses Ron even more, and drives him to go on. The sound of skin slapping skin now starts to fill the room, but neither of them cares a bit about it. Kim starts to rub her clit again with her right hand, while using her left hand to help Ron with her breasts.
âGod I love your pussy, KP.â Ron tells her.
âAnd I love your Cock!â She moans back.
The two lovers are now drenched in sweat, and Kimâs hair is a frazzled mess. She moans and grunts with each stroke her man gives her, and is pushed closer to her limit as well. Soon, neither of them can hold out.
âOh God KP, Iâm gonna cum again!â Ron yells.
âMe too!â She screams. âCum in me, Ron! FILL ME UP!!!â
Ron does exactly as instructed, letting loose his load for a second time inside of her. Kim shivers in pleasure, enjoying her second and more intense orgasm of the night. This time though, she doesnât bother to move away, and neither does Ron to pull out. The two stay as there are, enjoying the moment and the silence, at least until Kim breaks it.
âHey, Ron.â She says. âBefore I forget, Dr. Director and I came up with a plan to draw DNAmy out of hiding. But youâreâŠâ
ââŠGonna have to be the distraction again?â Ron finishes. âYou know, I donât get enough Health Care being the distraction.â
âTrust me.â Kim tells him, staying close to him and keeping his arm wrapped around her. âYouâll like this distraction.â
The Next AfternoonâŠ
At Triple S Studios in Hollywood, the cast & crew of the latest movie being shot are going through their takes when theyâre interrupted by the sound of loud honking. As they look over towards the entrance, they spot an entire entourage making their way into the studio. In the middle of the crowd, wearing shades, a Members Only jacket, Khakis, designer Sneakers and a fat gold chain around his neckâŠis Ron Stoppable.
âYo, Yo, Yo!â He says. âWhatâs happening, my peeps! The Ron Man is here with the new star of this flick, the Mole Rat in the Buff, Rufus!â
Rufus climbs out of Ronâs jacket pocket and onto his shoulder before putting on his shades and folding his arms over his chest. âYeah!â
Ron poses in the same manor as the cast & crew rush over to see the new star. For safety, 4 large bodyguards surround Rufus & Ron, or so it would seem. In reality theyâre actually undercover Global Justice Agents. The previous day Kim & Dr. Director came up with a plan to lure DNAmy out of hiding by portraying Rufus as the next new Hollywood Animal star. Ron is playing the role of Rufusâ manager, while Bonnie & Monique, behind Ron, are playing Rufusâ groupies.
âThis is so demeaning.â Bonnie says under her breath. âPlaying groupie to that naked hamster.â
âOh, like you wouldnât be doing this for some big name celebrity.â Monique counters.
âWell, thatâs different.â Bonnie scoffs. âRon is not a big name celebrity.â
âYOU!!!â
The admiration for Ron & Rufus stop, and everyone turns to a corner in the Studio to see a fuming DNAmy standing there, shaking in anger alongside one of her mutations, the Man-Poodle. âYOUâŠBIGâŠMEANIES!!! How dare you pick that NakedâŠTHING, over my lovable, adorable creation!â The Man-Poodle shows his gratitude for the kind words by licking DNAmyâs cheek, an act that isnât favored by anyone in the room.
âICK! Wrong-Sick.â Bonnie says.
âThatâs what Iâm saying.â Monique agrees.
DNAmy angrily storms toward the entourage, or more specifically Ron. âItâs little runt nude animals like you, that make it so hard for my creations toâŠwait, youâre that Ron Stoppable guy.â
The look on Ronâs face turns into a smug one. âYep.â
DNAmy starts to look worried. âButâŠbut that meansâŠâ
âThat Iâm here, too.â
Before DNAmy can react, sheâs nailed in the back by Kim, swinging in from the rafters. DNAmy tumbles across the floor a bit before coming to a stop. Her anger now raging, she stands back up and points at Kim. âGET HER, MY PETS!!!â
Almost immediately several Mutant Poodle-Men storm the Studio and surround Kim, who doesnât look worried at all. âI was expecting you guys to make an appearance.â
Grabbing her watch, she makes an adjustment to it that affects more than the time it takes. Her new Purple & Black mission outfit slowly fades away, revealing her Blue & White Battle Suit underneath. From there she leaps into battle, taking on all of them at once as Ron looks on.
âOK, why does KP always get the cool gadgets?â He says, as a large shadow casts behind him. He feels their presence and turns around, only to see the last thing he ever wanted to. âNoâŠnot the Chipmunks again!â
Sure enough, several of DNAmyâs Mutant Chipmunk bodyguards are ready to âwelcomeâ Ron to the fight again, and that causes him to run for his life with them in hot pursuit.
âWAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!â
Monique looks on from the sidelines, while Bonnie takes cover and hides behind a prop brick wall.
âWell, this is bad.â Monique tells herself. âHope Ron can outrun thoseâŠâ She stops herself when she notices a package sitting next to her on the table, one that has seemed to appear out of nowhere. She looks around to see who couldâve left it there, and after a moment she spots a grinning Hoodie off in the distance, saluting her before departing. Quickly, Monique rips open the package and pulls out a Black & Blue Hoodie that has the same designs as Kimâs Battle Suit. Itâs Ronâs Battle Hoodie.
âRON! CATCH!!!â She tosses it to him as he runs past and he catches it.
âBOOYAH!!! BATTLE HOODIE!!!â Making some distance between him and the Mutant Chipmunks, Ron quickly puts on the hood and readies himself for action. But as the Chipmunks surround him, he feels nothing from the suit. âOK, I take back the Boo-yah. Nothingâs happening!â
Monique begins to panic, until she spots a card with the wrapping of the package that reads, âActivate by wearing Hood.â
âRON, PUT THE HOOD ON!!!â She yells to him.
Seeing no other choice as they close in on him, Ron flips the Hood on and charges forward. Instantly, lines on his Hoodie begins to light up and glow just like Kimâs Battle Suit, and Ron feels the ability of Monkey Fu coursing through him. Leaping forward, he takes out one Chipmunk with a Double-Fist Smash, then follows it up with a Leg Sweep that takes down two more. The final one charges him, but Ron uses his momentum to perform a monkey flip that sends the poor creature dozens of feet in the air before crashing down hard. Ron quickly hops back to his feet, grinning from ear to ear.
âAw YEAH! Reinstated BOOYAH!!!â He cheers. âThe Ron-Man can rumble!â
In the midst of the fighting, DNAmy decides to make her leave, sneaking discreetly past the brawlers and over to the Studio exit. Once she reaches it though she receives a rude surpriseâŠdozens of Global Justice Agents surround her.
âDNAmy, youâre under arrest!â The Lead Agent says, walking over and slapping the handcuffs on her.
âOh, Poo!â She pouts. âAnd I wanted a director to give me my close-up.â
Back at the fights, Kim is finishing up with DNAmyâs creatures. A Jumping Roundhouse Kick KOâs the last Man-Poodle, as he drops to the ground. âThere, that should do it.â She says confidently. She turns her attention over to the Agents whoâre hauling off DNAmy, and doesnât notice one last Man-Poodle sneaking up from behind. Heâs ready to pounce, and just as Kim turns to see him, Ron comes in for the save, delivering a Power Shoulder Block that sends him flying into another Movie set, completely wrecking it.
âRon! Thanks for the save!â She tells him. âButâŠhow exactly did you do that? And why are you wearing a Hoodie which is glowing like my Battle Suit?â
âUh, wellâŠyou know, just a little something-something I got around town.â Ron answers, playing it off to not reveal the truth. âI mean the Ron-Man has connections. I know how to get favors.â
Bonnie & Monique join the two as Kim looks back at Ron, not completely believing him. âUh-huh. And one of those favors wouldnât involve sex, would it?â
Both Ron & Monique begin to grin nervously, while Bonnie decides to take advantage of the situation. âIâm guessing it does.â She says, turning to Monique. âMonique, you should be ashamed of yourself. Is that all you think Ron is for? Sex? Iâm ashamed to know you.â
âWho are you kidding, girl?â Monique shoots back. âYou & Britina were going at it with Ron like he was the last man on earth.â That comment causes Kim to switch her glare to Bonnie, whoâs just been caught. âThatâs right, girl. Britina may be rich & famous, but Homegirl has some thin walls.â
Ron drops his head in shame as Bonnie starts stuttering, trying to explain herself. The Global Justice Agents fly off using their jetpacks with DNAmy in tow, and itâs just the opening that a certain someone needed. A figure that was lurking in the shadows during the fight finally makes an appearance, and interrupts Team Possible.
âHope Iâm not interrupting your Teen Angst Moment.â
In that very instant, a cold chill travels down the spine of both Kim & Ron. They never expected to hear her voice again, and they canât believe theyâre hearing it now. But as they turn towards the exit, their suspicion is made reality. Shego stands in the doorway, wearing a sadistic smirk along with the Battle Suit Junior made for her.
âThâŠThâŠThatâs the Green Lady.â Bonnie says, backing up slowly along with Monique.
âShego?â Kim says in shock.
âAlive?â Ron adds, experiencing the same shock.
âAliveâŠand KICKING!!!â
Shego clenches her fists as several neon glowing green lines run up her suit, illuminating it brightly. As Junior walks in and joins her side, Shego ignites her fists until they burn fiercely with her green energy. This sight surprises Kim & Ron even more.
âUh, KP?â Ron gulps, worried about his girlfriend. âShegoâs got aâŠâ
âI know.â Kim interrupts in serious tone. She prepares herself for a brutal fight as Shego stretches into her Eagle Claw stance, ready to rip the life out of the Teen Superhero. The smirk has faded from her face, replaced with a look of cold hatred.
The Vengeance Chapters
Their eyes narrow, their stances strengthen, and their muscles tighten. Itâs the way Kim Possible and Shego have always faced off. Neither took the other lightly, and both of them never held back in their battles. But thereâs something different about this moment, and Kim knows it. Shego hasnât cracked one devious smile. She hasnât called Kim âPrincessâ or âCupcakeâ. She doesnât even acknowledge the rest of Team Possible. Her eyes are focused on Kim and Kim alone.
âSomethingâs not right here.â Kim thinks to herself.
Shego, in the meantime, doesnât feel like reverting back to her normal ways in battle. In her mind, she replays the events that have brought her here. Blasting Ronâs arm, the ensuing fight with Kim, being kicked off the roof of Drakkenâs Lair plummeting to her near-death. She remembers the pain, the agony, the months that she was helpless, unable to move, barely able to breathe. And it enrages her far past anything sheâs ever felt.
âRRRRRRAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!!â
She storms forward, ready to start the battle, and Kim grins in response. âShe always did want to lead. Better make this quick.â
Kim knows Shego always starts with a left jab, and prepares to launch a side kick to disrupt it. But instead of a jab, Shego leaps into the air, catching Kim off guard and making her miss the kick. She connects with a devastating hook to the jaw that sends Kim stumbling back, rattling her.
âWhoa! What theâŠOOOMPHH!!!â Shego follows up with a brutal left uppercut to the gut, and doesnât intend on stopping there.
âYOUâRE GOING DOWN!!!â She unleashes a flurry of punches, kicks and knee attacks, all of which Kim is barely able to dodge. Kim can see the hatred & rage in Shegoâs eyes, far more than she has shown in all of their past encounters combined. After several moments, Kim finally goes on the offensive, dodging a left hook and countering with a hard side kick. Usually that would cause Shego to back up, holding her side in pain. But today, at this moment, she sucks it up and counters with a vicious side kick of her own.
âAAAGGHHH!!!â For the first time in a very long time, Kim cries out in pain. And her boyfriend doesnât plan on letting it happen again.
âKIM!!!â Ron sprints forward, intending to inject himself into the fight, until Junior steps in front of him.
âShego wishes to handle Kim Possible herself.â He says, putting up his fists. âMeaning you will have to deal with me and my musclesâŠof which you donât have.â
âOh, I donât need muscles, Junior.â Ron replies, throwing the hood back on over his head. Instantly his battle hoodie powers up, which gives Junior second thoughts.
âUm, I believe that I have a photo shoot to attend.â He says, before dashing off for his life.
âHey, WAIT! Come back here!â Ron yells, chasing after him. âNow I know how the bad guys feel.â
Back with the main event, Kim has brought the fight to a stalemate, with both vixens punching & counterpunching with everything they have. âItâs like sheâs possessed.â Kim thinks, referring to Shego. âIâve never seen her this angry before. I gotta end it now!â
Kim holds off on another attack and tries to bait in Shego. Once she attacks with a right straight punch, Kim proceeds to end it. She connects with a right hook to the jaw, follows up with a spinning backhanded left fist strike, and then another one. âItâs over, Shego!â
Kim goes for the finishing blow, a spinning jump kick, only to have it blocked by Shegoâs right hand. As Kim looks down, she sees the rage on Shegoâs face, and her right fist glowing brightly with energy. Shego then puts the fist to use, connecting with a violent jumping uppercut that sends Kim airborne. Everything moves in slow motion as the impact overcomes Kim. But time begins to increase in speed on her descent. Shego lands on her feet first, and after two seconds, Kim slams into the ground on her back. Sheâs still conscious, but the attack is taking its toll on her. Sheâs bleeding from the mouth, and her face is worse for wear.
âIt will NEVER be over, Kim!â Shego barks at her, still enraged as a single tear rolls down her left cheek. âNow after what you did!â
âFREEZE!!!â
Shego takes her eyes off of Kim and looks around the movie studio, watching as dozens of Global Justice agents flood in, attempting to capture her. She then turns back to Kim, and gives her some cold parting words.
âWe are not done.â
Igniting her hands, she fires off randomly in all directions, hitting agents & debris, and causing fires in multiple spots. As the smoke fills the Studio, she makes her escape into it, with Junior right on her tail. The agents quickly extinguish the fires and clear out the smoke, just as their leader, Dr. Director, touches down in her jetpack.
âKimberly, are you all right?â She says, running over to her. Ron follows after her and slides down to Kimâs side on his knees. Kim nods her head âyesâ, but thatâs a lie. Sheâs not.
âIâŠI donât think I couldâve beaten her.â She thinks, still shaken from the blows she took. And for the first time since her entry into crime fighting, she begins to feel unsure of her abilities.
Two Days LaterâŠ
âThis is the greatest day of my life!â
Kim walks down the hallway of Middleton High, carrying her schoolbooks to her chest. Some of the bruises from her battle with Shego are still visible, which is why Bonnie is feeling so joyous as she walks alongside her. Ron is on Kimâs other side, as the three walk over to the History Class they have together.
âYou look like you were in the ring with Roy Jones Jr.â Bonnie tells Kim, who remains silent. âOnly if someone had a camera to remember this. Oh, waitâŠâ Almost predictably, she pulls out a digital camera and takes a quick snapshot of Kim, which makes her growl in displeasure. Bonnie just smiles back at her and heads into class, while Kim & Ron remain outside.
âYou want me to contact Wade and tell him to hack into Bonnieâs camera?â Ron offers.
âLater.â Kim replies. âBonnieâs right, though. Shego really did a number on me.â
âEh, just some lucky punchesâŠand kicks.â Ron tells her. âShe wonât stand a chance against you next time.â
âThatâs just it.â Kim reveals. âThere was something in her eyesâŠsomething that fueled her. I gave her some of my best shots, and she just shrugged them off and came at me even harder.â
âWhat are you saying, KP?â Ron asks.
âThat whatever Shego wants with me, I donât think it involves me being healthyâŠor even alive.â She concludes, as the two of them head into the class. They heard the news from other students that there would be a Substitute Teacher for this class, and Ron figures it as a free goof-off period. But as they glance towards their Sub, their expression turns to shock to see whoâs standing thereâŠMiss Go.
âOh, so glad you can join us, Kimmy!â She says cheerfully, showing no hint of malice. Kim & Ron decide it wise not to start anything here with innocent students around, and walk over to their desks and sit down.
âNow, I know itâs only two weeks until your Graduation.â She tells the students. âSo instead of making you do some boring old school assignment, how about we go to the Study Hall and have a Senior Party!â
That suggestion causes cheers to erupt from the students as they jump to their feet. âAnd this day just gets better!â Bonnie yells.
âYou kids go on down to the Study Hall!â Miss Go tells him. But when Kim gets up from her desk, she puts her hand up. âOH, not you Kimmy. Iâd like a short word with you.â
âA free period to party AND Ms. Perfect gets in trouble, pinch me, Iâm dreaming.â Bonnie boasts as she exits the room. Ron gets up from his seat and stands beside his girlfriend.
âGo, Ron.â Kim tells him, looking dead serious.
âAre you sure, KP?â He asks.
âVery.â She responds. âI will handle this. Just go.â
He does as asked, walking towards the door as Miss Go and Kim stare each other down. In their heads, they count down the moments it takes for the last student to leave the room. Out of the corners of their eyes, they watch as the door slowly closes, until itâs completely shut. That precise moment is when Shego strikes, shoving the teacherâs desk at Kim, who effortlessly leaps over it. As she lands though, she receives a hard thrust kick to her chest, courtesy of Shego. She follows up with a straight right punch that floors Kim, and leaves her completely vulnerable.
âSo what is this about?â Kim asks, struggling to sit up. âDrakken wants to capture and make another clone army of me again?â
âOh, we are far past Drakken.â Shego answers coldly. âThis is about me getting the payback I deserve, and your suffering.â
She balls her right hand into a fist and charges it up with her energy. Reeling it back, she prepares to deliver a punch that can do irreparable damage. That is, until sheâs clocked upside the head by a book. Catching it before it hits the ground, she sees that itâs a High School History book. Her gaze then turns towards the doorway, where Bonnie stands ready to chuck another book at her head.
âI have a Science book!â She threatens. âOver 450 pages!â
Shego just smirks and turns her attention to the cheerleader. âBigâŠmistake.â
She prepares to deal with the small nuisance, when she realizes sheâs made the mistake. Kim wraps her legs around Shegoâs waist and flips backwards, tossing her foe out of an open classroom window. Jumping to her feet, Kim then runs over to the window, intending to chase after her. But as she peers her head out, she sees absolutely no sign of her.
âGone!â Kim utters, before turning back to Bonnie. âIâŠcanât believe Iâm going to say this butâŠI think you saved my life.â
âYeah, well donât get all warm & fuzzy about it.â Bonnie responds. âYou saved the world against that crazy green chick, and she had it coming. Oh, and you can thank me by having Ron come over my house at 8pm. My parents & sisters wonât be home then.â Bonnie gives Kim one last smug grin before turning to walk out of the room. Usually at this point, Kim would try to get in the last word. But right now her focus is on Shego, and why sheâs brutally attacked her twice. And why it has nothing to do with Drakken.
3 Hours LaterâŠ
âThank you for shopping at Club Banana!â
Itâs 6pm and nearing the end of Kimâs shift at the Club Banana store, thankfully for Monique. Kimâs mind has been focused on Shego since her attack earlier, and itâs switched her usually cheery demeanor to a dreary one.
âAre you feeling OK today, girl?â Monique asks Kim.
âI have my arch-foe, whoâs the henchwoman for a mad scientist, hell-bent to make me suffer, and itâs not even part of the mad scientistâs plan.â Kim blurts out, feeling extremely frustrated.
Surprisingly, Monique gets exactly what Kimâs talking about. âThe Green Lady?â
âSheâs been attacking me over & over.â Kim confesses. âI feel that every time I turn a corner, sheâll be right there waiting with a fist.â
âExcuse me, do you have this in a forest green?â
âYes, maâam. Iâll get that andâŠâ Kim stops herself when a trigger in her mind causes her to recognize that voice. She slowly raises her head and looks up across the counterâŠand her guess is confirmed. Shego is standing right in front of her.
âOh, Lord!â Monique says, getting out of harmâs way.
Kim just slowly shakes her head. âNot here, Shego.â
âOh yes.â Shego replies. âHere!â
She leaps over the counter and tackles Kim to the floor, who then counters by flipping her up in the air. But Shego anticipates the move and grabs Kimâs wrists. The force of the throw plus the pull of Shego causes Kim to be dragged into the air, and Shego takes advantage by landing on her back and kicking Kim through the Club Banana display window, onto the main concourse of Middleton Mall. Needless to say, thatâs the straw that broke the camelâs back.
âThatâs it!â Kim yells, fed up with the attacks. âIâve had it with these attacks! Why are you so pissed off?!â
Shego leaps out through the display window and cocks an eyebrow upward. âPissed off? You do NOT know the definition of the word.â Shego counters. âAfter what you did to meâŠIâm FAR passed pissed off!â
She charges Kim like a rampaging bull, both hands burning bright with energy. Kim avoids the first two swipes Shego takes at her, but ends up being scratched in the gut by the third one. She stumbles back and looks down, noticing her blouse has been ripped open and two scratch marks are on her stomach, bleeding. Itâs at this moment that Kim herself snaps, and decides to end it for good. Bringing her left hand up, she motions for Shego to âbring itâ, which she does.
âYouâre gonna feel whatâs itâs like to have every bone break in yâ!â Shegoâs threat, and charge, is cut off as she feels a foot wedged deep in her stomach, courtesy of Kim. She follows up with a spin kick to the face that sends Shego reeling, switching advantage to her for the first time. She calmly walks towards Shego, eyes filled with determination. Shego attempts a right hook, but itâs easily deflected by Kim and countered with a left hook. Then a right, then left, then a knee to the jaw, before a straight punch knocks Shego to the ground. Every shopper in the Mall now have their eyes locked on this battle as Kim continues to dominate. Shego struggles to her feet, but rises up. She goes for a side thrust, and ends up having it parried by Kim, who counters with a vicious front kick. Shego staggers back in pain, and Kim decides to end up. Charging forward, she leaps into the air, plants one foot in Shegoâs chest, and brings the other one under her chin, connecting with the same Flash Kick she used on the villainess to defeat her so long ago. Shego flips into the air and lands brutally face down, as Kim lands perfectly on her feet.
âFinally.â She says, pulling out her Kimmunicator to contact Global Justice. But as sheâs about to dial inâŠ
âNoâŠâ
The sight is shocking to Kim, as she watches Shego struggle to stand. Sheâs bleeding from the mouth, and various bruises adorn her face. Yet she still tries to stand. âWeâŠarenâtâŠdone!â
âWhy, Shego?â Kim asks, frustrated & confused. âWhy do you wanna fight? Why do you want revenge? Youâre the one that tries to take over the world! You team up with a mad doctor, threaten the safety of everyone, you even attacked Ron and burned his arm. ThenâŠâ
âYOU LEFT ME TO DIE!!!!!!!â
Those words. Those five words. Kim never expected them to come from Shego, and it stuns her, more than any blow from Shego ever could. Seeing this, Shego sprints forward like a Cheetah, leaps into the air, and delivers a devastating jump kick that propels Kim backwards and sends her crashing into the Middleton Mall Water Fountain.
âUhhn.â Kimâs barely conscious now, and Shego doesnât plan on stopping as she ignites her hands again.
âI fellâŠhundreds of feet from that buildingâŠonto JAGGED rocks below!â Shego tells her, revealing what happened. âI couldnât move! I couldnât talk! All I could do was look up and watch you fly away with Global JusticeâŠleaving me to die!â A tear rolls down each cheek as she continues. âAnd I wouldâve if Senior Junior hadnât found me. Can you imagine what itâs like? Being in a cast, in so much pain, unable to move for MONTHS!!! And all while knowing that one person put you there!â
She aims her hands at Kim, who has no way to defend herself. âWell you donât have toâŠbecause Iâm gonna make it reality!â
âTHE HELL YOU ARE!!!â
Before she can even blink, Shego feels a vehicle slamming into her, trapping her on the hood. Itâs a Middleton Mall Security Cart, being driven by Monique, who jumps out of the cart as it zooms through the entrance and outside of the Mall. Immediately Monique rushes over to her friend, whoâs just about to pass out.
âKIM! Can you hear me? Are you all right? KIM!â
2 More Hours LaterâŠ
Kim opens her eyes, only to be greeted by the blinding shine of a flashlight. And she immediately knows whom it belongs to. âMom?â
âWell, thereâs no memory lost.â Mrs. Possible says, turning off the flashlight. âAnd no head trauma from what I can see. What happened?â
âShego.â Ron says, as he comes into Kimâs vision. Kim takes a look around and finds herself on the couch in her living room, with a bandaged stomach. She sits up slowly and listens as Ron continues. âMonique told me she attacked her at the Middleton Mall. It must be another plot by Drakken toâŠâ
âNo.â Kim interrupts. âItâs not.â
âWell whatever it is, the only thing I can prescribe is not going on any missions.â Mrs. P tells her daughter, but deep down she knows thatâs impossible for Kim not to do. âAnyway, I have to get to work. Get some rest, Kimmy. Please.â
As Mrs. Possible makes her exit, Ron sits down on the couch beside Kim, who immediately puts her head on his shoulder. âKP, are you this isnât another Drakken âLets clone Kim Possibleâ plan?â
Kim nods her head yes. âItâs more serious than that.â Ron puts his left arm around Kim as she continues to explain. âRemember the last time we battled Shego?â
Ron looks down over at the arm thatâs wrapped around Kim. Itâs the same arm that was blasted by Shego and suffered 2nd degree burns. âYeahâŠâ
âWell, when you passed out, me & Shego went at it.â She tells him. âI ended up kicking her off the top of the lair, and when I looked down at the darknessâŠI thought sheâd just escaped.â
âYou mean she didnât?â Ron asks.
âShe told meâŠthat we left her down there.â Kim reveals. âThat we left her for dead. Ron, you know me. I donât like Shego but I would neverâŠâ
âI know, KP.â He answers, interrupting for her good. âI know.â
The two of them decide to just leave it at that, and watch TV. With all that has happened today, they honestly hope that there are no calls for missions, as they just wish to spend a quiet night at home together.
MeanwhileâŠ
On the other side of Middleton, in a dank & rundown apartment building that is barely staying up, restsâŠno one whatsoever. However, in the newly built Middleton Suites across the street, a pair of green eyes looks out over the city, angrily.
âThat redhead has got to be the luckiest girl alive.â Shego utters. âI had her three timesâŠTHREE TIMES and she got away!â
In frustration, she swats at a nearly priceless vase and sends it into the wall, shattering it into dozens of pieces. Junior sits on the bed, just having witnessed it happen. âShego, do you not think that you are becoming obsessed with Kim Possible?â
âObsessed?!â She replies, before storming over and getting right into his face. âI am hell-bent on Payback! After what she did to me, I plan on making her suffer for as long as humanly possible!â
Sheâs wearing her angry face, and it shows as Junior is cowering in fear of her right now. She realizes this and backs away, before taking a deep breath and breathing out. âYou know what, I need some air.â Turning away from Junior, she grabs a jet-black jacket from off of the bed, walks toward the window and leaps out of it. She soars through the night air and lands several stories down on an adjacent rooftop. From there she goes to the edge of the roof and slides down the rain gutter until she reaches the ground in an alley. Law Enforcement has been on high alert ever since Shego revealed herself among the living. But sheâs more than use to making unconventional exits. As she exits the alley onto the main streetâŠ
KABOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!!!
The ground-shaking explosion nearly knocks her off her feet. She looks at the source, and sees a former electronics store, which has now been turned into a fiery inferno. And out of the flames floating in a hovercraft is a very unexpected faceâŠDr. Drakken.
âHmm, not much for stealth capability, but it gets the job done.â He says, referring to his new cannon that has just been equipped on the hovercraft.
âDRAKKEN???â Shego yells, which gets his attention.
âShego? SHEGO, YOUâRE ALIVE!!!â He immediately turns his craft and hovers towards her, but stops short when heâs reminded of something. âWaitâŠyouâre alive. WHY DIDNâT YOU BREAK ME OUT OF PRISON???â
âMaybe because I was KICKED OFF THE ROOF OF YOUR LAIR, AND HAD TO TAKE MONTHS TO HEAL!!!â She barks back, angry that Drakken reminded her of the events. âAnd just how the hell did you get out of prison?â
Shego gets her answer when she sees the mammoth figure known as Warmonga emerging from the damaged store, carrying several high-tech supplies on her shoulder. âHER???â Shego asks. âYou replaced me with HER???â
âThe offer was there, how could I refuse?â Drakken counters, which causes Shego to flare up her fists with energy. âHEY! In my defense, I thought you were dead.â
âYeah, well sheâs about to find out just how alive I AM!!!â She charges forward towards the alien warrior, who tosses aside her items and prepares for battle. Shego leaps into the air and aims for the face, but Warmonga lunges forward, slams her hand into Shegoâs stomach and slams her into the ground hard. Shegoâs not out though, and she counters with multiple energy blasts to Warmongaâs face, temporarily blinding her. As she stumbles back, Shego preps for another attack as Drakken tries to reason with her.
âShego, you donât understand.â He tells her. âI have a plan for Galactic Domination!â
âEnough with your stupid plans!â She replies, charging forward again. Warmonga hears her coming and lets loose a left hook, but Shego ducks under and kicks the legs out from under her. Putting Warmonga on her back, she clenches her hands together and prepares to slam them down on her face. But Warmonga grabs Shego by the wrists halfway down, and forcibly throws her across the street, slamming her into the side of a car. Drakken floats over to Shego and attempts to reason with her one last time.
âShego, we could team up and rule over this planet with her!â He says. âWill you just listen toâ?â
âSHUT UP!!!â She barks at him, charging back into battle. This time however, she becomes reckless. Warmonga easily anticipates her movements and grabs Shego by the throat, lifting her high into the air. As Shego struggles and gasps for air, Drakken slowly hovers around the two.
âWhat shall you have Warmonga do with angry green woman?â Warmonga asks.
âNothingâŠyet.â Drakken answers, before turning to Shego. âIâm sorry my dear, but I am too close to ultimate victory to have you ruin it. Warmonga is the perfect henchwoman for my new organization. Sheâs obedient, not sarcastic, and she actually shows faith in my plans. Plus the obvious superior physical strength. Maybe when you have a little change of attitude, you can rejoin usâŠas her lackey.â
He snaps in fingers, and in an instant, Warmonga chokeslams Shego viciously into the pavement, leaving an indentation of her. As the former henchwoman of Drakken lies motionless, Drakken flies off into the night, with Warmonga and the stolen equipment right behind him. An overwhelming feeling of DĂ©jĂ vu overcomes Shego as she feels consciousness slipping away. Itâs the same feeling she had months ago, when she was left for dead.
The Vengeance Chapters 2
âHA! Found the last one!â
Ron comes out of the kitchen with his hands victoriously in the air, carrying a leftover Chimerito from their earlier Bueno Nacho delivery. He walks over to the couch where Kimâs sitting and plops down right beside her. Grabbing the remote, he flips through the channels looking for anything good on.
âMan, there has got to be something on that we can watch.â He says, before landing on a channel that more than piques his interest. âAw, SCORE! Theyâre having another Captain Constellation marathon! What about it, KP?â
âGRRRR!!!â The growl from Kimâs lips is more than enough answer for him, as Ron quickly flips it to an episode of âBallroom with the Actorsâ, a favorite show of Rufusâ as he hops out of Ronâs pocket and onto the coffee table to watch it. Kim & Ron also settle for this show, and wrap their arms around each other.
âItâs been so long since weâve been able to be at home alone.â Kim says, enjoying the moment. âNo Mom & Dad asking me about chores, no TweebsâŠâ
âNo having to chase after a little sister whoâs been endowed with Mystical Ninja powers.â Ron adds. âYep, just the two of us alone.â
âYeah.â Kim agrees, before remembering something that changes her mood. âWe wonât have much time for that with Graduation coming up.â
âYeah.â Ron agrees. âHey, you know, I just got a scholarship to Upperton Tech, they want me to start for their team. Guess they must recognize the mad skills.â
Kim smiles Ron, happy for him. âYep, nobody runs away better than my Ron.â She jokes.
âYou know it, babe.â He says, before thinking about just what she said. âHey, was that a shot?â
Kim makes it up to him by moving closer and giving him a peck on the cheek. But that quickly turns into a prolonged kiss as they remember theyâre alone. They keep their lips pressed together, as their hands move over each otherâs bodies. Lower and lower they go, untilâŠ
BEEP-BEEP-BEDEEP!!!!
The sound of Kimâs Kimmunicator effectively ruins the mood for both of them. Reluctantly, she pulls it out of her pocket and answers, as Ron groans. âWhatâs the Sitch, Wade?â
âI just got a hit on your site, from your Mom.â Wade tells her. âShe wants you to come down to the Hospital. Says that thereâs a patient you need to see.â
30 Minutes LaterâŠ
On the 5th floor of the Middleton Medical Center, Kim & Ron stand in front of a bed with a curtain wrapped around it. Mrs. Possible grabs hold of the curtain and prepares to pull it back. âThis is why I called you here, Kimmy.â
She tugs the curtain and walks around the bed, pulling it back and revealing the newest patient for the Medical Center to be Shego. Kim lets out a startled gasps as Ronâs eyes widen. They see the bumps and bruises that adorn her face & arms, the black eye & swollen jaw. Her wrists, ankles & waist are strapped down to the bed by titanium restraints, much like the ones in Ronâs belt.
âWhat happened?â Kim asks.
âWe donât know.â Mrs. Possible answers. âShe was found almost indented into the pavement and rushed here. Her injuries arenât serious, but it will take her a long time to recover.â
âWhaâŠtheâŠâ
Shego slowly starts to awaken from her unconscious state. She opens her eyes slowly, and is welcomed by blurred vision. But it soon clears up and she notices the three standing around her, especially Kim.
âYOU!!!!!!â She tries to pounce on Kim but is successfully restrained by the straps. It doesnât stop Ron from being startled though, as he latches onto Mrs. Possible, but only for a moment.
âUh, yeah. I uhâŠslipped.â He says, trying to play it off. âMan, this floor is slippery. Hey, whereâs the guy thatâs in charge of mopping?â
Ron walks away with Mrs. Possible, looking for that person, and leaves Kim & Shego alone. âEnjoy seeing me like this?â Shego says bitterly.
âWho did this to you?â Kim asks.
âWhy do you care?â Shego replies. âMad cause you didnât do it yourself?â
Kim sighs hard and looks at Shego with sincere eyes. âI didnât mean to leave you down there, Shego. I may stop the bad guys but I donât kill them. Now Iâm trying to help you out. Will you work with me?â
Shego looks into her foeâs eyes, and sees that sincerity there. And that show of sincerity puts a small feeling of doubt into Shegoâs mind. The rage sheâs built up for so many months against the cheerleading crime-fighter begins to subside, and a small part of her breaks down. But she doesnât let it show, as she turns her head away from Kim.
âGo away.â She says.
Kim sees Shegoâs sudden change in emotion and leans in closer. âShego?â
âJUST GO!!!â She barks out, causing Kim to jump back. Backing up, she walks away from the bed as Shego lies there, experiencing conflicted feelings. A tear streams down sideways off her face, as she questions did Kim really meant was she said. Meanwhile, Kim runs over to join Ron & her mother whenâŠ
BEEP-BEEP-BEDEEP!
âŠAnother incoming call. She pulls out the Kimmunicator and answers. âGo Wade.â
âGot an alert from a Military Base just outside of Middleton.â Wade tells her. âSomeoneâs tearing through the Base.â
âOn it.â Kim says, before ending the communication. âCome on, Ron.â The two scramble down the hallway towards the stairs, as Mrs. Possible looks on. Sheâs watched her daughter run off to fight crime dozens of times before, but she just canât shake the feeling that the danger Kim will face is more than sheâs dealt with before.
âBe safe, Kimmy.â
30 More Minutes LaterâŠ
A large explosion erupts from the middle of Fort Carlton Military Base, and dozens of troops scramble towards the source in order to put a stop to it. Outside of the front gate, a Hummer rolls up and through inside the grounds, carrying two of Middletonâs finest. Kim & Ron look out of their respective windows, just as another huge explosion goes off.
âWhoa.â Ron says. âUh, KP? I think youâre gonna need the suit for this.â
âAlready on.â Kim informs him, showing her hand, which is covered by the suit. As the Hummer comes to a stop, several yards away from a smoldering warehouse building, a maniacal yet familiar laughter fills the air.
âAAAAAHHHHH-HAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHAHA!!!!!!!â
âI know that laughter.â Kim says, jumping out of the Hummer.
âMe too, KP!â Ron adds, hopping out on his side. They dash forward, closer into the inferno, but stop once they notice a figure walking out of it. They squint their eyes as the man calmly walks out of the huge gaping hole in the building. A couple of steps more, and his identity is revealed.
âDrakken!â Kim says coldly.
At most time, the Doctor would be in shock to see his greatest nemesis here. But today is a different day. âKim Possible.â He says, wearing a smug grin that doesnât go unnoticed by Ron.
âOK, heâs not shocked to see you?â He says.
Drakkenâs grin grows wider with that comment. âThatâs because, BuffoonâŠI now hold the Trump Card.â At that moment, Drakkenâs Trump Card emerges from the flames. Carrying two Cruise Missiles, one under her left arm and one on her right shoulder, Warmonga walks to the side of Drakken.
âIt is the annoying red female.â She says. âShall I deal with her, Great Blue?â
âNot just yet.â Drakken answers, putting a hand up to keep her back.
âWait, Warmongaâs your henchwoman now?â Ron asks. âYou do know Shegoâs in the Hospital.â
Drakkenâs evil grin grows even wider. âWho do you think put her there?â
Kim & Ronâs eyes widen in shock over that statement. âDude, that is so cold!â
âIs it really?â Drakken asks, defending himself. âSheâs ridiculed my plans, belittled me in front of my Henchmen, and shows little to no respect for me in general! All I did was upgrade to a better HenchwomanâŠand now I have the chance to rule the Universe!â
âOK, I know heâs still the bad guy, but he makes a lot of good points about Shego.â Ron says.
âRegardless, youâre going down hard.â Kim tells him, getting into her Karate stance.
Drakken sees this and tones down his smile to a simple evil smirk. He also puts down his hand and addresses Warmonga. âNow you may deal with her.â
Warmonga nods her head and gently places the two missiles on the ground. Once safe, she charges forward like an enraged elephant. Kim stays focused and waits for the right moment. Once sheâs close enough, Kim flips into the air and over the Lorwardia warrior, nailing her with a kick to the back of the head on the way down. Warmonga stumbles forward, and Kim rushes her to stay on the offensive. But Warmonga sees her coming. Grabbing Kim by the waist, she viciously slams her into the ground, much like she did Shego.
âKP!!!!!â Ron is about to rush over to help, but a laser blast in front of him stops him in his tracks. He looks up to see Drakken already in his Hovercraft, and aiming for another blast. Without a weapon or shield of his own, Ronâs forced to take his best action.
âWAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â
He jets off like a track star, with Drakken chasing after him, missing every shot. âHold still you blasted buffoon!â
Back at the fight, Warmonga raises her foot and prepares to end the fight, but Kim rolls out of the way, causing her to miss. She follows up with a backflip kick that sends Warmonga staggering forward again. Kim jumps to her feet and nails a spinning jump kick to her jaw as she turns around.
âGotta end this!â She says, knowing Warmongaâs power & recovery speed. Charging up the power in her battle suit, she ignites her hand a la Shego until it burns brightly with blue energy. Warmonga turns again and tries a haymaker, but Kim ducks it and unleashes a devastating right uppercut, one that would put any normal human being in a coma. But Warmongaâs not human, and she shakes off the punch before looking down at Kim with a sinister grin.
âGood shot.â She says. âNow itâs Warmongaâs turn.â
Before Kim can even react, Warmonga picks her up by the waist and speeds forward. Kim tries punching her back & neck with energy-charged blows, but itâs no use. They storm closer to the side of another Warehouse, which boasts a heavy brick wall. Closer and closer, and closer, untilâŠ
THOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!
âAAAAAAAAAAAAAAGGGGGGGGHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!â
Even with the suit on, Kim can feel the impact of hitting the heavy brick wall at such a high speed. Sheâs literally planted into the wall, so much so that as Warmonga steps away, Kim is left lodged into it, unable to move, and barely conscious. Ron sees this and immediately switches focus.
âKIM!!!!!!!â
He stops and changes direction, and thatâs all the time Drakken needs. He fires a light-blue energy ray that zaps Ron and causes him to collapse to the ground. He remains covered in light blue energy, something he knows all to well about.
âCanâtâŠmoveâŠImmobilizationâŠRayâŠâ Ron struggles out, unable to open his mouth, and barely able to move his lips.
âThat should take care of you.â Drakken says, before turning his attention to Kim. As Warmonga walks over and picks back up the missiles, Drakken hovers over to Kim, wearing a victory grin.
âThis is a new day, Kim Possible.â He tells the barely conscious heroine. âAnd today, you are not all that.â
With mockingly evil laughter, he hovers over to Warmonga as they make their escape. Kim, fighting to stay conscious, loses the battle and passes out, as Ron watches helplessly, unable to move.
The Vengeance Chapters 3
As nearly every building around them burns into the night, Ron tries desperately to move any part of his body that will help him get to Kim, or get to help. The effects of the ray are still working to their fullest though, as he finds himself powerless to even lift a finger. He fears for the worst as he looks over at Kim, still wedged into the brick wall, courtesy of a massive slam from Warmonga. Suddenly, a revelation hits him, and remembers there is a savior around.
âRuâŠfusâŠâ
The naked mole rat emerges sluggishly from Ronâs pocket. Due to his different physiology, the raysâ effects were limited on him. Rufus looks over at Ron, who gives him the order.
âCallâŠWadeâŠâ
Rufus nods his head and climbs back into Ronâs pocket. A moment later, he slowly resurfaces, pulling the Ronunicator out behind him. A quick press of the emergency red button instantly gets Wade on the other end.
âGuys, satellites show that thereâs a spaceship in the vicinity andâŠâ Wadeâs interrupted by Rufus, who tries to explain the situation to him, but is fails. âRufus, calm down. Just show me what happened.â
The mole rat does exactly that. Picking up the Ronunicator, he uses its camera to show the carnage done by Drakken & Shego. âOh man. Rufus, stay there! Iâm calling in Global Justice!â
Wade signs off as Rufus falls flat on his back on top of Ron. All of his movements have been strained and heâs near exhaustion. All thatâs left is the wait. The soldiers of the Base have taken off after Drakken & Warmonga, leaving the Kim, Ron & Rufus all alone. Thankfully, the wait is not long. Within 3 minutes the Global Justice Helicarrier hovers high above the site, and dozens of Global Justice agents swarm the scene, all of them lead by Dr. Director.
âI want this area secure!â She commands. âNo one gets in or out withoutâŠOh my god.â Her gaze turns toward Kim. âGet her out of that wall, now!â
10 agents follow the order, and proceed to help Kim as a medical team rushes over to her. Ron smiles, happy that they arrived to help her, when he hears a voice.
âMaâam! Iâve found Stoppable! He seems to be incapable of movement!â
Betty rushes over and examines Ron. âThat damn Immobilization Ray.â She says. âGet him aboard the ship and to the Science Deck, ASAP! Before he loses all movement!â Two agents grab hold of Ron and lift him to his feet gently, holding him up from under his arms. As they carry him off, he utters something to Betty.
âKimâŠhurt?â
âKim will be fine.â Betty tells him. âBut we need to neutralize the effects of that ray on you before they becomes permanent.â The agents rush towards the Helicarrier carrying Ron, following behind a dozen agents who are boarding with Kim in tow. Betty takes one last look at the collateral damage done in the area, as a look of worry creeps onto her face.
âThis may be our biggest battle.â
1 Hour LaterâŠ
âUhhnâŠâ
Kimâs eyes slowly break open, as she awakens from her forced slumber. A bright light greets her first, and she averts her eyes to the side and notices herself surrounded by high-tech equipment, all designed to keep her alive & well. Sitting up, she finds herself back in her mission clothes.
âThe mission. TheyâŠâ
âGot away.â Dr. Director says, alerting Kim that sheâs in the room. âThough we are just glad youâre still among the living.â
Among the living; and thatâs when it hits Kim. âRON! Oh God! Is he OK, he didnâtâŠâ
âCalm down, Kimberly.â Betty tells her. âRon is being attended to right now. We are trying to find a way to break the effects of Drakkenâs ray so he can become mobile.â Just then, Kim hears her boyfriendâs voice yelling out.
âOOOWWWW!!! AAAAHHHH!! THAT HURT!!!!!â
âIt seems as if we were successful.â Betty adds, as Kim shifts to the edge of the hospital bed. âSlow movements, now. That Lorwardian Amazon knocked you for a loop.â
âTell me about it.â Kim agrees, still feeling like her headâs spinning. âWeâre on the Helicarrier?â
âThe most efficient place you can be during this time.â Betty tells her. âYour arch-foeâs here as well.â
âShego?â Kim asks. âWhy is she here?â
âYouâll find out in due time.â Betty informs her. âFor now, you should regain your legs and walk around. But I will be expecting you in the Briefing Room in 10 minutes.â
With that said, Dr. Director makes her exit from the room. Sheâs followed behind by Kim, whoâs trying to indeed gather herself back together. She walks down the hall, making some distance until comes upon an intersection. There, she sees her boyfriend, wearing a hospital gown, locked in a struggle with the vending machine.
âEH! Come on, I want my Nutty Crunchers!â Ron says, banging his fist against the glass case. Suddenly, heâs nearly tackled to the ground by Kim, who holds him tight, thankful heâs OK.
âIâm so glad to see you.â She says lovingly, as Ron hugs her back just as tight, happy sheâs OK.
âSame here, Kim. Same here.â He says. Itâs a joyous & relieving moment between the two, one thatâs interrupted as Ron notices a large, muscle-bound, masked Global Justice agent surprisingly sneaking down the hallway.
âOK, is it me, or is that guy acting like heâs out after curfew.â Ron asks. Kim lets go and turns to see what Ron means. Spotting the agent, Kim puts a finger over Ronâs lips, indicating for him to be quiet. The two then stealthily follow the agent as he proceeds down the hallway, until he reaches a room thatâs right across from Kimâs. He opens the door and quickly enters as Kim & Ron stay hidden outside. A moment later, the agent emerges from the room with Shego in tow, pushing her in a hospital bed. Itâs at that moment that Kim & Ron decide to come out of hiding and confront the agent, who stops in his tracks once he spots them. He tries to backtrack, but finds the hallway flooded with agents, all lead by Dr. Director.
âUh, I was taking this here bandit toâŠuhâŠpayâŠfor herâŠbad crimes!â The agent says, in a horrible Texas accent. Dr. Director decides to put an end to the mystery off his identity and snatches off the mask to reveal that itâs Senor Senior Junior.
âAAAHHH!!! I AM EXPOSED!!!â He says, covering up his face.
Shego just sighs in frustration. âI couldâve gotten out easier with Motor Ed.â She says.
âThe question is âWhy do you wish to leaveâ, Shego?â Betty asks her.
âLook, I have my own agenda, Betty.â Shego replies. âAnd it doesnât involve hanging around goody-two-shoes again.â
âWait a minute.â Ron interrupts. âYou two know each other?â
âUnfortunately.â Shego groans.
âWe participated in various field assignments while she was a member of Team Go.â Betty tells him.
Shegoâs heard enough and tries to get out of her bed. âYeah, well if youâll excuse me, Iâm about to participate in stomping that alien bitch, and ramming my foot up Drakkenâsâ!â
âAs I was saying,â Betty interrupts, âthat is why I have you both here. Your expertise & knowledge of Drakken is direly needed. His latest plan has made him top priority. He needs to be stopped, and the best way he can beâŠis if you two team up.â
A tidal wave of shock washes over both Kim & Shego, as they look at Dr. Director, then at each other. âMEâŠWITH HER???â They say in unison.
âYes.â Betty answers in all seriousness. âLike it or not, you two may be all that stands between Drakken & possible Universal Domination.â
âYeâNOT GONNA HAPPEN!!!â Shego barks at Betty. âI rather join back up with my stupid brothers than team with goody-two-shoes!â
âAnd I can think of more better partners.â Kim counters. âPreferably ones without the yelling and hot-temperedness.â
âWHY DONâT YOU SAY THAT AGAIN, PRINCESS!!!â Shego yells, charging up her fists with energy. Kim backs into her fighting stance, but Dr. Director steps between both of them.
âI didnât want to say this but, need I remind you two that both of you took on Drakken by yourselves, and both of you had your backsides handed to you by Warmonga.â Betty says, quickly quieting the two femme fatales.
âUh, no offense KP, but she does make a good point.â Ron agrees, which causes Kim to growl at him. âShutting up now.â
âThe fate of this planet depends on you two.â Betty tells them.
âHey!â Ron says, feeling left out.
âAnd of course, the Ron Factor.â Betty adds, which cheers him up. âNow, Iâll expect to see all of you in the Briefing Room in five minutes.â Putting her hands behind her back, she turns and walks down the hallway, passing Kim on her way to the Briefing Room. Kim follows behind Betty as Ron heads back to his room, looking for his clothes. The agents disperse from the scene as well, leaving Shego & Junior alone.
âUm, did she also mean I was to join in the Briefing Room?â Junior asks.
âJust wheel me back into my room so I can get my pants.â Shego sighs.
5 Minutes LaterâŠ
In a large, theatre-like room, various agents of Global Justice sit and wait patiently for what mission will soon be ordered of them. At the front of the room sit the prime players. Kim, Ron, Shego and Junior all wait for what Dr. Director has to tell them, as she steps onto the stage and begins.
âLadies and Gentlemen, this will be the most important day of your lives.â She starts off. âAs you know, for the past few weeks Drakken has stolen various high-tech equipment while managing to stay under the radar, hence why neither we nor Kim Possible could track him. But with his latest theft of two experimental Cruise Missiles, he has decided not to care about hiding.â
âSo we know where his new lair is?â Ron asks.
âYes, and there lies the trouble, Ronald.â She answers, before pulling out a remote and pressing the red button on it. A moment later, a large image of the Moon appears on the screen behind her. âWe believe that he has used the alien technology provided by Warmonga to set up his base on the Moon. Not exactly simple for us to reach, plus he would have full knowledge of our approach. Sources tell us that heâs close to initiating something called, âPlan Xâ.â
âOh, God!â Shego says, dropping her head to the table in her arms.
âYou know about Plan X.â Kim deduces.
âI didnât think he would actually go through with it!â Shego says, before confessing. âLook, Dr. D had this idea where if someone found a way toâŠcreate artificial earth air or something, heâd steal it and use it to take over uninhabited planets. That way he can have multiple hideouts, have his men on multiple worlds, andâŠâ
âHave a decisive advantage when it comes to Global Domination.â Betty continues. âPlus he can strike at other worlds and repeat the process.â
âBingo, Betty.â Shego says.
âWait, waitâŠso Drakken really IS trying to rule the Universe?â Ron asks. âOK, KP? I think we should call in your cousin Larry for this one.â
âNo time for that.â Betty says. âIf that really is Drakkenâs plan, we might not have as much time as we thought. You must get to the Moon and shut down his operation before he can succeed.â
âYou can count on me, Dr. Director.â Kim says.
âAnd me.â Ron adds.
Betty smiles and nods at the two, before turning to Shego. âAnd how about you?â Shego just scoffs & turns away, which Betty predicted. She walks off of the stage and over to Shego, pulling out and handing over what looks to be a check. âI figured as much. But rest assured that if you do assist us, you will be well compensated.â
Shego glances over at the check and the pupils in her eyes almost turn into dollar signs. Never has she seen so many zeroes in her life. âCHA-CHING!!! Well, youâve bought my services!â
âWell not mine.â Junior protests. âAll of this Outer the Space travel, the big blue alien woman, no! I refuse to be a part of this, and IâŠâ
Juniorâs cut off when he feels Shego grabbing him by the collar. âDo it or I boot you off this ship, while weâre still flying.â
âAAAHHH!!! OK! OK! IâM IN!!!â Junior yells.
âUh, not to be a bring-down, but how exactly are we gonna get to the moon?â Ron asks.
âDonât worry, Ronald.â Betty tells him, handing him two 8×10 photos. âWe have two experts on the job. One for building the Rocket that youâll be traveling in, and the other for building the operating system.â
Ron takes one look at the photos, and then grins. âWell, they are experts.â
âCanât get any better.â Kim agrees, after glancing at the photos, which are of her father, James T. Possible, and Wade.
4 Hours LaterâŠ
As the sun slowly rises over the horizon, Kim looks at her watch to see that itâs 6:11am. Normally, she would be either just getting home from an overnight mission, waking up to go to school, or falling asleep after a âLovingâ night with Ron. But today is a far different day. Kim, Ron, Shego and Junior all stand in front of a specialized NOSA (National Outer Space Administration) Rocket Ship, customized for their mission. Kim & Shego are wearing their battle suits, and Ron is sporting his battle hoodie. Junior isnât unprotected either, sort of, as he wears ancient Greek battle armor that was given to him as a birthday gift from his father. With the importance of this mission, relatives & friends have shown up to show their support.
âI hope to be back by our Dinner Party, father.â Junior says.
âSon, I want you to know that while I do not approve of your heroic deed in this matter, I can understand.â Senior tells him.
âWould it help if we robbed Fort Knox when I got back?â Junior asks.
âThatâs my boy!â Senior says with pride, hugging his son.
Also exchanging final words are Shego and her brother, Hego. âThe Wego Twins told me that they wish you the best of luck on this mission.â He tells her. âAnd they wish they could be here with youâŠbut they got detention in school again.â
Shego cracks a smile, remembering the old times with them. âHeh, I told those twin dorks to pay more attention in school.â
âAnd I wish to extend these words of wisdom.â Hego continues. âThough you might find the odds stacked against you, as a hero, you must rage forward into the light, andâŠâ
Shego cuts him off by igniting her fist. âI swear, if you start another one of those stupid motivational speeches I willâŠâ
âOK! OK!â Hego says, deciding to just extend his hand out. âBut let me say thisâŠGood LuckâŠsister.â
âYeah, thanks.â Shego answers, trying to sound disinterested as she grabs his hand and shakes it. She realizes that was a mistake though, as Hego pulls her close into a full-on hug. âDAMMIT! Always the hugging with you!â
Meanwhile, the Possible Family giving their support to Kim. All except Jim & Tim. âSo not fair!â Jim says.
âWe should be the one doing space travel!â Tim adds. âKim doesnât even like space.â
âOf course I do.â Kim counters. âI love having a whole lot of space between me and you Tweebs.â
She lets off a smirk in their direction, before Mrs. Possible gives her a kiss on the forehead. âYou stay safe, Kimberly.â
âDonât worry honey.â Mr. Possible says, reassuring his wife. âMy little Kimmy-cub will be riding in the safest Rocket built in U.S. historyâŠas long as Ronaldâs not driving it.â
âHe wonât be.â Kim tells him.
At that moment, Ron says his goodbyes to his family. âGoodbye Ronald, and good luck.â Mr. Possible tells him calmly.
Mrs. Possible, however, isnât so calm at this moment. âOh Ronald, are you sure that hoodie armor is gonna protect you way up there?â She says, grabbing onto her son and holding him tight.
âMom, itâs a battle hoodie.â Ron says. âAnd stop with the emotions, youâre embarrassing me in front of the others!â
She finally is able to let go, thanks to some help from Ronâs Dad, and Ron follows the others onto the ship. As they walk in, they notice the surprising interior, which has been made up to look like a VIP Jet.
âWhoa, swanky!â Ron says about the dĂ©cor. âAt least weâll be flying in style when we meet our doom on the moon.â
âRon, positive thinkingâŠâ Kim reminds him.
As the four sit down in their seats, they hear a familiar voice over the P.A. system. âPlease fasten your seat belts and keep your trays at an upright position.â
âWade!â Kim says, glad to hear his voice. âDidnât think you could hack into our system from your computer.â
âOh I could,â Wade says, âBut I decided to help you on the mission from your Dadâs control center. They do have a bigger screen. Iâll be guiding the Rocket to the moon from here, so you wonât have to worry about you know who taking the wheel.â
âHey, for your information, Iâm a better driver than Kim!â Ron says in his defense.
âOh, here comes the countdownâŠâ
T-minus 10âŠ
9âŠ
8âŠ
7âŠ
6âŠ
5âŠ
4âŠ
3âŠ
2âŠ
1âŠ
Liftoff!
As friends and family head inside of the Control Center, the rocket ignites itâs thrusters and slowly begins to lift off of the ground. The fuel lines shut off and detach from the Rocket as it gains speed, producing a white cloud underneath that grows larger by the second. The cloud soon covers the entire launch pad and stops expanding, as the Rocket roars high into the sky. From the Control Center, everyone watches as hope in their hearts, and also prayer.
âI hope you really can do anything this time, Kim.â Wade says under his breath.
At That MomentâŠ
Unbeknownst to everyone, the launch of the Rocket is also being watched closely by eyes on the moon. Dozens of henchmen monitor their screens and watch as the Rocket hits the stratosphere, and report to their leader.
âDr. Drakken. Global Justice has just sent up their Rocket. Kim Possible and her sidekick are on board, along with Shego and hers.â
Drakken nods his head as he sits in a throne-like chair, elevated at the back of the room. Warmonga stands by his side, wielding her power staff. âI knew they would come to stop me.â Drakken says. âBut I doubt they know the surprise that awaits them on their ship.â
The Team-Up Chapters
Deep in the silence of space, the NOSA Rocket soars through the stars, its inhabitants on a journey to stop the mad doctor and his plan for possible universal domination. But itâs a 12 hour trip to his moon base, which leaves time for rest. And thatâs exactly what Ron & Senior Junior are doing, as they sit dozed off in their seats. The two other passengers are far from sleep though. Kim Possible & Shego continue to stare each other down, each waiting for the other to make a move, and both very wary of this âforcedâ partnership.
âSo what are you waiting for?â Shego asks, breaking the silence. âCanât finish me off unless itâs on a rooftop?â
Kim sighs in frustration. âShego, I gave you my apology. Why canât you just accept it?â
âOh, I donât know.â Shego answers sarcastically. âMaybe itâs because you left me to die!â
âI didnât leave you to die!â Kim counters. âAnd if I remember right, thatâs what you did to Ron when you burned his arm!â
âYeah, well that was payback for myâŠâ Shego stops herself when she realizes sheâs reached the source, the very center. Everything that has happened to her, to Kim, to Ron, to so many…has revolved around that chance sexual encounter with Ron. âYouâreâŠyouâre right.â
âAndâŠI am?â Kim says surprised.
âYeah, surprisingly.â Shego answers begrudgingly. âLook, did the sidekick ever tell you about our âtimeâ together?â
Kim lets off a quick facial twitch as sheâs reminded of that event. âYesâŠâ
âYeah, then you know it was a trap meant for you.â She confesses. âDrakken had this special room with whips & chains andâŠlets just say it was gonna be a lot of funâŠfor me. But, that was no reason for me to take your Boy-Toyâs virginity. I was frustrated. Maybe if I held back, this whole mess wouldnât have started.â
Shego folds her arms over her chest and turns away as Kim continues to look at her in shock. She never expected an apology from Shego. She guessed that Drakken would make a successful plan first before that happened. âUhâŠapology accepted? Look, IâŠkinda understand. I know the effect Ron can have on a lot of women.â
âAnd youâre still with him?â Shego asks.
âBecause most of the time the women give him little choice. Much like you did.â Kim answers. âBesides, Iâm learning that joining in makes it better.â
Shegoâs eyes widen as she canât help but to laugh at that last comment. âOHOHO!!! Youâre telling me little miss cupcake actually has a wild bedroom side?â
âCheck the name, Shego.â Kim responds smugly. âI can do anything.â
âIs that so?â Shego asks, with the same amount of smugness. âFine, then letâs see you plant one right here.â
She points to her jet-black colored lips, which catches Kim off guard. âKiss you?â
âWhatâs the matter, never kissed a girl before?â Shego smirks.
That was almost an understatement to Kim. Sheâs had more than enough experience with Bonnie and others at Cheer Camp, and as the shock wears off, Kim goes forward. She sits up and leans forward, as does Shego, who puckers her lips. âHeh, sheâll probably go for the quick peck.â Shego thinks. âSheâll want this to end as quickly asâ!â
That thought goes down the drain as she feels Kimâs lips nearly smothering hers. She brings her hand under Shegoâs chin and opens her mouth, almost as if sheâs inviting Shegoâs tongue inside. The invite is taken, and the two nearly become lost in their impromptu make-out session. So lost that they fail to realize they now have an audience, as Ron begins to creep out of his slumber.
âAw, manâŠI must be having that dream again.â He says, still thinking heâs asleep. âButâŠwhy arenât you two in the lingerie? And whereâs Mrs. P?â
Kim & Shego break the kiss quickly and look over at Ron. âMrs. P?â Shego asks. âDoes he mean your Mom?â
Kim just sighs as Ron begins to awaken fully, and realize this isnât a dream. âWha? Wait-wait a minute, this isnât a dream. YOU TWO WERE ACTUALLY KISSING???â
âHuh? Who was doing the kissing?â Junior asks as he wakes up.
âDude, Kim & Shego were just kissing!â Ron tells him, which shocks Junior fully awake. âHAS THE WORLD GONE MAD???â
âRon, calm down. Itâs a long story.â Kim tells him, as she & Shego fall back into their seats.
Shego looks over at a timer on the wall, and reads that they still have 8 more hours until they reach the moon. âWell, we gotta kill the time somehow.â
âOOH! I know! We can play that 6 Degrees game of that actor!â Junior suggests.
âAnd that goes in the bad idea category!â Shego responds.
âI know a perfect way.â Kim says, as she secretly moves her hand and slides it into Ronâs pants.
âMan, I wish Iâd asked Felix to bring my video games so we couldâŠGAAHHH!!!!â Ron feels Kimâs right hand reaching his manhood.
âWhoa! Youâre really taking this âI can do anythingâ motto of yours seriously, arenât you?â Shego asks.
âYep, and now itâs your turn.â Kim tells her. âYou said I couldnât kiss you, I say you canât screw Junior, right here, right now.â
âWHAT?â Ron & Junior yell.
Shego just grins deviously at the challenge. âOh, you donât know what Iâm able to do, princess.â
âWait! Do you not think it weird us about to do it in front of our foes?â Junior asks.
âYeah, I gotta agree with Junior.â Ron adds. âHaving sex in front of villains is justâŠâ Kim puts an end to the disagreement by locking her lips with his. As always, Ron finds himself powerless to resist the softness of her lips, and all he can do is wrap his arms around her, as she breaks the kiss. âThatâs not fairâŠusing your mouth like that.â
âI know.â Kim answers, grinning seductively. Grabbing her tight black pants, she pulls them down to her knees, then kicks out of them before doing the same to her pink thong. Once both are on the floor, she climbs on top of her boyfriend and straddles him. Reaching down, she unbuckles Ronâs pants and slides them down enough to reach her intentâŠhis Cock.
Meanwhile Shego, not wanting to look to be outdone, does the same with Junior. Grabbing hold of his hardening manhood, she tugs her tights down to her knees before sitting on Juniorâs lap. Junior does the rest as he pulls her panties down, and guides himself through he wet lips and inside of her. Shego lets out a pleasured moan as she feels every inch of him slide deep into her. Back over across the table, Kim has just slid herself onto Ronâs manhood, and she slowly starts to ride him. Ron lifts up her shirt to expose her perky breasts, and fondles them.
âStill donât think this was a good idea?â Kim asks.
Ron looks back up at her with a weak grin. âWellâŠitâs better than playing that actor game.â The two wrap their lips around each other again as Kim puts her right arm around his neck, keeping it there for balance. Ron rolls up Kimâs mission shirt and fondles her breasts with one hand, while palming her ass with the other. Back across the table, Shego feels herself being groped as Junior drives into her over & over. He fondles her breasts as she wraps her arm around him, begging for more.
âGod, YES!!!â She screams. âGive it to me, Junior! FUCK ME!!!â
Hearing her screams of passion begins to stimulate Junior, and he places both of his hands under her knees to elevate her. Once high enough, he increases his speed and starts jackhammering her snatch, which nearly makes Shegoâs eyes roll into the back of her head with pleasure. On the other end, Kim is now treating Ronâs Cock like a trampoline, jumping up & down on it. Her breasts jiggle & bounce majestically, almost hypnotic to Ron, who canât take his eyes off of them. After a moment though, he snaps out of the trance when he gets an idea.
âWait, KP. Lie down on the table.â He suggests which makes her grin.
âNow youâre getting into it.â She says, going ahead with it. Using her agility, she spins around forward while still keeping Ron inside of her. As she leans forward onto the table, Ron leans on top of her and resumes his hip thrusts, giving her all of his manhood again & again. Kim opens her legs even further, wanting all of Ron to penetrate deep inside of her.
âYeah, baby!â Kim tells her man. âOh god, fuck me just like that!â
âAlways, Kim.â Ron answers, gladly pounding her from behind just like she wants. Kim soon gets company on the table as Shego, now completely naked, is laid down on her back. Junior holds her legs in the air by the knees and starts to drill her snatch like before. She lets out a loud moan of approval before her breaths become short. Beads of sweat form all over her body, and fly off with each thrust made into her. Kim & Ron are working up a sweat also, as Ron pumps his Cock into his girlfriendâs pussy, bringing her closer to her limit along with him. And it only takes a few more fucks to get them there.
âRonâŠRon, Iâm gonnaâŠUUUUUUUUUUUUUUHHHHHHNNNNNNNNNN!!!!!!!â
With one simultaneous moan & groan, the two have their orgasm together. Ron fires off a warm load into Kimâs snatch, one that puts a wide smile on her face. But theyâre not the only ones reaching their limit.
âShegoâŠI am about to erupt.â Junior tells her, trying to hold back.
âYeah, erupt inside of me, baby!â She cheers, and Junior complies. One last thrust does it, and he shoots his semen out, filling her up. Exhaustedly, he pulls out and inadvertently sprays another load over her stomach, breasts and face. He then plops back into his seat, as does Ron. The two men feel spent after their fun. Unfortunately, Shego & Kim do not.
âOh god, that was time well spent.â Shego says as she sits up. She then notices that Juniorâs still âreadyâ, and turns to Kim. âI guess itâs my turn, now. Ever have the sidekickâs sausage in your mouth?â
Kim pushes herself up off the table and grins back at Shego. âPlenty of times.â
âThen show me your technique.â She says, pushing herself off the table and squatting down in front of Junior. Kim does the same, dropping to her knees. Though Ronâs not too excited about it.
âWhoa, wait.â He says. âCanât we get like a 5 minute break? Maybe an energy drink or something?â He gets his answer when he feels Kimâs lips wrapping around the head of his Cock. She then takes half of it into her mouth on the first try, something thatâs slightly impressive to Shego.
âNot bad.â She says, before turning her attention back to Junior. She gives the shaft of his Rod a good lick, before engulfing Ÿâs of it into her mouth. Shegoâs motions are quick & steady. She tightens her lips around his shaft and moves her tongue circularly, running it over every inch of his meat. Kim is taking a different approach, though. She licks Ronâs shaft up & down before taking it back into her mouth, and tonguing the head of his Cock. She bobs her head up & down for a few times, then takes it out and runs her mouth and tongue along the shaft again, while using her right hand to jerk it. Both approaches are different, but theyâre more than effective as Ron & Junior feel their limit approaching for a second time.
âDamn, KPâŠâ Ron says. ââŠyouâre gonna make me blow!â
âI feelâŠI will blow too, Shego.â Junior adds.
And a moment later, they explode like fire hoses. Ron cums first, shooting a second load onto Kimâs face, hitting her cheeks and nose. Junior cums right after him, shooting off in Shegoâs mouth just like she did her pussy. Itâs just how she likes it, and she swallows every drop, with Kim looking on.
âDoesnât that taste disgusting?â Kim asks.
âDrakkenâs Taste-Bud Modifier,â Shego answers, âone of his few inventions that work. Youâd be surprised the flavors he can come up with.â
âI probably would.â Kim agrees. âAnd I believe itâs my turn now.â
âSo whadaya got?â Shego asks.
âI say, letâs see if they can give as good as they can take.â Kim suggests, hopping back on the table and spreading her legs in front of Ron.
âYeâI never thought Iâd say this, but I like the way you think.â Shego replies, before doing the same. Junior looks up at Shego perplexed.
âI am supposed to give the head now?â He asks. âBut I do not know how.â
Ron grabs hold of Kimâs legs and gives Junior a little advice. âDude, you just gotta dive in there and do your best.â
âYou heard the sidekick.â Shego says, grabbing Juniorâs head and shoving it between her legs. Junior is still confused as of what to do, and begins to kiss her inner thighs, which is not exactly what Shego wanted. âOh, for the love ofâŠJUST USE YOUR TONGUE!!!â Getting those orders, Junior does indeed put his tongue to work, moving it along her pussy lips before delving it inside, and pleasing her. âOh YEAH! Thatâs it, baby!â
Ron is doing his thing between Kimâs legs, kissing & licking her just how she likes. Her legs are wrapped around his neck as she sits back with her arms behind her. âYeah Ron, Lick it baby! I love your tongue!â Her chest starts to heave as her breath becomes shorter. She takes one hand and rubs her right nipple as she gently bites her lower lip. Moans escape her lips about every 2 seconds, and her body quivers every time Ron licks her favorite spot. But soon, her love sounds are drowned out by Shegoâs loud moans. It seems that Junior is a quick learner, and as she holds his head down between her legs, he proceeds to lick her closer & closer to her 2nd orgasm.
âDAMN! IâŠTHINK IâM GONNAâŠAAAAAAAAAAGGGGGGHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!â
An orgasm wave washes over the villainess as she hits her limit for the 2nd time. Her body trembles in pleasure as she gushes her love juices out, and into Juniorâs face. Kim isnât far behind as she cums for the 2nd time, and gushes herself, with Ronâs face as the target. Worn out, both women fall onto the table beside each other, as Ron & Junior fall back into their seats.
âNeedâŠrestâŠâ Ron pleads.
âMeâŠtoâŠ.â Junior adds.
âOhâŠfine.â Shego says, fatigued herself. â5 minutes, and then itâs my turn again.â
âKP, how long are we gonna be doing this?â Ron asks.
âHow long do we have left till we get there?â Kim counters.
Ron looks over at the timer, and sees that they still have a long way to go. âAw man, I knew I shouldâve packed Energy drinks.â
8 Mostly Sex-Filled Hours LaterâŠ
âAlright, does everyone have their equipment?â
Kim asks this question as she suits up with the rest of the team. Theyâre right outside Drakkenâs Moon Base stronghold, about several dozen yards from where they landed the ship. The final three hours of the flight were spent getting rest and mission briefings. They will split into two teams, with Shego & Kim sneaking in to get closer to Drakken, while Junior & Ron provide the distraction by storming through the front. They finish putting on their grey spacesuits, and activate the artificial forcefield helmets that come with them.
âWe all know what needs to be done.â Kim tells them. âShego and I will sneak in through the side to try and reach Drakken. You two see if you can reach him through the front.â
âShould be simple to find the flaw and shut down this operation.â Shego says, having experience.
Ron nods his head in agreement. âYeah, well as long as nothing unexpected happens, we canâ!â
KRA-KA-BOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!!!!!
A planet-shaking explosion rattles the ground, and the four look over to see that the ship that brought them here is now victim to a massive explosion. As flaming debris falls from the sky, the four turn to each other, realizing things have just become harder for them.
âDoes this mean we are stuck here?â Junior asks in a panic.
âCalm down.â Shego tells him. âDr. D always has some sort of ship or Escape Pod in his lair. We shut down his plan and take one of them back home.â
âAnd thatâs what youâre gonna be doing.â Kim tells Ron & Junior. âAlong withâŠâ
ââŠbeing the distraction.â Ron finishes half-heartedly. Kim grins at him and gives him one last tight embrace.
âBe careful, Ron.â She tells him, before heading off, followed by Shego. The two femme fatales are wearing their respective battle suits underneath their spacesuits, so theyâre ready for anything. They find an opening through the Loading Bay and activate their cloaks before entering. Dozens of Drakkenâs henchmen litter the place, loading & unloading various supplies and weapons for his conquest. Most of the henchmen Shego know very well.
âThat guy still owes me 5 bucks.â She murmurs under her breath. She & Kim make their way unnoticed past the henchmen and exit the Bay into a long hallway with many doors.
âGreat. Looks like Drakkenâs stole more blueprints from those Extreme Evil Lair Makeover guys.â Shego says.
âYouâre the hideout expert.â Kim tells Shego. âWhereâs Drakkenâs main Lab?â
Shego takes a moment to think. âHmmm, usually itâs on the 7th door on the right.â Thatâs where the two head, and as Kim kicks the door open, the two charge insideâŠonly to see that Drakkenâs nowhere to be found, and over a hundred of his henchmen ready to greet them. âUnless he changed it into the henchmen training facility.â
The only exit from the room slams shut as the lead henchmen traps the two women inside. âSurrender, and swear allegiance to Drakken.â He says. âIt is impossible for you to defeat us.â
After hearing that remark, Kim & Shego just smile at each other and crouch into their fighting stances. âYeâyou really need to check the name!â Shego quips.
Meanwhile, downstairsâŠ
Ron & Junior arenât exactly taking the easy path themselves. Right now theyâre trying to outrun rapid laser fire from the ceiling, not to mention giant spinning tops of death.
âWAAAAAAAAAHHHHHH!!!!!! WHY DID IT HAVE TO BE SPINNING TOPS???â Ron yells.
âHE HAS STOLEN MY FATHERâS DESIGN!!!â Junior adds. âHE WILL HEAR FROM MY LAWYERS!!!â
As they continue to flee, they find the road almost about to run out for them with a dead end. Thinking quickly, the two split up and jump into separate doorways. The spinning tops roar past them and into the dead end, causing the wall to come crashing down. Dust & debris rises into the air, making it impossible for the lasers to find their targets. Itâs at that moment that Ron notices a light coming from where the tops crashed.
âJunior, follow me!â He says, as he runs to the crash site. Junior follows behind and when they emerge from the dust, they find themselves in the control room of the entire complex.
âThis has to be some stroke of luck.â Junior says. âFor the spinning tops to crash into a room like this.â
âDude, itâs called the Ron Factor.â Ron counters. âAnd it always comes through, A-Booyah! Now come on, we can shut down the security system here!â
Ron runs over to the nearest panel and, in his usual Ron-style, begins to press every button in a frantic attempt to shut down security. Surprisingly, or maybe not so surprisingly, it works as the system becomes overloaded and crashes. Once done, Junior draws his attention.
âRon, quick! Come here!â Ron runs over and Junior points at a monitor which shows a violent brawl inside the building. âShego and Kim Possible! They might need our help!â Ron just grins as he points back to the screen, and Junior sees that itâs Kim & Shego whoâre in the middle of the brawl, more than holding their own. Kimâs putting her Kung-Fu skills to the test, while Shego plays target practice with her powers and any standing henchmen.
âDude, itâs more than under control.â Ron tells him. âI say we just kick back andâ!â
Ron is suddenly cut off when he feels his skull cracking against Junior. He falls to the floor and begins to lose consciousness. As he looks up, he can only make out the shadow of an Amazon-like figure standing above him.
5 minutes laterâŠ
âOh, what happened?â
Ron opens his eyes to see Junior still KOâd on the floor. The scene doesnât get any better as he notices heâs in a heart-shaped bed, and thereâs someone in bed with him, crawling towards himâŠsomeone big.
âYou are the mate of the fiery-haired warrior.â Warmonga says, more than intimidating Ron at this moment. âWarmonga has heard rumors of your âtalentsâ.â
âTalents?â Ron asks nervously. âWhat are you talking about?â
âWarmonga spied on females in earth prison before freeing the Great Blue.â She confesses. âMany females claim you have special talents that can satisfy them. Warmonga wishes to experience those talents.â
She now has Ron lying down flat on the bed as she looms over him, wearing a seductive smirk. And as he senses his doom nearing, only one thing goes through Ronâs mind.
âI knew all this sex would get me killed one day.â
The KP Chapters Finale
âThere, that should do it.â
Kim brushes her hands off as she looks around at the dozens upon dozens of unconscious bodies lying on the ground. Though the numbers were over one hundred, they didnât stand a chance against Kim & Shegoâs might.
âHeh, good for a workout.â Shego says, tilting her head and cracking her neck. âBut I want another crack at that Blue Amazon Bitch!â
BEEP-BEEP-BEDEEP!!!
Kim immediately looks to her wrist Kimmunicator to take the call. âGo Wade!â
âGot some info on why your Rocket exploded.â Wade informs them. âA beacon was detected on board, and Drakken was able to use one of his rays to zero in and send a signal for the engineâŠâ
ââŠTo go Kablooie!â Kim finishes. âProbably was stashed by one of Drakkenâs minions.â
âMy fault, Kimmie-Cub.â Kimâs Dad chimes in off-screen. âNOSA really has to fund the security department more.â
âGlobal Justice is sending up a ride to bring you back.â Wade tells her.
âGood. Once we find Drakken and Warmonga, we canâŠâ
âUh, Kimmy?â Shego says. âLooks like the big blue bimbo found something more interesting.â
Kim looks up to see Shego pointing out of a window. Following the direction, Kim spies just was Shego meantâŠa clear view of Warmongaâs quarters, with Warmonga on top of Ron, about to disrobe him. And as it has before with Bonnie & Camille Leon, the green-eyed monster comes out.
âLooks like she wants to test drive the sidekick.â Shego quips, only making Kim angrier.
âThe Hell she is!â Kim snaps back, igniting the jet pack on her spacesuit. As her forcefield helmet activates over her head, she roars through the glass into the cold, vastness of space. Shego quickly turns on her helmet to prevent loss of oxygen.
âHeh, looks like the Princessâ got a mean streak after all.â
Like a crimson bullet, Kim flies towards the room and shocking speeds, and crashes through the window into Warmongaâs room. But she doesnât stop there.
âGET. OFF. MY. RON!!!â
She throws her entire body into Warmonga, knocking her off of Ron and through an adjacent wall. As the air quickly escapes the room, Ron powers on his helmet, then runs over and activates Juniorâs, before turning to Kim.
âHey, I just want to say she was taking advantage of me!â He says in his defense. âIâm the do-ee, not the doer.â
âNo kidding.â Kim answers, climbing to her feet. âI have to jump on you in the bed half the time to get you going.â
Ron is about to counter that remark when the sound of Warmonga rising from the debris grabs their attention. âFoolish red female.â She says. âIt will take far more to defeat the mightyâŠâ
âHEADâS UP, SMURFETTE!!!â
Warmonga turns towards her window only to be tackled by a Rocket-propelled Shego, and driven out of the room. As they crash through wall after wall, Kim decides to give her assistance. âIâll help Shego take down Warmonga!â She tells Ron. âYou & Junior find Drakken and shut him down.â
âOn it, KP!â Ron replies, before running over and helping Junior, whoâs just waking up, to his feet. Kim takes off and follows the path of destruction that Shego & Warmonga recently made. Getting to the end, she catches Shegoâs crash landing, as she drives Warmonga into the hard floor. Surprisingly though, Warmonga is unaffected, and quickly swats away Shego like a fly. Kim jumps down to ground level and lands by Shegoâs side as she stands to her feet.
Warmonga just smirks fiendishly at the sight of them fighting side by side. âThe two mightiest females of this planet wish to test their warrior will against Warmonga?â
âNo, we wish you kick your big, blue ass!â Kim answers.
âDown into the ground!â Shego adds.
Warmonga can see the seriousness in their eyes, and decides to up the odds. Letting out a whistle, she calls for her war staff, which flies into her hands a second later. She then slams the staff into the ground and twists it. A moment later, the staff emits an energy barrier which surrounds all three, locking them it what looks to be a makeshift death ring.
âIn that case, as they say in your languageâŠbring it!â Warmonga states.
MeanwhileâŠ
Several floors above, Ron & Junior speed down the hallway, trying to make their way to the center of Drakkenâs operation to stop him. âAw, come on!â Ron says. âWhy canât villains just have a door that tells you where the center of their operation is?â At that moment, Ron notices a door to his right and what it says, âCenter of Drakkenâs Operation through here.â
âHmm, convenient.â Ron says.
âYes, quite.â Junior adds.
The two then kick down the door, startling Drakken and interrupting his launch process. âWhat theâŠTHE BUFFOON! How did you find me?â
âThe sign was on the door.â Ron tells him smugly.
âGRRRR!!! I only put that up so I wouldnât get lost!â Drakken says in his defense.
Junior is ready to charge the mad doctor, but Ron puts his hand up, holding him back. âWait, one question. You donât still have that Hench-Co Strength Enhancer, do you?â
Drakken looks back at Ron confused. âNo, why do you ask?â He gets his answer when the two bum-rush and tackle Drakken through the window onto a catwalk below them. But Drakken quickly kicks Ron off of him and jumps to his feet. âEven without that device, Iâm more than a match for you!â
Drakkenâs boast gives Junior an opening though, and he uses it to bearhug Drakken from behind, squeezing the air out of him. âI do not believe you have the muscles that I do, doctor!â
Heâs right, but Drakken has brains, and he uses his to stomp down on Juniorâs foot. Junior breaks his hold and begins hopping around in pain. âOWIEOWIEOWIEOWIE!!!!!!â
Drakken grins at his handiwork and turns forward to make a break for it, when he sees his first foe back on his feet, ready to rumble. âHUWAAAAAAAA!!!! You wanna piece of Ron?â
âUhâŠone moment.â Drakken responds, before leaping over the guardrail down to the darkened floor. Both Ron & Junior look over the edge, thinking that Drakken mightâve foolishly jumped to his death. But once they hear him and, followed by his footsteps, they realize itâs very different. They leap over the guardrail and follow him down, landing on the floor below.
âI donât see him.â Junior says.
âWell, he couldnât have gotten far.â Ron says, before various lights begin to illuminate in the darkness behind him.
âIndeed I havenât, sidekick.â Out of the darkness steps Drakken, whoâs now suited up in, of all thingsâŠPrototype Mech Armor. âAnd as to answer your questionâŠI do want a piece.â
At That MomentâŠ
Kim & Shego slowly shuffle their feet while staying in their stances. Their eyes go to work scanning any weakness in Warmonga. Finding none, they decide to attack her head on, with Kim leading the charge.
Warmonga reacts with a straight punch thatâs ducked by Kim and countered with two shots to the stomach. She follows up with a right hook to the jaw, but Warmonga blocks a front kick and swats her away. That gives Shego an opening, and she lands a devastating spin kick that stuns Warmonga momentarily. She then follows up with a knee to the gut before grabbing her by the hair, and giving her a knee to the face. But Warmonga quickly shakes it off and delivers a knee of her own that sends Shego soaring. But it also leaves her open to Kim, and a brutal dropkick that causes her to stumble a little. Kim continues by doing a handspring kick, nailing her in the face and leaping into the air. That proves to be a mistake though, as Warmonga catches her before another attack, and plants her into the floor. But that allows Shego to come down hard on her with an energy-powered double-fist smash to her back. Shego has her down, and begins to throw energy charged punches at a breathtaking rate, trying to keep her down. But Warmonga uses her strength to violently throw both of them off of her. She stands up to her feet, actually looking like sheâs been in a fight.
âIt is wise to realize that you two are no match for Warmonga!â She says. âMy Lorwardian training far surpasses anything you can throw at me!â
âIs that so?â Shego asks. âThen whyâs there blood coming from your mouth?â Warmonga scoffs at that comment, but then considers it. Wiping a hand across her mouth, she looks down at it and indeed does see blood, all while giving Shego another opening. âAND HEREâS SOME MORE, BITCH!!!â
A jumping knee attack lands with Warmongaâs jaw, causing her to spit out more blood. Kim joins back into the fight, charging up her battle suit to emit a blue hue of energy from her hands. Once her fists are ignited, she charges forward and delivers jackhammer-like punches to her gut. After over a dozen shots, she finishes up with a massive uppercut that sends Warmonga reeling. Shego decides to end the fight, and follows up by leaping into the air and coming down hard with a two-foot stomp to Warmongaâs face. She plants her head through the floor, and renders her motionless. But itâs only for a brief moment. In a flash, Shego feels both of her ankles grabbed as sheâs slammed to the floor. Warmonga rises to her feet, with an almost crazed look in her eye. Using Shego like a bat, she smacks her into Kim, and the two careen into to energy barrier, which gives them an electric shock feedback. It only lasts for a second, but it feels like an eternity for them before they break free and fall almost lifelessly to the ground. But itâs not over. Warmonga violently picks them up by their hair and prepare to smash their heads together, like she did Ron & Junior, only with far more force. But as she closes the gap, Shego & Kim grab each otherâs hands, stopping her attempt cold. They then deliver a simultaneous elbow to the stomach, followed by dual energy-charged haymakers which send her staggering backwards, holding her face. Itâs clear at this point, that Kim & Shego have taken Warmonga far beyond what sheâs experienced in a fight.
âWARMONGA WILL TASTE VICTORY!!!â The Lorwardian declares in a state of rage. âAnd I will taste your blood on my fists as I do so!â
âSheâs nearly down!â Kim tells Shego. âTime to end this. Like we planned on the Rocket. GO!â
âThis better work, princess!â Shego says before charging forward. Warmonga braces herself for another attack, but is shocked to find Shego sliding between her legs under her. But itâs not as shocking as when she looks up, and feels a two-fisted uppercut, courtesy of Kim. She stumbles back, and Kim maneuvers behind her, grabbing her arm and locking it behind her in a hammerlock. She then turns Warmonga towards Shego, whose hands are glowing brighter than ever before.
âDO IT NOW!!!â Kim yells.
âYYYYYAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!!!!â
And in a shining moment, Shego unleashes a bedlam of energy blasts at the Alien Amazon. Unable to block fully, she can do nothing but try to withstand the onslaught. Shego doesnât hold back. Every blast she fires has enough force to turn concrete into dust, and is hot enough to melt steel. Kim shields herself behind Warmongaâs body, as the Lorwardian warrior cries out in pain for the first time in battleâŠever. The blasts go on non-stop for almost a full minute, before Warmonga forces Kim off of her and dives out of the way. Just as well to, since Shego was close to running on empty. Warmonga, surprisingly, is able to climb to her feet, albeit slowly. Her body is smoking from the blasts, and she can barely hold herself up as he legs look ready to give way. Kim and Shego stand on opposite sides of her, ready to deal the finishing blow.
âI amâŠWarmongaâŠâ She utters. âIâŠam guardianâŠto the GreatâŠBlue! IâŠamâŠâ
âYouâŠâ Kim says.
âAreâŠâ Shego adds.
âDONE!!!â They both yell, charging her. Kim connects with a flying kick to the face, as Shego hits a dropkick to her knees, and just like that, the fight is over. Warmongaâs body falls lifelessly to the floor as they land, and shows little to no movement. The two former foes look at each other, then down at their defeated opponent, and enjoy a large measure of victory.
âNot so tough now, are ya?â Shego boasts, not caring if Warmonga can hear her or not.
âWe got bigger problems, Shego.â Kim reminds her. âLike how do we get out of here to help the guys and stop Drakken?â
Shego answers that question by firing an energy blast at Warmongaâs war staff, effectively disabling it and shutting down the energy barrier. âYou were saying?â
âCome on!â Kim tells her, as the two run to join Ron & Junior.
MeanwhileâŠ
While the battle between Kim, Shego & Warmonga was as physical as it gets, the battle between Ron, Junior & DrakkenâŠnot so much. Ron is currently on the defensive, that is to say heâs running for dear life as Drakken chases him in his Mech Armor.
âGRRRR! Come back here and fight like a man!â Drakken yells.
âEasy for you to say, Mr. Mech Suit!â Ron replies, before making a sharp right around a corner. Drakkenâs unable to make that same turn, and goes crashing into the ground, giving Ron time to make a call on his Ronunicator.
âWade, I need some assistance!â Ron tells him.
âI could send the Wade-Bot 3.0 up there, but itâll take some time.â Wade responds.
âWe donât have time, Wade!â Ron says, before noticing Junior cowering in the corner for his life.
âThis is not cool!â He says. âIt is like we are in some bad video game!â
And in a moment of brilliance, Ron comes up with an idea. âWade, patch me through to Felix!â
âI donât understand.â Wade says. âWhy would you wantâŠ?â
Heâs cut off by the sound of Drakkenâs mech hand crashing through the wall, which sends Ron off to the races. âNo time to argue, Wade!â
Wade decides to patch the call through, and a moment later, Felixâs face appears on the screen. âRon? Is that you?â
âYeah! Felix! Whatâs up, buddy?â Ron says. âCould really use your help right now!â
âIs that Ron?â Felix moves to the side a little as Zitaâs face appears on the screen beside him, which causes Ron to stop in his tracks.
âWhoa wait, is that Zita?â He asks. âWhatâs she doing at your house?â
âWeâre dating now.â Felix tells him. âBeen going out for 3 months.â
âAlright, Felix!â Ron cheers. âSheâs a good lady, loves video games as much as we do.â He begins to congratulate them more, but the sound of Drakkenâs loud stomping gets his mind back on point. âOh right, the death chasing me thing. Felix, I need to know how you defeated the Mecha-Dictator in âRobot Overlord 4â!â
âUh, it doesnât look like youâre playing video games, buddy.â Felix tells him.
âLess talkie, more helping out!â Ron dashes forward and makes some distance between him and Drakken before hiding behind a stone pillar as Felix answers him.
âWell you gotta trick him into trapping his hands in the ground, and then disable the wires in his legs.â He says. âYou might have to distract him for that.â
âGot it!â Ron says. If thereâs one thing he knows how to be, itâs the distraction. And he puts that skill to work as he comes out of hiding and grabs Drakkenâs attention. âHey Drakken, why the suit? Afraid my Mystical Monkey Fu will whoop on you again?â
That sentence is more than enough to get the mad doctorâs attention. âNow you go squish, Buffoon!â He says, charging forward and raising his mechanical left arm. Ron dives out of the way, barely avoiding the arm as he drives it into the ground and, just like Ron planned, gets it stuck. Ron quickly moves to his rear and begins yanking out wires randomly. Within moments, Drakkenâs left leg is rendered useless.
âOK.â Ron says. âNow I just get the other leg andâOOMPHH!!!â
A hard swat from Drakkenâs mech arm sends Ron flying across the room and into a wall. He slides down to the floor feeling dazed, as Drakken approaches him, hopping on one leg. âDid you really think it would be that easy?â He mocks. âDid you really think that your foolish Monkey powers would help you stop my greatest plan yet?â
âIt dependsâŠâ Drakken turns around to see Junior, out of hiding, standing behind him.ââŠDid you think youâd look cool wearing that outfit?â
Drakken feels insulted by that remark. âIâll have you know that this was picked out by the cast of âEvil Eye for the Bad Guy!ââ
âSo that explains it.â Junior concludes. âIt came off the rack!â
âGRRRRR! Iâll put you ON the rack!â Drakken says, raising his mech fist up. Junior dives out of the way as Drakken drives it through the floor, getting it stuck again.
âAAAAHHHH!!!â Junior screams. âRon, use your Magic Monkey skills!â
âDude, itâs Mystical Monkey Powers!â Ron tells him, before charging forward. He goes to work on yanking wires from the other leg, and within moments, Drakkenâs mech is rendered unable to walk.
âWhaâŠGah! G-GakâŠNOOOOOOO!!!â Drakken yells. âI will not be defeated by the sidekick again!â
In an almost crazed state, Drakken begins to work his mech arms into overdrive, frantically swinging at Ron, Junior, and anything else close enough. He crashes through and topples several steel pillars as Ron joins up with Junior and gets to a safe distance, before turning his attention back to Drakken. Looking to finish it, he storms forward towards the mad doctor. Once close enough, he leaps into the air and attempts a flying kick aimed straight for DrakkenâŠbut ends up in his mech clutches.
âToo bad, so sad, buffoon.â Drakken gloats, ready to squeeze the life out of Ron. âAnd today, your pesky girlfriend wonât be able to save you!â
âGRRRMMFFF! DonâtâŠneed herâŠnot when I got Wade!â Ron pries free one arm, grabs his Ronunicator, and aims it at Drakken. Pressing the red button on it, he activates a signal installed by Wade to cause any electronic system to crash. Drakkenâs mech suit isnât immune, as it falls backwards and hits the floor with a massive thud. Ron lands on Drakkenâs chest, as Drakken finds himself unable to move any limb on his mech.
âGRRRRRRRR! YOU THINK YOUâRE ALL THAT, RON STOPPABLEâŠBUTâ!â
âBut I am!â Ron interrupts. âBOOYAH!!!â Itâs a huge victory for Ron at this moment, taking down Drakken without Kimâs help. But itâs a short-lived one as he begins to feel the entire building shake, as if itâs ready to collapse. âWhoa! What is going on?â
He looks down at Drakken, only to find that heâs struggling to escape his suit. Itâs then that he notices heâs standing on something, and as he removes his foot, itâs revealed to be a button. Drakken takes one look at the button, then turns to Ron in Anger. âYOU IDIOT! Youâve activated my baseâs self-destruct!â
âHey, me?â Ron says in his defense. âWho in the hell puts a self-destruct button on his own robot suit?â
âIt helped me to remember where it was!â Drakken barks back, before he feels the floor beneath him begin to crumble. Ron hops off of Drakken and makes a mad dash towards the exit, where Junior is standing waiting for him. But as he pushes forward, he notices the floor crumbling in front of him, starting a few feet from the exit and heading towards him. Still, he doesnât stop.
âNo problem.â He thinks. âI can make the jump. I can make it. I can make it!â
Faster & faster he runs, trying to reach the right point to where he can make the jump. As he runs out of floor, he leaps into the air and stretches out his arms in a valiant attempt. But itâs a failed one, as gravity kicks in halfway across. âIâM CANâT MAKE IT!!!â
He looks down the see the vast darkness below him, and his heart skips a beat. A quick instance of his life flashes before his eyes, and he realizes he still owes Monique $5. But before he plummets down into the dark depths, he feels a sharp tug at his spacesuit, followed by two arms wrapping around him securely. It appears his angel has arrived just in time.
âKP!!!â
She carries him across the ever increasing gap to the exit, and places him down beside Junior. But as she lands with him, Ron remembers someone left behind. âWait, Kim! Drakken!â
He points across the room to the supervillain, who has just now unhooked himself from the mech armor. But as he sits up, he sees the insurmountable gap between him and the only exit out, and becomes reserved in thinking that thereâs no escape. âSo this is how it ends for the great Dr. Drakken.â He says, voice beginning to crack. âNot with a bangâŠbut just a whimper.â
The floor beneath him starts to break away, and Drakken utters his final words. âIt appearsâŠI shall meet my fate in the afterlife!â
âLIKE HELL YOU WILL!!!â
And with perfect timing, another angel of mercy swoops in to save Drakkenâs life. Though at the moment, Drakken doesnât see it that way. âSHEGO???â
âShut up and hang on!â She tells him, as she rockets through the exit. Kim, Ron & Junior quickly follow after them as Drakkenâs fortress begins to crash down. During their escape, the five speed past the ground level where Shego & Kim defeated Warmonga, and notice the Lorwardian warrior still lying there.
âWait, we should save Warmonga!â Kim suggests. But a moment later, her body begins to sparkle and slowly fades away, as if she were teleported somewhere.
âLooks like someoneâs beat us to it!â Shego responds. âNOW COME ON!!!â
The 5 continue on their escape run from the fortress, as the walls cave in around them. But luck is on their side, and they reach mammoth front doors to the lair. Dashing out, they run to a safe distance before looking back, and watching as dozens of escape pods fly from the fortress, which is now crumbling like a sand castle and rapidly becoming jagged scrap metal.
âLooks like we did it.â Kim says.
âIndeed you did.â
The 5 of them turn around and see, to their shock, the Global Justice Helicarrier, loaded with hundreds of troops, and Dr. Director. âCongratulations, all. Youâve done an outstanding job and the world thanks you.â
âOH, COME ON!!!â Ron says. âYou mean we couldâve taken the heavily armored Helicarrier to fight Drakken instead of our ship that blew up?â
âThe Helicarrier was not ready for space travel by the time you took off.â Betty explains. âBasically this is our first test run outside of the earthâs atmosphere. Plus gas prices are a real pain in the arse.â
The 5 follow Dr. Director onto the Helicarrier and are greeted almost immediately by Monique & Bonnie. Monique obviously more enthusiastic over the victory. âYeah! I knew my girl could do it!â She says, before giving Kim a big hug.
As she lets go, Bonnie reluctantly walks over to them. âYeah, I guess you DID save the world. Thanks.â
âNo problem.â Kim answers smugly. âAlways glad to make the world safe for the snobby & conceited.â
âAHEM!!!â Shego interrupts, clearing her throat. âYeah, hate to interrupt the teen love moment, but thereâs the little matter concerning myâŠâ
âThe funds have been transferred into your account.â Betty tells her, which brings a grin to the villainessâ face.
âThen this is where I get off.â
Giving Kim a quick kick to the backside into Dr. Director as a distraction, Shego grabs hold of Drakken and leaps into a nearby GJ Escape Pod. Before agents can stop her, she launches from the Helicarrier and makes her own way back to Earth. Global Justice Agents are about to call a strike on her, when Dr. Director puts up her hand.
âNo.â She says. âLet her go.â
âBut sheâs escaping with Drakken.â One agent says.
âIf I know her, Drakkenâs about to get a punishment far worse than what we can deliver.â She tells them.
And at that moment, Drakken, barely conscious, addresses Shego as she pilots the Escape Pod. âYouâŠsaved me from prison.â He says, worn down from the battle & escape. âAfterâŠwhat happenedâŠbetween us. YouâŠdo care.â
After hearing those words, Shego puts the Pod on auto-pilot before walking over to Drakken and straddling him. She grabs his collar and pulls him close, looking at him with cold eyes. âI care about making you pay!â She barks at him. âLetâs get this understood, YOU DO NOT REPLACE ME! And for you and the big blue bimbo putting me back in the hospital AND making me team with Kim PossibleâŠoh, youâre gonna pay!â
Drakken smiles nervously, hoping for the best case scenario. âFlowers & Candy?â
âMore like Whips & Chains.â Shego says, as a sinister grin grows on her face.
âMommy!â Drakken whimpers, fearing for his life.
Back on the Helicarrier, Junior is feeling the pain of this impromptu rejection. âDoesâŠdoes this mean I am dumped?â He says. âButâŠwho will I find as my soulmate to live with me at my Villas?â
The last word of that sentence captures Bonnieâs attention, as she quickly makes her way over to the young Senior. âDid I just hear âVillaâ?â
âNo, Villas.â Junior corrects her. âI have about 4 andâŠâ He cuts himself off as he glances at her, and finds himself gazing into her eyes. Bonnie is unable to look away either, and as they stare at each other, it appears to be love at first sight. Love, mixed with a helping of lust as they break their gazes and begin to kiss each other passionately. The frantic makeout leads the two towards an Escape Pod and they fall in, closing the door behind them so they can have some privacy. Ron, Kim & Monique stand there in stunned silence, until Monique breaks it.
âYou knowâŠthey actually make a good couple.â
âPlus, they have the right idea.â Kim adds as she turns her attention to Ron.
âI believe you two deserve some well-earned alone time.â Betty says with a grin, before turning and walking off towards the main bridge. Before Ron can protest, Kim leads him into another Escape Pod, shutting the door behind them and leaving Monique by her lonesome.
âHey, what? OH, COME ON!!!â She yells, folding her arms over her chest in frustration. âThat just figures! A saving the world celebration and Iâm man-less!â
She lets out a solemn sigh and begins to make her way out of the area when Kim & Ronâs Escape Pod opens up. She looks over to see Kim already on top of Ron. Her spacesuit is halfway off, as is his, and sheâs waving her over. âRoom for one more.â
Monique doesnât have to be asked twice, and she immediately runs over to join the party. Slamming the door shut behind her, she hops over beside and begins disrobing along with Kim.
âOK, Iâd really like to register a complaint.â Ron says. âI had nothing to do with this idea!â
âComplaint registered.â Kim & Monique say in unison. âWeâre still doing it!â
Realizing itâs useless to resist at this point, Ron gives in and begins to pull of his spacesuit. He kicks it off the rest of the way as Kim & Monique strip down to their sports bras & thongs. Kim then climbs back on top of her man as Ron pulls aside the fabric of her thong and begins to run her snatch, just as she likes. The two press their lips together and exchange tongue work as Monique hops in beside Ron, who lets his right hand wander behind Monique and into her thong. He rubs & fingers both women as they press themselves close against him. Feeling the dual pair of round breasts surrounding his chest nearly causes his manhood to explode from his boxers. It doesnât go unnoticed by either ladies, as Monique reaches in and pulls it out.
âDo you mind?â She asks.
âNot at all.â Kim answers.
Taking her up on that, Monique slides off her thong before climbing on top of Ron with her back towards him. She grabs hold of his firm shaft and slowly slides herself down onto it, as she puts an arm around Ron for balance. Taking all of his manhood in, she leans back as Ron grabs hold of her legs and starts pumping her wet snatch. Kim leans in close to Monique and joins the action. The moment is heated for all three. Arousal is at itâs peak, which causes Kim & Monique to lay a wet one on each others lips. Their breasts lay squashed against each other as Ron looks up and marvel at the sight.
âSpankinââŠâ He utters, simply enjoying the view.
The ladies break up with makeout session as Monique subtly rocks her hips, grinding against Ron as he continues to pump her pussy. Kim switches her attention from Moniqueâs mouth to her breasts, and begins to suck on her nipples. Ron takes this moment to introduce Monique to his tongue, which she gladly meets. The heat from their bodies starts to make them sweat, and even creates a little fog on the Escape Pod door window, which gives them a little more privacy. Monique moves her hand under Kim and starts fingering her snatch. Kim uses her hand to stroke the base of Ronâs shaft, as he continues to drill Monique. As soon as Ron breaks his kiss from Monique, he finds Kimâs lips smothering his, and her tongue invading his mouth.
âGotdamn you can fuck, Ron!â Monique moans, as Ron speeds up his thrusts. Subtle smacks of skin slowly fill the room as Kim & Ron break their kiss, leaving a thin line of saliva connecting their mouths. Beads of sweat now coat their bodies, and as Ron continues to grope both Kim & Moniqueâs breasts, Monique feels like she canât hold on for much longer.
âOh, Fuck! Iâm gonna cum, baby!â She yells.
Ron lets out a grunt and pulls his cock out of her, before hitting his limit himself and spraying his load out, all over Moniqueâs stomach & breasts. Even Kimâs breasts are hit, and as Ron leans back into his seat, heâs cuddled in by both Kim & Monique.
âAw, man.â Ron says with a hint of concern in his voice. âI just rememberedâŠwe got Graduation coming up in a week.â
âWell, with what weâve been throughâŠthatâll be the least of our worries.â Kim answers.
âYeah.â Monique agrees. âWhatâs the worst that could happen?â